01 Mar 14 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 4 

FIQ-LEP-SG-V1 A 01 MAR 14

INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. 

DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.

 

NOTE: A vertical line in the outer margin of the page indicates the 

portion of the text affected by the changes. 

Dates of issue for original and changed pages are: 

Original . . . . 0 . . . . . 01 Oct 10 Change . . . . 4 . . . . . 01 Mar 14 

Change . . . . 1 . . . . . 01 Jul 11 

Change . . . . 2 . . . . . 01 Jun 12 

Change . . . . 3 . . . . . 01 Jul 13

Page 

No. 

*Change 

No. 

Page 

No. 

*Change 

No.

Page 

No. 

*Change

No.

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1-28-1 – 1-28-4 . . . . . . . . 0

A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1-29-1 – 1-29-6 . . . . . . . . 0 1-59-1 – 1-59-2 . . . . . . . . 0

i – iv . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1-30-1 – 1-30-4 . . . . . . . . 0 1-60-1 – 1-60-4 . . . . . . . . 0

1-0-1 – 1-0-22 . . . . . . . 3 1-31-1 – 1-31-4 . . . . . . . . 0 1-61-1 – 1-61-6 . . . . . . . . 3

1-1-1 – 1-1-16. . . . . . . . 3 1-32-1 – 1-32-6 . . . . . . . . 4 1-62-1 – 1-62-30 . . . . . . . 3

1-2-1 – 1-2-4 . . . . . . . . 0 1-33-1 – 1-33-8 . . . . . . . . 3 1-63-1 – 1-63-6 . . . . . . . . 3

1-3-1 – 1-3-4 . . . . . . . . 0 1-34-1 – 1-34-10 . . . . . . . 3 1-64-1 – 1-64-38 . . . . . . . 3

1-4-1 – 1-4-6 . . . . . . . . 3 1-35-1 – 1-35-12 . . . . . . . 3 1-65-1 – 1-65-12 . . . . . . . 3

1-5-1 – 1-5-4 . . . . . . . . 3 1-36-1 – 1-36-8 . . . . . . . 3 1-66-1 – 1-66-16 . . . . . . . 3

1-6-1 – 1-6-4 . . . . . . . . 0 1-37-1 – 1-37-12 . . . . . . . 3 1-67-1 – 1-67-2 . . . . . . . . 0

1-7-1 – 1-7-6 . . . . . . . . 0 1-38 -1– 1-38-6 . . . . . . . . 3 1-68-1 – 1-68-30 . . . . . . . 3

1-8-1 – 1-8-6 . . . . . . . . 3 1-39-1 – 1-39-24 . . . . . . . 0 1-69-1 – 1-69-28 . . . . . . . 3

1-9-1 – 1-9-6 . . . . . . . . 0 1-40-1 – 1-40-6 . . . . . . . . 1 1-70-1 – 1-70-6 . . . . . . . . 3

1-10-1 – 1-10-12 . . . . . . 0 1-41-1 – 1-41-4 . . . . . . . . 2 1-71-1 – 1-71-6 . . . . . . . . 2

1-11-1 – 1-11-2 . . . . . . . 0 1-42-1 – 1-42-4 . . . . . . . . 0 1-72-1 – 1-72-32 . . . . . . . 3

1-12-1 – 1-12-4 . . . . . . . 0 1-43-1 – 1-43-4 . . . . . . . . 0 1-73-1 – 1-73-16 . . . . . . . 3

1-13-1 – 1-13-4 . . . . . . . 0 1-44-1 – 1-44-4 . . . . . . . . 0 1-74-1 – 1-74-10 . . . . . . . 3

1-14-1 – 1-14-6 . . . . . . . 0 1-45-1 – 1-45-4 . . . . . . . . 0 1-75-1 – 1-75-6 . . . . . . . . 0

1-15-1 – 1-15-6 . . . . . . . 0 1-46-1 – 1-46-8 . . . . . . . . 1 1-76-1 – 1-76-4 . . . . . . . . 1

1-16-1 – 1-16-10 . . . . . . 0 1-47-1 – 1-47-6 . . . . . . . . 0

1-17-1 – 1-17-2 . . . . . . . 0 1-48-1 – 1-48-4 . . . . . . . . 1

1-18-1 – 1-18-6 . . . . . . . 0 1-49-1 – 1-49-6 . . . . . . . . 0

1-19-1 – 1-19-4 . . . . . . . 0 1-50-1 – 1-50-2 . . . . . . . . 0

1-20-1 – 1-20-4 . . . . . . . 4 1-51-1 – 1-51-4 . . . . . . . . 0

1-21-1 – 1-21-4 . . . . . . . 0 1-52-1 – 1-52-4 . . . . . . . . 0

1-22-1 – 1-22-4 . . . . . . . 0 1-53-1 – 1-53-4 . . . . . . . . 0

1-23-1 – 1-23-10 . . . . . . 0 1-54-1 – 1-54-4 . . . . . . . . 0

1-24-1 – 1-24-2 . . . . . . . 0 1-55-1 – 1-55-4 . . . . . . . . 0

1-25-1 – 1-25-6 . . . . . . . 0 1-56-1 – 1-56-4 . . . . . . . . 0

1-26-1 – 1-26-6 . . . . . . . 0 1-57-1 – 1-57-4 . . . . . . . . 3

1-27-1 – 1-27-4 . . . . . . . 0 1-58-1 – 1-58-4 . . . . . . . . 3

Summary of Changes: 

1. Updated FIQ-C026 and FIQ-C835 lessons. 

* Zero in this column indicates an original page.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-TOC-SG-V1 i 01 OCT 10 

Flight Engineer Initial Qualification 

(FIQ) Course 

Table of Contents – Student Guide 

(Volume I)

Volume Course Introduction FIQ-INT 1-0-1 

 Flight Engineer Initial Qualification Course 

 Introduction

FIQ-G840 1-1-1 

 Guide to Viewing CBT Lessons FIQ-C842 1-2-1 

 Aircraft General FIQ-C001 1-3-1 

 Fire Protection System FIQ-C003 1-4-1 

 Lighting System FIQ-C029 1-5-1 

 Auxiliary Power Unit FIQ-C004 1-6-1 

 Electrical System FIQ-C005 1-7-1 

 Aircraft Fuel System FIQ-C013 1-8-1 

 Air Refueling System FIQ-C043 1-9-1 

 Systems IGR I FIQ-I018 1-10-1 

 FTD Systems I FIQ-T301 1-11-1 

 Power Plant FIQ-C014 1-12-1 

 Hydraulic System FIQ-C006 1-13-1 

 Landing Gear System FIQ-C009 1-14-1 

 Flight Controls FIQ-C007 1-15-1 

 Systems IGR II FIQ-I035 1-16-1 

 FTD Systems II FIQ-T302 1-17-1 

 Communication Systems FIQ-C010 1-18-1 

 Pneumatic System FIQ-C012 1-19-1 

 Air Conditioning System FIQ-C026 1-20-1 

 Pressurization System FIQ-C008 1-21-1 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-TOC-SG-V1 ii 01 OCT 10 

 Ice and Rain Protection System FIQ-C011 1-22-1 

 Systems IGR III FIQ-I036 1-23-1 

 FTD Systems III FIQ-T303 1-24-1 

 Flight Instrument System FIQ-C015 1-25-1 

 Cabin Doors (Optional) FIQ-C025 1-26-1 

 Emergency Equipment FIQ-C002 1-27-1 

 Oxygen System FIQ-C028 1-28-1 

 Emergency Ground Egress FIQ-V059 1-29-1 

 Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance FIQ-C832 1-30-1 

 Takeoff Performance Charts FIQ-C833 1-31-1 

 KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return Data 

 Computation 

FIQ-C835 1-32-1 

 Performance Workshop I – TRT TOLD Card FIQ-E844 1-33-1 

 Performance Workshop II – Reduced Thrust 

 TOLD Card 

FIQ-E845 1-34-1 

 KC-10 Aircraft Orientation (with Pilot) FIQ-A841 1-35-1 

 Cargo/Passenger Operations FIQ-G020 1-36-1 

 Performance Workshop III – MTOGW 

 TOLD Card 

FIQ-E846 1-37-1 

 Performance Workshop IV – V1 = VMCG TOLD Card FIQ-E847 1-38-1 

Flight Management System (FMS) FIQ-M800 1-39-1 

 Navigation Systems FIQ-C016 1-40-1 

 Introduction to the Flight Guidance System FIQ-C078 1-41-1 

 Flight Guidance System – Autothrottle FIQ-C079 1-42-1 

 Flight Guidance System I FIQ-C080 1-43-1 

 Flight Guidance System II FIQ-C081 1-44-1 

 Flight Guidance System Procedures Integration FIQ-C082 1-45-1 

 FE Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection FIQ-C300 1-46-1 

 FE Interior Inspection I FIQ-C302 1-47-1 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-TOC-SG-V1 iii 01 OCT 10 

 FE Interior Inspection II FIQ-C303 1-48-1 

 FE Interior Inspection III FIQ-C304 1-49-1 

 FTD-304 FE Interior Inspection FIQ-T304 1-50-1 

 Engine Start Procedures FIQ-C308 1-51-1 

 Before Takeoff Procedures FIQ-C309 1-52-1 

 Takeoff Procedures FIQ-C320 1-53-1 

 Climb/Cruise Procedures FIQ-C330 1-54-1 

 Descent Procedures FIQ-C351 1-55-1 

 Approach Procedures FIQ-C352 1-56-1 

 Landing/Missed Approach Procedures FIQ-C361 1-57-1 

 After Landing Procedures FIQ-C371 1-58-1 

 FTD-305 FE Interior Inspection FIQ-T305 1-59-1 

FTD-306 Normal Procedures FIQ-T306 1-60-1 

 FTD Mission 1 FIQ-T601 1-61-1 

 Terminal Instrument Procedures (TERPS) FIQ-E852 1-62-1 

 FTD Mission 2 FIQ-T602 1-63-1 

 Performance Workshop V – Climb/Cruise/Hold/AR/ 

 Descent/Flight Planning 

FIQ-E848 1-64-1 

FTD Mission 3 FIQ-T603 1-65-1 

FTD Mission 4 FIQ-T604 1-66-1 

FTD-307 FE Interior Inspection FIQ-T307 1-67-1 

FGS Mission Exercise (McGuire) FIQ-F856 1-68-1 

FGS Mission Exercise (Travis) FIQ-F857 1-69-1 

Tanker Air Refueling Procedures FIQ-C505 1-70-1 

Receiver Air Refueling Procedures FIQ-C504 1-71-1 

Performance Workshop VI - Approach 

 and Landing Driftdown/Suspected 

Windshear/Wing Air Refueling Pods 

FIQ-E851 1-72-1 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-TOC-SG-V1 iv 01 OCT 10 

Performance Workshop VII – CFCC/Tire 

 Limiting Speed/Max Braking Speed 

FIQ-E849 1-73-1 

Performance Workshop VIII – Obstacle 

TOLD Card 

FIQ-E850 1-74-1 

Electrical Abnormal Procedures I FIQ-C311 1-75-1 

Air Conditioning Abnormal Procedures FIQ-C322 1-76-1 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-1 01 JUL 13 

Volume I Introduction

Introduction 

The following information provides an overview of the KC-10 Flight Engineer Initial 

Qualification Course. 

This Student Guide provides all the information needed to complete the KC-10 Flight 

Engineer Initial Qualification Course, (FIQ). This Introduction contains a Course 

Management Flow Chart, Daily Training Schedule, and Summary of Resources per 

Student. 

The course is designed for mature, responsible and motivated crewmembers. It contains 

the necessary educational information and training requirements to ensure that students 

are taught the essential skills and knowledge needed to perform their duties in the KC-10. 

Required tasks performed in the KC-10 will be taught to either familiarity or proficiency as 

needed to prepare you for Phase IB flight line training with the Formal Training Unit (FTU). 

Each lesson has objectives for skill and knowledge development to prepare you for 

successfully performing the required task and/or acquire the necessary knowledge to 

operate the KC-10. 

In general, you may proceed at own pace. However, there is a maximum completion time 

since some lessons are prerequisite to scheduled activities. You may work with others, as 

desired, and use resources as needed. Each Computer Based Training (CBT) lesson or 

lesson series, i.e. Flight Guidance System (FGS), requires completion of an end-of-lesson 

test, requiring a passing score of 85%. All missed questions require remediation and 

successful retest of that subject in order to complete the lesson and return to the CBT 

lesson menu to start the next CBT or log off. 

You will be given a tour of the Learning Center where you become familiar with the CBT 

system and learn how to operate the equipment. There will always be an instructor 

available to assist you as you take the CBT lessons. Every effort should be made to 

maintain the equipment and programs in the best possible operating condition. 

Each subject is made up of one or more lessons with each lesson having at least one 

objective and its related study assignment. Lessons may contain lesson quizzes, related 

exercises, and end of lesson tests. Your compliance with lesson preparation, review, and 

testing requirements are essential to successful completion of this course. 

Grades on FTD and Simulator missions are recorded on individual grade sheets. You must 

demonstrate familiarity or proficiency of the required performance objectives to complete 

the course requirements. The required level of performance for each graded mission is 

listed on the mission grade sheet. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-2 01 JUL 13 

The focus throughout this course is to ensure you receive the best quality training available. 

 You should ask for help from an instructor if you have any questions about the training 

received, information provided, or training equipment. 

Concept of Training

The approach used in this course fully integrates academic with performance training. The 

knowledge acquired from academic lessons are applied and practiced to achieve the 

desired level of performance for each task. 

The academic portion of the course uses a combination of CBT, Flight Management 

System Emulation Trainers (FETs), workbooks, reading assignments, workshops, instructor 

guided reviews, and lectures. Although most lessons are self-paced, you must accomplish 

them in the scheduled sequence to provide continuity and a building block foundation for 

subsequent lessons. Performance tasks requiring skill development are trained using static 

aircraft, Aircraft Systems Trainers (ASTs), Flight Training Devices (FTDs), and flight 

simulators. You may keep all course books issued by the ATS contractor. 

Instruction begins with lessons on aircraft systems, followed by flight operating systems, 

which include the Flight Management System (FMS) and FGS. The instruction will include 

all aspects of flying the KC-10 from mission preparation, pre-flight, normal ground and flight 

operations, to abnormal and emergency procedures. Air refueling training will be 

accomplished as both a tanker and receiver. You immediately reinforce procedures 

learned in academic CBT lessons by practicing them in a performance-training device. The 

reduced time lapse between related academic and performance training objectives 

enhances training effectiveness. Principles of Crew Resource Management (CRM) are 

integrated into the academic training and simulator mission profiles. 

Upon completion of your simulator training, a mission is set aside for USAF Flight Examiner 

administered evaluation. You are evaluated on normal, air refueling, abnormal and 

emergency procedures for aircraft system failures or malfunctions, and Crew Resource 

Management. 

Upon successful completion of your USAF Evaluation, four post-evaluation missions are set 

aside to familiarize you with mission planning, taxiing, formation flying and tactics prior to 

arriving at the Formal Training Unit (FTU). During these post-evaluation missions, because 

of the designed program overlap capability, you will either accomplish them with your 

assigned training partner, a squadron-provided or Contract Pilot or Flight Engineer 

Instructor seat-filler, or Pilot/Flight Engineer Instructor Course (PIC/FIC) candidates whose 

training classes overlap with yours. 

Mission Planning: 

You will mission plan S801 and S802 as a crew to gain proficiency in this task. However, 

because of the formation complexity of S803 and S804, canned mission planning data will 

be provided. 

If ACIQ/PIQ students are overlapped with a class of PIC candidates, ACIQ students will 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-3 01 JUL 13 

complete the formation briefing guide for S803 and S804, along with accomplishing the 

formation briefings. For PIQ students who are overlapped with PIC candidates, the PIC 

candidate will complete each formation briefing guide while providing you instruction on 

how to do so. He/she will also demonstrate the proper way to brief formations. 

Below is a breakdown of the possible pilot and flight engineer combinations for completing 

these four post-evaluation missions: 

Post-Evaluation Missions and Possible Training Course Overlap 

Scenarios. 

Note: The following information covers the most common personnel overlap and 

training scenarios. When unforeseen circumstances arise, each site manager and 

scheduler will administer them individually to ensure all required training events are 

accomplished. 

Flight Engineers: 

1. Accomplishing Post-Evaluation WSTs without FIC Overlap: 

Under this circumstance, you will accomplish the S801 through S804 profiles occupying 

the flight engineer’s seat and being taught by a Contract Flight Engineer Instructor. 

2. Accomplishing Post-Evaluation WSTs Overlapped with FIC Candidates: 

If overlapped with FIC candidates, PIQ/FIQ missions S801 and S802 will still be 

accomplished by you and a Contract Flight Engineer Instructor. However, for S803 and 

S804, FIC candidates will overlap with your training and act as instructors during both 

missions. 

For one FIQ student paired with one FIC candidate, you will accomplish both S803 and 

S804 in the flight engineer’s seat, while being instructed by the FIC candidate. 

For one FIQ student paired with two FIC candidates, both FIC candidates will ride along 

with you for S803 and S804. One FIC candidate will instruct the first half of each 

mission and the other FIC candidate will instruct the second half. The idle FIC 

candidate will occupy the simulator jump seat and observe. 

Pilots: 

1. Accomplishing Post-Evaluation WSTs with an Assigned Training Partner: 

If accomplished with assigned training partners, student A will occupy the left seat for 

S801 and S803. Student B will occupy the left seat for S802 and S804. The left seat 

student, in each case and all student pairings, acts as the aircraft commander and is in 

command for his/her respective missions. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-4 01 JUL 13 

2. Accomplishing Post-Evaluation WSTs with a Squadron-Provided Seat-Filler: 

If accomplished with a squadron-provided seat-filler, pilots will alternate seats for the 

mission profiles. For S801 and S803, student A will occupy the left seat and act as 

aircraft commander. For S802 and S804, Student A will occupy the right seat. In all 

scenarios, the squadron-provided seat-filler will act as a real-time crewmember and 

together, will work with the crew to complete each mission. 

3. Accomplishing Post-Evaluation WSTs Overlapped with PIC Candidates: 

If overlapped with PIC candidates, missions S801 and S802 will still be accomplished 

by assigned pilot training partners (or provided seat-filler) as indicated above. However, 

for the remaining two missions, PIQ profiles S803 and S804 will be accomplished with a 

PIC candidate acting as a training partner in the simulator. 

ACIQ students, for missions S803 and S804, will occupy the left seat on both and the 

guest PIC candidate will oversee the student’s mission planning, briefing, and training 

events while flying each mission from the right seat. The assigned pilot training partner 

(if applicable) will do the same in a different WST (depending on PIC pairing) and be 

overseen by the other PIC candidate. 

PIQ students will occupy the right seat for S803 and the left seat for S804 while a guest 

PIC candidate will act as both instructor and aircraft commander in the opposite seat. 

Again, the assigned pilot training partner (if applicable) will accomplish the same, 

depending upon PIC pairing. 

Together, PIQ students and PIC candidates will work as integral crews in the same 

manner expected on upcoming FTU sorties. 

Purposes of Overlapped Training with the PIC/FIC Program: 

The overall purposes of combining your training with the PIC/FIC program are to familiarize 

you and the new instructor candidates with typical instructor/student interactions, familiarize 

you with upcoming taxi and formation procedures, provide valuable instruction from linetested, experienced pilots and flight engineers in an operational setting, and provide realtime instructional opportunities for instructor candidates to hone their skills prior to arriving 

on the flight line. Accomplishing these activities in the simulator prior to attending FTU will 

help ensure a smooth transition to the flight line for each student and increase efficiency of 

FTU sorties. 

Fuel conservation is a very important issue because of rising fuel costs, however, flight 

plans and data for this training program may not reflect fuel conservation procedures 

because of training objectives of the individual lessons. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-5 01 JUL 13 

Course constraints and assumptions include: 

• Normal Initial Qualification class includes two Pilot students, and one FE student. 

• Five consecutive training days are followed by two days off. 

• A maximum of two FTDs per training day. 

• FE FTDs (T300/T800 series) are scheduled for one FE student. 

• FTDs requiring all crewmembers are the T600 series. 

• All simulator missions S701 to S720 and S801 to S804 require the Pilot and Flight 

Engineer students. 

• CRM is scheduled on training day 26 with Pilot, FE, and Boom Operator Initial 

Qualification students. 

• An Air Force administered simulator evaluation on training day 49. 

• Post-evaluation activities on training days 50 through 54. 

Student Guide Contents 

The following pages provide you with a Course Management Flow Chart, Daily Training 

Schedule, and Summary of Resources (per student). 

The Course Management Flow Chart provides a schedule by media type per training day. A 

space is available to write in the calendar date, if desired. The lessons are identified with a 

media identifier and number. The media identifiers are as follows: 

A Ground Aircraft 

C Computer-Based Training (CBT) 

E Workshop/Exercise 

F Flight Management System (FMS) Emulation Trainer (FET) 

G Briefing 

I Instructor-Guided Review (IGR) 

J Aircraft Systems Trainer (AST) 

M Mediated Interactive Lecture 

S Simulator 

T Flight Training Device (FTD) 

V Video Tape 

W Workbook 

For example, T301 is the FE Interior Inspection Flight Training Device lesson. 

The Daily Training Schedule puts the daily requirements in the order you are expected to 

complete the lessons/training events. The lesson times are approximate and serve as a 

guide for scheduling daily events. 

The Student Guide is arranged in the order shown on the schedule provided within this 

guide (and duplicated in Volume II). Volume I is organized from training day 1 through 19. 

Volume II covers training days 20 through 54. All lessons regardless of type of instruction 

are arranged in this order. A Flight Engineer workbook set is published separately. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-6 01 JUL 13 

Workbooks 

There are fourteen required workbooks in this course. 

W001 - Flying the KC-10 

W083 - Flight Guidance System 

W831 - Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance 

W834 - Takeoff and Landing Data 

W836 - Climb, Cruise, and Holding Data 

W837 - KC-10 Air Refueling Performance 

W838 - Descent, Approach, and Landing Data 

W839 - Driftdown 

W840 - Flight Plan Mission Forms 

W843 - Air Refueling Terminology 

W844 - Touch and Go Landings 

W845 - Low Visibility Approach and Landing 

W850 - Mission Planning 

W853 - TERPS 

Workbooks include readings, graphics, problems, and exercises that prepare you for 

subsequent academic CBT and workshop lessons. Although time is allotted in the training 

schedule to review workbooks, you are encouraged to begin reading these early in the 

schedule. Specific instructions for lesson preparation are included in the first chapter of 

each workbook and at the beginning of each lesson. In some cases, you are not required 

to complete the workbook in its entirety, but only complete specific portions. 

All performance workbooks provide supplemental information for the classroom workshops; 

you only need to review the problems and exercises, as well as the provided answers. The 

specific performance workshops will cover all the procedures you are required to 

accomplish. 

CRM 

A separate CRM Coursebook provides the information for the CRM workshop. Reading 

assignments are included in the daily schedule for your preparation. 

Required Course Materials

The Contractor will issue the following materials to you: 

• KC-10 Flight Engineer Initial Qualification Student Guide 

• KC-10 Flight Engineer Workbooks 

• Crew Resource Management Coursebook 

• KC-10 Instrument Panel Oilskins (Pilot and FE) 

• FMS CDU Page Flow Diagrams 

• KC-10 Tactics Handout 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-7 01 JUL 13 

You should be issued the following materials by their squadrons prior to the course starting: 

• T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Basic Flight Manual 

• T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Flight Manual Performance Data 

• T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-1, Emergency Procedures Checklist 

• T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-2, Normal Procedures Checklist 

• AF Form 4087, KC-10 CG Graph 

• AFI 11-2KC-10, Vol 3, KC-10 Operations 

• T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-5, Air Refueling Procedures Checklist 

• ATP-56(B), Air-to-Air Refuelling 

Note: Inform your Instructor if these items were not issued. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-8 01 JUL 13 

Course Management Flow Chart 

Date 

TNG 

DAY 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 

MIL/ 

BRF 

G840 G020 M800 

WB W831

W834 W083 W836 W837 

VIDEO V059 

CBT C842

C001 

C003 

C029 

C004 

C005 

C013 

C043 

C014 

C006 

C009 

C007 

C010 

C012 

C026 

C008 

C011 

C015 

 C0251 

C002 

C028 

C832 

C833 

C835 

C016 

C078 

C079 

C080 

C081 

C082 

C300 

C302 

C303 

C304 

IGR I018 I035 I036 

FET/ 

AST 

 

ACFT A841 

EXER E844 

E845 

E846 E847 

FTD T301 T302 T303 

SIM 

1

 Optional 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-9 01 JUL 13 

Date 

TNG 

DAY 

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 

MIL/ 

BRF 

 

WB W840 W853 W838 W843 

CRM 1/2

W844 

VIDEO 

CBT C308 

C309 

C320 

C330 

C351 

C352 

C361 

C371 

 C505 

C504 

C311 

C322 

IGR 

FET/ 

AST 

 F856/ 

F857 

ACFT 

EXER E852 E848 E851 E849 

E850 

FTD T304 T305 

T306 

T601 T602 T603 T604 T307 

SIM 

 1 Optional 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-10 01 JUL 13 

Date 

TNG 

DAY 

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 

MIL/ 

BRF 

 

WB W001 CRM 

2/2 

 W839 

VIDEO 

CBT C331 C341 

C342 

 C503 

C507 

C343 

C353 

IGR 

FET/ 

AST 

J421 

J422 

 

ACFT 

EXER E001 

E570 

FTD T308 

T605 

T309 T606 

SIM S701 S702 S703 S704 S705 S706 

1

 Optional 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-11 01 JUL 13 

Date 

TNG 

DAY 

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 

MIL/ 

BRF 

 

WB W845 

VIDEO 

CBT C362 

C372 

C508 

C509 

 C510 

C511 

C512 

C515 

C516 

C517 

C500 

C321 

C810 

 

IGR 

FET/ 

AST 

J423 

ACFT 

EXER 

FTD T310 T607 T311 

T312 

T608 

SIM S707 S708 S709 S710 S711 S712 

1

 Optional 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-12 01 JUL 13 

Date 

TNG 

DAY 

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 

MIL/ 

BRF 

 

WB W850 

VIDEO 

CBT C513 

C514 

C518 

 

IGR 

FET/ 

AST 

 

ACFT 

EXER E049 

E854 

FTD T313 T314 

T609 

T315 T316 T317 

SIM S713 S714 S715 S716 S717 S718 S719 S720 

1

 Optional 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-13 01 JUL 13 

Date 

 

TNG 

DAY 

51 52 53 54 

MIL/ 

BRF 

 

WB 

 

VIDEO 

 

CBT 

 

IGR 

 

FET/ 

AST 

 

ACFT 

 

EXER 

 

FTD T801 T802 T803 T804 

SIM S801 S802 S803 S804 

1

 Optional 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-14 01 JUL 13 

Daily Training Schedule 

LESSON ID LESSON TITLE DURATION DATE TIME 

 

DAY 1 

FIQ-G840 Flight Engineer Initial Qualification Course 

Introduction 

2.0 

FIQ-C842 Guide to Viewing CBT Lessons 0.3 

FIQ-C001 Aircraft General 1.0 

FIQ-C003 Fire Protection System 1.0 

FIQ-C029 Lighting System 0.7 

FIQ-C004 Auxiliary Power Unit 1.0 

 6.0 

DAY 2 

FIQ-C005 Electrical System 2.0 

FIQ-C013 Aircraft Fuel System 1.8 

FIQ-C043 Air Refueling System 1.0 

FIQ-I018 Systems IGR I 2.0 

6.8 

DAY 3 

FIQ-T301 FTD Systems I 1.0 

FIQ-C014 Power Plant 1.0 

FIQ-C006 Hydraulic System 1.3 

FIQ-C009 Landing Gear System 1.0 

FIQ-C007 Flight Controls 1.5 

FIQ-I035 Systems IGR II 2.0 

7.8 

DAY 4 

FIQ-T302 FTD Systems II 1.0 

FIQ-C010 Communication Systems 1.3 

FIQ-C012 Pneumatic System 1.0 

FIQ-C026 Air Conditioning System 1.0 

FIQ-C008 Pressurization System 1.0 

FIQ-C011 Ice and Rain Protection System 0.7 

FIQ-I036 Systems IGR III 2.0 

8.0 

DAY 5 

FIQ-T303 FTD Systems III 1.0 

FIQ-C015 Flight Instruments 1.0 

FIQ-C025 Cabin Doors (Optional) 1.0* 

FIQ-C002 Emergency Equipment 0.5 

FIQ-C028 Oxygen System 0.5 

FIQ-V059 Emergency Ground Egress 1.0 

FIQ-W831 Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance 

Workbook 

 1.5 

FIQ-W834 Takeoff and Landing Data 1.5 

 8.0 

 

 

 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-15 01 JUL 13 

LESSON ID LESSON TITLE DURATION DATE TIME 

 

DAY 6 

FIQ-C832 Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance 1.0 

FIQ-C833 Takeoff Performance Charts 1.0 

FIQ-C835 KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return Data 

Computation 

2.0 

FIQ-E844 Performance Workshop I - TRT TOLD Card 2.0 

FIQ-E845 Performance Workshop II – Reduced Thrust 2.0 

8.0 

DAY 7 

FIQ-A841 KC-10 Aircraft Orientation 4.0 

FIQ-G020 Cargo/Passenger Operations 1.0 

FIQ-E846 Performance Workshop III – MTOGW TOLD 

Card 

3.0 

8.0 

DAY 8 

FIQ-E847 Performance Workshop IV – V1 = VMCG TOLD 

Card 

2.0 

FIQ-M800 Flight Management System (FMS) 4.0 

FIQ-W083 FGS Workbook 1.5 

7.5 

DAY 9 

FIQ-C016 Navigation Systems 1.0 

FIQ-C078 Introduction to Flight Guidance System 0.8 

FIQ-C079 Flight Guidance System - Autothrottle 1.0 

FIQ-C080 Flight Guidance System I 1.3 

FIQ-C081 Flight Guidance System II 1.2 

FIQ-W836 Climb, Cruise, and Holding Data Workbook 1.5 

6.8 

DAY 10 

FIQ-C082 Flight Guidance System Procedures Integration 1.0 

FIQ-C300 FE Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 1.7 

FIQ-C302 FE Interior Inspection I 1.0 

FIQ-C303 FE Interior Inspection II 1.0 

FIQ-C304 FE Interior Inspection III 1.0 

FIQ-W837 Air Refueling Performance Workbook 1.5 

7.2 

DAY 11 

FIQ-T304 FTD-304 FE Interior Inspection 2.0 

FIQ-C308 Engine Start Procedures 0.5 

FIQ-C309 Before Takeoff Procedures 0.5 

FIQ-C320 Takeoff Procedures 0.5 

FIQ-C330 Climb/Cruise Procedures 0.5 

FIQ-C351 Descent Procedures 0.5 

FIQ-C352 Approach Procedures 0.5 

FIQ-C361 Landing/Missed Approach Procedures 0.5 

FIQ-C371 After Landing Procedures 0.5 

FIQ-W840 Flight Plan Mission Forms 1.5 

7.5 

 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-16 01 JUL 13 

LESSON ID LESSON TITLE DURATION DATE TIME 

 

DAY 12 

FIQ-T305 FTD-305 FE Interior Inspection 2.0 

FIQ-T306 FTD-306 FE Normal Procedures 2.0 

FIQ-W853 TERPS - FE Workbook 1.5 

5.5 

DAY 13 

FIQ-T601 FTD Mission 1 3.5 

FIQ-E852 TERPS 4.0 

7.5 

DAY 14 

FIQ-T602 FTD Mission 2 3.5 

FIQ-E848 Performance Workshop V - Climb/Cruise/ 

Hold/AR/Descent/Flight Planning 

3.5 

FIQ-W838 Descent, Approach, and Landing Data 1.5 

8.5 

DAY 15 

FIQ-T603 FTD Mission 3 7.0 

7.0 

DAY 16 

FIQ-T604 FTD Mission 4 7.0 

7.0 

DAY 17 

FIQ-T307 FTD-307 FE Interior Inspection 2.0 

FIQF856/F857FGS Mission Exercise (Travis/McGuire) 2.0 

FIQ-C505 Tanker AR Procedures 1.0 

FIQ-C504 Receiver AR Procedures 0.7 

FIQ-W843 Air Refueling Terminology 1.0 

CRM-IT CRM Reading Assignment (1/2) 1.0 

7.7 

DAY 18 

FIQ-E851 Performance Workshop VI – Approach and 

Landing Driftdown/Suspected Windshear/Wing 

Air Refueling Pods 

6.0 

FIQ-W844 Touch and Go Landing 1.5 

7.5 

DAY 19 

FIQ-E849 Performance Workshop VII - CFCC/Tire 

Limiting Speed/Max Braking Speed 

2.5 

FIQ-E850 Performance Workshop VIII – Obstacle TOLD 

Card

3.5 

FIQ-C311 Electrical Abnormal Procedures I 1.0 

FIQ-C322 Air Conditioning Abnormal Procedures 0.8 

7.8 

DAY 20 

FIQ-S701 Simulator Mission 1 7.0 

7.0 

DAY 21 

FIQ-S702 Simulator Mission 2 7.0 

7.0 

 

 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-17 01 JUL 13 

LESSON ID LESSON TITLE DURATION DATE TIME 

 

DAY 22 

FIQ-J421 AST-J421 Abnormal Procedures 2.0 

FIQ-C331 Fuel Abnormal Procedures 0.8 

FIQ-J422 AST-J422 Abnormal Procedures 2.0 

FIQ-W001 Flying the KC-10 1.5 

6.3 

DAY 23 

FIQ-T308 FTD-308 FE Interior Inspection 2.0 

FIQ-C341 Power Plant Abnormal Procedures I 1.0 

FIQ-C342 Flight Controls Abnormal Procedures 1.0 

FIQ-T605 FTD Mission 5 3.5 

 7.5 

DAY 24 

FIQ-S703 Simulator Mission 3 7.0 

CRM-IT CRM Reading Assignment (2/2) 1.0 

 8.0 

DAY 25 

FIQ-S704 Simulator Mission 4 7.0 

 7.0 

DAY 26 

FIQ-T309 FTD-309 FE Interior Inspection 2.0 

FIQ-E001 Crew Resource Management Workshop 4.0 

FIQ-E570 Performance Review Workshop 2.0 

 8.0 

DAY 27 

FIQ-S705 Simulator Mission 5 7.0 

 7.0 

DAY 28 

FIQ-S706 Simulator Mission 6 7.0 

 7.0 

DAY 29 

FIQ-C503 Receiver AR Emergency and Abnormal 

Procedures 

0.5 

FIQ-C507 Tanker AR Emergency and Abnormal 

Procedures 

0.5 

FIQ-T606 FTD Mission 6 3.5 

FIQ-C343 Power Plant Abnormal Procedures II 0.5 

FIQ-C353 Hydraulic/Flight Control Abnormal Procedures 1.0 

FIQ-W839 Driftdown 1.5 

 7.5 

DAY 30 

FIQ-T310 FTD-310 FE Interior Inspection 2.0 

FIQ-J423 AST-J423 Abnormal Procedures 2.0 

FIQ-C362 Power Plant/Abort/Landing Gear Abnormal and 

Emergency Procedures 

0.7 

FIQ-C372 Hydraulics Abnormal and Emergency 

Procedures I 

1.0 

FIQ-C508 Electrical/Pressurization Abnormal and 

Emergency Procedures 

1.0 

FIQ-C509 Fire/Smoke/Miscellaneous Emergency 

Procedures 

0.5 

 7.2 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-18 01 JUL 13 

LESSON ID LESSON TITLE DURATION DATE TIME 

 

DAY 31 

FIQ-T607 FTD Mission 7 6.0 

FIQ-W845 Low Visibility Approach and Landing 1.0 

 7.0 

DAY 32 

FIQ-S707 Simulator Mission 7 7.0 

 7.0 

DAY 33 

FIQ-S708 Simulator Mission 8 7.0 

 7.0 

DAY 34 

FIQ-S709 Simulator Mission 9 7.0 

 7.0 

DAY 35 

FIQ-C510 Anti-Ice/Windshield Abnormal Procedures 0.5 

FIQ-C511 Pneumatics Abnormal and Emergency 

Procedures 

0.7 

FIQ-T311 FTD-311 2.0 

FIQ-C512 Electrical Abnormal Procedures II 1.0 

FIQ-T312 FTD-312 2.0 

FIQ-C515 Hydraulics Abnormal and Emergency 

Procedures II 

0.4 

FIQ-C516 Flight Controls/Auto Flight/Flight Inst Abnormal 

Procedures 

0.8 

 7.4 

DAY 36 

FIQ-C517 Power Plant Abnormal and Emergency 

Procedures 

1.5 

FIQ-T608 FTD Mission 8 3.5 

FIQ-C500 Adverse Weather Procedures 2.0 

FIQ-C321 Takeoff Windshear Procedures 0.5 

FIQ-C810 Landing Windshear Procedures 0.5 

 8.0 

DAY 37 

FIQ-S710 Simulator Mission 10 7.0 

 7.0 

DAY 38 

FIQ-S711 Simulator Mission 11 7.0 

 7.0 

DAY 39 

FIQ-S712 Simulator Mission 12 7.0 

 7.0 

DAY 40 

FIQ-C513 Fire/Smoke Abnormal and Emergency 

Procedures 

1.0 

FIQ-C514 Miscellaneous Abnormal and Emergency 

Procedures 

0.7 

FIQ-C518 Landing Gear Abnormal Procedures 0.7 

FIQ-T313 FTD-313 2.0 

 4.4 

DAY 41 

FIQ-T314 FTD-314 2.0 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-19 01 JUL 13 

LESSON ID LESSON TITLE DURATION DATE TIME 

 

FIQ-T609 FTD Mission 9 3.5 

 5.5 

DAY 42 

FIQ-S713 Simulator Mission 13 4.0 

FIQ-T315 FTD-315 3.0 

 7.0 

DAY 43 

FIQ-S714 Simulator Mission 14 7.0 

 7.0 

DAY 44 

FIQ-S715 Simulator Mission 15 7.0 

 7.0 

DAY 45 

FIQ-S716 Simulator Mission 16 4.0 

FIQ-T316 FTD-316 3.0 

 7.0 

DAY 46 

FIQ-S717 Simulator Mission 17 4.0 

FIQ-T317 FTD-317 3.0 

 7.0 

DAY 47 

FIQ-S718 Simulator Mission 18 7.0 

 7.0 

DAY 48 

FIQ-S719 Simulator Mission 19 7.0 

 7.0 

DAY 49 

FIQ-S720 Simulator Mission 20 - Evaluation 7.0 

FIQ-W850 Mission Planning Workbook 1.0 

 8.0 

DAY 50 

FIQ-E049 Portable Flight Planning System Workshop 4.0 

FIQ-E854 Post-Eval Mission Planning Exercise 3.0 

 7.0 

DAY 51 

FIQ-T801 FTD-801 FE Interior Inspection 1.0 

FIQ-S801 Post-Eval Simulator Mission 1 6.0 

 7.0 

DAY 52 

FIQ-T802 FTD-802 FE Interior Inspection 1.0 

FIQ-S802 Post-Eval Simulator Mission 2 6.0 

 7.0 

DAY 53 

FIQ-T803 FTD-803 FE Interior Inspection 1.0 

FIQ-S803 Post-Eval Simulator Mission 3 6.0 

 7.0 

 

 

 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-20 01 JUL 13 

LESSON ID LESSON TITLE DURATION DATE TIME 

 

DAY 54 

FIQ-T804 FTD-804 FE Interior Inspection 1.0 

FIQ-S804 Post-Eval Simulator Mission 4 6.0 

 7.0 

Notes: 

* = Optional 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-21 01 JUL 13 

FIQ Summary of Resources 

(Per Student) 

Media Average Time (Hours) No. of Events Total Time (Hours) 

Training Days 54 

A = ACFT 4.0 1 4.0 

C = CBT 0.9 69 62.9 

E = EXR 3.2 13 41.5 

F = FET 2.0 1 2.0 

G = PRB 1.5 2 3.0 

I = IGR 2.0 3 6.0 

J = AST 2.0 3 6.0 

M = MIL 4.0 1 4.0 

S = WST 6.5 24 155.0 

T = FTD 2.6 30 79.0 

V = VID 1.0 1 1.0 

W = WBK 1.5 15 21.5 

 TOTAL 163 385.9 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 

FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-22 01 JUL 11 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Pilot/Flight Engineer Initial Qualification 

Course Introduction 

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - This lecture provides an orientation of the KC-10 training program 

and facilities. It introduces you to the KC-10 mission and your role as a KC-10 

crewmember and explains the course content and sequence of training. Since 

there is no evaluation of the material in this course introduction, no objectives are 

defined other than described here as the purpose of this lesson. 

II. Duration - 2.0 hours 

III. Reference Materials 

A. Pilot/Flight Engineer Initial Qualification Course Introduction

B. AFI 11-2KC-10, Volume 1

IV. Equipment and Materials 

A. Pilot/Flight Engineer Initial Qualification Course Introduction Student 

Guide 

B. Classroom Presentation System 

C. Whiteboard, markers, and eraser 

D. AMC Video, TV 

V. Student Preparation/Review 

A. Read Student Lecture Text (time permitting)

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-1 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Pilot/Flight Engineer Initial Qualification 

Course Introduction

Student Lecture Text

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. Instructor Introduction 

B. Purpose statement 

Congratulations on your selection to fly the KC-10. In this lesson you are 

introduced to the KC-10 Initial Qualification Course. Following a brief orientation 

to the KC-10 program, you will watch a video on Air Mobility Command. Your 

duties and responsibilities as a KC-10 crewmember and general crew 

coordination are then discussed. Finally, the initial qualification course will be 

described, and the lesson will conclude with a tour of the Learning Center facility. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Orientation 

For your orientation to the KC-10 training program, we will make introductions, 

discuss the role of the KC-10 Aircrew Training System (ATS) contractor, provide 

general information and requirements, and cover learning center procedures. 

1. Student/Instructor Introduction. 

a. Purpose. Provide background information. 

2. The Contractor’s Role in the Training Program 

Let’s look at the organization, function, and interface between the 

contractor and the Air Force. 

a. KC-10 ATS Contractor. The KC-10 ATS contractor 

provides contract instructors, scheduling, maintenance 

support for all training devices and equipment, and training 

material. The contractor is responsible for Phase IA 

(simulator) portion of Initial Qualification.

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-2 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

(1) Training System Support Center (TSSC). The 

TSSC is located in Fairfield CA, close to Travis AFB. 

The TSSC manages the operation and maintenance 

of the KC-10 ATS. The TSSC is responsible for 

designing, developing, updating, and maintaining KC10 courseware. The TSSC also provides engineering, 

maintenance, and logistical support for the Flight 

Training Devices (FTDs), flight simulators, and Boom 

Operator Trainers (BOTs). 

(2) Training Sites. The contractor has training sites at 

McGuire AFB, NJ and Travis AFB, CA to administer 

the Phase 1A portion of KC-10 Initial Qualification 

training. 

b. Air Force Interface. The Air Force provides a level of 

management designed to oversee contractor performance 

and provide funding and support for the training system. 

(1) DET 1, AMCAOS. DET 1, AMCAOS is co-located 

with the TSSC in Fairfield, CA. DET 1 provides 

technical content reviews of all KC-10 ATS 

courseware and certifies training devices for use. 

(2) HQ AMC/A3TK. Manages KC-10 training for AMC. 

(3) AFLCMC/WNSK. Located at Wright-Patterson AFB, 

OH is the Air Force program management office for 

the KC-10 ATS Contractor. 

(4) Unit Flying Training. The Air Force conducts flying 

training for Phase IB portion of Initial Qualification, 

Phase II Mission Qualification, and Continuation 

Training. 

3. General Information and Requirements 

a. Phone Numbers. 

(1) Office. 

(a) McGuire AFB, NJ: 609-723-6070 

(b) Travis AFB, CA: 707-437-8574 

(2) Instructors. 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-3 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

b. Uniform. Flightsuit. 

c. Emergencies. Notify your instructor or training administrator 

immediately in case of an emergency. 

d. Registration. Complete the KC-10 ATS Information Form 

TR-007. If you have not received the Student Information 

form, let your instructor know during the course introduction. 

Completing the student information form pre-registers you in 

the Learning Center Network for taking computer-based 

lessons. You’ll be provided your personal ID and password 

to continue into Learning Management System (LMS). This 

allows the system to keep tabs on your progress and 

performance in the Computer-Based Training (CBT) lessons. 

e. Required Course Materials. Ensure you have all of the 

required course materials issued by the contractor and the 

Air Force. A list of required course materials is included in 

the first section of the Student Guide. 

2. Learning Center 

The KC-10 Initial Qualification Course CBT lessons are taught in the 

Learning Center. FTDs and Simulators are in separate rooms within the 

training site. 

a. Hours. The learning center is staffed from 0700 to 1700 

weekdays. You may use the Learning Center after hours 

and on weekends with prior coordination through your 

instructor or site administrator. 

b. Layout. 

(1) Restroom Locations. 

(2) Building Entries and Exits. 

c. Learning Center Rules and Procedures. 

(1) Smoking Policy. Smoking is only allowed in 

designated areas outside the building. 

(2) Food and Drink Policy. Food and drink is allowed 

only in the lounge or other designated areas. 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-4 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

(3) Equipment Operation. All computer terminals are 

located in the academic area. You will be shown how 

to operate the equipment. If you encounter a problem 

with any of the equipment, please inform an 

instructor. 

(4) Courtesy. Be courteous to other students by keeping 

the talking and noise levels to a minimum. Please 

clean up your area prior to leaving the Learning 

Center. 

(5) Safety Procedures. 

d. Classroom Lectures/Workshops. 

(1) Breaks. A ten-minute break is scheduled for every 

50 minutes of classroom instruction. 

(2) Classroom Atmosphere. Class is normally 

conducted in an informal manner. 

B. KC-10 Mission 

In order to help you focus on why you’re here, we’ll look at AMC Mission 

Orientation videotape then discuss the role of the KC-10 and your role as a KC10 crewmember. 

1. The Mission of AMC 

2. Role of the KC-10 

a. The KC-10 was chosen by the Air Force in 1977 to fill the 

requirements for the Advanced Tanker/Cargo Aircraft 

(ATCA). In fulfilling this role, you can expect to fly anywhere 

the Defense Department’s contingency, mobility, airlift, and 

air refueling commitments dictate. 

b. The functional objective of the KC-10 is to increase the 

Defense Department’s capability to project power through 

mobility enhancement. The aircraft accomplishes this 

mobility concept by: 

(1) Supporting the simultaneous air refueling and airlift 

requirements for the long-range deployments of 

tactical fighter forces. 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-5 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

(2) Supporting air-refueling requirements of airlift aircraft 

within the continental U.S (CONUS) and beyond our 

borders (OCONUS). 

(3) Augmenting airlift forces between major aerial ports. 

3. Role of the Pilot and Copilot. 

The Pilot and Copilot have important roles in the safe and successful 

accomplishment of the KC-10 mission. Below is a brief overview of Pilot 

and Copilot duties and responsibilities. 

a. Pilot Primary Responsibilities. The Pilot is: 

(1) The aircraft commander responsible for the aircraft 

and crew. 

(2) Responsible for successful mission accomplishment. 

In no instance will safety be compromised. 

(3) Responsible for the issuance of instructions governing 

all phases of flight. 

(4) Will train to control and supervise from either the left 

or right seat. 

b. Pilot’s Other Duties. 

(1) Mission Planning.

(a) Coordinate with other crewmembers on exact 

mission requirements. 

(b) Supervise procurement and/or preparation of 

all required forms, charts, logs, etc., in 

accordance with existing directives. 

(c) Attend required briefings. 

(2) Pre-Takeoff. 

(a) Conduct specialized crew briefing. Review 

mission profile including any mission changes 

and obtain/review forecast weather. The 

briefing should include but not be limited to: 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-6 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

1) Special clothing requirements. 

2) Crash landing and ditching procedures. 

3) Departure and approach procedures, 

including EGPWS considerations. 

4) Review normal and emergency takeoff 

and initial climb considerations with the 

Copilot and Flight Engineer. 

(b) Check takeoff data prepared by the Flight 

Engineer. 

1) Special Departure Procedures 

(c) Confirm required ditching equipment is aboard 

the aircraft and properly stowed for overwater 

flights. 

 

c. Copilot’s Primary Duties. 

(1) Assist the Pilot, as directed, to accomplish the 

assigned mission. 

(2) Be thoroughly familiar with normal, abnormal, and 

emergency procedures. 

(3) Attend all required briefings. 

d. Copilot - Other Considerations. 

(1) The Copilot is an integral part of the crew, not an 

extra pilot. You are a highly qualified crewmember 

who must be prepared to take control of the situation 

and assume command of the aircraft in the absence 

or incapacitation of the Pilot in command. You will be 

trained to operate the aircraft from either the right or 

left seat. 

(2) To be prepared, you must aggressively and 

conscientiously study and review the appropriate 

governing procedures, regulations, and Flight Manual 

normal, abnormal, and emergency procedures. 

Utilize simulator time conscientiously to practice and 

improve your flying skills and decision making 

abilities. 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-7 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

4. Role of the Flight Engineer 

The Flight Engineer has an important role in the safe and successful 

accomplishment of the KC-10 mission. Below is a brief overview of your 

primary duties as well as other tasks the Flight Engineer will perform. 

a. Primary Duties. Primary duties of the Flight Engineer are 

to: 

(1) Perform inspections as required and report the 

condition of the aircraft to the Aircraft Commander. 

(2) Coordinate aircraft weight and balance with the Boom 

Operator. Particular emphasis is placed on fuel 

load/distribution and CG movement/computation. 

(3) Compute all aircraft performance data for the mission 

and as requested by the aircraft commander. 

(4) Operate and monitor the various systems inflight to 

ensure successful mission accomplishment. 

(5) Be knowledgeable of normal, abnormal, and 

emergency procedures that pertain to the Flight 

Engineer position. 

(6) Monitor the aircraft fuel status and keep the pilots 

advised. 

(7) Coordinate with the crew and assist during all 

abnormal and emergency situations. 

(8) Complete forms, logs, etc., in accordance with 

existing directives. 

(9) Monitor departure routes, altitudes, obstructions, and 

traffic procedures to include applicable information 

and instructions in Flight Information Publications 

(FLIPs). 

(10) Monitor descent, approach and landing procedures to 

include applicable information and instructions in FLIP 

terminal and approach procedures. 

b. Other duties. Performs aircraft servicing, as needed. 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-8 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

5. Role of the Boom Operator 

The Boom Operator has an important role in the safe and successful 

accomplishment of the KC-10 air refueling and cargo/ Passenger mission. 

I’ll provide a brief overview of their primary duties. 

a. Primary Duties. Primary duties of the Flight Engineer are 

to: 

(1) Perform inspections and preparation, as required, and 

report the condition of the aircraft to the Aircraft 

Commander. Manage the loading and offloading of 

cargo and passengers. Ensure the proper 

documentation is with the cargo and any hazardous 

materials are properly packaged and accounted for. 

Monitor the passengers’ inflight. 

(2) Coordinate aircraft weight and balance with the Flight 

Engineer. 

(3) Conduct inflight refueling with receiver aircraft. Boom 

air refueling with receptacle equipped receivers and 

Drogue air refueling with probe equipped receivers.

(4) Operate and monitor the various systems/equipment 

on the ground and inflight to ensure successful 

mission accomplishment. 

(5) Be knowledgeable of normal, abnormal, and 

emergency procedures that pertain to the Boom 

Operator position. 

(6) Act as Safety Observer for all phases of flight that the 

Boom Operator may observe. 

6. Crew Coordination 

The KC-10 mission is demanding. The successful accomplishment of the 

mission depends on effective crew coordination, i.e., being alert and 

interacting harmoniously with other crewmembers, maintaining situational 

awareness, and observing safe operating requirements and standards. 

Coordination of actions within a crew is of prime importance to ensure the 

optimum degree of mission success and safety. Coordination is not 

limited to actions alone. Being completely familiar with one’s crew position 

and having working knowledge of other crewmembers’ duties are 

essential parts of the total effort. Each crewmember must be alert at all 

times and notify the responsible crewmember of any deviation or 

discrepancy, which will affect successful completion of the mission. 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-9 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Maximum crew coordination with minimum verbal effort is achieved by the 

Flight Engineer reading all checklists (except Boom Operator checklists), 

with the appropriate responses from the other crewmembers. Crew 

coordination enhances the manner in which the mission is performed. It 

must be developed through diligent effort, understanding, and anticipation; 

the safety of the crew depends upon it. In short, CREW COORDINATION 

is nothing more than COMMUNICATION. Don’t try to read crewmembers’ 

minds, TALK TO THEM. 

a. Interaction. The importance of effective interaction with 

other crewmembers will become obvious as you gain 

familiarity with the KC-10 mission. Successful interaction is 

accomplished by: 

(1) Coordination of actions among crewmembers to 

ensure the safety and success of the mission. 

(2) Learning your responsibilities and becoming familiar 

with the duties and responsibilities of the other crew 

positions. 

b. Awareness. Each crewmember must be constantly alert for 

any situation that may be questionable: 

(1) Practice. 

(2) Procedure. 

(3) Discrepancy. 

(4) Deviation. 

c. Safety. Crew coordination must be developed through 

diligent effort, understanding and anticipation. The safety of 

the crew depends on it. 

C. IQ Course Description 

Now that you are familiar with your job and responsibilities, let’s discuss the 

training program you are about to enter. Below you are provided with an 

overview of the Initial Qualification Course including a description of the training 

approach, integrated training concept, and the course overview. 

1. Training Approach 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-10 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

This course contains the necessary academic and hands-on training to 

ensure you acquire the knowledge and necessary skills needed to safely 

perform your duties on the KC-10. The approach used in this course fully 

integrates academic with hands-on training events, so the procedures 

taught in academic lessons are applied in hands-on training events. 

Academic training includes self-paced activities, workshops, and instructor 

guided reviews (IGR). KC-10 Flight Manuals are the primary reference 

source for all lessons. However, information from other sources, such as 

maintenance manuals, is included in some lessons. 

Self-paced activities used in the course include CBT lessons, workbooks, 

and reading assignments. 

Keep in mind that although the course is considered self-paced, in reality 

a tight schedule must be maintained to ensure preparation for specific 

training events. You should initially try to get ahead; this will allow 

additional time to spend on more difficult lessons. It cannot be 

emphasized enough that if you get behind on your CBT lessons, 

workbooks, or reading assignments, it is very difficult to catch up. When 

you go to the FTD or SIM unprepared, you compromise successful 

completion of the training mission for yourself and your crew. 

Hands-on events include the static aircraft, FTD, and flight simulator. 

Let’s briefly review the media used in the course. 

a. Academics. 

(1) Self-paced. 

(a) Computer-Based Training. CBT is used as 

the primary academic media in the course. 

Lesson material is presented by integrating text 

and graphics on screen with audio narration. 

Embedded quizzes and end of lesson tests 

assess your knowledge of the presented 

material. You control access to any repetition 

of lesson segments, lesson topics, and lesson 

exercises using the mouse and keyboard. 

(b) Workbooks. Instructional workbooks provide 

you with individually paced readings, 

exercises, and problems. Workbooks 

familiarize you with terminology, conditions, 

and procedures and supplements information 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-11 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

included in the Flight Manual. Lesson 

exercises assess understanding and answer 

keys provide feedback. Although there is time 

allocated in the training schedule to review the 

workbooks, you are encouraged to begin 

reading the workbooks early in the schedule. 

Mandatory workbooks must be completed by 

the time indicated on the training schedule. 

You are encouraged to review the optional 

workbooks listed on the training schedule. All 

workbooks are designed for your continued 

use after you complete the course. 

(c) Reading Assignments. Lesson reading 

assignments are listed in the Student 

Preparation/Review section of each Student 

Guide. Successful completion of this course 

requires self-study. Best results are achieved 

when you complete the required reading 

assignment prior to the academic lesson. 

(2) Workshops/Exercises. Workshops and exercises 

provide the opportunity to practice what you learned 

in prerequisite workbook and CBT lessons. In a 

workshop setting, the instructor provides appropriate 

guidance when questions arise and presents 

exercises for you to complete. 

(3) Instructor Guided Reviews. Instructor Guided 

Reviews (IGRs) are scheduled following a sequence 

of CBT lessons for aircraft systems. The purpose of 

the review is to provide you with an opportunity to 

seek clarification or reinforcement of material 

presented in the CBT lessons. An instructor-guided 

review is not used to re-teach the subject nor present 

new material. An outline is included in the Student 

Guide. Use it to take notes on the areas discussed 

during the review. Time spent in the IGR is split 

between the classroom and the FTD. 

(4) Mediated Interactive Lecture. One instructor-based 

lecture is included in the course to provide a Cargo 

and Boom Operator orientation. 

b. Hands-on Training. Let’s now take a look at the hands-on 

media. 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-12 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

(1) Static Aircraft. A field trip to a KC-10 aircraft is 

scheduled immediately following the systems 

academic lessons and prior to normal procedures 

instruction. The guided tour familiarizes you with 

general features of the aircraft emphasizing those 

exterior and interior components of specific concern 

to your crew position. 

(2) Aircrew Systems Trainer. The ASTs used to 

observe and perform normal, abnormal, emergency 

procedures to a system. The AST uses real-time 

aircraft systems software. Some of the systems 

presented are APU, Electrical, Pneumatics and Air 

Conditioning. 

(3) Flight Training Device. This training device permits 

practice of normal, abnormal, and emergency 

checklist procedures. Some FTD sessions are 

independent, meaning they are Pilot or Flight 

Engineer only. Procedures practiced in the FTD 

prepare you for missions flown in the simulator. 

(4) Simulator. Simulator periods are structured creworiented missions. In this device, you practice 

normal, abnormal, and emergency procedures. As 

much as possible, they are planned as full-profile 

missions. Pilots will practice flying the aircraft from 

both pilot seats. 

c. Student Guide. Finally, the Student Guide includes a 

scheduled order of events and provides an individual guide 

for each lesson. The guide is broken into two volumes, and 

arranged in daily order from day 1 to 19 for Volume I, and 

day 20 to 54 for volume II. It is your responsibility to use the 

Student Guide as a reference to ensure complete 

preparation for the next lesson/training event. 

(1) CBT Lessons. CBT lessons include an introduction, 

student preparation/review requirements, objectives, 

and a lesson outline. Use the outline to take notes 

during each CBT lesson. 

(2) Workshops and Exercises. Workbooks and 

exercises include an introduction, objectives, 

instructional reading topics, problems, and exercises. 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-13 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

(3) FTD and Simulator. FTD and simulator lessons 

include an introduction, objectives, and the profile to 

be flown. 

2. Integrated Training Concept. 

a. Purpose. This course uses an integrated training concept 

that close couples hands-on FTD and simulator training 

events to academic instruction. After completing a series of 

academic lessons, you will have the opportunity to practice 

what you have learned in a hands-on training device. The 

reduced time lapse between related academic and hands-on 

training objectives enhances training effectiveness. 

b. Integrated Training. Instruction starts with aircraft systems, 

including a description of the aircraft systems, operational 

characteristics, and limitations. It, then, proceeds through 

mission preparation, normal procedures (takeoff, climb, 

enroute, descent, landing, and after landing), abnormal and 

emergency procedures, and air refueling procedures. 

(1) Simulators start with aircraft systems and advance to 

more complex abnormal and emergency procedures. 

They also include normal, abnormal, and emergency 

tanker and receiver air refueling procedures. FTD 

missions support the simulator training with normal, 

abnormal, and emergency procedure practice. 

3. Course Overview 

a. Course Length. The Pilot and Flight Engineer Initial 

Qualification Courses are both 54 days in length. There are 

five days of academics following the Air Force administered 

simulator evaluation. You are not responsible for this 

information in the evaluation. 

b. Course Management Flow and Training Schedule. Your 

instructor will preview the scheduled daily events. Follow 

along with the Course Management Flow and Training 

Schedule charts that are included in the front section of your 

Student Guide. 

D. Learning Center Tour 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-14 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

III. REVIEW 

A. Summary 

This course provides you the knowledge and skills needed to become safe and 

effective KC-10 crewmembers. This program introduction provided a general 

orientation, introduced the mission of the KC-10 and your specific 

responsibilities, and described the Initial Qualification Course. Should you have 

any questions during the course, please feel free to call upon your instructor at 

any time. 

B. Remotivation 

Becoming a successful KC-10 aircrew member is not an easy task. By 

dedicating yourself and following the instructions in the student guide, you will 

find this course trains you to be the best possible crewmember in the KC-10 

program. 

C. Closure 

Are there any questions? If not, this concludes the presentation. 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-15 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 

PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-16 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

PIQ/FIQ-C842-SG 1-2-1 01 OCT 10 

Guide to Viewing CBT Lessons

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to acquaint you with the various 

features of the KC-10 Aircrew Training System (ATS) Computer-Based Training 

(CBT). 

II. Duration - 0.3 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. None

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Guide to Viewing CBT Lessons CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. None 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

PIQ/FIQ-C842-SG 1-2-2 01 OCT 10 

Guide to Viewing CBT Lessons

Student Outline

l. INTRODUCTION

A. The purpose of this lesson is to acquaint the student with the various 

features of Computer Based Training (CBT). 

B. Objective 

1. Describes the navigation through KC-10 ATS Computer Based 

Training (CBT) Lessons. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Guide to Viewing CBT Lessons 

1. Lesson Overview 

B. CBT Interface 

1. Navigation Menu 

a. Navigation Menu 

b. Organization and Structure 

c. Navigation Menu Key 

2. Screen Layout 

a. Screen Layout 

b. Presentation Area 

c. Narration Text 

(1) Narration Text 

(2) Audio On 

(3) Audio Off 

d. Navigation Controls 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

PIQ/FIQ-C842-SG 1-2-3 01 OCT 10 

(1) Navigation Controls 

(2) Topic Counter 

(3) Back and Next Arrow Buttons 

(4) Pause Button 

(5) Replay Button 

(6) Confirm Button 

e. Feature Controls 

(1) Feature Controls 

(2) AUDIO 

(3) GLOSSARY 

(4) FAQ/CMM 

(5) COMMENT 

(6) MENU/EXIT 

3. Quiz and Exam Functions 

a. Quiz and Exam Functions 

b. Embedded Quiz 

c. End-of-Segment Quiz and Remediation 

d. End-of-Lesson Exam 

C. Lesson Summary 

1. Lesson Summary 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

PIQ/FIQ-C842-SG 1-2-4 01 OCT 10 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C001-SG 1-3-1 01 OCT 10 

Aircraft General

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to KC-10 aircraft 

layout, design and major components. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-9, Cargo Loading Manual

IV. Equipment and Materials 

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Aircraft General CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section 1, Systems Description 

a. Part 1, Aircraft General 

(1) Aircraft General Description 

(2) Engine Danger Areas 

(3) Galley Description 

(4) Lavatories Description 

(5) Potable Water Description 

(6) Seats Description 

(7) Cargo Equipment 

b. Part 8, Doors 

(1) Doors Description 

(a) Cockpit Door 

(b) Lavatory Door 

(c) Cabin Doors 

(d) Cargo Doors 

(2) Ground Egress/Entry Ladder 

(3) Portable Ladder Assembly 

c. Part 11, Emergency Equipment 

(1) Bunks - (Fig 1.11-4) 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-9 

1. Section II, Description of Aircraft Features 

a. Cryogenic Vent 

b. Personnel Provisions 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C001-SG 1-3-2 01 OCT 10 

Aircraft General

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson introduces you to KC-10 aircraft layout, design, and major 

components. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify aircraft general exterior characteristics. 

2. Identify aircraft general interior characteristics. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Aircraft General 

1. Lesson Overview 

B. Aircraft Exterior Characteristics 

1. KC-10 Overview 

2. Exterior Dimensions 

a. Exterior Dimensions 

b. Turning Radius 

c. Weight Limitations 

3. Engines 

4. Danger Areas/Thrust 

a. Danger Areas 

b. Exhaust Wake Velocity 

c. Pulling Force 

(1) Pulling Force - Takeoff Thrust 

(2) Pulling Force - Idle 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C001-SG 1-3-3 01 OCT 10 

5. Structural Components 

6. Fuselage Structure 

7. Doors and Hatches 

8. Maintenance Service Doors 

9. Aircraft Servicing 

10. Aircraft Exterior Characteristics Quiz 

C. Aircraft Interior Characteristics 

1. Fuselage Compartments 

2. Flight Compartment Stations 

3. Cockpit Door 

4. Crew Seats 

a. Crew Seats 

b. Pilot and Flight Engineer Seats 

c. Boom Operator’s Seat 

d. Crewmember/Observer’s Seat 

5. Facilities 

a. Facilities 

b. Lavatory 

c. Z Lavatory 

d. Galley 

e. Potable Water System 

f. Crew Bunks 

6. Cargo Loading and Safety Issues 

7. Cargo/PAX Configurations 

8. Patient Support Configuration 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C001-SG 1-3-4 01 OCT 10 

9. Local Training Configurations 

10. Cargo Barrier Net/Environmental Curtain 

11. Cryogenic Vent 

12. Center Accessory Compartment 

13. ARO Compartment 

14. Aircraft Interior Characteristics Quiz 

III. EXAM 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Fire Protection System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce the KC-10 fire protection 

system. It provides detection, fire and smoke warning, and the subsystems to 

extinguish a fire in the engine nacelles and APU compartment. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Fire Protection System CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description 

a. Part 2, Power Plant/APU - Fire Protection 

CH 3 

FIQ-C003-SG 1-4-1 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Fire Protection System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. The KC-10 fire protection system provides detection, fire and smoke 

warning, and the subsystems to extinguish a fire in the engine nacelles 

and APU compartment. 

Parallel fire detection loops in the engines and APU are monitored by a 

control unit which energizes the warning system when a fire is detected. 

The cargo compartment is protected by sixteen smoke detectors, any one 

of which can activate the smoke caution system. 

The fire extinguishing system uses three dual canister systems, one on 

each engine. The APU is covered by the number two engine 

extinguishing system. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the fire protection system components. 

2. Identify the fire protection system operational characteristics. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Fire Protection System 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Fire Protection System Components 

1. Introduction 

2. Major Components 

3. Fire Detection System 

a. Fire Detection System 

b. Fire Detector Units 

CH 3 

FIQ-C003-SG 1-4-2 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

(1) Fire Detector Units 

(2) Fire Sensing Cables 

(3) Loop A and Loop B 

(4) Fire Detector Control Units 

(a) Fire Detector Control Units 

c. Fire Extinguishing System 

d. Cabin Cargo Compartment Smoke Detection 

4. Controls and Indicators 

5. Engine Fire 

a. Engine Fire Detection Panel 

b. Engine Fire Handles 

c. Engine Fuel Lever Lights 

d. Engine Fire Light 

6. APU Fire 

a. APU Fire 

b. APU Loop/Fire Lights 

c. APU Fire Summary Light 

d. APU Fire Control 

e. APU Ground Control Panel 

7. Cabin Cargo Compartment Smoke 

a. Cabin Cargo Compartment Smoke 

b. Smoke Detector Panel 

c. Cabin Cargo Smoke Lights 

8. Summary 

9. Quiz 

CH 3 

FIQ-C003-SG 1-4-3 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

C. Fire Protection System Operational Characteristics 

1. Introduction 

2. Fire Detection System 

a. Loop Selector Switches 

3. Fire Detection System Test 

a. Fire Detection System Test 

b. FE Panel 

c. Fire Handle/Fuel Lever 

d. Pilots’ Glareshield/Annunciator 

e. Engine Fire Warning Bell 

4. Engine Fire Warning 

a. Engine Fire Warning 

b. Engine Fire Detection 

c. Fuel Lever Lights 

d. Eng Fire Handles/Warning Lights 

(1) Eng Fire Handles/Warning Lights. 

(2) Gen Field Disconnect Position 

(3) Fuel & Hyd Off Position/Discharge Agent 1 

(4) Discharging Agent 2 

(5) Restore Hydraulic Pressure 

5. APU Fire Detection 

a. APU Fire Detection 

b. APU Fire Indications 

(1) APU Fire Indications 

(2) Master Warning Light 

CH 3 

FIQ-C003-SG 1-4-4 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

(3) APU Summary Light 

c. APU Fire Protection 

d. APU Ground Control Panel 

6. Cabin Cargo Smoke Test 

a. Cabin Cargo Smoke Test 

b. Cabin Cargo Smoke Detection 

7. Summary 

8. Quiz 

III. Exam 

CH 3 

FIQ-C003-SG 1-4-5 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 

CH 3 

FIQ-C003-SG 1-4-6 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Lighting System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the KC-10 Exterior 

and Interior Lighting Systems. 

II. Duration - 0.7 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Lighting System CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section 1, Systems Description 

a. Part 1, Aircraft General 

(1) Lighting Description 

CH 3 

FIQ-C029-SG 1-5-1 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Lighting System

Student Outline 

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. Aircraft lighting is composed of an Exterior System, and Interior Lighting 

consisting of cockpit, cabin, ARO station, and Warning and Caution 

subsystems. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the characteristics of the Exterior Lighting System. 

2. Identify the characteristics of the Interior Lighting System. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Lighting System 

1. Introduction 

2. Objective 

B. Exterior Lighting 

1. Introduction 

2. Landing Lights/Runway Turnoff Lts 

a. Landing Lights/Runway Turnoff Lts 

3. Position/Illumination 

a. Position Lighting Overview 

b. Wing Tip/Strobe Lights 

c. Beacon and Formation Lights 

d. AR Receptacle Lights 

4. General Illumination/Scanning 

a. Illumination/Scanning Overview 

CH 3 

FIQ-C029-SG 1-5-2 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

b. Wing and Logo Lights 

c. Fuselage Lights 

d. Aircraft Underside Lighting 

5. Controls and Indicators 

a. Landing Lights 

b. T-Storm/Nav/Hi-Int/Formation 

c. Beacon Lights 

d. Logo Light 

e. Wing/Upper Fuselage/AR Receptacle Lighting 

f. ARO Controlled Lighting 

6. Summary 

7. Quiz 

C. Interior Lighting 

1. Introduction 

2. Cockpit Lighting 

a. Primary Lighting 

b. Secondary/Standby Lighting 

c. Thunderstorm Lighting 

3. Cabin/ARO Compartment Lighting 

a. Cabin Lighting 

b. ARO Compartment Lighting 

4. Controls and Indicators 

a. Main Instrument Lighting 

b. Overhead/Glareshield Lighting 

c. Center Instrument/Pedestal Lighting 

CH 3 

FIQ-C029-SG 1-5-3 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

d. FE Station Lighting 

e. Dome/Thunderstorm Lights 

f. Standby Lighting 

g. Seat Belt/Don Oxygen Mask 

CH 3 

FIQ-C029-SG 1-5-4 01 JUL 13 

h. Master Warning/Caution Lights Overview 

i. Summary/Master Warning Lights 

j. Cue/Caution Lights 

k. Annunciator Light Test 

5. Summary 

6. Quiz 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C004-SG 1-6-1 01 OCT 10 

Auxiliary Power Unit

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the KC-10 Auxiliary 

Power Unit (APU). 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual

IV. Equipment and Materials 

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Auxiliary Power Unit CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description 

a. Part 2, Power Plant/APU-Fire Protection 

2. Section III, Limitations 

a. APU 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C004-SG 1-6-2 01 OCT 10 

 Auxiliary Power Unit

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. The APU is a twin spool axial flow gas turbine. Its purpose is to eliminate 

the dependence of the KC-10 on ground support equipment. The APU 

design permits its use in flight as well as on the ground. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the Auxiliary Power Unit System components. 

2. Identify the operational characteristics of the Auxiliary Power Unit. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Auxiliary Power Unit 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. APU Components 

1. Introduction 

2. APU System Components 

a. APU System Components 

b. APU Compartment 

c. Compressors 

d. Oil Lubrication System 

e. Drain Can 

f. Inlet/Exhaust doors 

3. APU Controls and Indicators 

a. APU Controls and Indicators 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C004-SG 1-6-3 01 OCT 10 

b. Master Switch/Door Open Light 

c. Control System Switch 

d. Fuel Pump Switch 

e. Fuel Pressure Low Light 

f. Using BAT PWR Light 

g. Oil Pressure LO/TEMP HI Light 

h. Oil Quantity Gage 

i. N1 and N2 Gages 

j. EGT Gage 

k. Generator Bus Switches 

l. ISOL Valve 

4. Summary 

5. Quiz 

C. APU Operational Characteristics 

1. Introduction 

2. APU Start (Normal) 

a. APU Start (Normal) 

b. Exercise – APU Start (Normal) 

3. APU Shutdown 

4. APU Malfunctions 

5. APU Automatic Shutdown 

6. Summary 

7. Quiz 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C004-SG 1-6-4 01 OCT 10 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C005-SG 1-7-1 01 OCT 10 

Electrical System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the major 

components of the KC-10 electrical system, the controls and indicators, and their 

function and operational characteristics. 

II. Duration - 2.0 hours 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Electrical System CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description 

a. Part 4, Electrical 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C005-SG 1-7-2 01 OCT 10 

 Electrical System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. The KC-10 electrical system consists of alternating and direct current 

power generation (three engine-driven generators and four transformer 

rectifiers) with corresponding distribution systems. A fourth generator is 

installed on the auxiliary power unit (APU) to provide auxiliary power on 

the ground or in the air. An external power receptacle provides for ground 

power. Emergency power supplied by battery/static inverter system or by 

an air driven generator (ADG). Distribution and control is effected through 

panels, annunciators, indicators, switches, buses, and circuit breakers. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the electrical system components. 

2. Identify the electrical system controls and indicators. 

3. Identify the operational characteristics of the electrical system. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Electrical System 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Electrical System Components 

1. Introduction 

2. Engine Driven Generators 

3. AC Buses 

4. AC Tie Bus 

5. Transformer/Rectifiers 

6. DC Buses 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C005-SG 1-7-3 01 OCT 10 

7. DC Tie Bus 

8. Battery Bus 

9. Battery/Battery Charger Relay 

10. APU Generator 

11. External Power 

12. Ground Service Relay 

13. Air Driven Generator 

14. Circuit Breakers 

a. Circuit Breaker Panels 

b. Aircraft Systems/Lighting/Misc 

c. Flight Guidance/Communications 

d. Emergency/Battery Buses 

e. Integral Panel Lighting/Light Plates 

f. Remote Control Circuit Breakers 

15. Summary 

16. Quiz 

C. Electrical System Controls and Indicators 

1. Introduction 

2. AC Electrical Panel 

a. Electrical Panel Overview 

b. CSD Disc Button/Press Low Light 

c. CSD Temp Gage/Rise Button 

d. Generator Switch 

e. Gen Off/Gen Fail Lights 

f. Parallel Gen Button/AC Loadmeter 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C005-SG 1-7-4 01 OCT 10 

g. AC Bus Off Light 

h. Emerg AC Bus Off Lights 

i. AC Bus Tie Switches/Off Lights 

j. External Power Switch/Lights 

3. DC Electrical Panel 

a. DC Loadmeters 

b. DC Bus Off Lights 

c. DC Tie Switches/Closed Lights 

d. DC X-Tie Switch/Closed Light 

e. Battery Switch/Battery Bus Off Light 

4. APU Electrical 

a. APU Gen Reset Switch/Gen Off Light 

b. APU Power Avail/Gen Fail Lights 

c. APU Gen Bus Switches 

d. APU AC Loadmeter 

5. Test Panel 

a. AC Voltmeter/Frequency Indicator 

b. DC Volt/Amp Meter 

c. Volt/Amp/Freq Selector 

6. Ground Service Bus Power Switch/Bus Off Light 

7. Electrical System Reset Switches 

8. Generator Fail Reset Button 

9. Emerg Power Switch/Emer Power Lights 

10. Air Driven Generator 

11. Ground Service Bus Switches/Lights 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C005-SG 1-7-5 01 OCT 10 

12. External Power Panel 

13. Summary 

14. Quiz 

D. Operational Characteristics of the Electrical System 

1. Introduction 

2. Battery Power 

3. Engine Generators 

4. Generator Bus 1 

5. Generator Bus 2 

6. Generator Bus 3 

7. Isolated Mode 

8. Unparalleled Mode 

9. Parallel Mode 

10. Bus Priority 

a. Description 

b. Eng/APU/Ext Pwr Avail 

c. Tie Bus Priority 

d. Generator Bus Priority 

11. Air Driven Generator 

12. Summary 

13. Quiz 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C005-SG 1-7-6 01 OCT 10 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Aircraft Fuel System 

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the KC-10 Fuel 

System. 

II. Duration - 1.8 hours 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Aircraft Fuel System CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description 

a. Part 3, Fuel and UARRSI 

(1) Fuel System Description 

(2) Universal Air Refueling Receptacle and Slipway 

Installation (UARRSI) 

CH 3 

FIQ-C013-SG 1-8-1 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

 Aircraft Fuel System 

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. The KC-10 fuel system consists of fuel tanks, pumps, manifolds, control 

valves and indicators necessary to perform a wide variety of tasks. These 

include supply for the engine and APU, tanker air refueling using the air 

refueling boom, centerline drogue, or wing pod drogue as well as taking 

on fuel in flight through the use of an in flight receiver system. The system 

is designed so that any engine can be fed from any tank. The engines can 

use all available fuel or all available fuel can be offloaded to a receiver 

aircraft. This lesson is presented in two segments. The first segment 

discusses the fuel system components, and the second segment 

discusses the operating characteristics, including the system limitations. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the fuel system components. 

2. Identify the operational characteristics of the fuel system. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Aircraft Fuel System 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Fuel System Components 

1. Introduction 

2. Fuel Storage 

a. Fuel Storage 

b. Main Wing Tanks 

c. Fuselage Body Tanks 

(1) Fuselage Body Tanks 

CH 3 

FIQ-C013-SG 1-8-2 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

(2) Forward Body Tanks 

(3) Center Wing Tank 

(4) Aft Body Tank 

d. Fuel Vent System 

(1) Fuel Vent System 

(2) Positive/Negative Pressure Relief Valve 

e. Fuel Level Measuring Sticks 

f. Scavenging System 

3. Fuel Distribution System 

a. Fuel Distribution System 

b. Crossfeed Manifold 

c. Fuel Transfer System 

d. Ground Refueling 

4. Receiver Aerial Refueling System 

a. Receiver Aerial Refueling System 

b. UARRSI 

c. Air Refueling Recept Shutoff Valve 

d. Slipway Door 

e. Induction Coil 

5. Controls and Indicators 

a. Controls and Indicators 

b. Fuel Quantity Indicators 

(1) Fuel Quantity Indicators 

(2) Totalizer/Gross Weight Indicator 

(3) Fuel Quantity Test Button 

CH 3 

FIQ-C013-SG 1-8-3 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

c. Fuel Quantity Indicator Power Switch 

d. Fuel Pressure Gage 

e. Fuel Used Indicator 

f. Advisory Lights 

(1) Advisory Lights 

(2) Fuel Filter Press Drop Light 

(3) Tank Overfilled Light 

(4) Main Tank FUEL SCHED Light 

(5) Forward Body Tank FUEL SCHED Light 

(6) Tip Pump(s) Low Press Light 

(7) Ground Refuel Valve Open Light 

(8) Fuel Cue Light 

g. Dual Function Switch Lights 

(1) Dual Function Switch Lights 

(2) Transfer Pump Switch 

(3) Main Tank Boost Pump 

(4) Crossfeed Valve Switch 

(5) Fill Valve Switch 

(6) Fuel Dump Switch 

(7) Isolation Valves 

(8) Alternate Transfer Valve 

(9) AR Isolation Valve 

h. Override Switches 

(1) Override Switches 

(2) Transfer Pump Override 

CH 3 

FIQ-C013-SG 1-8-4 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

(3) AR Override Switch 

i. Fuel Dump Switch 

j. Manifold Drain/Outboard Fill 

k. AR Pump Switch Lights 

l. Switch Flow Line Annunciator Supply Power 

6. AR Receiver Fuel Panel 

a. AR Receiver Fuel Panel 

b. AR Master Switch/Unlock Light 

c. OVRD/Ready Light 

d. AR Receiver Valve 

e. Latched/Disconnect Lights 

f. UARRSI Status Annunciator Panel 

7. HI-LEVEL Float Test 

8. Fuel Manifold Scavenge Switch 

9. UARRSI Lighting 

a. UARRSI Lighting 

b. AR Receptacle 

c. Perimeter and Lead-In 

10. Summary 

11. Quiz 

C. Fuel System Operational Characteristics 

1. Introduction 

2. Center of Gravity Control 

3. Tank to Engine Feed 

4. Tank to Tank Transfer 

CH 3 

FIQ-C013-SG 1-8-5 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

a. Tank to Tank Transfer 

b. Transfer Body Tank Fuel 

5. Fuel Limitations 

a. Fuel Limitations 

b. Transfer Body Tank Fuel 

c. Main Tank 2 Transfer 

d. Transfer Pump Override 

6. Ground Refueling 

7. Receiver Air Refueling 

a. Receiver Air Refueling 

b. Onload Fuel 

c. Disconnect 

8. Summary 

9. Quiz 

III. Exam

CH 3 

FIQ-C013-SG 1-8-6 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C043-SG 1-9-1 01 OCT 10 

Air Refueling System

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the tanker air 

refueling portion of KC-10 Fuel System. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials 

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Air Refueling System CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description 

a. Part 3, Fuel and UARSSI 

(1) Fuel System Description 

(2) Wing Pod Aerial Refueling System 

b. Part 15, Air Refueling Boom/Hose 

2. Section III, Limitations 

a. Air Refueling Limitations 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C043-SG 1-9-2 01 OCT 10 

Air Refueling System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. The KC-10 fuel system consists of fuel tanks, pumps, manifolds, control 

valves, and indicators necessary to perform a wide variety of tasks. 

These include supply for the engine and APU, and tanker air refueling 

using the boom, centerline drogue, or wing pod drogue as well as taking 

on fuel in flight through use of the inflight receiver system. This lesson 

covers the Tanker Air Refueling System and is presented in two 

segments. The first segment covers the components of the air refueling 

system, and the second segment covers the operational characteristics 

and limitations. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the components of the Air Refueling System. 

2. Identify the operational characteristics of the Air Refueling System. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Air Refueling System 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Air Refueling System Components 

1. Introduction 

2. Air Refueling System Components 

a. Air Refueling System Components 

b. Boom 

c. Centerline Drogue 

d. Wing Aerial Refueling Pods 

3. AR Fuel System 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C043-SG 1-9-3 01 OCT 10 

a. AR Fuel System 

b. Forward Body 

c. Center Wing 

d. Aft Body 

4. AR Manifold 

a. AR Manifold 

b. Boom/Drogue Manifolds 

c. Fuel Pressure Transducers 

5. Fuel Pressure Control Unit 

6. WARP System 

a. WARP System 

b. WARP Components 

c. Modes of Operation 

7. Controls and Indicators 

a. Controls and Indicators 

b. AR Fuel Pump Switch 

c. AR Isolation Valve 

d. Boom/Drogue Engaged Light 

e. Boom Valve 

f. Drogue Valve 

g. AR Pump Override 

h. Alternate Transfer Valve 

i. Master Fuel Isolation Valve Sw 

j. By-Pass Disagree Lights 

k. Fuel Flow/Offload Gage 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C043-SG 1-9-4 01 OCT 10 

l. Fuel Pressure Gage 

m. AR HYD Press Lights 

8. FE Annunciator Panel 

9. WARP Control Panel 

10. Summary 

11. Quiz 

C. Air Refueling System Operational Characteristics 

1. Introduction 

2. Boom Refueling 

a. Boom Refueling 

b. AR Pumps 

c. Armed Before Contact 

d. Fuel Offload 

e. Disconnect 

f. Armed After Contact 

g. AR Pump Override 

3. Centerline Drogue 

4. WARP 

a. WARP 

b. Alt Trans/Isol Valves 

c. AR Pump Override (WARP) 

d. Wing Drogue Valve 

e. Wing Pod Valve 

f. WARP Refueling Complete 

5. Manifold Scavenge 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C043-SG 1-9-5 01 OCT 10 

a. Manifold Scavenge 

b. Receiver 

c. Tanker 

d. Boom 

6. Limitations 

a. Limitations 

b. Airspeed 

c. Environmental 

7. Summary 

8. Quiz 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C043-SG 1-9-6 01 OCT 10 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-1 01 OCT 10 

Systems IGR I 

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this IGR is to review the Aircraft General Exterior 

and Interior, Fire Protection System, Interior and Exterior Lighting System, APU, 

Electrical System, Aircraft Fuel System, and Air Refueling System. This review 

provides you with opportunities to seek clarification or reinforcement of this 

material. 

II. Duration - 2.0 hours

III. Reference Materials 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials 

A. Systems IGR I Instructor Guide and E-Frame Set 

B. Classroom Presentation System 

C. Aircrew System Trainer (AST) (Optional) 

D. Whiteboard, markers and erasers 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. You should have completed these CBT lessons. 

1. Aircraft General 

2. Fire Protection System 

3. Lighting System 

4. Auxiliary Power Unit 

5. Electrical System 

6. Aircraft Fuel System 

7. Air Refueling System 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-2 01 OCT 10 

Objectives 

1. Identify aircraft general exterior characteristics. 

2. Identify aircraft general interior characteristics.

3. Identify operational characteristics of the fire protection system.

4. Identify characteristics of the exterior lighting system. 

5. Identify characteristics of the interior lighting system. 

6. Identify operational characteristics of the auxiliary power unit. 

7. Identify operational characteristics of the electrical system. 

8. Identify the operational characteristics of the fuel system. 

9. Identify the operational characteristics of the air refueling system. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-3 01 OCT 10 

Systems IGR I 

Student Outline

A. Aircraft General Exterior Characteristics 

1. External Dimensions 

2. Engines 

3. Structural Components 

4. Danger Areas around the A/C 

5. Doors and Hatches 

6. Aircraft Servicing 

B. Aircraft General Interior Characteristics

1. Fuselage Compartments 

a. Flight Deck 

b. Cabin 

c. Cargo 

d. Forward Avionics Bay 

e. Center Accessory Compartment 

f. ARO Compartment 

g. Fuel Tanks 

2. Flight Deck Stations 

3. Crew Seats

4. Lavatories 

5. Galley/Water/Bunks 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-4 01 OCT 10 

6. Cargo Pax Configuration 

7. Barrier Net/Environmental Screen 

C. Fire Protection System 

1. Fire Detection Panel 

2. Fire Detection System Test 

3. Engine Fire Warning 

4. APU Fire Panel 

5. APU Ground Control Panel 

6. Cabin Cargo Smoke

D. Exterior Lighting System 

1. Landing/Ground Operations

a. Landing Lights 

b. Runway Turnoff Lights 

2. Position Lighting and Illumination 

a. Red and Green Wingtip

b. White Position Lights

3. Scanning and General Illumination 

a. Wing Scan Lights 

b. Logo Lights 

c. Fuselage Scan Lights

d. Underwing Illumination Lights 

e. Horizontal Stabilizer Lights 

f. Receiver Airplane Lights 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-5 01 OCT 10 

4. UARRSI Lighting 

a. Flood 

b. Slipway 

5. Controls and Indicators 

a. Overhead Panel 

b. FE Console 

c. ARO Compartment 

E. Interior Lighting System 

1. Cockpit Lighting 

a. Primary 

b. Secondary 

c. Standby 

d. Thunderstorm 

2. Cabin and ARO Lighting 

a. Overhead 

b. Threshold Entry 

c. ARO Overhead 

3. Controls and Indicators 

a. Primary Lighting 

b. Standby Lighting 

c. Aircrew/Passenger Notification 

d. Master Warning and Master Caution Lights 

e. Engine Fire Warning Lights 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-6 01 OCT 10 

F. Auxiliary Power Unit 

1. APU General Description 

a. Twin-Spool, Gas Turbine 

b. Source of Pneumatic and Electrical Power 

c. Location - APU Compartment, Lower Aft Fuselage 

d. Seal-when-closed Access Door 

2. Oil System 

a. Self-contained 

b. Wet sump 

c. Reservoir 

d. Oil Pressure Sensor 

e. Oil Temperature Sensor 

f. Oil Level Sensor 

3. Ignition System 

a. Master Switch to Momentary Start 

b. Electronic Control Unit initiates Start 

c. Intermittent Duty Cycle 

d. Ignition Unit 

4. Fuel Supply and Control 

a. Fuel Supply 

b. Fuel Distribution 

c. APU Drain 

5. Electric Power Supply 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-7 01 OCT 10 

a. Aircraft Batteries 

b. Permanent Magnet Generator (PMG) – above 95% N2

6. APU Electronic Control Unit 

a. DC Powered (battery or PMG) 

b. Functions 

c. Location – Aft Fuselage Compartment 

7. Normal Standby Operation Modes 

a. APU Generator 

b. Pneumatics 

c. Modes of Operation 

8. APU Cooling and Compartment Ventilation 

a. Ambient Air 

b. Distribution 

c. Function 

9. Controls and Indicators – APU Control Panel 

a. APU N1 Gage – indicates percent of rated rotor speed 

b. APU EGT Gage – indicates exhaust gas temperature and limits 

c. APU N2 Gage – indicates percent of rated rotor speed 

d. APU Oil Quantity Gage – indicates usable oil quantity 

e. APU USING BAT PWR light 

f. APU OIL PRESS LO/TEMP HI Light 

g. APU Master Switch 

h. APU Control Systems Switch 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-8 01 OCT 10 

i. APU FUEL PRESS LO light – illuminates when fuel pressure is 

below starting or operating limits 

j. APU Fuel Pump Switch 

G. Electrical System 

1. System Description 

a. Engine Driven Generators (3) - AC Power 

b. Transformer Rectifiers (TR) 

c. Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) 

d. Circuit Breakers 

e. Air-Driven Generator (ADG) 

2. Lower Electrical Panel Controls and Indicators – AC section 

a. CSD Section 

b. Generator Section 

c. AC Bus Section 

3. Upper Electrical Panel Controls and Indicators – DC section 

a. DC LOAD Meters 

b. L EMER and R EMER DC BUS OFF lights 

c. DC TIE BUS 

d. DC TIE and X-TIE switches 

e. DC GROUND SERVICE BUS 

f. Battery Section 

4. APU Control Panel 

a. APU PWR AVAIL Light 

b. APU GEN BUS Switches 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-9 01 OCT 10 

c. APU PWR IN USE Lights 

d. APU GEN FAIL/OFF Lights 

e. APU AC LOAD Meter 

f. APU GEN RESET Switch 

5. AC Volt/Freq and DC Volt/Amp Controls 

a. VOLT/AMP/FREQ Selector 

b. AC VOLT Meter 

c. AC FREQ Meter 

d. DC VOLT/AMP Meter 

6. Elect Sys Reset Panel 

a. ELEC SYS RESET Switches 

b. GEN FAIL RESET Button 

c. FUEL QTY IND PWR Switch 

7. Emergency Power 

a. EMER PWR Switch 

b. EMER PWR IN Use Lights 

c. EMER BUS OFF Summary Light (not depicted) 

d. ELEC Cue Light (not depicted) 

8. ADG Operation 

a. ADG Release Handle 

b. ADG Switch 

9. Ground Service Buses 

a. DC Ground Service Bus Power Switch 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-10 01 OCT 10 

b. Cabin Ground Service Panel (California Panel) 

10. External Power Panel 

a. External Power Receptacle 

b. EXT PWR AVAIL Light 

c. EXT PWR NOT IN USE Light 

d. GND SERVICE EXT PWR Switch 

H. Aircraft Fuel System 

1. Fuel Storage 

2. Fuel Distribution System 

3. Receiver Air Refueling System 

4. Controls and Indicators 

I. Air Refueling Fuel System 

1. Air Refueling Boom 

a. Location 

b. Hoist and Latch 

c. Two Aerodynamically Faired Tubes 

d. Flight Control Surfaces (Hydraulic System 2) 

2. Center Line Drogue 

a. Location 

b. Refueling Probe Equipped Receiver Aircraft 

c. Hose Reel System 

d. Paradrogue 

e. Guillotine 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-11 01 OCT 10 

f. Lights 

3. Wing Pod Drogue 

a. Location 

b. Purpose 

c. Paradrogue 

d. Ram Air Turbine 

e. Fuel Pressure Operated 

4. Air Refueling Pumps 

a. Hydraulic 

b. Fuel Pressure Control Unit (FPCU) 

5. Manifold Scavenging 

a. Receiver 

b. Tanker 

c. Boom 

6. Controls and Indicators 

a. Switch/Lights 

b. Gages 

c. Hydraulics 

d. WARP Panel
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-12 01 OCT 10 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-T301-SG 1-11-1 01 OCT 10 

FTDSystems I 

I. Purpose – This mission is an instructor-guided review of the normal functions 

and operation of the Fire Protection, Lighting, APU, Electrical, and Fuel Systems. 

Students are not responsible for the completion of checklists. Instructor(s) 

will ensure aircraft configuration, panels, and switches are set properly. 

This lesson will not be graded.

II. Duration – 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Flight Training Device 

B. FTD Systems I Instructor Guide 

C. T.O 1C-10(K)A-1 

V. Student Preparation/Review 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description – Applicable Systems 

B. Attend classroom review 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-T301-SG 1-11-2 01 OCT 10 

Objectives 

Training objectives introduced and practiced during this training mission: 

1. Identify the operational characteristics of the Fire Protection System. 

2. Identify the operational characteristics of the Auxiliary Power Unit. 

3. Identify the operational characteristics of the Electrical System. 

4. Identify the operational characteristics of the Interior Lighting System. 

5. Identify the operational characteristics of the Exterior Lighting System. 

6. Identify the operational characteristics of the Fuel System. 

Profile

Instructor may vary profile to meet student needs. 

1. Establish Battery Power 

2. Test Fire Detection 

3. Start APU 

4. Establish APU Electrical Power 

5. Test Cabin Cargo Smoke Detection 

6. Establish Engine Generators Electrical Power 

7. Establish External Electrical Power 

8. EMER PWR Switch — ON 

9. EXT PWR Switch — OFF 

10. SHUTDOWN the APU 

11. Establish Normal Interior/Exterior Lighting 

12. Test P/FE Master Warning/Caution/Annunciator Lights 

13. Establish Fuel Panel Configuration (Normal, Onload, Offload) 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C014-SG 1-12-1 01 OCT 10 

Power Plant

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the power plant 

system. It is presented in two segments. The first segment describes the 

engines and their major components, the subsystems and the flight deck controls 

and indicators. The second segment describes the operation of the system and 

components, and the power plant limitations. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Power Plant CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description 

1. Part 2, Power Plant/APU - Fire Protection 

2. Section III, Limitations 

1. Systems Limitations 

(1) Power Plant 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C014-SG 1-12-2 01 OCT 10 

Power Plant

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. The KC-10 is powered by three interchangeable GE-CF6-50 high-bypassratio turbofan engines. Each engine is flat rated at 52,500 pounds thrust 

at sea level. The basic engine consists of a variable stator, 14-stage high 

pressure ratio compressor, an annular combustor, a two-stage air-cooled 

turbine, gearbox, controls, and accessories. The turbine-driven front fan 

increases mass airflow and decreases jet velocity, allowing quieter 

operation, improved thrust, and specific fuel consumption. This lesson is 

presented in two segments. The first segment describes the engines and 

their major components, the subsystems and the flight deck controls and 

indicators. The second segment describes the operation of the system 

and components, and the power plant limitations. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the characteristics of the Power Plant System components. 

2. Identify the operational characteristics of the Power Plant System. 

II. PRESENTATION

A. Lesson Introduction 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Power Plant System Components 

1. Introduction 

2. Engine Components 

a. Engine Components 

b. Fan Section 

c. Compressor Section 

d. Turbine Section 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C014-SG 1-12-3 01 OCT 10 

e. Accessory Drive Section 

3. Power Plant Subsystems 

a. Power Plant Subsystems 

b. Engine Fuel Control 

c. Oil System 

d. Starting and Ignition 

e. Thrust Reverser 

f. Engine Failure Detection 

4. Controls and Indicators 

a. Controls and Indicators 

b. Throttles 

c. Thrust Reverser 

d. Engine Fuel Levers 

e. Reverser Lights 

f. N1 Gage 

g. EGT Gage 

h. N2 Gage 

i. Fuel Flow Gage 

j. Max Pointer Reset Switch 

k. Engine Fail Lights 

l. Eng Oil Press/Strainer Lights 

m. Eng Ignition/Start Controls 

n. Ignition Transfer Switches 

o. Engine Oil System Gages 

5. Summary 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C014-SG 1-12-4 01 OCT 10 

6. Quiz 

C. Power Plant Operational Characteristics 

1. Introduction 

2. Starting and Ignition 

a. Starting and Ignition 

b. Ignition Selector Switch 

c. Override and Airstart Switch 

d. Engine Start EGT Limits 

e. Engine Start 

f. Ignition Exciter Power Transfer Switch 

3. Reverse Thrust 

4. Engine Shutdown 

5. Summary 

6. Quiz 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C006-SG 1-13-1 01 OCT 10 

Hydraulic System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the components, 

operational characteristics and limitations of the hydraulic system. 

II. Duration - 1.3 hours 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Hydraulic System CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description 

1. Part 5, Hydraulics 

2. Section III, Limitations 

1. Systems Limitations 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C006-SG 1-13-2 01 OCT 10 

 Hydraulic System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson introduces you to the hydraulic system on the KC-10. It 

describes the components and their function and the operational 

characteristics of the system. The first segment describes the hydraulic 

system components, and controls and indicators. The second segment 

covers the operational characteristics and limitations of the hydraulic 

system. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the hydraulic system components. 

2. Identify the operational characteristics of the hydraulic system. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Lesson Introduction 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Hydraulic System Components 

1. Introduction 

2. Reservoir/Plumbing 

a. Reservoir 

b. Supply Tank 

c. Shutoff Valve 

3. EDP’s, Filters, and Accumulators 

a. Engine Driven Pumps 

b. Hyd Filters 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C006-SG 1-13-3 01 OCT 10 

c. Accumulators 

d. Relief Valve 

4. Aux Pumps and Motor Pumps 

a. Aux Pumps 

b. Reversible Motor Pumps 

c. Non-Reversible Motor Pumps 

5. Hydraulic Powered Components 

6. Elevator Shutoff Valve 

7. Controls and Indicators 

a. Hyd Panel Overview 

b. Temperature Gage 

c. Quantity Gage 

d. EDP Switches 

e. TEMP HI/PRESS LO Lights 

f. Pressure Gage 

g. Aux Pump Switches and Lights 

h. RMP Switches and Lights 

i. RUD STBY PWR Switch and Light 

j. AR Press/AR Pump Lights 

k. FE Annunciator Hyd Lights 

l. Flt Cont Switch/Lights 

8. Summary 

9. Quiz 

C. Hydraulic System Operational Characteristics 

1. Introduction 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C006-SG 1-13-4 01 OCT 10 

2. Aux Pump Operation 

a. Aux Pump Operation (FE Panel) 

b. Aux Pump Operation (Ovhd Panel) 

3. EDP Operation 

a. Left Hyd Pump Operation 

b. Right Hyd Pump Operation 

4. RMP Operation 

a. RMP/OFF Position 

b. RMP/ON Position 

c. RMP/ARM Position 

d. RMP/Aircraft Stall 

e. RMP/ADG-HYD 

f. RMP/Low Hyd Quantity 

g. RMP/AR Alt Supply System 

5. Non-RMP Operation 

a. Non-RMP Normal Operation 

b. RUD STBY PWR Switch - OFF 

c. RUD STBY PWR Switch - ARM 

d. 2-1 Non-RMP Operation 

e. 3-2 Non-RMP Operation 

6. Summary 

7. Quiz 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C009-SG 1-14-1 01 OCT 10 

Landing Gear System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the landing gear 

system. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Landing Gear System CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description 

a. Part 7, Landing Gear 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C009-SG 1-14-2 01 OCT 10 

 Landing Gear System 

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. The KC-10 landing gear system is a tricycle gear comprised of four-wheel 

trucks on each main gear, dual wheels on the nose gear, and a 

supplemental dual-wheel center gear. There are two independent braking 

systems, with anti-skid, on each of the eight main wheels and the two 

center wheels. 

This lesson consists of two segments. The first segment describes the 

landing gear system components, including the brakes and their function. 

The second segment discusses the operating characteristics of the 

landing gear and brakes. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the landing gear system components. 

2. Identify the operational characteristics of the landing gear system. 

II. PRESENTATION 

1. Lesson Introduction 

2. Objectives 

A. Landing Gear System Components 

1. Introduction 

2. Landing Gear (General) 

3. Nose Gear 

a. Nose Gear 

b. Doors 

c. Ground Sensing System 

4. Main Gear 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C009-SG 1-14-3 01 OCT 10 

a. Main Gear 

b. Doors 

5. Center Gear 

a. Center Gear 

b. Doors 

6. Nose Wheel Steering System 

a. Nose Wheel Steering System 

b. Rudder Pedals 

c. Hydraulic Systems 

7. Wheel Brake System 

8. Anti-Skid System 

9. Wheels and Tires 

a. Wheels and Tires 

b. Fuse Plugs 

10. Landing Gear Handle 

a. Landing Gear Handle 

b. Release Button 

c. Landing Gear Lights/Horn 

11. Center Gear Isolation Switch 

12. Alternate Gear Extension 

a. Alternate Gear Extension 

b. Raising the Lever 

c. Stowing the Lever 

13. Center Gear Alternate Extension 

14. Nose Gear Up/Down Lock Indicator 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C009-SG 1-14-4 01 OCT 10 

15. Main Landing Gear/Door Indicators 

16. Parking Brake/Light 

17. Anti-Skid Switch/Lights 

18. Wheel Brake Indicators 

a. Brake System Hyd Press Gage 

b. Brake Temp Monitor System 

c. Differential Temperature Light 

19. Summary 

20. Quiz 

B. Operational Characteristics of the Landing Gear System 

1. Introduction 

2. Landing Gear Limitations 

3. Gear Handle 

a. Gear Handle 

b. Retracting the Gear 

4. Landing Gear Visual/Aural Signal 

5. Gear Light Test Button 

6. Center Gear Isolation Switch 

7. Alternate Gear Extension Handle 

8. Center Gear Alternate Extension 

9. Main Gear Visual Indications 

10. Nose Gear Visual Indications 

11. Alternate Gear Extension 

12. Brake System 

13. Anti-Skid System 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C009-SG 1-14-5 01 OCT 10 

a. Anti-Skid System 

b. Anti-Skid Fail Lights 

c. Hydraulic Pressure 

14. Brake Temperature Monitor System 

a. Brake Temperature Monitor System 

b. Differential Temperature Light 

15. Summary 

16. Quiz 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C009-SG 1-14-6 01 OCT 10 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C007-SG 1-15-1 01 OCT 10 

Flight Controls

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the flight control 

system. 

II. Duration - 1.5 hours 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Flight Controls CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description 

1. Part 6, Flight Controls 

(1) Flight Controls Description 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C007-SG 1-15-2 01 OCT 10 

 Flight Controls

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. All KC-10 flight controls are fully powered by the three hydraulic systems. 

Primary flight controls consist of inboard and outboard ailerons, upper and 

lower rudders, and inboard and outboard pairs of elevators. Secondary 

flight controls are inboard and outboard leading edge slats, inboard and 

outboard trailing edge flaps, wing spoilers, and an adjustable horizontal 

stabilizer. 

Basic concept: cockpit-to-cable-to-hydraulic actuator-to-control surface. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the flight control system components. 

2. Identify the operational characteristics of the flight control system. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Lesson Introduction 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. System Components 

1. Introduction 

2. Primary Flight Controls 

a. Primary Flight Controls 

b. Aileron Roll 

c. Elevators - Pitch 

d. Rudder - Yaw 

3. Secondary Flight Controls 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C007-SG 1-15-3 01 OCT 10 

a. Secondary Flight Controls 

b. Spoilers 

c. Flaps 

d. Slats 

e. Horizontal Stabilizer 

4. Primary Controls and Indicators 

a. Primary Controls and Indicators 

b. Control Columns 

c. Aileron Trim Knob 

d. Rudder Pedals 

e. Rudder Trim Knob 

f. Yaw Damp Switches 

g. Rudder STBY Power Sw 

h. Surface Position Indicator 

i. Elevator Feel Selector 

5. Secondary Controls and Indicators 

a. Secondary Controls and Indicators 

b. Spoiler Handle 

c. Flaps 

d. Slats 

e. Flap/Slat Indicator 

(1) Flap/Slat Indicator 

(2) Flap Limit Placard 

(3) Flap Handle Position Indicator 

(4) Flap Position Tapes 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C007-SG 1-15-4 01 OCT 10 

(5) Flap Disagree Flag 

(6) Slat Position Lights 

(7) Indicator Test 

(8) Caution Lights 

f. Flap Limit Selector 

g. Stall Test Selector 

h. Horizontal Stabilizer 

(1) Horizontal Stabilizer 

(2) Control Wheel Trim Switches 

(3) Alternate Trim Switches 

(4) Longitudinal Trim Controls 

(5) Autopilot Control 

(6) Indicator Scale 

6. Summary 

7. Quiz 

C. Operational Characteristics 

1. Introduction 

2. Primary Flight Controls 

a. Ailerons 

b. Elevators 

c. Rudders 

3. Secondary Flight Controls 

a. Spoilers 

b. Flap/Slat Operation 

(1) Flap/Slat Operation 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C007-SG 1-15-5 01 OCT 10 

(2) Position Indicators 

(3) Flap Slat Handle 

(4) Flaps/Slats Retracting 

(5) Flap Takeoff Selector 

(6) Slat Warning System 

c. Horizontal Stabilizer 

(1) Horizontal Stabilizer 

(2) Alternate Trim Switch 

(3) Trim Control Handles 

(4) Autopilot Engaged 

(5) Command Mode 

(6) Control Wheel Steering Mode 

(7) Aural Signal 

d. Warning Systems 

4. Summary 

5. Quiz 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C007-SG 1-15-6 01 OCT 10 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I035-SG 1-16-1 01 OCT 10 

Systems IGR II 

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this IGR is to review the Power Plant, Hydraulic 

System, Flight Controls, and Landing Gear System. The Instructor guides the 

review, which covers the subject taught in the preceding CBT Lessons. The 

review provides you with opportunities to seek clarification or reinforcement of 

this material. 

The Student Outline is designed to assist you during this IGR. It is a brief outline 

of major topics to be discussed and provides space for note taking if required. 

II. Duration - 2.0 hours 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

B. KC-10 Pilot and Flight Engineer Station Oilskins

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Systems IGR II Student Guide and E-Frame Set 

B. Classroom Presentation System 

C. Aircrew System Trainer (AST) 

D. Whiteboard, markers, and erasers 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. You should have completed these CBT lessons prior to the IGR. 

1. Power Plant 

2. Hydraulic System 

3. Landing Gear System 

4. Flight Controls 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I035-SG 1-16-2 01 OCT 10 

Objectives 

1. Identify the operational characteristics of the Power Plant System. 

2. Identify the operational characteristics of the Hydraulic System. 

3. Identify the operational characteristics of the Flight Controls System. 

4. Identify the operational characteristics of the Landing Gear System. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I035-SG 1-16-3 01 OCT 10 

Systems IGR II

Student Outline

A. Power Plant 

1. Engine Sections 

a. Fan Section 

b. Compressor Section 

c. Combustion Section 

d. Turbine Section 

e. Accessory Drive Section 

2. Subsystems 

a. Engine Fuel Control 

b. Oil System 

c. Starting and Ignition 

(1) Pneumatic 

(2) Dual Ignition 

d. Ignition Controls 

(1) Selector Switch 

(2) Start Switch 

(3) Override and Airstart 

e. Thrust Reverser 

(1) Purpose 

(2) Blocker Door System 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I035-SG 1-16-4 01 OCT 10 

(3) Pneumatically Operated 

(4) Ground Use Only 

f. Engine Failure Detection 

(1) Lost Thrust 

(2) N1 exceeds 85% 

(3) 11% Difference 

(4) Ground Operation Only 

3. Controls and Indicators 

a. Throttles 

b. Instruments 

(1) N1 RPM 

(2) EGT 

(3) N2 RPM 

(4) Fuel Flow 

c. Oil Gages 

(1) Pressure 

(2) Temperature 

(3) Quantity 

B. Hydraulic System 

1. System Components 

a. Engine Manifolds 

b. System Manifolds 

c. Engine Driven Pumps 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I035-SG 1-16-5 01 OCT 10 

d. Auxiliary Pumps 

e. Reservoirs 

f. Accumulators 

g. Reversible Motor Pumps 

h. Auxiliary Reservoir 

i. Supply Tank/Hand Pump 

j. Hydraulic Shutoff Valve 

k. Engine driven pumps 

l. Hydraulic Filters 

(1) Engine Manifold - 4 Non-bypassing 

(2) System Manifold - 2 Non-bypassing 

(3) Differential Pressure Indicators 

m. Accumulators 

n. Auxiliary Pumps (2) 

o. Reversible Motor Pumps (1-3 and 2-3) 

p. Non-reversible motor pumps 

2. Systems Powered by the Hydraulic Systems 

a. Flight Controls 

b. Air Refueling Pumps 

c. Brakes 

d. Anti-skid 

e. Nosewheel steering 

f. UARRSI 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I035-SG 1-16-6 01 OCT 10 

g. AR Boom/Drogue 

h. Elevator Hydraulic Shutoff Feature (not depicted) 

3. Controls and Indicators 

a. Gages 

(1) Pressure 

(2) Quantity 

(3) Temperature 

b. Lights 

(1) Press Lo 

(2) Temp Hi 

(3) Rud Stby Pwr Off 

c. Switches 

(1) Pump Switches 

(2) Reversible Motor Pumps 

(3) Rudder Stby Pwr 

C. Flight Control System 

1. Primary Controls 

a. Ailerons 

(1) Inboard-High Speed 

(2) Outboard-Low Speed 

b. Elevators 

(1) Inboard & Outboard Pairs 

(2) Automatic Load Feel System 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I035-SG 1-16-7 01 OCT 10 

c. Rudder 

(1) Upper Rudder (2 segments) 

(2) Lower Rudder (2 segments) 

(3) Upper & Lower Yaw Dampers 

2. Secondary Controls 

a. Spoilers 

(1) 5 each Wing 

(2) Lateral Control Mixer 

(3) Single Hydraulic System 

b. Flaps 

(1) Inboard and Outboard Segments 

(2) Flap Bus System 

(3) Automatic Flap Limiter 

(4) Hydraulic Systems 1 & 2 

c. Slats 

(1) 8 Segments Each Wing (2, Inboard, 6 Outboard) 

(2) Positions 

(3) Hydraulic systems 1 & 3 

d. Horizontal stabilizer 

(1) Hydraulic Systems 1 & 3 

(2) Trim Rates 

D. Landing Gear 

1. Landing Gear System 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I035-SG 1-16-8 01 OCT 10 

a. Nose Gear 

(1) Ground Sensing 

(2) Nosewheel Steering 

b. Main Gear 

(1) Wheels and Tires 

(2) Disk pressure plugs 

c. Centerline Gear 

2. Brake System 

a. Dual Powered 

b. Brake Accumulator Back-Up (4) 

c. Parking Brake 

d. Dual Brake Control Valves (2) 

e. Anti-skid 

(1) Anti-skid Control Valves 

(2) Anti-skid Control Box 

3. Controls and Indicators 

a. Landing Gear 

(1) Gear Handle 

(2) Gear Handle Release Button 

(3) Gear Lights/Aural Warning 

(4) Center Gear Isolation Switch 

(5) Alternate Gear Extension Lever 

(6) Center Gear Alternate Extension 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I035-SG 1-16-9 01 OCT 10 

(7) Viewing windows/tubes 

b. Brakes 

(1) Hydraulics 

(2) Parking Brake Handle 

(3) Anti-skid Test 

(4) Brake Temperature indications 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I035-SG 1-16-10 01 OCT 10 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-T302-SG 1-17-1 01 OCT 10 

FTD Systems II 

I. Purpose – This mission is an instructor-guided review of normal functions and 

operation of the Power Plant, Hydraulic, Landing Gear, and Flight Controls 

Systems. Students are not responsible for completion of checklists. The 

instructor(s) will ensure aircraft configuration, panels, and switches are set 

properly. This lesson will not be graded.

II. Duration – 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Flight Training Device 

B. FTD Systems II Instructor Guide 

C. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

V. Student Preparation/Review 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description – Applicable Systems 

B. Attend classroom review 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-T302-SG 1-17-2 01 OCT 10 

Objectives

Training objectives introduced and practiced during this training mission: 

1. Identify the operational characteristics of the Power Plant System. 

2. Identify the operational characteristics of the Hydraulic System. 

3. Identify the operational characteristics of the Landing Gear System. 

4. Identify the operational characteristics of the Flight Control System. 

Profile

Instructor may vary profile to meet student needs. 

1. Power Plant – Controls and Indicators 

2. Engine Start (3, 1, 2) 

3. Reverse Thrust Operation 

4. Hydraulic System – Controls and Indicators 

5. Operation of Auxiliary Pumps 

6. Operation of Reversible Motor Pumps 

7. Operation of Non-Reversible Motor Pumps 

8. Operation of Engine-Driven Pumps 

9. Flight Controls – Controls and Indicators 

10. Operation of Ailerons, Elevators, and Rudders 

11. Operation of Spoilers, Flaps, Slats, and Horizontal Stabilizer 

12. Landing Gear – Controls and Indicators 

13. Operation of Landing Gear 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C010-SG 1-18-1 01 OCT 10 

Communication Systems

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the KC-10 

Communication Equipment Suite. It describes the HF, VHF, UHF, L-Band 

SATCOM, IFF/ATC Transponder, Interphone, Passenger Address, Audio Panel, 

and Cockpit Voice Recorder Systems. 

II. Duration - 1.3 hours 

III. Reference Materials 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Communication Systems CBT Lesson 

C. Writing material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description 

a. Part 13, Communications 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C010-SG 1-18-2 01 OCT 10 

Communication Systems

Student Outline 

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. The KC-10 has worldwide tanker/airlift capability. With its great range and 

diversity, the KC-10 has several different communication systems 

onboard, allowing the crew to maintain constant contact with all controlling 

agencies--no matter the distance! 

This lesson discusses the communication system components. Segment 

one provides an overview of each component, including purpose, location, 

and general function. Segments two through four provide a detailed 

functional description of the HF, UHF, and VHF Systems. Each lesson 

segment is followed by a segment quiz, and at the completion of all lesson 

segments, you will be given a test to assess your knowledge of the 

communication system. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the Communication System Components. 

 2. Identify the Operational Characteristics of HF Radios. 

 3. Identify the Operational Characteristics of UHF Radios. 

 4. Identify the Operational Characteristics of VHF Radios. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Communication Systems 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

3. Communication System Components 

a. Introduction 

b. UHF Radios 1 and 2 

(1) UHF Radios 1 and 2 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C010-SG 1-18-3 01 OCT 10 

(2) ARC -164(V)/UHF 1 

(3) ARC -171/UHF 2 

c. VHF Radios 1 and 2 

(1) VHF Radios 1 and 2 

(2) Controls 

(3) Antennas 

d. HF Radios 1 and 2 

(1) HF Radios 1 and 2 

(2) Controls 

(3) Antennas 

(4) ACS Function 

(5) SELCAL 

e. Interphone 

(1) Interphone 

(2) Flight Interphone 

(3) Service Interphone 

(4) Controls 

f. Public Address System 

g. Audio Panel 

(1) Audio Panel 

(2) Audio Select Switches 

(a) Audio Select Switches 

(b) PA PTT Pushbutton 

(c) Hot Mic/Radio Switches 

(d) Control Wheel Micro Switch 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C010-SG 1-18-4 01 OCT 10 

(3) Operation/Radios/Nav Aids 

(a) Operational/Radios/Nav Aids 

(b) Flight Interphone 

(c) Service Interphone 

(d) Public Address 

h. IFF/ATC Transponder 

i. L-Band SATCOM 

j. Iridium Phone 

k. Cockpit Voice Recorder 

l. Summary 

m. Quiz 

4. HF Radios 

a. Introduction 

b. Controls and Indicators 

(1) Controls and Indicators 

(2) Buttons 

(3) Display Fields 

c. Operational Characteristics 

d. HF SELCAL Annunciator Panel 

e. Summary 

f. Quiz 

5. UHF Radios 

a. Introduction 

b. UHF 1 Functional Description 

(1) UHF 1 Functional Description 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C010-SG 1-18-5 01 OCT 10 

(2) Function Switch 

(3) Volume Knob 

(4) Manual Mode 

(5) Preset Mode 

c. UHF 1 Operational Description 

d. UHF 2 Functional Description 

(1) UHF 2 Functional Description 

(2) Function Selector Switch 

(3) Frequency Selector 

(4) Squelch Switch 

e. UHF 2 Operational Description 

f. Summary 

g. Quiz 

6. VHF Radios 

a. Introduction 

b. Controls and Indicators 

c. Operational Characteristics 

d. Summary 

e. Quiz 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C010-SG 1-18-6 01 OCT 10 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C012-SG 1-19-1 01 OCT 10 

Pneumatic System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the components 

and operational characteristics of the pneumatic system. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual

IV. Equipment and Materials 

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Pneumatic System CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description 

a. Part 9, Pneumatics 

2. Section III, Limitations 

a. Systems Limitations 

(1) Pneumatics 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C012-SG 1-19-2 01 OCT 10 

Pneumatic System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. The KC-10 pneumatic system consists of components, controls, and 

indicators used to supply pneumatic power for air conditioning 

pressurization, wing anti-icing, galley and lavatory ventilation, engine 

starting, and engine reversing. Pneumatic pressure is supplied from a 

ground external source, the APU, or engines No. 1 and No. 3. 

This lesson consists of two segments. The first segment describes the 

system components, including the controls and indicators. The second 

segment describes the operational characteristics of the pneumatic 

system. Lesson presentation is followed by a lesson test. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the pneumatic systems components. 

2. Identify the operational characteristics of the pneumatic system. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Pneumatic System 

1. Lesson Introduction 

2. Lesson Objectives 

B. System Components 

1. Introduction 

2. System Description 

a. System Description 

b. Pressure Regulator Valve 

c. Over Pressure Valve 

d. Precooler 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C012-SG 1-19-3 01 OCT 10 

e. Manifold Ducting 

f. Manifold Failure Protection 

g. APU Air 

h. Ground Air 

3. Controls and Indicators 

a. Controls and Indicators 

b. Pneumatic Supply Selector 

c. Manifold Fail Light 

d. Temp HI Light 

e. Abnormal Light 

f. Temperature Gage 

g. Pressure Gage 

h. 1-2 &1-3 Isolation Valves 

i. Disagree Lights 

j. APU Isolation Valve 

k. Annunciator Lights 

l. APU Isol Valve Open Light 

m. Use Engine Pneu Supply Light 

n. Isol Valve Select Switches 

o. Manifold Detect Loop Select Switch 

4. Summary 

5. Quiz 

C. Operational Characteristics 

1. Introduction 

2. Controls and Indicators 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C012-SG 1-19-4 01 OCT 10 

3. Pneumatic Supply Selector 

4. LO Position 

5. AUTO Position 

6. HI Position 

7. Pressure Regulating Valve 

8. Warning Lights 

9. Isolation Valves 

10. Summary 

11. Quiz 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Air Conditioning System

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the components 

and operational characteristics of the air conditioning system. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials 

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Air Conditioning System CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description 

a. Part 10, Pressurization and Air Conditioning 

2. Section III , Limitations 

a. Systems Limitations 

CH 4 

FIQ-C026-SG 1-20-1 01 MAR 14 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Air Conditioning System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson introduces you to KC-10 Air Conditioning system. It describes 

system components and function and operational characteristics. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the air conditioning system components. 

2. Identify the operational characteristics of the air conditioning 

system. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Air Conditioning System 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Air Conditioning Components 

1. Introduction 

2. Air Conditioning Packs 

a. Air Conditioning Packs Location 

b. Flow Control Valve/Compressor 

c. Heat Exchanger/Turbine/Water Separator 

d. Pack Anti-Ice Protection 

e. Pack Overheat Protection 

3. Air Distribution 

a. Conditioned Air/Trim Air 

b. Ground Conditioned Air 

CH 4 

FIQ-C026-SG 1-20-2 01 MAR 14 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

c. Lav-Galley Vent/Center Accessory Compartment 

d. Avionic Cooling 

4. Controls and Indicators 

a. Cabin Air Shutoff Handle Location 

b. Shutoff Handle - Passenger Configuration 

c. Shutoff Handle - All Cargo Configuration 

d. Ram Air Valve 

e. Air Conditioning Panel 

f. Flow Gages 

g. Pack Selectors 

h. Pack Indicators 

i. Pack Ind Sel/Pack Off Light 

j. Zone Temp Selectors 

k. Trim Air Valve Position Indicators 

l. Compt-Duct Temp/Lav Galley 

m. Trim Air Switch 

n. Duct-Avionic Compartment Overheat 

o. Avionic Flow Switch 

p. FE Annunciator Panel Air Cond Lights 

q. INS Flow Off Lights 

r. Airflow Indicator 

5. Summary 

6. Quiz 1 

C. Air Conditioning Operational Characteristics 

1. Introduction 

CH 4 

FIQ-C026-SG 1-20-3 01 MAR 14 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

2. Pre-Conditioned Air 

3. Air Conditioning Pneumatics 

4. Automatic Mode 

a. Central Controller 

b. Pack Selector - Auto 

c. Temp Control - Auto 

5. Manual Mode 

a. Pack/Temp Selectors - Manual 

b. Zone Temp Control - Manual 

c. Pack Temp Control – Manual 

6. Summary 

7. Quiz 2 

III. Exam 

CH 4 

FIQ-C026-SG 1-20-4 01 MAR 14 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C008-SG 1-21-1 01 OCT 10 

Pressurization System

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the KC-10 

pressurization system. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Pressurization System CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description 

a. Part 10, Pressurization and Air Conditioning 

(1) Pressurization Description 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C008-SG 1-21-2 01 OCT 10 

 Pressurization System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. Pressurization for the KC-10 is provided by engine bleed air and controlled 

by regulating the outflow of air from the pressurized section. The cockpit, 

cabin and cargo compartment, ARO compartment, and the avionics and 

center accessory compartments are all pressurized. The pressurization 

and pressurization rate of change can be controlled automatically or 

manually. Controls and indicators are on the pilot’s overhead panel and 

flight engineer’s panel. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the pressurization system components. 

2. Identify the operational characteristics of the pressurization system. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Pressurization 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Pressurization System Components 

1. Introduction 

2. Pressurized Compartments 

3. Pressure Controller 

4. Thrust Recovery Valve 

5. Cabin Pressure Relief Valves 

6. Controls and Indicators 

a. Controls and Indicators Overview 

b. Mode Selector, Semi-Auto Light 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C008-SG 1-21-3 01 OCT 10 

c. Alt Set Knob, Alt Scale 

d. Ldg Baro Set Knob 

e. Rate Limit Selector 

f. Man/Auto Handle, Control Wheel 

g. Valve Position Indicator 

h. Cabin Alt Rate Indicator 

i. Cabin Alt Indicator, Baro Set Knob 

j. Differential Pressure Indicator 

k. Warning Lights, Cab Alt Horn 

l. Alt Schedule Placard 

7. Summary 

8. Quiz 

C. Operational Characteristics of the Pressurization System 

1. Introduction 

2. Automatic Mode Overview 

3. Auto Takeoff and Initial Climb 

4. Auto Climb and Cruise 

5. Auto Descent 

6. Auto Depressurization 

7. Limitations 

8. Semi-Automatic Mode 

9. Semi-Automatic Climb 

10. Semi-Automatic Descent 

11. Semi-Auto Depressurization 

12. Manual Mode 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C008-SG 1-21-4 01 OCT 10 

13. Summary 

14. Quiz 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C011-SG 1-22-1 01 OCT 10 

Ice and Rain Protection System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the KC-10 Ice and 

Rain Protection System. 

II. Duration - 0.7 hour 

III. Reference Materials 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Ice and Rain Protection System CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description 

a. Part 12, Anti-Ice and Rain Protection 

2. Section III, Limitations 

a. Engine Anti-Ice 

b. Wing Anti-Ice 

c. Windshield Heat 

d. Windshield Rain Repellent 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C011-SG 1-22-2 01 OCT 10 

 Ice and Rain Protection System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. The KC-10 ice and rain protection system prevents ice formation and 

provides for ice and rain removal. The system employs mechanical 

windshield wipers, chemical water repellent and anti-icing air from the 

pneumatic and engine bleed systems. Pitot and static ports system icing 

protection is provided through electrically heated elements. The ice and 

rain protection system controls and indicators are located in the flight 

compartment. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the ice and rain protection system components. 

2. Identify the operational characteristics of the ice and rain protection 

system. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Ice and Rain Protection System 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. System Components 

1. Introduction 

2. Engine Anti-Ice 

3. Antenna/Wing Anti-Ice 

4. Windshield/Clearview Window 

a. Windshield/Clearview Window 

b. Anti-Ice 

c. Windshield Wipers 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C011-SG 1-22-3 01 OCT 10 

d. Rain Repellent System 

5. Pitot-Static Ice Protection 

6. Controls and Indicators 

a. Controls and Indicators 

b. Windshield/Clearview Window 

c. Engine and Antenna 

d. Pitot/Static Heaters 

e. Pitot Heat Inop Light 

f. Selector Positions 

g. TAT Heater 

h. Pitot Heat Selector 

i. Wing Anti-Ice Switch 

j. Wing Anti-Ice Lights 

7. Summary 

8. Quiz 

C. Operational Characteristics 

1. Introduction 

2. Engine Anti-Ice 

3. Antenna Anti-Ice 

4. Wing Anti-Ice 

5. Windshield Anti-Ice/Defog 

6. Windshield Wipers/Rain Repellent 

7. Summary 

8. Quiz 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C011-SG 1-22-4 01 OCT 10 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I036-SG 1-23-1 01 OCT 10 

Systems IGR III 

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this IGR is to review the Pneumatic System, Air 

Conditioning System, Pressurization System and Ice and Rain Protection 

Systems. 

II. Duration - 2.0 hours

III. Reference Materials 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Systems IGR III Student Guide 

B. Classroom Presentation System 

C. Aircrew System Trainer (AST) 

D. Writing Materials 

V. Student Preparation/Review 

A. You should have completed these CBT lessons. 

1. Pneumatic System 

2. Air Conditioning System 

3. Pressurization System 

4. Ice and Rain Protection System 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I036-SG 1-23-2 01 OCT 10 

Objectives 

1. Identify operational characteristics of Pneumatic System. 

2. Identify operational characteristics of Air Conditioning System. 

3. Identify operational characteristics of Pressurization System. 

4. Identify operational characteristics of Ice and Rain Protection System. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I036-SG 1-23-3 01 OCT 10 

Systems IGR III

Student Outline

A. Pneumatic System

1. Pneumatic System Components 

a. Pneumatic air sources 

(1) Engines (1 & 3) 

(2) APU 

(3) External air source 

b. Bleed Air Valves 

(1) 8th stage low pressure bleed check valve 

(2) 14th stage high pressure bleed control valve 

(3) Pressure regulator valve 

(4) Over pressure valve 

(5) Fan air valve 

(6) APU valves 

(7) Isolation valves (1-2, 1-3) 

c. Air Distribution 

(1) Bleed air pre-cooler 

(2) Pneumatic System 1 – from pre-cooler 

(3) Pneumatic System 3 – from pre-cooler 

(4) Pneumatic System 2 – from 1-2 isolation valve 

d. Manifold Failure Detection System – Thermal & Pressure 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I036-SG 1-23-4 01 OCT 10 

Sensors/switches 

(1) Fuselage Detector Loops 

(2) Center Accessory Compartment 

(3) Left and Right Wing Leading Edge 

(4) Left and Right Wing Differential Pressure Switches 

(5) Manifold Fail Detector (avionics compartment) 

(6) Manifold Fault Identification Panel (CAC) 

2. Pneumatic Controls and Indicators 

a. Engine Pneumatic Supply Selector – Engines 1 & 3 

b. MANIFOLD FAIL Light 

c. TEMP HI Light 

d. PNEU ABNORMAL Light 

e. Pneumatic Temperature Gage 

f. Pneumatic Pressure Gage 

g. APU/ISOL VALVE Switch 

h. 1-2/1-3 ISOL VALVE Switches 

i. ISOL VALVE DISAGREE Lights 

j. APU/ISOL VALVE OPEN Light 

k. USE ENG PNEU SUPPLY light 

B. Air Conditioning System 

1. Air Conditioning Packs 

a. Venturi 

b. Flow Control and Shutoff Valve 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I036-SG 1-23-5 01 OCT 10 

c. Trim Air Regulator Valve 

d. Fan 

e. Compressor 

f. Compressor Bypass Check Valve 

g. Pneumatic Fuse Plug 

h. Pneumatic Thermostat (bi-metallic) 

i. Heat Exchanger 

j. Turbine Inlet Temperature Sensor 

k. Pneumatic Thermostat (bi-metallic) 

l. Pneumatic Fuse Plug 

m. Turbine 

n. Turbine By-pass Valve 

o. Water Separator 

p. Pack Discharge Temperature Sensor 

q. Pack Anti-ice Valve 

r. Check Valve 

s. System Manifold 

t. Conditioned Air Dump Valve 

u. Trim Air Manifold Pressure Switch 

v. Zone Trim Air Valve 

w. Manual Conditioned Air Shutoff Valve 

x. Ground Conditioned Air Connectors 

y. Over-pressure Relief Valves 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I036-SG 1-23-6 01 OCT 10 

2. Air Conditioning Controls and Indicators 

a. FE Air Conditioning Panel 

(1) Pneumatic FLOW Gage 

(2) Pack Function Selector 

(3) PACK OFF light 

(4) TURB INLET TEMP gage 

(5) PACK TEMP VALVE POS Indicator 

(6) PACK DISCH TEMP Gage 

(7) PACK IND SEL 

(8) Temperature selector (3) 

(9) VALVE POS Indicator 

(10) AVIONIC FLOW Switch 

(11) TRIM AIR Switch 

(12) DUCT AVIONIC COMP OVERHEAT Light 

(13) COMPT/DUCT Temp Gage 

(14) LAV/GALLEY VENT switch 

b. FE Annunciator Panel Lights 

(1) AVIONIC FLOW OFF 

(2) AIR COND TRIM AIR PRESS HI 

(3) CTR ACCESS COMPT FLOW OFF 

(4) AIR COND DOORS 

(5) AR AVIONIC FLOW OFF 

c. Cabin Air Shutoff Handle 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I036-SG 1-23-7 01 OCT 10 

(1) Passenger Configuration 

(2) Cargo Configuration 

(3) UP for aircraft dispatch 

d. Ram Air Valve Control (Tee) Handle 

e. Airflow Indicator 

3. System Operation – Operating Modes 

a. Pre-conditioned Air 

b. Automatic Mode 

c. Manual Mode 

C. Pressurization System 

1. System Components 

a. Cabin Pressure Controller 

b. Two Motor-operated Actuators – Active and Reserve 

c. Thrust Recovery Valve 

d. Pressure Relief Valves (3) 

2. Controls and Indicators 

a. Controls 

(1) Mode Switch 

(2) Altitude Select Knob 

(3) Landing BARO Set Knob 

(4) Rate Limit Selector 

(5) Manual CAB ALT Control Wheel 

(6) CAB/PRESS MAN/AUTO Handle 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I036-SG 1-23-8 01 OCT 10 

b. Indicators 

(1) Thrust Recovery (Outflow) Valve Position Indicator 

(2) Cabin Altitude Rate Indicator 

(3) Cabin Altitude/differential Pressure Gage 

(4) CAB PRESS RELIEF OPEN Light 

(5) CABIN ALT Warning Light 

(6) CAB ALT WARN HORN Button 

(7) ALT SCHED Placard 

3. Pressurization System Operation 

a. Automatic Pressurization Schedule 

b. Operating Modes 

(1) Automatic Mode 

(2) Semi-Automatic Mode 

(3) Manual Cabin Pressure Control 

D. Ice and Rain Protection System 

1. Engine, Wing, Antenna 

a. Engine Anti-icing 

b. Wing Anti-icing 

c. Upper Antenna Anti-icing 

2. Windshield 

a. Windshield Anti-icing 

b. Windshield Defogging 

c. Windshield Wipers 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I036-SG 1-23-9 01 OCT 10 

d. Rain Repellant System 

3. Pitot-Static & Angle-of-attack (AOA) 

a. Pitot Tubes – Dual Heaters 

b. Static Ports – Single Element Heater 

c. Angle-of-attack Sensor 

d. Total Air Temperature (TAT) Probe 

4. Controls and Indicators 

a. Forward Overhead Panel 

(1) Windshield Anti-Ice 

(2) Windshield Defog 

(3) Meter Sel & Heat 

(4) Heater Current Meter 

(5) Engine & Antenna Anti-Ice switches 

(6) Rain Repellant 

(7) Windshield Wiper switch (2) 

b. Pilot's Annunciator Panel 

(1) ENG ANTI-ICE DISAGREE lights 

(a) ENG 1 & 3 

(b) ENG 2 

(2) ENG 2 ANTI-ICE COWL PRESS HI 

(3) ENG 2 ANTI-ICE COWL DUCT FAIL 

(4) ENG ANTI-ICE SWITCH ON 

(5) ANTENNA ANTI-ICE DISAGREE 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-I036-SG 1-23-10 01 OCT 10 

(6) WINDSHIELD ANTI-ICE INOP (L & R) 

(7) PITOT HEAT INOP 

c. FE Upper Instrument Panel #2 

(1) Wing Anti-Ice switch 

d. Pitot Heater Select Switches (FE Equipment Panel) 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-T303-SG 1-24-1 01 OCT 10 

FTD Systems III 

I. Purpose – This mission is an instructor-guided review of the normal functions 

and operation of the Pneumatic, Air Conditioning, Pressurization, and Ice and 

Rain Protection Systems. Students are not responsible for completion of 

checklists. The instructor(s) will ensure aircraft configuration, panels, and 

switches are set properly. This lesson will not be graded.

II. Duration – 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Flight Training Device 

B. FTD Systems III Instructor Guide 

C. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

V. Student Preparation/Review 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description – Applicable Systems 

B. Attend classroom review 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-T303-SG 1-24-2 01 OCT 10 

Objectives 

Training objectives introduced and practiced during this training mission:

1. Identify the operational characteristics of the Pneumatic System. 

2. Identify the operational characteristics of the Air Conditioning System. 

3. Identify the operational characteristics of the Pressurization System. 

4. Identify the operational characteristics of the Ice and Rain Protection System. 

Profile

Instructor may vary profile to meet student needs. 

1. Pneumatic System – Controls and Indicators 

2. Pneumatic System – External Air 

3. Pneumatic System – APU 

4. Pneumatic System – Engines 

5. Air Conditioning System – Controls and Indicators 

6. Air Conditioning System Operation 

7. Pressurization System – Controls and Indicators 

8. Pressurization System Operation 

9. Ice and Rain Protection System – Controls and Indicators 

10. Ice and Rain Protection System Operation 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C015-SG 1-25-1 01 OCT 10 

Flight Instrument System 

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the KC-10 flight 

instrument system. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Flight Instrument System CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description 

a. Part 6, Flight Control/Flight Instruments/Auto Flight 

(1) Flight Instruments 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C015-SG 1-25-2 01 OCT 10 

 Flight Instrument System 

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson discusses the KC-10 flight instrument system. It includes 

pitot-static systems, two central air data computer systems, or CADCs, 

basic and standby flight instruments, and related components. These 

systems sense environmental conditions and use the data to influence 

navigation and flight instrumentation. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the flight instrument system components. 

2. Identify the operational characteristics of the flight instrument 

system. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Flight Instrument System 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Flight Instruments Components 

1. Introduction 

2. Pitot-Static System 

a. Pitot-Static System 

b. Pitot System 

c. Static System 

3. Total Air Temperature Probe 

4. Central Air Data Computers (CADC) 

5. Flight Data Recorder 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C015-SG 1-25-3 01 OCT 10 

6. Controls and Indicators 

a. Controls and Indicators 

b. Primary Instruments 

(1) Mach/Airspeed Indicator 

(2) Overspeed Warning System 

(3) Altimeter 

(4) Vertical Speed Indicator 

(5) Attitude Director Indicator 

c. Standby Instruments 

(1) Standby Instruments 

(2) Attitude Indicator 

(3) Altimeter 

(4) Airspeed Indicator 

d. TAS/SAT Indicator 

e. Flight Data Recorder 

f. Static Air Switches 

g. CADC/IFF Switches 

7. Summary 

8. Quiz 

C. Flight Instruments Operational Characteristics 

1. Introduction 

2. Basic Flight Instruments 

a. Basic Flight Instruments 

b. Airspeed Indicator 

c. Overspeed Warning System 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C015-SG 1-25-4 01 OCT 10 

d. Altimeter 

(1) Altimeter 

(2) Barometer Set Knob 

(3) Altitude Bug Knob 

(4) Low Altitude Alert 

(5) Negative Flag 

(6) Loss of Power/Internal Failure 

(7) Altitude Advisory Light 

e. Vertical Speed Indicator 

f. Attitude Director Indicator 

(1) Attitude Director Indicator 

(2) V-Command Bars 

(3) Flight Director Flag 

(4) Flight Director Light 

(5) Fast/Slow Indicator 

(6) Runway/Localizer Indicator 

(7) Glideslope Pointer 

(8) DH Light 

(9) Malfunction Flags 

(10) ADI Test Button 

3. Standby Instruments 

a. Standby Instruments 

b. Attitude Indicator 

c. Altimeter 

d. Airspeed Indicator 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C015-SG 1-25-5 01 OCT 10 

4. STATIC AIR Switch 

5. TAS/SAT Indicator 

6. Flight Data Recorder 

7. Selector Switches 

a. Selector Switches 

b. Flight Director Command Selector 

c. CADC Selector 

d. CADC Switched Light 

8. Summary 

9. Quiz 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C015-SG 1-25-6 01 OCT 10 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C025-SG 1-26-1 01 OCT 10 

Cabin Doors

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the location and 

operation of doors and crew entrances on the KC-10. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-9, Cargo Loading Manual

IV. Equipment and Materials 

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Cabin Doors CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section 1, Systems Description 

a. Part 8, Doors and Ladders 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K) A-9 

1. Section III, Aircraft Configuration (Application) 

a. Cargo Door 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C025-SG 1-26-2 01 OCT 10 

Cabin Doors

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson introduces you to the location and operation of doors and crew 

entrances on the KC-10. These doors provide normal crew and 

passenger entry and exit, and the primary means of escape in an 

emergency. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the characteristics of the Cabin Doors. 

2. Identify the operational characteristics of the Cabin Doors. 

3. Identify the procedures to operate the Cabin Door Emergency 

Controls. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Cabin Doors 

1. Lesson Overview 

B. Cabin Door Characteristics 

1. Cabin Door Locations and Description 

a. Cabin Door Locations 

b. Cabin Door Description 

2. Exterior Controls 

3. Door 1L Manual Drive 

4. Interior Controls and Indicators 

a. Interior Controls and Indicators 

b. Interior Controls Locations 

c. Pneumatic Pressure Reservoir 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C025-SG 1-26-3 01 OCT 10 

d. Mode Verification Indicator 

e. Slide Raft Cylinder Low Pressure Light 

f. Manual Lift Bar 

g. FE Panel Cabin Door Status Lights 

5. Cabin Door Characteristics Quiz 

C. Cabin Door Operations 

1. Cabin Door Operation Introduction 

2. Exterior Control: Location and Handle 

a. Exterior Controls: Location and Handle 

b. Door Control Switch - Opening/Closing the Door 

c. Auxiliary Control Handle 

d. Emergency Override 

3. Interior Controls: Location and Differences 

a. Interior Controls: Location and Differences 

b. Doors 1L, 1R Emergency Controls 

(1) Doors 1L, 1R Emergency Controls 

(2) Slide Arming/Disarming - Doors 1L, 1R 

(3) Emergency Override - Doors 1L, 1R 

(a) Emergency Override - Doors 1L, 1R 

(b) Door Emergency Control Handle 

(c) Reset Lever 

c. Doors 1L, 1R Controls 

(1) Doors 1L, 1R Controls - Slide Inflation Cylinder 

Indications 

(2) Doors 1L, 1R Controls - Slide Armed/Disarmed 

Indications 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C025-SG 1-26-4 01 OCT 10 

d. Doors 2L, 2R Controls/Location 

(1) Doors 2L, 2R Controls/Location 

(2) Slide Arming/Disarming - Doors 2L, 2R, 4R 

(3) Door Emergency Control Handle 

(a) Door Emergency Control Handle – Location 

(b) Door Emergency Control Handle – Operation 

(4) Doors 2L, 2R, 4R 

(a) Doors 2L and 2R 

(b) Door 4R 

e. Opening/Closing the Door - Interior Controls 

4. Cabin Door Operations Quiz 

D. Cabin Doors Emergency Controls 

1. Cabin Door Exterior Emergency Operation 

2. Interior Controls: Doors 1L, 1R Controls 

a. Interior Controls: Doors 1L, 1R Controls 

b. Doors 1L, 1R With Slide/Raft Deployment 

c. Doors 1L, 1R Operation without Slide/Raft Deployment 

d. Doors 2L, 2R, 4R 

e. Doors 2L, 2R Operation with Slide/Raft Deployment 

f. Doors 2L, 2R Operation without Slide/Raft Deployment 

g. Backup System 

(1) Backup System 

(2) Cabin Doors Backup System 

h. Manual Lift Bar Operation with Slide/Raft Deployment 

i. Manual Lift Bar Operation without Slide/Raft Deployment 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C025-SG 1-26-5 01 OCT 10 

3. Resetting Controls for Normal Operation 

a. Resetting Controls for Normal Operation 

b. Doors 1L, 1R RESET Lever 

c. Doors 2L, 2R, 4R RESET Lever 

(1) Doors 2L, 2R, 4R RESET Lever 

(2) Door RESET Lever 

4. Cabin Door Emergency Controls Quiz 

III. EXAM 

 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C025-SG 1-26-6 01 OCT 10 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 

 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C002-SG 1-27-1 01 OCT 10 

Emergency Equipment

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - This lesson introduces you to the emergency equipment essential to 

the safety of the flight crew and personnel during adverse conditions. 

II. Duration - 0.5 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Emergency Equipment CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description 

a. Part 11, Emergency Equipment 

(1) Emergency Exits 

(2) Portable Fire Extinguishers 

(3) Emergency Passenger Oxygen System (EPOS) 

(4) Emergency Radio Beacon Transmitters 

(5) Escape Slide/Raft 

(6) Emergency Locator Transmitter 

(7) Aircrew Eye/Respiratory Protection System 

(8) Escape Slide/Raft 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C002-SG 1-27-2 01 OCT 10 

Emergency Equipment 

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson introduces you to the KC-10 emergency equipment essential 

to the safety of the flight crew and personnel during adverse conditions. It 

also introduces the escape slide/rafts and the seven man raft. The first 

segment describes the emergency equipment on the KC-10 and the 

second segment discusses the slide/rafts and seven man raft. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the emergency equipment components. 

2. Identify the operational characteristics of the Slide/Raft and 

associated equipment. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Emergency Equipment 

1. Lesson Overview 

B. Emergency Equipment Components 

1. Primary/Secondary Emergency Exits 

a. Emergency Exit Locations 

b. Aircraft Door Operation 

c. Cockpit Door 

d. Door 4R 

2. Escape Ropes 

a. Escape Rope Locations 

b. Clearview Window Escape Ropes 

c. Door 4R Escape Rope 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C002-SG 1-27-3 01 OCT 10 

3. Emergency Lights 

a. Emergency Lighting System 

b. Lighting Conditions 

c. Emergency Lights Power 

4. Life Vests 

5. Emergency Equipment Panels 

6. Fire Extinguishers 

a. Fire Extinguishers – Halon 

b. Fire Extinguishers – Graviner 

c. Fire Extinguishers – Lavatory 

7. Emergency Passenger Oxygen System (EPOS) 

8. Aircrew Eye/Respiratory Protection (AERP) System 

9. Emergency Locator Transmitters 

10. Emergency Locator Transmitter Component Locations 

11. Emergency Equipment Components Quiz 

C. Escape Slide/Rafts and Associated Equipment Operational Characteristics 

1. Escape Slide/Rafts 

a. Escape Slide/Rafts 

b. Emergency Egress 

c. Escape Slide/Rafts Deployment 

d. Raft Mode Operation 

e. Survival Equipment 

2. Emergency Radio Beacon Transmitters Location 

3. Emergency Radio Beacon Transmitters Activation 

4. Emergency Radio Beacon Transmitters Operation 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C002-SG 1-27-4 01 OCT 10 

5. Seven-Man Life Raft 

6. Escape Slide/Rafts and Associated Equipment Operational 

Characteristics Quiz 

III. EXAM 

 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C028-SG 1-28-1 01 OCT 10 

Oxygen System

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the components, 

operational characteristics of the oxygen system. 

II. Duration - 0.5 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Oxygen Systems CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description 

a. Part 11, Emergency Equipment 

(1) Oxygen System 

(2) Flight Crew Oxygen System 

(3) Passenger Oxygen System 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C028-SG 1-28-2 01 OCT 10 

 Oxygen System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson discusses the components and operational characteristics of 

the oxygen system. The oxygen system consists of two independent 

emergency systems. One system is used for the flight crew while the 

other system is used for support personnel and passengers. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify components of the Oxygen Systems. 

2. Identify the Operational Characteristics of the Flight Crew Oxygen 

System. 

3. Identify the Operational Characteristics of the Emergency 

Passenger Oxygen System. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Oxygen System 

1. Lesson Overview 

B. Components of Oxygen Systems 

1. High Pressure Oxygen 

2. Oxygen Regulator 

3. Oxygen Quantity 

4. ARO/Additional Crew Oxygen Shutoff 

5. Chemical Oxygen Generating 

6. Auto Mask Release 

7. Manual Mask Release 

8. Portable Oxygen Supply 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C028-SG 1-28-3 01 OCT 10 

a. Portable Oxygen Supply - Location 

b. Portable Oxygen Supply - Operation 

c. Portable Oxygen Supply - Duration 

9. Emergency Passenger Oxygen System 

10. Components of Oxygen System Quiz 

C. Flight Crew Oxygen System Operational Characteristics 

1. Regulator Operation 

2. Regulator Safety Features 

3. Oxygen Quantity Selector Switch 

4. Oxygen Quantity 

5. Support Personnel Oxygen System 

6. ARO/Additional Crew Oxygen Shutoff 

7. Flight Crew Oxygen System Operational Characteristics Quiz 

III. EXAM 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C028-SG 1-28-4 01 OCT 10 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

PIQ/FIQ-V059-SG 1-29-1 01 OCT 10 

Emergency Ground Egress 

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this video is to demonstrate exiting the aircraft during 

emergency conditions. While the program is intended primarily for maintenance 

personnel, the contents are applicable to KC-10 crewmembers. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. None 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Emergency Ground Egress Video 

B. Emergency Ground Egress Student Guide 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. Review Student Outline 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

PIQ/FIQ-V059-SG 1-29-2 01 OCT 10 

Objective 

1. Describe procedures for emergency ground egress from the KC-10. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

PIQ/FIQ-V059-SG 1-29-3 01 OCT 10 

Emergency Ground Egress

Student Outline 

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. Instructor Introduction 

B. Purpose 

The purpose of this lesson is to review ground evacuation procedures. There will 

be a video, followed by discussion. While the KC-10 has an excellent safety 

record, it is not exempt from the risks and hazards associated with aircraft 

operation. The video begins with a KC-10 engulfed in flames and heavy black 

smoke. This tragic accident, which resulted in loss of life, occurred while 

maintenance personnel were working on the aircraft. You can easily imagine how 

difficult it would be to evacuate the aircraft, and escape through a fire of this 

magnitude. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Emergency Ground Egress 

1. Emergency Oxygen Equipment 

a. Crew Masks 

(1) Location 

(2) Use 

b. Portable Oxygen Bottles 

(1) Location 

(2) Use 

c. Emergency Escape Breathing Device 

(1) Location 

(2) Use 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

PIQ/FIQ-V059-SG 1-29-4 01 OCT 10 

d. Smoke Goggles 

(1) Location 

(2) Use 

2. Aircraft Exits 

a. Clearview Windows 

(1) Location 

(2) Operation 

(3) Use of escape ropes 

b. Cabin Doors 

(1) Location 

(2) Operation 

(a) Electrical 

(b) Emergency (pneumatic) 

(c) Manual lift 

(3) Use of escape slide 

(4) Use of escape rope 

3. Emergency Actions 

a. Notification 

b. Exit 

c. Assembly 

d. First aid 

e. Information to emergency personnel 

III. SUMMARY 

The very strong message delivered in the video is that an emergency can occur 

while the aircraft is on the ramp, with tragic consequences. You may be 

accomplishing a routine preflight and very quickly become involved in a 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

PIQ/FIQ-V059-SG 1-29-5 01 OCT 10 

catastrophe. The key to surviving a ground emergency is situational awareness, 

and being prepared to take appropriate action. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

PIQ/FIQ-V059-SG 1-29-6 01 OCT 10 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C832-SG 1-30-1 01 OCT 10 

Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff 

Performance

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the specifications 

used to certify performance for commercial and military aircraft, their differences 

in definitions and terminology, and their impact on KC-10 Takeoff Performance. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Performance Manual 

B. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance Workbook (W831) 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Introduction to Takeoff Performance CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

1. Section 3, Takeoff 

B. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance Workbook (W831) 

1. Sections 1.0 - 4.0 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C832-SG 1-30-2 01 OCT 10 

Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff 

Performance

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the specifications used to 

certify performance for Commercial and Military aircraft, their differences 

in definitions and terminology, and their impact on KC-10 Takeoff 

Performance. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the differences between commercial and military 

specifications used to certify aircraft performance. 

2. Identify the definitions of terminology associated with performance 

calculations. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Introduction to Takeoff Performance 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Specifications and Certifications 

1. Introduction 

2. Overview 

3. Certification Process 

a. Commercial Aircraft 

b. Military Aircraft 

c. KC-10 Extender 

d. Highlights 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C832-SG 1-30-3 01 OCT 10 

e. Commercial Criteria 

(1) 115% rule 

(2) Engine Loss at V1 

(3) Accelerate/Stop Distance 

f. Military Criteria 

(1) Engine Fail/TO Continued 

(2) Engine Fail/TO Aborted 

(3) Balanced Runway Concept 

g. Climb Gradient Requirement 

4. Summary 

5. Quiz 1 

C. Terminology 

1. Introduction 

2. Performance Calculations 

a. Critical Field Length 

b. Lineup Distance 

c. Stressed Overrun 

3. Speed Requirements 

a. Ground Minimum Control Speed 

b. Decision Speed 

c. Minimum Unstick Speed 

d. Angle of Incidence 

e. 1.0g Stall Speed 

f. Air Minimum Control Speed 

g. Minimum Stall Speed 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C832-SG 1-30-4 01 OCT 10 

h. Rotate Speed 

i. Liftoff Speed 

j. Takeoff Safety Speed 

k. Minimum Climbout Speed 

4. Initial Climb Requirements 

a. Climb Gradient 

b. Climb Flight Path 

c. Actual Climb Gradient 

d. Obstacle Clearance Criteria 

e. Zone One 

f. Zone Two 

g. Zone Three 

h. KC-10 Obstacle Clearance Criteria 

5. Special Departure Procedures (SDP) – Part 1 

6. Special Departure Procedures (SDP) – Part 2 

7. Special Departure Procedures (SDP) – Part 3 

8. Special Departure Procedures (SDP) – Part 4 

9. Summary 

10. Quiz 2 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C833-SG 1-31-1 01 OCT 10 

Takeoff Performance Charts

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the criteria used to 

establish the basis for the charted data in the performance manual and to cover 

the engine-out climb profile from lineup to the end of the pressure height for 

acceleration using previously learned terms and definitions. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Performance Manual 

B. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance Workbook (W831) 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Takeoff Performance Charts CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

1. Section 3, Takeoff 

B. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance Workbook (W831) 

1. Section 1.0 

2. Section 2.0 

3. Section 5.0 

4. Section 6.0 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C833-SG 1-31-2 01 OCT 10 

Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff 

Performance

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the criteria used to 

establish the basis for the charted data in the performance manual and to 

cover the engine-out climb profile from lineup to the end of the pressure 

height for acceleration using previously learned terms and definitions. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the criteria used to establish charted KC-10 performance 

data. 

2. Identify the events and parameters associated with the engine-out 

takeoff profile. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Takeoff Performance Charts 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Basis for Performance Charts 

1. Introduction 

2. General Electric CF6-50C2 Engines 

3. N1 RPM 

4. Flat Rated Engine 

5. Break Point Temperature 

6. Standard Day Temperature 

7. Environmental Envelope 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C833-SG 1-31-3 01 OCT 10 

8. Full Takeoff Thrust 

9. Reduced Thrust Takeoff 

10. Assumed Temperature 

11. Turbine Blade Creep 

12. Safety Margins 

13. Summary 

14. Quiz 1 

C. Engine-Out Profile 

1. Introduction 

2. Critical Field Length 

3. Rolling Takeoff 

4. Wind Direction/Velocity 

5. Lineup Distance 

6. Decision Speed 

7. Decision Speed - Abort 

8. Takeoff on Two Engines 

9. Rotate Speed 

10. Rotate Sequence 

11. Warning 

12. Climbout Speed 

13. Acceleration Height 

14. Pressure Height for Acceleration 

15. Obstacle Height 

16. Corrected Obstacle Height 

17. Downhill Trajectory 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C833-SG 1-31-4 01 OCT 10 

18. Delta Correction 

19. Reducing Required Gradient 

20. Summary 

21. Quiz 2 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return 

Data Computation

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to cover the complete KC-10 Takeoff 

and Landing Data Worksheet and TOLD Card. You will cover the Takeoff 

Conditions section of the worksheet, defining the information required to 

calculate the required data. You will use these conditions to complete the 

Takeoff Calculations section of the worksheet and compute the data required for 

emergency return immediately after takeoff. Finally, you will transfer the 

appropriate data to the TOLD Card takeoff and landing sections, and compute 

the remaining data. 

II. Duration - 2.0 hours 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Performance Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials 

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return Data Computation CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

IV. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

1. Section III, Takeoff 

2. Section IV, Approach and Landing 

3. Section X, Mission Planning 

CH 4 

FIQ-C835-SG 1-32-1 01 MAR 14 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return 

Data Computation

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. The purpose of this lesson is to cover the complete KC-10 Takeoff and 

Landing Data Worksheet and TOLD Card. You will cover the Takeoff 

Conditions section of the worksheet, defining the information required to 

calculate the required data. You will use these conditions to complete the 

Takeoff Calculations section of the worksheet and compute the data 

required for emergency return immediately after takeoff. Finally, you will 

transfer the appropriate data to the TOLD Card Takeoff and Landing 

sections, and compute the remaining data. 

B. Objectives 

1. Select the required Takeoff Conditions data to complete the Takeoff 

Landing Data Worksheet. 

2. Select the required Takeoff Computation data to complete the 

Takeoff and Landing Data Worksheet. 

3. Select the required Emergency Return data to complete the Takeoff 

and Landing Data Worksheet. 

4. Select the Takeoff and Landing Data to be transferred to the TOLD 

Card. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Takeoff Performance Computations 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Takeoff Conditions 

1. Introduction 

2. TOLD Card 

CH 4 

FIQ-C835-SG 1-32-2 01 MAR 14 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

3. Aircraft Conditions 

a. Gross Weight 

b. Center of Gravity 

4. Environmental Conditions 

a. Outside Air Temperature 

b. Dew Point 

c. Anti-Ice 

d. Pressure Altitude 

e. Wind Direction 

f. Wind Velocity 

5. Airfield Conditions 

a. Runway Heading 

b. Runway Available 

c. Runway Condition Reading 

d. Runway Surface Condition 

e. Runway Slope 

f. Field Elevation 

g. Obstacle Height 

h. Obstacle Distance 

6. Aircraft Configuration 

a. Air Conditioning 

b. Reverse Thrust 

7. Summary 

8. Quiz 1 

C. Takeoff Computations 

CH 4 

FIQ-C835-SG 1-32-3 01 MAR 14 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

1. Introduction 

2. Environmental Factors 

a. Wind Data 

3. Weight and Distance Factors 

a. Climb Gradient 

b. Correction Factor for Config. 

c. Equivalent Field Length 

d. Runway Available Limiting Weight 

e. Climb Gradient Limiting Weight 

f. Max. Takeoff Gross Weight 

g. Flap Setting 

h. Reduced Power Takeoff 

i. Tire Speed Limiting Weight 

4. Speeds for Takeoff 

a. Ground Min. Control Speed 

b. Critical Engine Failure Speed 

c. Max. Braking Speed 

d. Max. Allowable Weight 

e. Rotate Speed 

f. Min. Rotate Speed 

g. V2/Climbout Speed 

5. Max Allowable Brake Temp 

a. Max Allowable Brake Temp 

b. Brake Zone 

6. Assumed Temperature 

CH 4 

FIQ-C835-SG 1-32-4 01 MAR 14 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

a. Assumed RALW/TEMP 

b. Assumed CGLW/TEMP 

c. Assumed TEMP 

7. Summary 

8. Quiz 2 

D. Emergency Return Data 

1. Introduction 

2. Emergency Return Data 

a. Emergency Return Data 

b. Relative Density 

c. Threshold Speed 

d. Flare Distance 

e. Stopping Distance Ratio 

f. Landing Ground Roll 

g. Landing Distance 

3. Summary 

4. Quiz 3 

E. TOLD Card Completion 

1. Introduction 

2. Takeoff Data/Gross Weight 

a. Takeoff Data/Gross Weight 

b. Flap Setting 

c. N1/Power Setting 

d. Assumed TEMP 

e. V1/Decision Speed 

CH 4 

FIQ-C835-SG 1-32-5 01 MAR 14 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 4 

f. VR/Rotate Speed 

g. V2/Climbout Speed 

h. Flap/Slat Retraction Speeds/Minimum Maneuver Speed 

FIQ-C835-SG 1-32-6 01 MAR 14 

i. Stabilizer Trim Setting 

j. Acceleration Height 

3. Emergency Return Data 

a. Emergency Return Data 

b. Emergency Return Speeds 

4. TOLD Card Summary 

5. Summary 

6. Quiz 4 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E844-SG 1-33-1 01 JUL 13 

Performance Workshop I 

TRT TOLD Card

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this workshop is to provide an opportunity for you to 

practice completing a Takeoff Rated Thrust TOLD card. Be sure you have 

completed the prerequisite workbooks and CBT lessons prior to the workshop. 

Your instructor will present the workshop exercises and provide appropriate 

guidance if you have any questions. Once again, this is intended to be a 

workshop and you are encouraged to ask questions. 

Part I describes the topics that will be covered by the workshop exercises. 

Part II consists of the workshop exercises. 

II. Duration - 2.0 hours 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Flight Manual Performance Data 

IV. Equipment and Materials 

A. Classroom 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

C. Performance Workshop I - TRT Told Card Student Guide 

D. AF IMT 4089, KC-10 TOLD Card Worksheet 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance CBT Lesson 

B. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance Workbook (W831) 

C. Takeoff Performance Charts CBT Lesson 

D. Takeoff and Landing Data Workbook (W834) 

E. KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return Data Computation CBT Lesson 

F. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

1. Section I, Introduction 

2. Section II, Engine Data 

3. Section III, Takeoff 

4. Section X, Mission Planning 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E844-SG 1-33-2 01 JUL 13 

Objective

1. Complete a KC-10 Takeoff and Landing Data (TOLD) Card. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E844-SG 1-33-3 01 JUL 13 

Part I

TRT Time Limits

Takeoff Rated Thrust is the maximum thrust available. Used only for takeoff, it is time 

limited to five minutes of continuous use with all engines operating. In the event of an 

engine failure, the TRT limit can be extended to ten minutes of continuous use. 

Requirements for a TRT Takeoff 

A Takeoff Rated Thrust takeoff will be planned and a TOLD Card Worksheet completed 

for the following conditions: 

• RCR less than 10 

• RSC reported 

• Anti-skid braking system or one main gear wheel brake inoperative 

• One center gear wheel brake inoperative and takeoff gross weight is greater 

than 460,000 pounds 

• Headwinds used for mission accomplishment 

• Suspected windshear reported 

• Commercial Type II Deicing/Anti-icing fluid has been applied 

Completing TOLD Card Worksheet and TOLD Card

It is the flight engineer’s responsibility to complete the AF IMT 4089 TOLD Card 

Worksheet and TOLD card based on environmental and aircraft conditions. The 

performance data will be checked by the pilot or another flight engineer. The TOLD 

Card Worksheet and the Obstacle Clearance Worksheet aid in the computation of the 

Takeoff and Landing Data. The Obstacle Clearance Worksheet will be covered in a 

later lesson. Once all computations are computed, the appropriate speeds and settings 

are transferred to the TOLD Card portion. 

Begin by entering all applicable conditions in the Takeoff Conditions blocks of the 

worksheet. Whether performing static or rolling takeoff, remember the alignment 

distance correction of 300 feet from runway length is the same. When either a wind 

direction greater than 45° from runway heading or a crosswind component greater than 

23 knots exists, accomplish a rolling takeoff. 

Record all computations on the worksheet. It is not necessary to enter a number in 

every block. It is permissible to enter a check mark (√) if: a condition does not exist, the 

condition was checked but found not to be a factor, or the results of the computation are 

outside the parameters of the chart. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E844-SG 1-33-4 01 JUL 13 

When computing a TRT Takeoff, place a check mark (√) in the Assumed RALW/TEMP, 

Assumed CGLW/TEMP, and Assumed Temp blocks on the worksheet. 

The Max Allowable Brake Temperature is based on computed V1 and is the maximum 

allowable brake temperature for takeoff. Use the brake cooling time charts (sheet 1 and 

2) in the performance manual to compute this value. 

The brake temperature zone block is used as a reference to determine how hot the 

brakes may be after an abort. Use the Brake Energy chart in the performance manual 

to determine the correct temperature zone. 

Complete a TOLD Card for all takeoffs to include the emergency return speeds and 

landing distance based on flaps/slats at 35°/EXT and takeoff gross weight. Record the 

emergency return data in the landing portion of the TOLD Card. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E844-SG 1-33-5 01 JUL 13 

Part II

Workshop Exercises

1. GIVEN: 

Gross Weight 560,000 

Takeoff CG 24.0% 

OAT 23° C 

Dew Point TAnti-ice OFF 

Pressure Altitude +500’ 

Wind Direction CALM 

Wind Velocity 0 

Runway heading 170°

Runway Length 11,500 

RCR 23 

RSC 0 

Slope 0.6 UP 

Climb Gradient 2.5% 

Field Elevation 423’ 

Obstacle Height N/A 

Obstacle Distance N/A 

Air Conditioning ON 

Reverse Thrust YES 

Compute Takeoff Performance using Takeoff Rated Thrust. Assume a Special 

Departure Procedure (SDP) is available requiring a 2.50 Min Climb rate with no obstacle 

and a 11,500 Max LOP. The MTOGW exceeds given gross weight of 560,000 lbs. 

Note: Reduced Thrust Takeoff data is covered in a later workshop. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E844-SG 1-33-6 01 JUL 13 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E844-SG 1-33-7 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E844-SG 1-33-8 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Performance Workshop II 

Reduced Thrust TOLD Card 

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this workshop is to provide an opportunity for you to 

practice completing a Reduced Thrust TOLD card. Be sure you have completed 

the prerequisite workbooks and CBT lessons prior to the workshop. Your 

instructor will present the workshop exercises and provide appropriate guidance 

if you have any questions. 

Part I describes the topics that will be covered by the workshop exercises. 

Part II consists of the workshop exercises to be completed. 

II. Duration - 2.0 hours 

III. Reference Materials 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Flight Manual Performance Data

IV. Equipment and Materials 

A. Classroom 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

C. Performance Workshop II - Reduced Thrust TOLD Card Student Guide 

D. AF IMT 4089, KC-10 TOLD Card Worksheet 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance CBT Lesson 

B. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance Workbook (W832) 

C. Takeoff Performance Charts CBT Lesson 

D. Takeoff and Landing Data Workbook (W834) 

E. KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return Data Computation CBT Lesson 

F. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

1. Section I, Introduction 

2. Section II, Engine Data 

3. Section III, Takeoff 

4. Section IX, Approach and Landing 

5. Section X, Mission Planning 

CH 3 

FIQ-E845-SG 1-34-1 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Objective

1. Complete KC-10 Reduced Thrust Takeoff and Landing Data (TOLD) Card. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E845-SG 1-34-2 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Part I

Reduced Thrust Takeoffs

A reduced thrust takeoff is computed and used to extend the life of the engine and 

reduce maintenance cost. 

Thrust planned for takeoff is based on the amount of thrust available versus the amount 

of thrust needed, with both values determined by aircraft and environmental conditions. 

In essence, if the amount of thrust needed for a given set of aircraft and environmental 

conditions is less than the amount of thrust available, a reduced thrust setting is 

computed based on assumed temperature. 

With other conditions constant, assumed temperature is the temperature at which the 

aircraft gross weight is calculated as the maximum allowable. In other words, the lower 

the aircraft gross weight, the higher the assumed temperature; the higher the assumed 

temperature the less thrust required for takeoff. Conversely, as weight increases, 

assumed temperature decreases, thus requiring more thrust for takeoff. This trend 

continues until at some point the assumed temperature is equal to ambient temperature. 

At this point, Reduced Thrust equals Rated Thrust, or TRT. 

It is important to understand the relationship between thrust, temperature, and pressure 

altitude as well as certain limitations when determining the thrust to use for takeoff data 

computations. Since the engine is flat-rated, it will produce a constant amount of thrust 

for a given pressure altitude-based temperature within the environmental envelope. 

However, beyond a certain point (break point), thrust decreases as temperature 

increases. Break point temperatures for specific pressure altitudes from Sea Level to 

14,000 feet are shown in T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Section III/Takeoff. Notice at 5000 feet 

the break point temperature becomes constant and remains constant up to the certified 

maximum altitude of 14,000 feet. These altitudes represent part of the certified 

environmental envelope. 

The temperature limits associated with the environmental envelope are -54° C to 

50° C, but not to exceed standard day temperature plus 40° C. In some conditions, the 

"+40° C above standard day temperature" value determines the maximum temperature 

limit of the environmental envelope for the aircraft. Additionally, for assumed 

temperature computations, the assumed temperature must not exceed the maximum 

environmental envelope temperature by more than 10° C. For example, you are 

planning a departure from Colorado Springs with an OAT of 43° C and a pressure 

altitude of +5180’. A check of the standard atmosphere table reveals that the standard 

day temperature for that pressure altitude is 5° C. Therefore, the environmental 

envelope maximum temperature limit is 45° C. Applying the added 10° C limitation for 

assumed temperature computations, the maximum assumed temperature that can be 

used for reduced thrust calculation is 55° C. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E845-SG 1-34-3 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

When performing reduced thrust TOLD calculations, apply the assumed temperature 

value to all calculations except pressure height for acceleration. Determine pressure 

height for acceleration using the actual OAT or ambient temperature. Also, both the 

Brake-Cooling Time and Brake Energy charts always use actual outside air 

temperature. 

VR < VR MIN 

There may be occasions, especially when operating at light gross weights, that the 

computed rotate speed (VR) may be less than minimum rotate speed (VR MIN). 

Remember, minimum rotate speed is the wet/icy ground minimum control speed. This 

is the minimum airspeed at which the aircraft, after rotate from a three point attitude, 

can lose a wing engine and maintain directional control, main gear still on the ground, 

and not exceed the lateral deviation of 25 feet from runway centerline. 

When VR is less then VR MIN, VR must be increased or "bumped" to equal VR MIN. 

Likewise, if VR is increased, then V2 must be increased equally. For example: VR and 

V2 are computed to be 115 and 129 KIAS respectively, while VR MIN is computed to be 

133 KIAS, VR must be increased (bumped) 18 knots to equal VR MIN. Now, VR equals 

133, likewise V2 is bumped 18 knots and now equals 147 KIAS. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E845-SG 1-34-4 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Part II

Workshop Exercises

1. GIVEN: 

Gross Weight 495,000 

Takeoff CG 26.0% 

OAT 17° C 

Dew Point T

Anti-ice OFF 

Pressure Altitude +210’ 

Wind Direction CALM 

Wind Velocity 0 

Runway heading 350°

Runway Length 10,000 

RCR 23 

RSC 0 

Slope 1.2 DN 

Field Elevation 194’ 

Climb Gradient 2.5% 

Obstacle Height N/A 

Obstacle Distance N/A 

Air Conditioning ON 

Reverse Thrust YES 

Compute Takeoff Performance. For the purposes of this training event assume a 

Special Departure Procedure (SDP) is available requiring a 2.50 Min Climb rate with no 

obstacle depicted and a 10,000 Max LOP. The MTOGW exceeds given gross weight of 

495,000 lbs. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E845-SG 1-34-5 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

2. GIVEN:

Gross Weight 290,000 

Takeoff CG 26.0% 

OAT 20° C 

Dew Point T

Anti-ice OFF 

Pressure Altitude +33’ 

Wind Direction 150°

Wind Velocity 10 

Runway heading 180°

Runway Length 10,500 

RCR 23 

RSC 0 

Slope 0 

Field Elevation 45’ 

Climb Gradient 2.5% 

Obstacle Height N/A 

Obstacle Distance N/A 

Air Conditioning ON 

Reverse Thrust YES 

Compute Takeoff Performance. For the purposes of this training event assume a 

Special Departure Procedure (SDP) is available requiring a 2.50 Min Climb rate with no 

obstacle depicted and a 10,500 Max LOP. The MTOGW exceeds given gross weight of 

290,000 lbs. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E845-SG 1-34-6 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-E845-SG 1-34-7 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-E845-SG 1-34-8 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-E845-SG 1-34-9 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-E845-SG 1-34-10 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

KC-10 Aircraft Orientation 

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - This lesson provides an instructor-guided orientation to a KC-10 

aircraft. It is scheduled to follow immediately after the systems academic lessons 

and prior to normal procedures instruction. The guided tour will familiarize you 

with the general features of the aircraft, emphasize specific components of 

concern to each crew position, and will demonstrate the Flight Engineer’s 

Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection. Additionally, you will perform procedures 

related to the cockpit windows, seats, and cabin doors. 

II. Duration - 4.0 hours 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. KC-10 Aircraft 

B. KC-10 Aircraft Orientation Student Guide 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. You should be prepared to describe and demonstrate operation of 

selected aircraft equipment. Review the following material, as required 

prior to the tour. 

1. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

a. Section I, System Description (as required) 

b. Section IV, Normal Procedures 

(1) FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 

CH 3 

FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-1 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Objectives

Demonstrate Proficiency - During this training mission, you are expected to 

practice and demonstrate proficiency on the following procedures:

1. Operate the clearview windows. 

2. Operate the crew seats. 

3. Operate the cabin doors. 

Profile

1. Flight Engineer’s Exterior Inspection 

2. Interior Familiarization 

 a. Cockpit 

 b. Cabin/Cargo Compartment 

 c. ARO Compartment 

3. Wheel Well components (Time Permitting) 

CH 3 

FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-2 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

KC-10 Aircraft Orientation

AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR

FE Exterior Inspection Instructor points out and discusses: 

Initial safety inspection: 

• Wheel Chocks 

• Landing Gear Doors 

• Flight Control Surfaces 

• APU Inlet/Exhaust Areas 

• Boom and Drogue (WARP if equipped) 

• Pitot & Inlet Covers 

1. NOSE SECTION 

• Pack Inlet and Exit Doors 

• L Angle of Attack Sensor 

• Pitot Tubes 

• Windshield Wipers 

• Skin and Radome 

• R Angle of Attack Sensor 

• TAT Tube 

2. NOSE GEAR AND WHEEL WELL 

• Tires 

• Linkage (engaged) 

• Gear Safety Pin 

• Steering Bypass Pin 

• Landing/Taxi Lights 

• General Condition of Wheel Well and 

Bulkhead Door Closed 

• Leaks 

CH 3 

FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-3 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-4 01 JUL 13 

AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR

FE Exterior Inspection 

(continued)

3. RIGHT FORWARD FUSELAGE 

 • Fwd Passenger Door 

 • Landing Light 

 • Static Ports 

 • Mid Passenger Door 

 • Cabin Pressure Relief Valves (door flush) 

 • Skin (all panels closed and fastened) 

 • Wing and Turnoff Lights 

4. RIGHT WING AND FUSELAGE 

 • Inboard Slat 

 • Fuel Level Sticks and Panels 

 • Engine 3 (panels closed and fastened) 

 • Ground Wires (Removed) 

 • Outboard Slat 

 • Fuel Vent 

 • Wing Air Refueling Pod (if installed) 

 a. Panels closed and fastened. 

 b. RAT cover removed. 

 c. Strake on outboard side of POD. 

 d. Hose and basket stowed. 

 e. Light assembly retaining clip installed. 

 f. Retract crank removed. 

 g. Check for fuel leaks/POD damage. 

 • Wing Tip and Lights 

 • Outboard Aileron and Trailing Edge 

 • Fuel Dump 

 • Outboard Flap 

 • Inboard Aileron 

 • Inboard Flap 

5. RIGHT LANDING GEAR 

• Tires 

• Strut 

• Gear and Wheel Well Area 

• Ground Lock Pin 

• Leaks 

• Brakes
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-5 01 JUL 13 

AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR

FE Exterior Inspection 

(continued)

6. CENTER GEAR 

 • Tires 

 • Strut 

 • Strut Press Gage Normal 

 • Linkage (engage) 

 • Gear Safety Pin 

 • General Condition of Wheel Well 

 • Brakes 

7. CAC SHROUD, FWD TANK, and AFT TANK 

LEAK SENSE DRAINS 

• Coordination with ground crew/maintenance 

8. RIGHT AFT FUSELAGE 

 • Right Aft Exit Door 

 • Fuselage Skin (all panels closed/fastened) 

 • APU Compartment Door 

 • APU Inlet Doors (closed and clear if not 

operating) 

 • APU Exhaust Area Clear 

 • Boom and ARO Station Windows 

9. EMPENNAGE AND CONTROL SURFACES 

 • All Fixed and Movable Control Surfaces 

(panels closed and fastened) 

 • Elevator Surfaces (both inboard fasteners 

secured) 

 • Tail Cone 

 • Engine 2 (panels closed and fastened) 

 • Fan Exhaust Thrust Reversers 

 • Rudder Surfaces 

 • Boom and Drogue Area 

 • Leaks 

10. LEFT AFT FUSELAGE 

 • Inspection Same as Right Aft Fuselage 

(except Exit Door) 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-6 01 JUL 13 

AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR

FE Exterior Inspection 

(continued)

11. LEFT LANDING GEAR 

 • Inspection Same as Right Landing Gear 

• APU Ground Control Panel 

12. LEFT WING AND ENGINE 

• Inspection Same as Right Wing and Engine, 

to include WARP POD if installed 

13. LEFT FORWARD FUSELAGE 

• Inspection Same as Right Forward Fuselage

• Outflow Valves (full open) 

• Ground Pneumatic Connectors 

• Oxygen Blowout Disc (normal) 

• Water/Oxygen Service Panel Closed 

• Avionic Venturi Discharge Clear 

• Cargo Door and Vent Valve (flush and 

closed) 

Avionics Compartment 

(access through Nosewheel 

compartment)

1. Access Hatch and Light switch 

2. Ram Air Valve Tee Handle 

3. General Equipment location 

4. Secure Radio (KY-58) 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

COCKPIT

Pilot and Copilot's Position Overhead Panel, Instrument Panel, Pedestal and 

Consoles: 

1. Emphasize the Pilot positions are 

approximately 15 feet off the ground and 25 

feet forward of the nose gear. 

Pilot's Seat: 

1. Demonstrate the power seat controls for 

positioning the seat vertically, horizontally, and 

fully aft and outboard (exit). 

Demonstrate same using the manual 

vertical/horizontal control handles. 

2. Demonstrate seat alignment markings for 

proper individual vertical and horizontal seat 

position sighting. 

3. Student occupies seat and correctly operates 

the controls.

Clearview Windows and Visors 1. Demonstrate operation of windows and show 

correct position for visor when opening 

window. 

2. Show location of Emergency Escape Ropes. 

3. Student demonstrates correct operation of the 

windows including opening, closing, and 

latching. 

CH 3 

FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-7 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-8 01 JUL 13 

COCKPIT

Flight Engineer’s Station Audio Panel 

1. Configure and demonstrate operation of the 

audio panel for flight and service interphone 

and radio transmission using hot mike and foot 

switch. 

2. Show location of maintenance jack switch. 

3. Explain if power is not on the aircraft 

emergency power can be used for radio 

operation. Show location of Emergency Power 

Switch. 

4. Point out overhead speakers and volume 

control 

Flight Engineer's Seat 

1. Demonstrate seat controls for positioning the 

seat vertically, horizontally, and facing 

outboard or forward. 

2. Student occupies the seat and correctly 

operates the controls to position the seat 

vertically, horizontally, and facing outboard and 

forward. 

Emergency Equipment 

1. Quick Don Oxygen Mask 

 • Location 

 • Operation 

 • Re-Stowing 

2. Smoke Goggles 

3. ARO/Additional Crewmember O2 Shutoff 

Upper Panel 

1. Potable Water gage

Cockpit Lights 1. Show location and operate FE’s interior flood 

and work-table lights, the cockpit dome light, 

and map light. 

2. Explain operation of lights when using battery 

power vs. AC power.

Observer’s Seat 1. Demonstrate use of the fold-down observer 

seat, pointing out location of life vest.

Cockpit Door 1. Demonstrate operation of smoke screen and 

blowout panel. Show removal and installation.
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CABIN/CARGO COMPARTMENT

Lavatory 1. Show location of lavatory water shutoff valve, 

oxygen bottle, and drop-out mask panel. 

2. Demonstrate door locking / unlocking panel.

Galley 1. Show components and operation of 

refrigerator/ freezer, ovens, Hot Cup, coffee 

maker, and Hot Jug. 

2. Show location of compartment for first aid, fire 

extinguisher, food trays, and APU & External 

Power switches.

Cargo Compartment Lighting 

Console

1. Overview of which lights are controlled.

Cabin Doors 

(Instructor Demonstration)

1. Demonstrate free-fall and normal operation of 

FWD cabin doors using exterior controls. 

2. Operate door using interior controls 

3. Explain slide arming procedures and point out 

indicators. 

4. Explain pneumatic operation and show location 

of pressure gage. 

5. Explain slide/raft low pressure indicator light 

and demonstrate system test. 

6. Demonstrate door 2L/R and 4R operation and 

point out differences from 1L/R in operation of 

controls. Include location of escape rope at door 

4R.

Cabin Doors 

(Student Performance)

1. Student demonstrates the correct normal 

operation of door 1L/R using exterior controls, 

and explains emergency operation. 

2. Student demonstrates the correct normal 

operation of door 2L/R using interior controls, 

and explains emergency operation.

CH 3 

FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-9 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CABIN/CARGO COMPARTMENT

AR Receptacle Shutoff Valve 1. Show location and explain that it is manually 

operated and used to provide pressure to the 

UARRSI. 

2. Explain purpose is to prevent Skydrol leaks in 

cockpit during normal cruise and whenever not 

receiving fuel.

Cargo Door/Hydraulic Control 

Panel

1. Show location and explain operation.

Emergency Equipment Panels 1. Show location forward, aft, and in ARO Station 

as field trip progresses. 

2. Point out items provided on each panel.

Crew Entry/Egress Ladder 1. Show location and point out different 

components.

Nose Gear Inspection Tubes 1. Show location at station 565. 

2. Demonstrate use.

Passenger Oxygen Generators 

and Drop-Out Masks

1. Show location. 

2. Explain Auto and Manual operation.

Emergency Passenger Oxygen 

System 

1. Show location. 

2. Explain operation. 

Aircrew Bunks 1. Show locations. 

2. Point out location of portable oxygen bottles.

Forward (Lower Area) 

Compartment 

1. Show location.

Cargo Barrier Net Show three locations where it can be installed.

Environmental Curtain 1. Point out both locations 

a. Side panels remain installed at both 

locations. 

b. Center panel is relocated and can be rolled 

up for cargo loading or offloading 

operations.

Z - Lavatory 1. Show location and plumbing connections.

Cargo Door 1. Show location and explain operation 

a. Vent Door operation 

b. Over centered mechanisms 

c. Lockpins

CH 3 

FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-10 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-11 01 JUL 13 

CABIN/CARGO COMPARTMENT

Cargo System Control Pendant 

Panel

1. Point out location.

Powered Roller System 1. Explain eight rollers: 

a. They raise up to move the pallet and then 

retract below the Omnidirectional rollers 

when de-energized. 

b. They are used to load and offload laterally 

and assist in rotating oversize cargo, such 

as “coupled pallets”. 

c. The in/out switches control direction of 

rotation of the three rows of rollers. 

d. Right channel rollers can be cut out (switch 

on control panel) so powered rollers can 

still be used for left side if pallets are on 

right side.

Center Accessory 

Compartment

1. Show location, Station 1120. 

2. Show location of: 

a. Batteries 

b. Battery charger 

c. 1-2, 1-3 Isolation Valves 

d. AR Master Valve 

e. APU Start Circuit Breakers 

f. Anti-Skid Control Box 

g. Pneumatic Controllers 

h. Pneumatic Manifold Fault Indicator

Cryogenic Vent 1. Show location, Station 1149. 

2. Explain purpose.

AR Receiver Valve Manual 

Override Handle

1. Show location, Station 1145. 

2. Explain used to manually open AR master fuel 

valve.

Main Gear Door Indicators/ 

Viewing Ports

1. Show location at Station 1427. 

2. Point out light switch.

Main Gear Indicator 1. Show location on top of wing. 

a. Up - Gear is down. 

b. Down - gear is up.

AR Isolation Valve 1. Show location, Station 1330. 

2. Show override handle.
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-12 01 JUL 13 

CABIN/CARGO COMPARTMENT

Aft Cargo Compartment 1. Show location of ELTs. 

2. Show location of Cockpit Voice Recorder & 

Digital Flight Data Recorder.

Portable Ladder 

(Stair Extender)

1. Locate and point out components. 

2. Point out use is for doors 2L/R. 

ARO COMPARTMENT

Incandescent and Aft Cargo 

Lights

1. Point out switches: top of ladder, just under 

floor level. 

2. Show functions. 

3. Point out Incandescent switch also on left side 

of panel at center BO ARO position.

Boom/Drogue Valve and Dual 

Bypass Valves

1. Show location inside small door by ladder on 

sidewall and through floor panel at door 4R. 

2. Point out both manual handles for bypass 

valves and associated cannon plug disconnect.

LEFT AND RIGHT WHEEL WELLS

(If time is available, open left and right Main Wheel Well doors and show components)

Right Main Wheel Well 1. Auxiliary Pumps 

2. Landing Gear Sequencing Valve 

3. Center Gear Sequencing and Manual Control 

Valves 

4. #3 Hydraulic Reservoir and Accumulator 

5. Anti-skid Control Valves 

6. Bogie Trim Cylinder

Center Gear Wheel Well 1. 1-3/2-3 Reversible Motor Pumps 

2. Auxiliary Reservoir

Left Main Wheel Well 1. Hydraulic Reservoir Fill Hand Pump 

2. #1 Hydraulic Reservoir & Accumulator 

3. Alternate Ground Refueling Station 

4. Anti-skid Control Valves 

5. Bogie Trim Cylinder

LEAVING AIRCRAFT

Leaving Aircraft 1. Ensure all equipment is restored to same 

position you found it and aircraft is in good 

condition.
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Cargo/Passenger Operations

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this briefing is to help you better understand the 

capabilities and limitations of the aircraft and crew relating to cargo load 

planning, cargo loading and offloading, and the transport of hazardous cargo. A 

Boom Operator Instructor presents it. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-5, Basic Weight Checklist and Loading Data 

C. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-9, Cargo Loading Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Cargo/Passenger Operations Student Guide 

B. Classroom Presentation System 

C. Whiteboard, markers and erasers 

D. Cargo Load Trainer 

V. Student Preparation and Review 

A. None 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G020-SG 1-36-1 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Cargo/Passenger Operations

Student Lecture Text

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. Instructor Introduction 

B. Purpose Statement 

This briefing is to help you better understand the capabilities and limitations of 

your aircraft and crew relating to cargo load planning, cargo loading and 

unloading, and the transport of hazardous cargo. 

1. Attention 

Good crew coordination and resource management are essential to 

accomplishing the varied missions of the KC-10. In-depth knowledge and 

understanding of the responsibilities of your specific crew position, as well 

as an understanding of the responsibilities of the other members of your 

crew is required. Each crewmember must rely on the others to 

accomplish their duties effectively and safely. 

2. Motivation 

This briefing provides an overview of aircraft configurations and crew 

capabilities for carrying cargo and passengers. The Boom Operator is 

directly responsible for carrying out these duties; however, it is the Aircraft 

Commander’s ultimate responsibility to understand what is being done in 

the "Back" of the aircraft. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Cargo/Passenger Carrying Capabilities 

This briefing introduces the capabilities of the KC-10 to handle cargo and 

passengers in support of its worldwide missions. As Boom Operators, we are 

responsible for planning the cargo load configuration; monitor the loading and 

offloading of the aircraft and supervising the passengers. In addition, we must 

know the procedures for handling hazardous cargo. You must be familiar with 

what we are doing in the "Back of the aircraft" and with the coordination required 

to successfully accomplish the mission. 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G020-SG 1-36-2 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

1. KC-10 Basic Configurations 

The KC-10 was developed from the DC-10 series 30 airliner. It is 

designed to ferry receiver aircraft while transporting their support 

personnel and equipment. The KC-10 can also be refueled in flight, 

further increasing its capabilities. For mission flexibility, the KC-10 can 

assume a variety of configurations. These are commonly divided into two 

general categories: all cargo or mixed cargo-personnel. 

a. All Cargo 

 The all cargo configuration can be arranged for 25 or 27 pallets. 

b. Cargo/Passenger/Patient Support 

This cargo-passenger configuration consists of 25 pallets, and 

seating for 6 additional crewmembers. To provide seating for the 6 

crewmembers, the pallets on the right side of the aircraft are placed 

lengthwise in the cargo compartment, and the first 11 pallets on the 

left side are placed laterally as shown here. The cargo-loading 

manual contains detailed information concerning the various 

configurations for cargo and personnel. 

One of the most commonly used consists of 23 pallet positions and 

seating for 16 passengers. This configuration can be modified to 

carry 20 passengers by adding 2 seats on either side behind the 

seats shown here. However, this imposes a 2100-pound limit on 

each pallet due to reduced space available for cargo net expansion. 

There are two Patient Support Configurations based on the mixed 

Cargo/75 Personnel Configuration. Patient Support Pallet (PSP) 

Configuration 1 (Code H) replaces pallet positions 2R & 3R with 1 

PSP with 6 litters in 2R and a blank 463L pallet in position 3R. 

Patient Support Pallet (PSP) Configuration 2 (Code I) is 1 PSP with 

6 litters in 2R and 1 PSP with 3 litters in pallet position 3R. 

2. KC-10 Passenger Accommodations 

For the comfort of the passengers, particularly the duty passengers who 

will probably be beginning a work shift upon arrival at their deployed 

location, the KC-10 has relatively civilized passenger accommodations. 

a. Increased Accommodation Unit (IAU) 

The Increased Accommodation Unit, commonly referred to as the 

IAU, increases the passenger and extra crewmember seating 

capacity to a total of 75. 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G020-SG 1-36-3 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

44 of these seats are mounted on four seat pallets. 

The IAU also provides additional stowage space. The stowage 

compartment is mounted on the right side of the airplane, just 

forward of seat pallet number two right. 

With the increased number of personnel that can be carried with 

the IAU, an additional comfort station is provided. We refer to it as 

the “Z-LAV” and it provides all the comforts of the permanent 

lavatory located forward. It is installed on the left side of the 

airplane, just forward of the cargo door. 

b. Environmental Curtain 

An environmental curtain establishes the aft end of the passenger 

compartment and serves as a smoke and sound barrier. The 

curtain consists of six panels fastened to the ceiling and sidewalls 

by slide fasteners and Velcro strips. The environmental curtain 

may be installed at one of two locations, depending on aircraft 

configuration. 

3. KC-10 Cargo Handling Equipment 

As with other aspects of its mission, the KC-10 uses specialized 

equipment for carrying cargo. This cargo equipment includes pallets, 

coupled pallets, cargo restraints, a barrier net, and rollers. 

a. Pallets 

The primary means of transporting cargo is the palletized method. 

The KC-10 can accommodate up to twenty-seven 88 X 108 inch 

pallets. The pallets are rated for 10,000 lbs; however their loads 

are limited to 5400 lb, 6500 lb, and 10,000 lb depending on their 

location in the aircraft. 

b. Compartments 

Letters and station numbers on the sidewalls identify 

compartments. Double letters on the left wall are for lateral pallet 

loading. Pallet numbers are located on the floor. Yellow decals 

identify longitudinal, or lengthwise, pallet positions. White decals, 

on the left side only, show lateral pallet positions. 

c. Coupled Pallets 

To accommodate large cargo items, pallets can be coupled 

together using two “one inch couplers” attached to the pallet rings. 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G020-SG 1-36-4 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

d. Restraints 

Cargo in the KC-10 can be restrained with various types of 

equipment. Using a top net and two side nets provides the 

maximum restraint for a single pallet load weighing up to 10,000 

lbs. The “actual” amount of restraint provided by straps or chains is 

determined by a mathematical ratio method formula. 

e. Barrier Net 

As an added safety feature, a cargo barrier net is installed to 

provide protection in the event of extreme deceleration forces. It is 

rated for nine G’s of restraint for cargo loads up to 175,000 lbs. 

f. Omni-directional Rollers 

Pallets are supported in the doorway area by omni-directional 

castered rollers. The casters swivel and permit loaded pallets to be 

moved in any direction. The rollers are contained in seven panels 

and two outboard conveyor assemblies. 

g. Powered Rollers 

These eight powered rollers assist during loading and offloading 

operations. When energized, the rollers elevate to move the pallet 

laterally or rotate it for longitudinal alignment. When de-energized, 

the rollers automatically retract. 

h. Powered Rollers Control Panel 

The control panel located at the forward edge of the cargo door 

provides power for the rollers. The cargo door must be open to 

operate the powered rollers. A pendant, attached to the control 

panel by a 24-foot cord, allows freedom of movement to operate 

the rollers while closely observing pallet positioning. The pendant 

is stowed beneath the control panel. 

i. Roller Conveyors 

The manually operated longitudinal roller conveyor assemblies 

consist of rollers mounted in channels along both sides, and down 

the center of the floor. They may be located forward and aft of the 

omni-directional panels, or only aft, depending on aircraft 

configuration. 

4. KC-10 Cargo Load Planning Considerations 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G020-SG 1-36-5 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

These are the Boom Operator’s “dash 9" cargo operations responsibilities. 

They are completed each time a KC-10 cargo mission is flown. 

a. Cargo Size/Contour 

Each item of cargo must be contoured to fit safely within the 

curvature of the fuselage. 

b. Cargo Gross Weight 

Each item of cargo must be within the maximum gross weight for its 

loaded position. 

c. Concentrated Loads 

A concentrated load is a large amount of weight covering a small 

contact area. The areas of contact are commonly called "skids" or 

"contact points", and must be checked to ensure no limits are 

exceeded. 

Vehicle axles are another form of concentrated load that must be 

checked prior to loading. 

d. Cargo Load/Unload Aft Limit 

The center of balance of the aircraft must be computed for each 

item of cargo loaded or unloaded. Items of cargo loaded behind 

the main landing gear quickly bring the center of balance aft and 

can result in the aircraft “tipping on its tail.” 

A “tipping analysis” is computed to ensure that the center of 

balance always remains forward of 40% MAC. The aircraft will tip 

at 44% MAC. 

e. Lateral Unbalance 

The KC-10's “widebody” design allows side-by-side pallet loading. 

Just as there are lateral fuel balance limits, there are also cargo 

lateral balance limits. The Boom Operator ensures that lateral 

cargo weight differences are within limits. 

f. Zone Limitations 

One of the principal additions to the DC-10-30 commercial freighter 

basic airframe, for the KC-10 conversion, was the addition of 

forward and aft body fuel tanks. Zone limitation calculations are 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G020-SG 1-36-6 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

completed to ensure that the amount of body tank fuel and cargo 

loaded does not exceed the allowable weights by fuselage station. 

The airframe does not differentiate by type of weight; additional fuel 

means less cargo. Careful planning can optimize this weight 

capability and satisfy fuselage limitations. 

g. Other Considerations 

The KC-10 Boom Operator must also compute, as required, factors 

such as pounds per linear foot loading (PLF), required restraint, 

and nose-strut compression during loading operations. Restraint 

calculation and placement for “rolling stock” (wheeled vehicles) 

generally takes a significant amount of time due to the vertical 

restraint limitation of the aircraft. 

5. Hazardous Cargo 

When loading hazardous cargo, the load plan must consider the 

compatibility of the various hazardous materials, and the proximity of 

hazardous materials to passengers. 

6. Cargo Off-loading 

Cargo off-loading is essentially the reverse of cargo loading. Inflight, after 

the landing fuel is determined, the boom operator normally accomplishes 

the offload tipping analysis. The analysis uses the landing fuel weight and 

fuel distribution when determining the sequence in which the aircraft is 

offloaded. 

7. Cargo Load Model 

The purpose of the KC-10 Cargo Load Model is to enable Boom 

Operators to visualize the assembly of various types of cargo loads in the 

aircraft. It is a scale model of the cargo compartment and cargo handling 

system. Boom Operators plan a variety of loads, and then assemble scale 

models of rolling stock and pallets. The planned cargo is placed in the 

CLM in accordance with TO 1C-10(K)A-9, Cargo Load Manual. 

III. REVIEW 

A. Summary 

B. Remotivation 

I hope the information presented here enhances your understanding of what’s 

happening behind the cockpit door. Because of the varied missions and aircraft 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-G020-SG 1-36-7 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

configurations of the KC-10, it is important for the entire crew to understand the 

capabilities and limitations of the aircraft and crew, relating to cargo loading and 

unloading. You don’t want to be involved in a situation similar to the Fed Ex DC10 sitting on its tail, or the DC-8 accident at Miami caused by shifting cargo. 

C. Closure 

PIQ/FIQ-G020-SG 1-36-8 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-1 01 JUL 13 

Performance Workshop III 

MTOGW TOLD Card 

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this workshop is to provide you an opportunity to 

practice completing a Max Takeoff Gross Weight TOLD card. Be sure you have 

completed the prerequisite workbooks and CBT lessons prior to the workshop. 

Your instructor will present the workshop exercises and provide appropriate 

guidance if you have any questions. 

Part I describes the topics that will be covered by the workshop exercises. 

Part II consists of the workshop exercises to be completed. 

II. Duration - 3.0 hours 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Flight Manual Performance Data

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Classroom 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

C. Performance Workshop III - MTOGW TOLD Card Student Guide 

D. AF IMT 4089, KC-10 TOLD Card Worksheet 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance Workbook 

B. Takeoff and Landing Data Workbook 

C. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance CBT Lesson 

D. Takeoff Performance Charts CBT Lesson 

E. KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return Data Computation CBT Lesson 

F. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

1. Section I, Introduction 

2. Section II, Engine Data 

3. Section III, Takeoff 

4. Section IX, Approach and Landing 

5. Section X, Mission Planning 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-2 01 JUL 13 

Objective

1. Complete a KC-10 Maximum Takeoff Gross Weight Takeoff and Landing Data 

(TOLD) Card. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-3 01 JUL 13 

Part I

A Maximum Takeoff Gross Weight (MTOGW) TOLD Card is computed based on the 

maximum weight at which the aircraft can take off under given conditions. These 

conditions pertain to environmental, runway, or field condition factors. 

As previously demonstrated, the MTOGW block of the TOLD Card is completed for all 

takeoffs. Remember, reduced thrust procedures do not apply when computing a 

maximum takeoff gross weight TOLD Card. Therefore, any blocks pertaining to the 

assumed temperature receive a check (√) mark. 

The Air Force Flight Standards Agency (AFFSA) has contracted with Jeppesen to 

provide safe engine out departure procedures for bases used by the KC-10 to provide 

the maximum takeoff weight possible and miss any obstacles should an engine fail 

during takeoff. Special Departure Procedure information is found at 

“http://www.jeppesen.com/wlcs/index.jsp” on the internet. 

Jeppesen analyzes terrain and obstacle data against aircraft specific performance data 

to determine the best engine out departure and takeoff weight for each runway at a 

given location. The user name and password change periodically; please contact your 

wing DOV for current information. Once logged into the website, click on OPS DATA, 

which will take you to the SORT and aircraft selection menus. 

A User Guide that can be viewed or downloaded is also available below the Ops Data 

menu. Please review this guide as soon as possible. Only bases that have approved 

procedures are listed on the Jeppesen website. This website should be checked during 

mission planning. If an approved procedure is available, it must be briefed and used if 

an engine failure occurs on takeoff. TOLD and/or SDP departure plate information can 

be found on the website, and has been approved by the Air Force for TOLD 

computations. 

Figure 3 is an example of SDP TOLD information and Figures 4 and 5 are examples of 

SDP departure plates found on the website. More information is available from your 

instructor during the TOLD card workshop. If a SDP is available for the runway being 

used, it should be followed exactly in order to avoid obstacles. 

The following pages will provide you an understanding of Special Departure 

Procedures. •From any to the Jeppesen website: –User Name: afopsdata 

–Password: jeppesen 

–Click: AIRPORT DATA 

–Select a sort method 

–Select KC-10 from the dropdown menu 

–KC-10 User’s Guide available 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

Figure 1. Airfield Analysis Data 1.

 

The FAA expects all aircraft to climb at a rate of at least 200 ft/nm (30:1) with all engines 

operating. The top line represents this. 

The middle line represents 152 ft/nm (40:1) or a 2.5% net climb gradient. When an 

instrument runway is TERPS and an obstacle penetrates this line, a Departure Procedure 

or SID identifies the obstacle or requires a turn or increased climb rate. Air Force requires 

most military aircraft to be able to clear all obstacles in the event of an engine failure. 

Identifying the proper obstacles is the hard part. 

Because of the climbout and clean up procedures, at times the KC-10 actually operates 

below a 2.5% climb gradient. In this case actual obstacles may exist and may not be 

readily identified. 

Jeppesen airfield analysis identifies all obstacles that penetrate the bottom line out to 

approximately 30 nautical miles. After that, it’s up to you to avoid obstacles. 

FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-4 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Figure 2. Airfield Analysis Data 2.

Jeppesen, using the ICAO criteria, also covers a greater width for obstacle 

consideration along the planned flight route than required by FAA. 

The SDP is aircraft specific. Takeoff and climb performance procedures are examined 

against the specific runway obstacle data to determine the best route. Straight ahead is 

examined first with alternate routes later if it would be impossible to use the straightahead course. The route selected will apply technical manual procedures and provide 

clearance over all obstacles for the first 30 miles in the event you lose an engine at V1. 

After going to the correct website, Figures 4-7c, 4-7d, and 4-7e are examples of the 

TOLD data pages and departure plate information found on the site. The plate depicts 

both Dry and Wet data with Dry data being used most by crewmembers and the Wet 

being use by mission planners. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-5 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-6 01 JUL 13 

Figure 3. TOLD data sheet.

1 

Figure 3. SDP TOLD Information.

2 

2 

3 

4 

 5 

 7 

 6 8 

9 

FOR TRAINING USE ONLY 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-7 01 JUL 13 

Using the SDP TOLD information is fairly easy. The sheet has systems information as 

well as airfield data. Below is a description of the some of the information on the sheet. 

Items on Figure 3: 

Item 1 Systems settings and airfield data are usually found at the top of the page. 

Item 2 Runway 6 – Dry with a TURN is the runway identified. 

Item 3 This is the outside air temperature is in Centigrade. 

Item 4 This is the maximum takeoff weight that should not be exceeded. This is a 

planning guideline. 

Item 5 The max liftoff point is the point that the airplane lifts off if it loses an engine at 

V1. Simply stated, it is the field length plus the lineup distance. Cutbacks have 

already been considered for obstacles or screen height. You must subtract the 

runway alignment distance from this max liftoff point number. Enter this 

number in your RWY AVAIL block. If E-TOLD is used just enter this number. 

Item 6 This is the number used for the obstacle height in AGL. Enter this number in 

the OBST HT block. Again, if E-TOLD is used, this number needs to be in MSL 

HT. You must add the obstacle height and field elevation to get MSL. 

Item 7 The runway slope is identified here and is used. This is your actual slope for 

this runway. This is the number that is entered in the SLOPE block on your 

TOLD worksheet. If using E-TOLD, remember that a zero has to be put in front 

of the dismal point. 

Item 8 This is the number used in the TOLD for corrected obstacle distance. This 

number is your obstacle distance and is entered in the OBST DIST block. This 

is also entered in E-TOLD in the very same manner. 

Item 9 This number is not used. The number is obtained from T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 and 

should be greater or equal to the number on the SDP TOLD sheet. If the 

number is less than the SDP sheet, a mistake has occurred and the climb 

gradient data must be recomputed. 

Figure 4 is an example of a Special Departure Plate with only written instructions and 

Figure 5 is a Special Engine Failure Procedure plate. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-8 01 JUL 13 

Figure 4. Special Procedure Plate.

FOR TRAINING USE ONLY 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FOR TRAINING USE ONLY 

Figure 5. Special Engine Failure Procedure.

FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-9 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-10 01 JUL 13 

Part II 

WORKSHOP EXERCISES

1. GIVEN: 

Gross Weight Maximum Gross Weight for Takeoff (To be computed) 

Takeoff CG 23.0% 

OAT 5° C 

Dew Point 4° C 

Anti-ice ON 

Pressure Altitude +120°

Wind Direction 130°

Wind Velocity 5 G 10 

Runway Heading 230°

Runway Length 11,100'

RCR 12 Reported 

RSC 0 

Slope 0 

Field Elevation 93′

Obstacle Height N/A 

Obstacle Distance N/A 

Air Conditioning OFF 

Reverse Thrust YES 

Compute Takeoff Performance For the purposes of this training event assume a 

Special Departure Procedure (SDP) is available requiring a 2.50 Min Climb rate with no 

obstacle depicted and a 11,100 Max LOP. The SDP MTOGW is 590,000 lbs for the 

given conditions. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-11 01 JUL 13 LANDING COMPUTATION (*Abnormal Configuration)

V

1

V

R

V

2

VFR

V

SR

0° /EXT

22° / EXT

0° /RET

TAS

TAKEOFF LANDING

0°/RET

MM V
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-12 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Performance Workshop IV - 

V1=VMCG TOLD Card

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this workshop is to provide you an opportunity to 

practice completing a TOLD card for V1=VMCG. Be sure you have completed the 

prerequisite workbooks and CBT lessons prior to the workshop. Your instructor 

will present the workshop exercises and provide appropriate guidance if you 

have any questions. 

Part I describes the topics that will be covered by the workshop exercises. 

Part II consists of the workshop exercises to be completed. 

II. Duration - 2.0 hours 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Flight Manual Performance Data

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Classroom 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

C. Performance Workshop IV - V1=VMCG TOLD Card Student Guide 

D. AF IMT 4089, KC-10 TOLD Card Worksheet 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance Workbook 

B. Takeoff and Landing Data Workbook 

C. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance CBT Lesson 

D. Takeoff Performance Charts CBT Lesson 

E. KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return Data Computation CBT Lesson 

F. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

1. Section I, Introduction 

2. Section II, Engine Data 

3. Section III, Takeoff 

4. Section IX, Approach and Landing 

5. Section X, Mission Planning 

CH 3 

FIQ-E847-SG 1-38-1 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-E847-SG 1-38-2 01 JUL 13 

Objective

1. Complete a KC-10 Takeoff and Landing Data (TOLD) Card when V1 equals 

VMCG. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Part I

When V1 = VMCG, the aircraft's takeoff gross weight (TOGW) is limited to a maximum 

weight that allows the aircraft to stop in the available runway after experiencing engine 

failure at V1. 

When computing the Takeoff Data for a V1 = VMCG condition, it may be necessary to 

reduce TOGW. If this is the case, determine the maximum allowable weight (MAW) for 

the given runway available. Remember, use the optimum takeoff flap setting when 

computing MAW, except when an RSC is used for TOLD planning use 25° flaps only. 

The MAW is the MTOGW. 

When runway cutback procedures are used for obstacle clearance, use the original 

(Full) runway available to determine MAW when V1 = VMCG. When determining MAW 

and SDP procedures are used, use the (Full) runway available to determine MAW, not 

the listed MAX liftoff point. Using the MAX liftoff point distance could result in a 

significantly lower MAW value. 

If V1 equals VMCG, then VR MIN must be computed and compared to VR. If VR is less than 

VR MIN, increase VR to equal VR MIN. Do not forget to increase V2 by the same increment. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E847-SG 1-38-3 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Part II

WORKSHOP EXERCISES

1. GIVEN: 

Gross Weight 550,000 

Takeoff CG 23.0% 

OAT 5° C 

Dew Point T

Anti-ice ON 

Pressure Altitude +30’ 

Wind Direction CALM 

Wind Velocity 0 

Runway Heading 130°

Runway Length 12,100 

RCR WET 

RSC .15 Reported (Standing Water) 

Slope .8 DN 

Field Elevation 82’ 

Obstacle Height N/A 

Obstacle Distance N/A 

Air Conditioning ON 

Reverse Thrust YES 

NOTE

If the desired takeoff gross weight of 550,000 lbs is not permitted, 

compute the MTOGW for the given conditions. 

Compute Takeoff Performance. For the purposes of this training event assume a 

Special Departure Procedure (SDP) is available requiring a 2.50 Min Climb rate with no 

obstacle depicted and a 12,100 Max LOP. The SDP MTGOW exceeds the computed 

takeoff MTOGW. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E847-SG 1-38-4 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-E847-SG 1-38-5 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-E847-SG 1-38-6 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-1 01 OCT 10 

FMS-800 Flight Management System

I. Purpose – The purpose of this briefing is familiarization of the basic functions and 

major components of the FMS-800 Flight Management System. 

II. Duration – 4.0 hours 

III. Reference Materials 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

B. FMS page flow diagrams 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Classroom Presentation System 

B. Whiteboard, markers and erasers 

C. Flight Emulation Trainer 

V. Student Preparation and Review 

A. None 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-2 01 OCT 10 

Objectives

At the completion of this lesson, you will be able to: 

1. Describe the basic functions and components of the KC-10 Flight Management 

System (FMS) 

2. Match FMS Control Display Unit (CDU) controls to respective functions 

3. Describe characteristics of select FMS pages 

4. Describe the characteristics of the Data and Direct-To functions 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-3 01 OCT 10 

FMS-800 Flight Management System 

Student Lecture Outline 

E-FRAME 1: FMS-800 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM REVIEW 

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. Instructor Introduction 

1. Flying Experience 

2. Type of Aircraft 

B. Purpose Statement 

1. Attention 

2. Motivation

E-FRAME 2: OBJECTIVES 

C. Objectives 

1. Describe the basic functions and components of the KC-10 Flight 

Management System (FMS) 

2. Match FMS Control Display Unit (CDU) controls to respective functions 

3. Describe characteristics of select FMS pages 

4. Describe the characteristics of the Data and Direct-To functions 

II. PRESENTATION

E-FRAME 3: FMS REVIEW 

A. Lesson Structure 

1. Part 1 – FMS Basic Functions and Components 

2. Part 2 – FMS-800 User Basics 

3. Part 3 – FMS Page Characteristics 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-4 01 OCT 10 

4. Part 4 – FET Exercises 

E-FRAME 4: FMS BASIC FUNCTIONS AND COMPONENTS 

B. Part 1 

1. FMS Basic Functions and Components Overview 

E-FRAME 5: FMS-800 OVERVIEW 

2. The FMS 

a. Computes aircraft position and flight path guidance worldwide. 

b. Determines position data autonomously; i.e., without the need 

for ground-based navigation aids (NAVAIDS). 

c. Provides functional control for the 

(1) Global positioning system (GPS) 

(2) Inertial navigation units (INUs) 

(3) Tactical air navigation (TACAN) radios 

(4) Automatic direction finder (ADF) navigation radios

E-FRAME 6: FMS-800 OVERVIEW-1 

3. The FMS utilizes 

a. User inputs 

b. Internal memory and external databases 

c. GPS and INU position and velocity inputs 

d. Central air data computer (CADC) inputs 

e. FMS software controls all system functions. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-5 01 OCT 10 

E-FRAME 7: FMS CAPABILITIES 

4. Basic Capabilities 

a. Navigation Data 

b. Mission Plans 

c. Flight Path Guidance 

E-FRAME 8: FMS COMPONENTS 

5. Basic Components 

E-FRAME 9: CDU

6. Basic CDU Description 

E-FRAME 10: CDU CONFIGURATION

7. CDU Installation Position and Input Configurations 

a. CDU 1 

b. CDU 2 

c. CDU 3 

E-FRAME 11: CDU POWER

8. CDU Power Switches 

E-FRAME 12: THE SYSTEM

9. FMS Coordination 

a. CDU Coordination 

b. CDU Inputs 

E-FRAME 13: FMS SYSTEM INTERFACES

10. Systems Integration 

a. Systems Interface Wiring 

b. Flight Guidance Signals 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-6 01 OCT 10 

c. FGS Coupling 

E-FRAME 14: MIL-STD-1553B DATA BUS 

11. Data Bus Description 

E-FRAME 15: 1553 BUS CONTROL

12. Bus Controller and Remote Terminals 

a. Bus Controller/Remote Terminal 

b. Bus Control 

c. Remote Terminals 

E-FRAME 16: BUS SPLIT SWITCH 

13. Bus Split Switch Function 

a. Switch Description 

b. Bus Split Operation 

E-FRAME 17: BSIUs

14. BSIU Functions 

a. Flight Instruments 

b. Automatic Flight Guidance Systems 

c. Navigation Radios 

E-FRAME 18: DATA LOADER

15. Data Loader 

a. Cartridge Slots 

b. Split Bus Operation 

E-FRAME 19: KEY LOAD PANELS

16. Key Load Panels 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-7 01 OCT 10 

E-FRAME 20: GPS 

17. GPS Components 

a. Receiver-Processor Module 

b. GPS Antennas 

c. GPS 3 Not Enabled 

E-FRAME 21: GPS CONTROL

18. GPS Control Options 

a. Active Unit/Alternate Unit 

b. Manual Switching 

c. GPS Velocity and Altitude Aid 

d. GPS Power 

E-FRAME 22: INERTIAL NAVIGATION SYSTEM (INS/INU)

19. INS/INU Components 

a. INS 

b. INU 

c. Component Locations 

E-FRAME 23: INS/INU CONTROL

20. Inertial Navigation System and Unit Control 

a. INS Control 

b. INU Control 

E-FRAME 24: MODE SELECTOR UNIT (MSU)

21. MSU Settings 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-8 01 OCT 10 

E-FRAME 25: MSU ANNUNCIATOR LIGHTS (READY NAV) 

22. READY NAV Light 

E-FRAME 26: MSU ANNUNCIATOR LIGHTS (BATT)

23. BATT Light 

E-FRAME 27: INS OUTPUTS

24. INS Outputs 

a. ADIs and EHSIs 

b. Remote Compass System 

c. Automatic Flight Guidance System 

d. Autothrottles 

e. Weather Radar System 

E-FRAME 28: INS SELECTOR SWITCH

25. INU Output Assignments 

a. NORM 

b. CAPT ON AUX 

c. F/O ON AUX 

E-FRAME 29: FMS MULTI-SENSOR CAPABILITIES

26. FMS Sensor Options 

a. Sensor Configurations 

b. Position Error 

c. Weighted Solutions 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-9 01 OCT 10 

E-FRAME 30: NAVIGATION SOURCE SELECTIONS 

27. INS and GPS Selection Options 

a. Power-Up Default 

b. INS NORM 

c. INS CAPT ON AUX 

d. INS F/O ON AUX 

e. Active GPS Selection 

E-FRAME 31: DESIGNATED PILOT

28. Steering Solution for Default Startup Initialization and Autopilot 

a. Designated Pilot Steering Solution Drives Autopilot 

b. Determines FMS Steering Calculations 

E-FRAME 32: DATA CARTRIDGE

29. Databases and Mission Data 

a. Stored on Data Cartridge 

b. GPS Almanac Data 

E-FRAME 33: ICAO DATABASE

30. Database Characteristics

a. ICAO Database 

b. Waypoint 

c. Waypoint Identifiers 

d. Database Access 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-10 01 OCT 10 

E-FRAME 34: MISSION DATA 

31. Mission Data Management 

a. Mission Planning 

b. Data Transfer 

c. User-Waypoint Database 

d. Data Management 

E-FRAME 35: ELECTRONIC HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (EHSI) 

32. EHSI 

a. Graphical Display 

b. Displays FMS Path when FMS Selected as Nav Source 

E-FRAME 36: FMS HEADING SWITCH

33. FMS Heading Switch Setting Function 

E-FRAME 37: FMS HEADING SWITCH (TRUE SELECTED) 

34. FMS Heading Switch Set to TRUE 

E-FRAME 38: FMS HEADING SWITCH (MAG SELECTED) 

35. FMS Heading Switch Set to MAG 

E-FRAME 39: PART 2 – FMS-800 USER BASICS 

C. Part 2 

1. FMS-800 User Basics Overview 

FMS data pages and the CDU push button keys are the primary 

interfaces used to view FMS data, input data into the FMS, clear data 

from the FMS, and manage the FMS functions. The CDUs are also 

used to manage the TACAN and ADF navigation radios and the INUs. 

E-FRAME 40: FMS PAGE OVERVIEW

2. General FMS Page Description 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-11 01 OCT 10 

E-FRAME 41: PAGE FORMAT

3. Page Content Arrangement 

E-FRAME 42: PAGE TITLE 

4. FMS-Assigned Descriptive Page Title 

E-FRAME 43: CDU LINE SELECT KEYS 

5. LS Key Functional Description 

E-FRAME 44: LS KEY FUNCTIONALITY 

6. Field-Defined Functions 

E-FRAME 45: SCROLL ARROWS AND ARROW KEYS 

7. Arrow Symbols and Keys 

E-FRAME 46: SCROLLING 

8. Types of Scrolling

E-FRAME 47: PAGE PROMPTS 

9. Page Prompt Identification and Use 

E-FRAME 48: PAGE FUNCTIONALITY

10. FMS Page Functions 

E-FRAME 49: PAGE CONTENT 

11. FMS Page Content

E-FRAME 50: PAGE HIERARCHY

12. Basic Hierarchical Structure 

E-FRAME 51: PAGE SETS

13. Page Set Organization 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-12 01 OCT 10 

E-FRAME 52: PAGE SELECTION OVERVIEW 

14. How to Select a Page and Move Between Pages 

E-FRAME 53: TOP-LEVEL PAGE FUNCTION KEYS

15. Key Descriptions 

E-FRAME 54: TOP LEVEL PAGES

16. Top Level Page Selection 

E-FRAME 55: TOP LEVEL PAGES (CONDITIONAL)

17. Conditional Rules 

E-FRAME 56: TOP LEVEL PAGE FUNCTION KEY RULES

18. Conditional Rules 

E-FRAME 57: DATA LINES

19. Data Line Description 

E-FRAME 58: DATA LINE CONTENT

20. Data Line Content 

E-FRAME 59: MANIPULATING DATA 

21. Using the FMS 

E-FRAME 60: FIELDS AND SYMBOLS

22. Field Formatting 

E-FRAME 61: BRACKETS AND DASHES

23. Bracket Characteristics 

E-FRAME 62: ASTERISK 

24. Asterisk Symbol 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-13 01 OCT 10 

E-FRAME 63: CHECKMARK

25. Checkmark Symbol 

E-FRAME 64: COLON

26. Colon Symbol 

E-FRAME 65: INWARD-POINTING ARROWS

27. Inward-Pointing Arrow Functions 

E-FRAME 66: INWARD-POINTING ARROW (ON-OFF)

28. Commands Executable Function 

E-FRAME 67: INWARD-POINTING ARROW (SELECT)

29. Loads Navigation Procedure 

E-FRAME 68: INWARD-POINTING ARROW (RADIO PAGES)

30. Toggles Frequency Between Two Different Settings 

E-FRAME 69: INWARD-POINTING ARROW (STATUS PAGES)

31. Resets Fault Count 

E-FRAME 70: OUTWARD-POINTING ARROWS (WAYPOINT PAGES)

32. Accesses Detail/Expanded Data 

E-FRAME 71: OUTWARD-POINTING ARROWS (STATUS PAGES) 

33. Status Detail 

a. LRU listed in the adjacent field 

b. RTN prompt 

E-FRAME 72: DEGREES AND DEGREES TRUE

34. Degree (°) and True (T)Symbols 

a. Degree symbol (°) indicates that reference is degrees 

magnetic 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-14 01 OCT 10 

b. Subscripted T (T), reference indicates degrees True 

E-FRAME 73: WAYPOINT SEQUENCE NUMBERS AND WAYPOINT IDENTIFIERS

35. Waypoint Numbering and ID 

a. Waypoint Numbering

b. Labeled/Unlabeled waypoints 

E-FRAME 74: PAGE TITLE LINE

36. Page Line 2, Page Title Line 

E-FRAME 75: INFORMATION LINE

37. Page Line 4, Information Line 

E-FRAME 76: ANNUNCIATION LINE

38. Page Line 6, Annunciation Line 

E-FRAME 77: EHSI MSG ANNUNCIATION

39. MSG Annunciation 

E-FRAME 78: CLEARING ANNUNCIATIONS

40. Acknowledging and Clearing Annunciation Messages 

a. Acknowledging and Clearing Annunciations 

b. Non-Clearable Annunciations 

E-FRAME 79: SCRATCHPAD LINE

41. Page Line 8, Scratchpad Line 

E-FRAME 80: SCRATCHPAD CONTENT

42. Scratchpad Content 

E-FRAME 81: ENTER AND INPUT 

43. Distinction Between Enter and Input 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-15 01 OCT 10 

a. Data Entry 

b. Data Carry-over 

E-FRAME 82: MANUAL DATA ENTRY 

44. Manually Populate Scratchpad 

E-FRAME 83: COPYING AND TRANSFERRING DATA 

45. Copy and Input 

E-FRAME 84: CONFIRMATION 

46. Confirm if Prompted 

E-FRAME 85: COPY AND TRANSFER 

47. Things to Remember 

E-FRAME 86: ENTER, INPUT, CONFIRM 

48. To Enter Data Into the Scratchpad 

a. Use the CDU alphanumeric keypad to manually populate the 

scratchpad. 

b. Copy existing data from an active data field to the scratchpad. 

E-FRAME 87: ENTER, INPUT, CONFIRM 

49. Input Data Into the FMS 

a. Press the LS key adjacent to the data field where you want to 

input the data. 

b. The scratchpad automatically clears if the FMS accepts data. 

E-FRAME 88: ENTER, INPUT, CONFIRM 

50. Confirm the Input 

a. Press associated LS key again to confirm 

b. Pressing CLR function key before confirming cancels operation 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-16 01 OCT 10 

c. If FMS accepts input, scratchpad automatically clears 

d. If input not accepted, FMS generate a scratchpad message. 

e. CLR will not undo or cancel function or input after confirmation 

E-FRAME 89: SCRATCHPAD MESSAGE 

51. Automated Scratchpad Message 

E-FRAME 90: CLEARING THE SCRATCHPAD 

52. Things to Remember 

E-FRAME 91: USING THE SCRATCHPAD TO CLEAR AN ACTIVE FIELD 

53. Enter and Input a Minus Sign 

E-FRAME 92: PART 3 – FMS PAGE CHARACTERISTICS 

D. Part 3 

1. FMS Page Characteristics Overview 

Discuss how to locate specific FMS pages and move from page. In 

this part of the lesson we will look at the pages most often used by the 

flight engineer. We will also specifically look at the DATA function and 

the Direct-To function. 

E-FRAME 93: FMS PAGE SET OVERVIEW 

2. Overview of Lesson Part 3 

a. Index (IDX) 

b. Position (PSN) 

c. Integrated Navigation (INAV) 

d. Status (STAT) 

e. Navigation Radio (NAV) 

f. Steering (STR) 

g. Flight Plan (FPLN) 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-17 01 OCT 10 

h. Flight Plan Edit (EDIT) 

i. Mission (MSN) 

j. DATA and (DIR) function keys 

E-FRAME 94: PAGE NOTES 

3. Preamble

E-FRAME 95: INDEX PAGES 

4. Index1 and Index2 Selection 

E-FRAME 96: INDEX1 PAGE 

5. Index1 Page Content 

E-FRAME 97: INDEX2 PAGE 

6. Index2 Page Content 

E-FRAME 98: POSITION PAGES 

7. Position Page Selection 

a. pilot psn 

b. copilot psn 

E-FRAME 99: PILOT PSN, COPILOT PSN PAGES 

8. Pilot Position and Copilot Position Page Content 

E-FRAME 100: INAV PAGES 

9. INAV Page Selections 

a. Navigation Source 

b. Seven Different Pages, one for each Nav solution 

E-FRAME 101: GPS SATELLITE DATA AND RAIM 

10. Satellite Data Page and RAIM Prediction Page 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-18 01 OCT 10 

E-FRAME 102: INU1(2,3) INAV PAGE 

11. INUx INAV Page Content 

E-FRAME 103: INU1(2,3) CONTROL PAGE 

12. INUx Control Page 

E-FRAME 104: STATUS PAGES 

13. Status Page Selection 

E-FRAME 105: LRU DETAILED STATUS PAGES 

14. Detailed Status Pages 

E-FRAME 106: CHECK STATUS 

15. Check Status Function 

E-FRAME 107: STATUS SYMBOLS 

16. Status Symbol Summary 

E-FRAME 108: FMS STATUS PAGE 

17. FMS Status Page 

E-FRAME 109: CDU STATUS (SELECT) 

18. CDU Detailed Status Pages 

E-FRAME 110: CDU STATUS PAGE 

19. CDU Detailed Status Page Content 

E-FRAME 111: NAV SENSOR STATUS PAGE 

20. Nav Sensor Status Page Content 

E-FRAME 112: NAV RADIO STATUS PAGE 

21. Nav Radio Status Page Content 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-19 01 OCT 10 

E-FRAME 113: NAV RADIO CONTROL PAGES 

22. Nav Radio Control Page Content 

E-FRAME 114: NAV RADIO1(2) PAGES 

23. Nav Radio1(2) Page Content 

E-FRAME 115: STEERING PAGES 

24. Four Top-Level Steering Pages 

E-FRAME 116: BAROSET 

25. Barometric Altimeter Setting on vnav str 

E-FRAME 117: FLIGHT PLAN PAGES 

26. Flight Plan Page Content 

E-FRAME 118: MISSION PAGE 

27. Mission Page Content 

E-FRAME 119: FMS DATA PAGES 

28. FMS Data Pages Content 

E-FRAME 120: FROM-TO DATA 

29. From-To Data Page Content

E-FRAME 121: FROM-TO DATA (LEG, WAYPOINT) 

30. From-To Data – Leg, Waypoint Content

E-FRAME 122: FROM-TO OPTIONS 

31. From-To Options Content 

E-FRAME 123: PART 4 – FET EXERCISES 

E. Part 4 

1. FET Exercises Overview 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-20 01 OCT 10 

E-FRAME 124: INSTRUCTOR-GUIDED FET EXERCISES 

2. Describe and perform the FMS Preflight Initialization Procedure 

a. TO 1C-10(K)A-1 

b. FET 

E-FRAME 125: SUMMARY 

3. Lesson Summary 

a. Descriptions of the basic functions and components of the 

KC-10 Flight Management System (FMS) 

b. FMS Control Display Unit (CDU) controls and functions 

c. FMS page selection and page characteristics 

d. Basic characteristics of the DATA and DIRECT-TO functions 

e. Selected FMS Procedures 

f. FET exercise 

4. Remotivation 

a. Using the FMS is an essential duty of the flight engineer. 

b. Checklists provide some guidance to locating the 

appropriate pages; however, you must be familiar with FMS 

terminology and page features to be able to follow this 

guidance. 

E-FRAME 126: THE END 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-21 01 OCT 10 

APPENDIX A 

FMS EXERCISE 

Procedure

Pre-Departure 

1 Activate the FET by entering KWRI in the ‘Airport’ box and selecting OK. 

2 Set MSUs to STBY 

3 

Verify the FMS software version by pressing the STAT key to access the 

status page. Select CDU1 (LS5) and check that the software version 

number (VSN) is 613-9466-011 KC10. The three-digit suffix must be -011 

or higher (-012, -013...) and KC10 must be specified. The FET software 

version may display as “XXXX...”. 

4 

Select IDX, START and then observe the ‘start 1 psn/time’ page for 

position, date, and time. 

KWRI - N40°00.935 W074°35.502 

Using the CLR key, clear all of the data displayed on the annunciation line. 

 Check that WGS-84 datum is displayed on the start 1 page. 

5 

Observe the scroll symbol located to the left of the scratchpad, indicating 

more pages are available. Scroll to the ‘start 2 nav/init’ page. There is 

usually no need to initialize the GPS, except if maintenance has been 

performed on the system. Assume you do need to initialize for today’s 

mission. Press LS1 and note the arrow changes to an asterisk. After the 

GPS is initialized, the asterisk reverts to an arrow. This may take a few 

minutes, so continue with next step. 

6 Press the INAV function key to access the ‘inav’ pages. 

7 

Next, access the ‘inu1 control’ page. Scroll the ‘inav’ page until INU 

CONTROL displays next to LS4. Select INU CONTROL to access the 

‘inu1 control’ page. 

8 

Activate the POSITION mode (LS2), and note the display change. Ensure 

that 72. 33o 0.1o is displayed. 

Type latitude N4000.9 in the scratchpad and press ENTER (LS6). 

Type longitude W07435.5 in the scratchpad and press ENTER (LS6). 

To clear the data and re-enter (if necessary), press CLEAR (LS3). 

To clear the scratchpad, press and hold the CLR key. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-22 01 OCT 10 

Procedure

9 

Set the INU1 MSU to ALIGN in the simulation control window (in the 

aircraft, all three selectors will be set to ALIGN). Now change the display 

on the information line by pressing DTK-STS (LS1). Note status counts 

down from 90 to 02 (In the aircraft, the READY-NAV light will also 

illuminate at 02). 

10 

Access the ‘start 3 database’ page. Select IDX, START (LS1), and then 

scroll to ‘start 3 database’ page. Here, verify the effectivity date of the 

stored ICAO database(s): DB A and/or DB B. If a database is not 

available, the effectivity date will be dashed. During initialization of the 

FMS you are required to select one of the available databases by pressing 

the adjacent LS key. Once selected, the arrow pointing to that database 

will change to an asterisk until the other database is selected. Select DB B 

KC-10. 

11 

Scroll to ‘start 4 mission’ page. On this page, select the mission data to 

be used from either MSN A or MSN B data cartridge. During initialization of 

the FMS, you are required to select one of the available missions by 

pressing the adjacent LS key. Once selected, the arrow pointing to that 

database will change to an asterisk until the other database is selected. 

Select MSN A fltplan.cr. 

12 

Scroll to the ‘start 5 fpln/load’ page. From this page, you can access the 

catalog, load an alternate flight plan, replace the active flight plan, and load 

or erase flight data. 

13 While on the ‘start 5 fpln/load’ page, display the alternate flight plan 

catalog using ALTN CATLG (LS6). 

14 

Select a flight plan (McGuire1) by pressing the appropriate line select key. 

 Replace the current flight plan using FPLN REPLACE (LS7) and confirm 

(LS7 again). This is now your alternate flight plan in the CDU. 

15 Power-up all navigation equipment. Select IDX, POWER (LS6) to access 

the ‘master power’ page and then LS5 to turn on the equipment. 

16 

Configure TACAN and ADF. 

Select NAV to access ‘nav radio 1’ page. 

Scroll right to access ‘nav radio 2’ page. 

nav radio 1 page - ADF – 396, TCN1 – 43X. 

nav radio 2 page - ADF - 396, TCN2 - 85Y, MODE - BCNINV.

17 Set INU1 MSU to NAV on the FET control panel. (In the aircraft, this step 

is accomplished for all three MSUs during the Before Start checklist.). 

18 Access the position page (PSN) to monitor for windshear during takeoff. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-23 01 OCT 10 

Procedure

INSTRUCTOR PERFORMS FOLLOWING ACTIONS 

Select these options on the FET control panel: 320 mile scale, 10X

acceleration, A/C centered on map, Auto on A/C. Select RUN to begin 

mission. 

Climb 

19 Compare data on the pilot and copilot PSN and STR pages, and the FPLN

page. 

Enroute 

20 

After passing waypoint 05, select 10x acceleration and determine your ETA 

to the ARCP for AR-313-N, N33°49 W094°25 (WPT 12) using remote 

ranging. 

Press the DATA function key. Next, press the LS key next to N33°49 

W094°25. Toggle LS1 to PPSN VIA FPLN. On the ‘from-to data’ page, 

find your ETA to the ARCP next to LS 8. To return to the flight plan page, 

press the FPLN function key. 

21 

After passing waypoint 07: 

a. Determine time and distance from present position direct to 

waypoint 14. 

Press the DATA function key. Next, press the LS key next to adjacent to 

waypoint 14. Toggle LS1 to PPSN DIRECT. On the ‘from-to data’ page, 

find your time and distance to waypoint 14 on line five. 

b. Determine time and distance from present position to waypoint 

14 via flight plan. 

Toggle LS1 to PPSN VIA FPLN. On the ‘from-to data’ page, find your 

time and distance to waypoint 14 on line five. ETE and ETA calculations 

VIA FPLN may not calculate correctly. To return to the flight plan page, 

press the FPLN function key. 

22 

For contingency planning, the aircraft commander asks you to obtain time 

and distance to KTIK from waypoint 12. 

While on the ‘fpln’ page, press the DATA function key. Select the line 

select key next to waypoint 13. Enter KTIK in the scratchpad and enter it 

by again selecting the key next to waypoint 13. 

Notice that line three now displays KTIK and your time and distance to 

KTIK is shown on line 5. You have not altered the flight plan and KTIK will 

be gone when you return to the ‘fpln’ page. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-24 01 OCT 10 

Procedure

23 Receiver is cancelled. Recover to Garden City, Kansas (GCK) by pressing 

DIR and scrolling down to GCK. 

Descent 

24 

Set barometer (BAROSET) to 30.00. 

Press the STR selector key and vertically scroll until BAROSET is next to 

LS4. 

Enter 3000 into the scratchpad and press LS4 to insert. Note that the FMS 

automatically inserts the decimal. 

25 

Monitor the position (PSN) page for windshear during the approach and 

come to a full stop landing. The FET mode becomes 'Initialization' and 

the aircrafts stops. To close the FET, select FILE, then EXIT. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 1 

FIQ-C016-SG 1-40-1 01 JUL 11 

Navigation Systems

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the function and 

components of the navigation systems on the KC-10.

 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Navigation Systems CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section 1, Systems Description 

a. Part 6, Flight Controls 

(1) Ground Proximity Warning System 

b. Part 14, Navigation and RADAR 

(1) Navigation Systems Description 

(2) TACAN Description 

(3) Automatic Direction Finding System Description 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 1 

FIQ-C016-SG 1-40-2 01 JUL 11 

Navigation Systems

Student Outline 

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson describes the function and components of the navigation systems 

on the KC-10. It discusses the compasses, navigation radio aids, and the 

controls and indicators of the systems. The lesson consists of two segments. 

 The first identifies the components and their function. The second segment 

discusses the operation of the systems and the associated limitations. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the components of the navigation systems. 

2. Identify the operational characteristics of the navigation systems. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Navigation Systems 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Navigation Systems Components 

1. Introduction 

2. Magnetic Hdg Reference System 

a. Magnetic Hdg Ref Sys Components 

b. Dual Compass System 

c. Compass Control Panel 

3. Stand Magnetic Compass 

a. Standby Magnetic Compass Desc 

b. Correction Card 

4. EHSI 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 1 

FIQ-C016-SG 1-40-3 01 JUL 11 

5. Radio Magnetic Indicator (RMI) 

a. RMI’s Location 

b. RMI Compass Card/Selector Sw 

c. RMI Differences 

6. Tactical Air Nav Sys (TACAN) 

a. TACAN Power Sources 

b. TACAN RMI Compass Card/Pointers 

c. TACAN Controls/Indicators 

d. TACAN Antennas 

e. Operational Modes 

f. DME Indicators 

g. Operating Range 

7. Auto Direction Finding Sys (ADF) 

a. ADF Description 

b. FMS Control 

c. VOR/ADF RMI 

8. Marker Beacon System 

a. Marker Beacon System Description 

b. VOR/ILS Frequency Selector 

c. Lights 

9. Radio Altimeter System 

a. Radio Altimeter Description 

b. Indicators 

c. Antennas 

10. Clocks 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 1 

FIQ-C016-SG 1-40-4 01 JUL 11 

a. Clocks 

b. Pilot’s Clock 

(1) Pilot’s Clock 

(2) Short Term Elapsed Time 

(3) Long Term Elapsed 

c. Flight Engineers’ Clock 

(1) Flight Engineers’ Clock 

(2) GMT Selector 

(3) Short/Long Term Elapsed Time 

11. Radar 

a. Radar Description 

b. Control Panel 

(1) Mode Selector 

(2) System Switch 

(3) Pencil/Fan Switch 

(4) Gain Knob 

(5) Antenna Tilt 

(6) R-T Fault Lights 

c. Indicator Panel 

(1) Indicator panel 

(2) Range Selector 

(3) Hold Push Button 

(4) Target Clarity/Intensity 

(5) Normal/Marker Delay Switch 

(6) Radar Scope Display 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 1 

FIQ-C016-SG 1-40-5 01 JUL 11 

12. Summary 

13. Quiz 1 

C. Navigation Systems Operational Characteristics 

1. Introduction 

2. Magnetic Hdg Reference System 

a. Magnetic Hdg Reference System 

b. Synchronization 

3. Standby Magnetic Compass 

4. EHSI 

5. Radio Magnetic Indicator (RMI) 

6. Tactical Air Nav Sys (TACAN) 

7. Auto Direction Finding Sys (ADF) 

a. Auto Direction Finding Sys (ADF) 

b. UHF DF Operation 

8. Marker Beacon System 

9. Radio Altimeter System 

a. Radio Altimeter 

10. Clocks (FE) 

a. Clocks (FE) 

b. Brightness Adjustment 

c. Short Term Elapsed Time 

11. Radar 

a. Radar 

b. Test Mode 

c. Weather /Map 1/Map 2 Mode 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 1 

FIQ-C016-SG 1-40-6 01 JUL 11 

d. Beacon Mode 

12. Summary 

13. Quiz 2 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 2 

FIQ-C078-SG 1-41-1 01 JUN 12 

Introduction to the 

Flight Guidance System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the functions, 

characteristics and operations of the Flight Guidance System. 

II. Duration - 0.8 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Station 

B. Introduction to the FGS CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description 

a. Part 6, Automatic Flight Description 

B. FGS Workbook (W083) 

1. Sections 1.0 through 4.0 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 2 

FIQ-C078-SG 1-41-2 01 JUN 12 

Introduction to the 

Flight Guidance System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the function, 

characteristics and operations of the Flight Guidance System. 

B. Objective 

1. Select the characteristics of the Flight Guidance System panel and 

components. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Introduction to the Flight Guidance System 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Introduction to the Flight Guidance System 

1. Introduction 

2. Flight Guidance System Panels 

a. FGS Panels Locations 

b. FGS Components 

3. Autothrottle Systems 

a. Autothrottle Component Location 

b. Autothrottle Control Panel 

c. Thrust Rating Computer 

d. Autothrottle Disengage Button 

e. TOGA Button 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 2 

FIQ-C078-SG 1-41-3 01 JUN 12 

f. Speed Control Test Selector 

g. Autothrottle Indicators 

h. Autothrottle Procedures 

4. Roll Control 

a. Roll Control Components 

b. Roll Control Panel 

c. Navigation Inputs 

5. Pitch Control 

a. Pitch Control Panel Location 

b. Pitch Controls 

6. Flight Director 

a. FD Component Location 

b. FD Controls 

c. FD Indicators 

7. Autopilot System 

a. Autopilot Component Location 

b. Autopilot Controls 

c. Autopilot Indicators 

8. Segment Summary 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 2 

FIQ-C078-SG 1-41-4 01 JUN 12 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C079-SG 1-42-1 01 OCT 10 

Flight Guidance System 

Autothrottle 

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the functions, 

characteristics and operations of the Flight Guidance System’s Autothrottle 

system. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. FGS Autothrottle CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Materials 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. Flight Guidance System Introduction CBT Lesson 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section 1, Systems Description 

(a) Part 6, Flight Controls/Flight Instruments/Automatic Flight 

(1) Automatic Throttle and Speed Control System 

(2) Automatic Throttle System (ATS) 

C. FGS Workbook, (W083) 

1. Section 5.0 

2. Section 6.0 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C079-SG 1-42-2 01 OCT 10 

Flight Guidance System 

Autothrottle 

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the functions, 

characteristics and operations of the Flight Guidance System’s 

Autothrottle system. 

B. Objectives 

1. Select the operational characteristics of the autothrottle controls 

and indicators. 

2. Select the characteristics of autothrottle modes of operation. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Flight Guidance System Auto Throttle (FGS) 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Controls and Indicators 

1. Introduction 

2. Major Components 

3. Autothrottles - Engage 

4. Autothrottles - Disengage 

5. Illuminated Fail Lights 

6. Extinguished Fail Lights 

7. Speed Mode Operation 

8. N1 Mode Operation 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C079-SG 1-42-3 01 OCT 10 

9. Thrust Rating Computer 

10. Speed/N1 Operation 

11. ADI Fast/Slow Indicator 

12. TOGA Button 

13. Summary 

14. Controls and Indicators Quiz 

C. Modes of Operation 

1. Introduction 

2. Takeoff 

3. Speed Mode 

4. FMA Displays 

5. ADI Fast/Slow Indicator 

6. Airspeed Indicator 

7. Safety Limits 

8. Overspeed Protection 

9. Alpha Speed 

10. Disengaged ATS Landing 

11. Engaged ATS Landing 

12. Speed Control Test 

13. Summary 

14. Modes of Operation Quiz 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C079-SG 1-42-4 01 OCT 10 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C080-SG 1-43-1 01 OCT 10 

Flight Guidance System I 

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the function, 

characteristics and operations of the Flight Guidance System’s Roll and Pitch 

systems. 

II. Duration - 1.3 hours 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. FGS I CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Materials 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. FGS Autothrottle CBT Lesson 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section 1, Systems Description 

(a) Part 6, Flight Controls/Automatic Flight 

(1) Roll Mode 

(2) Pitch/Altitude Advisory System 

C. FGS Workbook, (W083) 

1. Section 5.0 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C080-SG 1-43-2 01 OCT 10 

Flight Guidance System I

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the function, 

characteristics and operations of the Flight Guidance System’s Roll and 

Pitch systems. 

B. Objectives 

1. Select the operational characteristics of the FGS Roll Control 

Modes. 

2. Select the operational characteristics of FGS Pitch Control Modes. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Flight Guidance System I 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Roll Control 

1. Introduction 

2. FGS Panel/Roll Indicators 

3. Heading Controls 

a. Heading Control Knob 

b. Heading Select Mode 

c. Heading Hold Mode 

d. AP/FD Engagement 

e. Takeoff Mode 

4. Bank Angle Selector 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C080-SG 1-43-3 01 OCT 10 

a. Bank Angle Selector 

b. Bank Angle Selector - Description 

c. Bank Angle Selector - Operation 

5. RAD/FMS Mode 

a. RAD/FMS Switch 

b. RAD Nav Source 

c. RAD Arm 

d. RAD Capture/Track 

e. Localizer/ILS 

f. FMS Capture/Track 

6. ILS Mode 

a. ILS Switch (Arm) 

b. Localizer Capture/Track 

c. Glideslope Capture/Track 

7. Summary 

8. Roll Control Quiz 

C. Pitch Control 

1. Introduction 

2. Pitch Control Panel 

3. Vertical Speed Wheel 

a. Vertical Speed Wheel 

b. Vertical Spd/Alt Hold Modes 

c. Vert Spd Cautions/Warnings 

4. IAS/MACH Hold 

a. IAS Hold Mode 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C080-SG 1-43-4 01 OCT 10 

b. Mach Hold Mode 

c. Affects of Speed/N-1 Modes 

5. Altitude Preselect 

a. Altitude Preselect Mode 

b. Altitude Arm/Capture 

c. Altitude Hold 

6. Altitude Advisory 

a. Alt Advisory/Capture 

b. Alt Advisory/Deviation 

c. Alt Advisory/Independent Ops 

7. Summary 

8. Pitch Control Quiz 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C081-SG 1-44-1 01 OCT 10 

Flight Guidance System II

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the functions, 

characteristics and operations of the Flight Guidance System’s Flight Director 

and Autopilot. 

II. Duration - 1.2 hours 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. FGS II CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Materials 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. Complete FGS I CBT Lesson 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section I, Systems Description 

(a) Part 6, Automatic Flight pertaining to the Flight Director 

(b) Part 6, Automatic Flight pertaining to the Autopilot 

C. FGS Workbook, (W083) 

1. Section 4.0 

2. Section 5.0 

3. Section 6.0 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C081-SG 1-44-2 01 OCT 10 

Flight Guidance System II

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the functions, 

characteristics and operations of the Flight Guidance System’s Flight 

Director and Autopilot. 

B. Objectives 

1. Select the operational characteristics of the Flight Director 

components. 

2. Select the operational characteristics of the KC-10 Autopilot 

components. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Flight Guidance System II 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Flight Director 

1. Introduction 

2. Flight Director Control Panels 

3. ADI V-Command Bars 

4. Flight Mode Annunciators 

5. Flight Director Command Selector 

a. FD Selector Positions 

b. FD Light 

c. FD Flag 

6. Mode of Conflict 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C081-SG 1-44-3 01 OCT 10 

a. Mode Conflict Indication 

b. Mode Conflict Causes 

7. Modes of Operation Overview 

a. Modes of Operation Overview 

b. Back Course Localizer Approach 

(1) Back Crs Localizer Description 

(2) Back Crs Localizer Operation 

c. Takeoff Mode 

(1) Takeoff Mode Description 

(2) Pitch – All Engines Operating 

(3) Pitch – Engine Failure 

(4) Roll Guidance 

d. Go-Around Mode 

8. Summary 

9. Quiz 

C. Autopilot 

1. Introduction 

2. Autopilot Components 

3. Autopilot Controls 

a. A/P Levers Description 

b. A/P CWS - Roll Axis 

c. A/P CWS - Pitch Axis 

d. A/P CWS - FMA Displays 

e. A/P CMD - Description 

f. A/P Caution 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C081-SG 1-44-4 01 OCT 10 

g. A/P Basic Modes 

4. Mode Conflict 

5. Command CWS 

a. Command CWS Description 

b. FMA/V-Command Bars 

6. Turbulence Mode 

a. Turbulence Mode Description 

b. Turbulence Mode Operation 

c. Turb Air Penetration Speed 

d. Turbulence Mode Termination 

7. Autopilot Advisory Lights 

a. Advisory Lights Location 

b. Autopilot Fail Lights 

c. Out-of-Trim Lights 

8. Summary 

9. Quiz 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C082-SG 1-45-1 01 OCT 10 

Flight Guidance System 

Procedures Integration

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the functions, 

characteristics and operations of the Flight Guidance System’s procedures 

integration. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. FGS Procedures Integration CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review 

A. Complete Flight Guidance System I and II CBT Lessons 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IV, Normal Procedures 

a. Pilot’s Interior Inspection, Cockpit Preparation, and Before 

Takeoff information pertaining to Flight Guidance Usage 

b. Approach information Pertaining to Flight Guidance Usage 

(1) ILS Approach & ILS Back course Approach 

2. Section V, Mission Preparation 

a. Operating Techniques for: 

(1) Figure 5-1 Takeoff and Climb 

(2) Figure 5-2 Altitude Pre-select and Advisory 

(3) Figure 5-3 Turbulence Penetration 

(4) Figure 5-4 Descent Profile 

(5) Figure 5-5 Holding Pattern 

(6) Figure 5-6 FMS Holding Pattern 

(7) Figure 5-7 Flight Director Manual ILS Approach 

(8) Figure 5-8 Go-Around from Flight Director Approach 

(9) Figure 5-9 CMD CWS During ILS Approach - Autopilot 

Lever in CMD 

(10) Figure 5-10 Flight Guidance System Back Course 

Approach 

(11) Figure 5-11 Flight Guidance System GPS Approach 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C082-SG 1-45-2 01 OCT 10 

Flight Guidance System 

Procedures Integration

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. The previous lessons on the Flight Guidance System discussed the 

operations of the individual components. This lesson uses a computerbased mission scenario to demonstrate integrated system operation. It 

explains and demonstrates the integrated operation using on-screen text 

and narration. This lesson directs you through the checklists and flight 

procedures during a typical mission. The scenario covers the operation in 

these mission phases. 

B. Objective 

1. Perform the FGS Procedures. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Lesson Introduction 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. FGS Procedures Integration 

1. Introduction 

2. Mission Data 

3. Preflight 

4. Cockpit Preparation 

5. Before Takeoff 

a. Takeoff Flex (TRC) 

b. TOGA Button/Alt Preselect 

c. Altitude Arm 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C082-SG 1-45-3 01 OCT 10 

6. Takeoff 

a. Heading Preselect 

b. Takeoff Roll 

c. Climb Power (TRC) 

d. N1 Mode/Vert Spd 

7. Climb 

a. AP Engage/IAS Mode 

b. Hdg Sel/Bank Angle Limit 

c. Alt Set/Alt Arm 

d. Alt Advisory/Alt Cap 

8. Cruise 

a. RAD Arm (VOR) 

b. Command CWS/RAD Track 

c. Altitude Arm 

d. Enroute Climb 

e. MACH Hold/ALT CAP 

f. MCR Power (TRC) 

g. Turbulence Mode 

h. Cancel Turbulence Mode 

9. Descent 

a. Initiate Descent/ATS Off 

b. MACH Hold/IAS Hold 

c. Speed Select/ATS On 

10. Approach 

a. ILS Approach/GA Power (TRC) 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C082-SG 1-45-4 01 OCT 10 

b. Localizer Capture 

c. Arm ILS/Bank Angle Limit 

d. Glideslope Capture 

11. Go-Around 

a. TOGA Button/Go-Around Mode 

b. Alt Arm/Vert Spd 

c. Acceleration/Clean-up 

12. Approach 

a. LOC Backcourse/Alt Arm 

b. CWS/Backcourse Arm 

c. Backcourse Cap/Track 

d. Vert Spd/Alt Hold 

e. AP Disc/Vert Spd 

13. Landing 

14. Summary 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 1 

FIQ-C300-SG 1-46-1 01 JUL 11 

FE Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the procedures 

used in the initial aircraft inspection, ensuring the aircraft is safe to establish 

electrical, pneumatic, and hydraulic power. It also prepares the aircraft for the 

interior and exterior preflight inspection. 

II. Duration - 1.7 hours 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IV, Normal Procedures 

a. Flight Crew Preflight and Preparation for Flight 

b. Preflight and Cockpit Preparation 

(1) FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 1 

FIQ-C300-SG 1-46-2 01 JUL 11 

FE Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson covers the procedures used in the initial aircraft inspection, 

ensuring the aircraft is safe to establish electrical, pneumatic, and 

hydraulic power. It also prepares the aircraft for the interior and exterior 

preflight inspection. The first segment discusses the procedures in detail 

using the Dash-1 expanded procedures. The second segment allows you 

to practice the steps using the checklist. The lesson test evaluates your 

knowledge of the procedures. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the Flight Engineer’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 

procedures. 

2. Perform the Flight Engineer’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 

procedures. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection Procedures Identification 

1. Introduction 

2. Exterior 

a. Wheel Chocks 

b. Landing Gear Doors 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 1 

c. Flight Control Surfaces 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 2 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 1 

FIQ-C300-SG 1-46-3 01 JUL 11 

d. APU Inlet/Exhaust Areas 

e. Boom and Drogue 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 3 

f. Pitot & Inlet Covers 

3. Interior 

a. AFTO Form 781 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 4 

b. Battery Switch/Voltage 

c. Fuel Dump Switch 

d. L-Band SATCOM 

e. Spoiler Handle 

f. Flap/Slat Handle 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 5 

g. Landing Gear Handle 

h. UHF Radios 

i. ARC-164 (V) UHF Radios 

j. ARC-171 UHF Radios 

k. VHF-1 Radio 

l. Cabin Air Shutoff Handle 

m. APU and Eng Fire Detect Sys 

(1) Fire Warning Setup 

(2) Fire Warning Test 

(3) Agent Low Lights Check 

n. APU 

(1) APU 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 1 

FIQ-C300-SG 1-46-4 01 JUL 11 

(a) Embedded Quiz Question 6 

(2) APU Set For Start 

(3) APU Fuel Set 

(a) Embedded Quiz Question 7 

(4) APU Start 

(a) Embedded Quiz Question 8 

o. Electrical Power (APU/External) 

p. Remove External Power 

q. CAB PRESS/Outflow Valve Position 

r. Equipment Panel 

(1) Test Select/Config Switches 

(2) Ignition Exciter Transfer Switch 

(3) Fuel Quantity Channel Selector 

(4) Manifold Fail Loop Selector Switch 

(5) Pitot Heater Select Switches 

(6) Oxygen System Test Selector 

s. Circuit Breakers 

t. Hydraulic System 

(1) Hydraulic System 

(a) Embedded Quiz Question 9 

(2) Reversible Motor Pump Check 

(3) Auxiliary Pump Number One 

(4) Auxiliary Pump Number Two 

(5) 2-3/1-3 Reversible Motor Pump O 

(6) Temp., Quantity, Quantity Bugs 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 1 

FIQ-C300-SG 1-46-5 01 JUL 11 

(7) Rudder Standby Power OFF Light 

(8) Engine Hyd Pump Switches 

u. Manifold Fail/Supply Lockout – Part 1 

v. Manifold Fail/Supply Lockout – Part 2 

w. Center Inst Panel Flow Indicator 

x. Pneu and Air Conditioning System 

y. Trim Air Switch 

z. FE Annunciator Lights Part One 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 10 

aa. FE Annunciator Lights Part Two 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 11 

bb. FE Annunciator Lights Part Three 

cc. CDU Power Switches 

dd. MSUs/ READY NAV BATT Lts 

ee. FMS – Part 1 

ff. FMS – Part 2 

gg. FMS – Part 3 

4. Summary 

C. Exterior / Interior Initial Inspection Procedures Performance 

1. Introduction 

2. Exterior 

a. Wheel Chocks 

b. Landing Gear Doors 

c. Flight Control Surface 

d. APU Inlet/Exhaust Areas 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 1 

FIQ-C300-SG 1-46-6 01 JUL 11 

e. Boom and Drogue 

f. Pitot and Engine Covers 

3. Interior 

a. AFTO Form 781 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 1 

b. Fuel Dump Switch 

c. L-Band SATCOM 

d. Spoiler Handle 

e. Landing Gear Handle 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 2 

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 3 

f. VHF-1 Radio 

g. Cabin Air Shutoff Handle 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 4 

h. APU 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 5 

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 6 

(3) Embedded Quiz Question 7 

(4) Embedded Quiz Question 8 

i. CAB PRESS/Outflow Valve/Lighting 

j. FE Equipment Panel 

k. Circuit Breakers 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 9 

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 10 

(3) Embedded Quiz Question 11 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 1 

FIQ-C300-SG 1-46-7 01 JUL 11 

(4) Embedded Quiz Question 12 

(5) Embedded Quiz Question 13 

(6) Embedded Quiz Question 14 

(7) Embedded Quiz Question 15 

(8) Embedded Quiz Question 16 

(9) Embedded Quiz Question 17 

(10) Embedded Quiz Question 18 

(11) Embedded Quiz Question 19 

(12) Embedded Quiz Question 20 

(13) Embedded Quiz Question 21 

l. FMS – Part 1 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 22 

m. FMS – Part 2 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 23 

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 24 

(3) Embedded Quiz Question 25 

(4) Embedded Quiz Question 26 

4. Summary 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 1 

FIQ-C300-SG 1-46-8 01 JUL 11 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C302-SG 1-47-1 01 OCT 10 

FE Interior Inspection I

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce the procedures used in the 

initial aircraft inspection. This lesson is presented in three segments and 

discusses the inspection procedures for the Overhead Panel, the Pilot’s, Center, 

and Copilot’s Instrument Panels, and the Center Pedestal. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. FE Interior Inspection I CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IV, Normal Procedures 

a. Preflight and Cockpit Preparation 

(1) FE’s Interior Inspection 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C302-SG 1-47-2 01 OCT 10 

FE Interior Inspection I

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson covers the procedures used in the initial aircraft inspection. 

The first segment discusses the procedures for inspecting the Pilot’s 

Overhead Panel. The second segment discusses the procedures for 

inspecting the Pilot’s, the Center, and the Copilot’s Instrument Panels. 

The third segment discusses the procedures for inspecting the Center 

Pedestal. All procedures are discussed in detail using the Dash-1 

expanded procedures. The lesson test evaluates your knowledge of the 

procedures. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the Interior Inspection procedures for the Pilot’s Overhead 

Panel. 

2. Identify the Interior Inspection procedures for the Pilot’s, Copilot’s, 

and Center Instrument Panels. 

3. Identify the Interior Inspection procedures for the Center Pedestal. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. FE Interior Inspection I 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Pilot’s Overhead Panel 

1. Introduction 

2. Pilot’s Windows 

3. Master Warning/Caution Lights 

4. Overhead Panel Scan 

5. Radar Transponder 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C302-SG 1-47-3 01 OCT 10 

6. HYD FLT Control Lights 

7. Flap Limit Selector 

8. Elevator Feel System 

9. ADG Switch 

10. Yaw Damp System 

11. Anti-skid System 

12. Compasses 

13. HF Radios 

14. INS/FD CMD/CADC Selector 

15. IFF CADC Select 

16. Voice Recorder 

17. Engine Start Panel 

18. Emergency Power Switch 

19. Emergency Lights 

20. Seat Belts 

21. Antenna Switches 

22. Beacon Light 

23. GPWS 

24. ARO Station Alarm 

25. ELT 1 and 2 Switches 

26. Stall Warning 

27. Max Speed Warn 

28. Speed Control 

29. Windshield Anti-ice, Defog 

30. Pitot Heat Selector 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C302-SG 1-47-4 01 OCT 10 

31. Engine & ANT Anti-ice 

32. Lights 

33. Pilot Annunciator Lights 

34. Summary 

35. Pilot’s Overhead Panels Quiz 

C. Pilot’s, Copilot’s, and Center Instrument Panel 

1. Introduction 

2. Scan Pattern 

3. Pilot’s Instrument Panel 

4. Reverser Lights 

5. Engine Instruments 

6. Speed Brake and Slat 

7. Thrust Computer and TAT 

8. Flap/Slat Position 

9. Surface Position Indicator 

10. Gear Lights and Warning Horn 

11. Copilot Inst Pnl and Windows 

12. Summary 

13. Pilot’s, Copilot’s, and Center Instrument Panel Quiz 

D. Center Pedestal 

1. Introduction 

2. Longitudinal Trim System 

a. Pilot’s Trim Switches 

b. Long Trim Handles 

c. Alternate Trim System 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C302-SG 1-47-5 01 OCT 10 

d. Copilot’s Trim Switches 

3. Parking Brakes 

4. Spoiler Handle 

5. Takeoff Warning Horn 

6. Parking Brakes 

7. Fuel Levers 

8. Flap/Slat, Flap T.O. Selector 

9. IFF/ETCAS 

10. Weather Radar 

11. Aileron Trim 

12. Rudder Trim 

13. ADG Release 

14. Passenger Address System 

15. Summary 

16. Center Pedestal Quiz 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C302-SG 1-47-6 01 OCT 10 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 

FIQ-C303-SG 1-48-1 01 JUL 11 

FE Interior Inspection II

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - This lesson continues with the Flight Engineer’s procedures followed 

in the initial aircraft inspection. The previous lesson stopped the inspection 

following the Center Pedestal. This lesson begins with the Flight Engineer’s 

Panels and continues to the end of the procedure. The steps are discussed in 

detail using the Dash-1 expanded procedures. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. FE Interior Inspection II CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IV, Normal Procedures 

a. Preflight and Cockpit Preparation 

(1) FE’s Interior Inspection 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 

FIQ-C303-SG 1-48-2 01 JUL 11 

FE Interior Inspection II

Student Outline 

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson continues with the Flight Engineer’s procedures followed in 

the Initial Aircraft Inspection. The previous lesson stopped the inspection 

following the Center Pedestal. This lesson begins with the Flight 

Engineers Panels and continues to the end of the procedure. The steps 

are discussed in detail using the Dash-1 expanded procedures. The 

lesson test evaluates your knowledge of the procedures. 

B. Objective 

1. Identify interior inspection procedures for the Flight Engineer’s 

Panels. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. FE Interior Inspection II 

1. Lesson Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. FE Interior Inspection 

1. Scan Pattern 

2. Audio Panel 

3. Exterior/Interior Lights 

4. Hydraulic System 

5. Electrical System 

a. CSDs / Gen Fail Lights 

b. Generators / AC Load / Bus Off Lights 

c. Bus Ties / Emergency Power / DC Load 

d. DC Bus Off Lights / DC Tie / Battery 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 

FIQ-C303-SG 1-48-3 01 JUL 11 

e. Volt / Amp / Freq Selector 

6. Oxygen Mask Switch Guard 

7. Pneumatic and A / C Systems 

a. Scan 

b. Pneumatic & Air Conditioning Lights 

c. Pneumatic Supply / Temp-Press Gages 

d. Isolation Valves / Wing Anti-Ice Switches 

e. Flow Gages / Pack Selector 

f. Pack Indicator Selector 

g. Temp Sel / Avionic Flow / Trim Air 

h. Valve Position / Temp Gages / Lav-Galley 

8. Brake Temp System Test 

9. Oxygen Quantity Switch 

10. Cabin Cargo Smoke Detectors 

11. Annunciator Panel 

12. Pressurization 

13. Clock 

14. Engine Instruments 

15. L-Band SATCOM 

16. Gear Lights 

17. AR Receptacle Audio Switch 

18. Flight Recorder Switch 

19. Maintenance Jack Switch 

20. Potable Water System 

21. AR Receptacle Door Handle 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 

FIQ-C303-SG 1-48-4 01 JUL 11 

22. Fuel System 

a. Fuel System Lights 

b. Fuel Quantity Test 

c. Aft Pump Switches 

d. Fuel Temp / Fuel Used Reset 

e. Manifold Scavenge / AR Gages / Isol Valve 

f. Gross Weight Indicator 

g. AR Boom 

h. Tanker/Receiver Manifold Scavenge 

i. Wing Pod Control Panel 

23. Hyd Motor Pump Switches 

24. Aux Hyd Pumps 

25. Oxy Mask / Regulator / Interphone 

a. Audio Panel 

b. Oxy Supply / Diluter Lever-100% 

c. Don Mask / Check Emergency 

d. Interphone Check / Supply Lever Off 

26. AR Receptacle Shutoff Valve 

27. Summary 

28. FE Interior Inspection Quiz 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C304-SG 1-49-1 01 OCT 10 

FE Interior Inspection III

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - This lesson continues with the Flight Engineer’s procedures followed 

in the initial aircraft inspection. This lesson allows you to practice the entire 

Flight Engineer Interior Inspection. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials 

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Flight Engineer Interior Inspection III CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IV, Normal Procedures 

a. Preflight and Cockpit Preparation 

(1) FE’s Interior Inspection 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C304-SG 1-49-2 01 OCT 10 

FE Interior Inspection III 

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson allows you to practice and perform the procedures for 

inspecting the Pilot’s station and the Flight Engineer’s station. The lesson 

test evaluates your knowledge of the procedures. 

B. Objective 

1. Perform the FE Interior Inspection Procedures. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. FE Interior Inspection III 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Interior Inspection Procedures Practice 

1. Pilot’s Overhead Panel 

a. Scan Pattern 

b. Pilot’s Windows 

c. Master Warning/Caution 

d. Radar Transponder Selectors 

e. Hydraulic Flight Control Lights 

f. Flap Limit Selector 

g. Elevator Feel System 

h. ADG Switch 

i. Yaw Damp System 

j. Anti-skid System 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C304-SG 1-49-3 01 OCT 10 

k. Compasses 

l. HF Radios 

m. INS/FD CMD/CADC 

n. IFF CADC Select 

o. Voice Recorder 

p. Engine Start Panel 

q. Emergency Power Switch 

r. Emergency Lights 

s. Seat Belts 

t. Antenna Switches 

u. Beacon Light Master Selector 

v. GPWS 

w. ARO Station Alarm 

x. ELT 1 & 2 Switches 

y. Stall Warning System 

z. Max Speed Warn System 

aa. Speed Control 

bb. Windshield Anti-ice 

cc. Windshield Defog 

dd. Pitot Heat Meter Selector 

ee. Engine Antenna Anti-ice Sws 

ff. Lights 

gg. Pilot Annunciator Lights 

2. Forward Instrument Panels 

a. Scan Pattern 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C304-SG 1-49-4 01 OCT 10 

b. Pitot Static Selector 

c. Reverser Lights 

d. Engine Instruments 

e. Speed Brake and Slat Reset Lts 

f. Thrust Computer and TAT 

g. Flap/Slat Position Indicator 

h. Surface Position Indicator 

i. Gear Lights and Warning Horn 

j. Copilot’s Instrument Panel 

k. Copilot’s Window 

3. Center Pedestal 

a. Longitudinal Trim System 

b. Parking Brakes 

c. Spoiler Handle 

d. Takeoff Warning Horn 

e. Parking Brakes Set 

f. Fuel Levers 

g. Flap/Slat Handle 

h. Flap Takeoff Selector 

i. IFF/ETCAS 

j. Weather Radar 

k. Aileron Trim 

l. Rudder Trim 

m. ADG Release Handle 

n. PA System 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C304-SG 1-49-5 01 OCT 10 

4. Flight Engineer’s Panels 

a. Scan pattern 

b. Audio Panel 

c. Exterior/Interior Lights 

d. Hydraulic System 

e. Electrical System 

(1) CSD’s and Generators 

(2) A-C Electrical System 

(3) D-C Electrical System 

(4) Battery Indicators 

f. Oxygen Mask Switch Guard 

g. Pneumatic & Air Conditioning Systems 

h. Brake Temperature System 

i. Oxygen Quantity Switch 

j. Cabin Cargo Smoke Detectors 

k. Annunciator Panel 

l. Pressurization 

m. Clock 

n. Engine Instruments 

o. COMSEC Control Panel 

p. Gear Lights 

q. AR Receptacle Audio Switch 

r. Potable Water System 

s. AR Receptacle Door Handle 

t. Fuel System 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C304-SG 1-49-6 01 OCT 10 

(1) Fuel System Lights 

(2) Fuel Quantity Test 

(3) Aft Pumps, Press Temp 

(4) Fuel Used Counters 

(5) Manifold Scavenge/AR Gages/Isol Valve 

(6) Gross Weight Indicator 

(7) AR Boom 

(8) Tkr/Rec Manifold Scavenge 

(9) Wing Pod Control Panel 

u. Hydraulic Motor Pump Switches 

v. Hydraulic Motor Pumps 

w. AUX HYD Pumps 

x. Oxy Mask, Reg Interphone 

(1) Audio/Oxy Supply/Diluter Lever 

(2) Check Emergency 

(3) Supply Lever Off 

y. AR Receptacle Shutoff Valve 

5. Summary 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-T304-SG 1-50-1 01 OCT 10 

FTD-304 

FE Interior Inspection

I. Purpose – The purpose of this introductory trainer is to allow practice of the 

FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection and the FE’s Interior Inspection. 

II. Duration – 2.0 hours 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Flight Training Device 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

C. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-2 

V. Student Preparation/Review 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IV, Normal Procedures 

a. FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 

b. FE’s Interior Inspection 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-T304-SG 1-50-2 01 OCT 10 

Objectives

Training objectives introduced and practiced during this training mission:

1. Perform Equipment Operation 

2. Perform FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection Procedures 

3. Perform FE’s Interior Inspection Procedures 

4. Perform Fuel Management and Conservation Procedures 

Profile

Instructor may vary profile to meet student needs. 

1. FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 

2. FE’s Interior Inspection 

Mission Briefing 

1. Briefing: While in the FTD the instructor will brief the procedures to be 

accomplished during this FTD period. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C308-SG 1-51-1 01 OCT 10 

Engine Start Procedures

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the checklists and 

procedures used for starting the engines on the KC-10. It discusses the Cockpit 

Preparation and Before Start checklists and the Engine Start Procedures. 

II. Duration - 0.5 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Engine Start Procedures CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IV, Normal Procedures 

a. Preflight and Cockpit Preparation 

(1) Cockpit Preparation 

b. Engine Starting 

(1) Before Start 

(2) Starting Engines 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-2 

1. Cockpit Preparation 

2. Before Start 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C308-SG 1-51-2 01 OCT 10 

Engine Start Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson introduces you to the checklists and procedures used for 

starting the engines on the KC-10. It discusses the Cockpit Preparation 

and Before Start checklists and the Engine Start Procedures. After 

discussing the flow and details of these checklists, there is a practice with 

minimal prompts and remediation directing you to the abbreviated 

checklist. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the Cockpit Preparation Procedures. 

2. Identify Before Start Procedures 

3. Identify Engine Start Procedures 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Engine Start Procedures 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Engine Start Procedures Identification 

1. Checklist Procedures 

2. Cockpit Prep Checklist 

a. Takeoff Data/N1 Limit/V-Bugs 

(1) Takeoff Eata/N1 Limit/V-Bugs 

(2) Takeoff Data Checked 

(3) N1 Limit 

(4) Zero Fuel Weight 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C308-SG 1-51-3 01 OCT 10 

(5) V-Bugs 

(6) Minimum Acceleration Height 

(7) Close or Distant Obstacle 

(8) Two Engine MSL 

(a) No Obstacle 

(b) Flap Selector Set 

b. Altimeters 

c. FMS/INU Present Position/Flight Plan 

d. Oxygen System 

e. Compasses 

f. Yaw Dampers 

g. Anti-Skid 

h. Emergency Switch Light 

i. Stall Warn/Max Speed/Speed Cont 

j. Windshield Anti-Ice/Defog 

k. Pitot Heat 

l. Exterior Lights 

m. Cabin Cargo Smoke Switch/Avionics Flow Switch 

n. Pressurization Set 

o. Cockpit Prep Checklist Completed 

3. Before Start Checklist 

a. Before Start Checklist 

b. INUs 

c. Beacon Light Selector 

d. Parking Brake/Fuel Levers 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C308-SG 1-51-4 01 OCT 10 

e. Fuel Pumps 

f. Pack Function Selectors 

g. Engine Ignition Selector 

h. Pneumatic Pressure 

i. BO Prep/Cargo Door Lights 

j. Cabin Door Lights 

k. Before Start Checklist Completed 

4. Engine Start Procedures 

a. Engine Start Procedures 

b. Engines Clear to Start 

c. Ground Control Clearance 

d. Pneumatic Pressure 

e. Fuel Lever On 

f. Initial Fuel Flow Indication 

g. EGT Rise 

h. 45% N2 - Starter Cutout 

i. Oil Pressure/Temp/Quantity Bug 

j. Hydraulic Panel Set 

k. Caution N1 Indication 

5. Summary 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C309-SG 1-52-1 01 OCT 10 

Before Takeoff Procedures

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce the Before Takeoff 

procedures. It describes the procedures from after the engines are started, using 

the Before Taxi and the Before Takeoff Checklists. 

II. Duration - 0.5 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Before Takeoff Procedures CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IV, Normal Procedures 

a. Taxi and Takeoff 

(1) Before Taxi 

(2) Before Takeoff 

B. T.O. 1C-10K(A)-1CL-2 

1. Before Taxi 

2. Before Takeoff 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C309-SG 1-52-2 01 OCT 10 

Before Takeoff Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson discusses the Before Takeoff Procedures. It describes the 

procedures from after the engines are started, using the Before Taxi and 

the Before Takeoff Checklists. The lesson consists of two segments and 

a Test. The first segment discusses the Flight Engineer procedures in 

detail, and reviews the Pilot procedures, using the expanded Dash-1 

procedures. Appropriate Notes, Cautions and Warnings are discussed. 

The test evaluates your knowledge of the procedures. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the before takeoff procedures. 

2. Perform the before takeoff procedures. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Before Takeoff Procedures 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Before Takeoff Procedures Identification 

1. Before Taxi Checklist 

a. Before Taxi Checklist 

b. Windows 

c. Anti-Ice 

d. Hydraulic System 

e. Pneumatic and Air Conditioning 

f. Fire Bottle/Ground Equipment/Gear Pins 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C309-SG 1-52-3 01 OCT 10 

g. Before Taxi Checklist Complete 

2. Before Takeoff Checklist 

a. Before Takeoff Checklist 

b. Flaps/Slats 

c. Flight Controls 

d. Trim 

e. Spoilers 

f. Crew Briefing 

g. CDUs/EHSIs/Radio Aids 

h. Flight Instruments 

i. Thrust Computer 

j. Number 2 Engine 

(1) Number 2 Engine 

(2) Engine Ignition Switch 

(3) Engine Start Switch 

(4) Fuel Lever 

(5) EGT Rise/Starter Pop-Out 

(6) Oil Quantity Bugs 

k. Hydraulic System 

(1) Hydraulic system 

(2) Normal Indications 

(3) One Three Motor Pump 

l. Electrical System 

(1) Electrical System 

(2) Parallel Generators 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C309-SG 1-52-4 01 OCT 10 

(3) Volt/Amp/Frequency Selector 

m. APU 

(1) APU 

(2) APU Isolation Valve 

(3) APU Master Switch 

n. Manifold Fail/Supply Lockout 

(1) Pneumatic System 

(2) System 1 Test 

o. L-Band Satcom 

p. HF Radios 

q. Fuel System 

r. FGS/ALT Preselect 

s. Brake Temperature(s) 

t. Cabin Report/Iridium Phone 

u. Pneumatic System 

(1) Pneumatic System 

(2) Bleeds Off Takeoff 

(3) N1 Manual Set 

v. Radar 

w. IFF/ETCAS 

x. HI-Int/Landing Lights 

y. Annunciator Panels 

z. Before Takeoff Checklist Complete 

3. Summary 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C320-SG 1-53-1 01 OCT 10 

Takeoff Procedures

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce the normal takeoff 

procedures from "In position for Takeoff", with the line items completed, through 

the portion of the After Takeoff/Climb checklist accomplished immediately after 

the first power reduction, before reaching 10,000 feet. 

II. Duration - 0.5 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials 

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Takeoff Procedures CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section 1V, Normal Procedures 

a. Taxi and Takeoff 

(1) Takeoff 

b. Climb and Cruise 

(1) After Takeoff/Climb 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C320-SG 1-53-2 01 OCT 10 

Takeoff Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson discusses the normal takeoff procedures from ready for 

takeoff through completion of the steps of the After Takeoff and Climb 

Checklist that are accomplished after the first power reduction. The test 

confirms your knowledge of the procedures. 

B. Objective 

1. Identify Takeoff Procedures 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Takeoff Procedures 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Takeoff Procedures Identification 

1. Crew Duties 

a. Crew Duties 

b. Autopilot Engaged 

c. Autopilot Not Engaged 

d. Deviations 

e. PF/PNF 

2. Takeoff Procedures 

a. Warm Up Time 

b. N1-40/45 Percent 

c. Takeoff Warning CAUTION 

d. Takeoff Power 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C320-SG 1-53-3 01 OCT 10 

e. 80 Knots 

f. No Clamp 

g. Monitor Winds 

h. V1/Rotate 

i. V2 Plus 10 

j. Gear/Spoilers 

k. Climb Power 

l. 1000 Feet Up 

m. Noise Abatement 

3. After Takeoff/Climb Checklist 

a. Landing Gear/Lights 

b. Thrust Computer/N1 

c. Pressurization/Spoilers 

d. Flaps/Slats 

e. Flap Takeoff Selector 

f. Acceleration 

4. Summary 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C320-SG 1-53-4 01 OCT 10 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C330-SG 1-54-1 01 OCT 10 

Climb/Cruise Procedures

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce the Climb/Cruise 

Procedures. The lesson discusses the procedures after the aircraft is cleaned up 

and climbing to altitude. 

II. Duration - 0.5 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Climb/Cruise Procedures CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IV, Normal Procedures 

a. After Takeoff/Climb 

b. Climb Information 

c. Cruise Information 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C330-SG 1-54-2 01 OCT 10 

Climb/Cruise Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson discusses Climb/Cruise Procedures after the aircraft is 

cleaned up and climbing to altitude. There are two segments and a test. 

The first segment, using the expanded Dash-1, covers the Flight Engineer 

procedures in detail and reviews the Pilot procedures. The second 

segment, using the abbreviated checklist, leads you through the checklist 

procedures. Appropriate Notes, Cautions and Warnings are discussed. 

The test evaluates your knowledge of the procedures. 

B. Objective 

1. Identify the climb/cruise procedures. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Climb / Cruise Procedures 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

3. Identify the Climb/Cruise Procedures 

a. Departure/Climb 

(1) Altitude Arm 

(2) RAD Arm/Track 

(3) Acceleration/IAS Hold 

b. After Takeoff/Climb Checklist 

(1) BO/Lights/Seat Belt 

(2) Transition Altitude 

(3) SATCOM 

(4) Iridium Phone 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C330-SG 1-54-3 01 OCT 10 

(5) Checklist Complete 

c. Aircraft Systems 

(1) Engines 

(2) Hydraulics 

(3) Electrical 

(4) Fuel 

(5) Pneumatics 

(6) Air Conditioning 

(7) Pressurization 

(8) Annunciators/Fire Det 

(9) Engine Oil 

d. Climb/Level Off 

(1) Mach Hold 

(2) Alt Cap/Speed Mode 

e. Fuel Management 

f. Fuel Status/Aircraft Forms 

g. Summary 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C330-SG 1-54-4 01 OCT 10 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C351-SG 1-55-1 01 OCT 10 

Descent Procedures

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce the KC-10 Descent 

Checklist and descent profiles. It covers the descent down to ten thousand feet. 

II. Duration - 0.5 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Descent Procedures CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IV, Normal Procedures 

a. Descent and Landing 

(1) Descent Information 

(2) Descent 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C351-SG 1-55-2 01 OCT 10 

Descent Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson discusses the KC-10 Descent Checklist and descent profiles. 

It covers descent down to ten thousand feet. The Flight Engineer 

procedures are covered in detail; Pilot procedures are reviewed. There 

are two segments and a test. The first segment discusses the procedures 

in detail using the Dash-1 expanded procedures. In the second segment, 

you will practice the checklist steps. The test evaluates your knowledge of 

the procedures. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify the descent procedures. 

2. Perform the descent procedures. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Descent Procedures 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Descent Procedures 

1. Landing Data/V-Bugs 

a. Landing Data Requirements 

b. Tab Data (Pilot) 

c. V-Bugs 

d. Approach Speed 

e. Reference Ground Speed 

f. Approach Speed Procedures 

2. Crew Briefing 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C351-SG 1-55-3 01 OCT 10 

a. Briefing Items 

b. Required Call-Outs 

c. GPWS/Ref Grd Speed 

3. Approach RAIM 

4. Radio Altimeters 

5. Windshield Anti-Ice 

6. HF Radios 

7. Pressurization 

8. L-BAND SATCOM 

9. Altimeters 

10. FMS Baroset 

11. Descent Profiles 

a. Descent Profiles 

b. Long Range Descent 

c. Penetration Descent 

d. Enroute Descent 

12. Enroute Descent Procedures 

13. Aircraft Systems 

14. Call-Outs/Transition Altitude 

15. Speed Reduction/IAS Hold 

16. Summary 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C351-SG 1-55-4 01 OCT 10 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C352-SG 1-56-1 01 OCT 10 

Approach Procedures

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the Approach 

Checklist, Downwind Checklist, and Approach Procedures. 

II. Duration - 0.5 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Approach Procedures CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IV, Normal Procedures 

a. Descent and Landing 

(1) Approach Information 

(2) Approach 

(3) Before Landing Information 

(4) Before Landing 

b. After Landing and Parking 

(1) Downwind 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C352-SG 1-56-2 01 OCT 10 

Approach Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson discusses the Approach Checklist, Downwind Checklist, and 

approach procedures. Appropriate Notes, Cautions, and Warnings are 

discussed. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify Approach Procedures. 

2. Perform Approach Procedures. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Approach Procedures 

1. Introduction 

2. Objective 

B. Approach Procedures Identification 

1. Approach Checklist 

a. Approach Checklist 

b. Fuel Panel Set 

(1) Fuel Panel Set 

(2) Notes, Caution & Warning 

c. Exterior Lights Set 

d. Seat Belts 

e. Thrust Computer 

f. CDUs/EHSIs/Radio Aids 

g. Altimeters 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C352-SG 1-56-3 01 OCT 10 

h. Annunciator Panels 

i. Iridium Phone/Checklist Complete 

2. Downwind Checklist 

a. Downwind/Touch and Gos 

b. Approach Procedures 

c. Aircraft Configuration 

d. Cleared for Approach 

e. FMS/CDUs 

f. VOR/ADF/RMI Selector 

g. ‘1000 Feet Above’ Callout 

h. Landing Gear Warning 

i. Zero Extend Min Man Speed 

j. 22/Extend Min Man Speed 

k. Localizer Arm 

l. Localizer Capture 

m. Final Approach Course 

n. Final Approach/Checklist Complete 

3. Before Landing Checklist 

a. Before Landing Checklist 

b. Landing Gear Extension 

c. Final Flaps/Salmon Bug 

d. Landing Gear Down/Four Green 

e. Landing Lights/Lights/Spoilers 

f. Anti-Skid Test 

g. Brake Pressure/Temperature 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-C352-SG 1-56-4 01 OCT 10 

h. Flaps/Slats 

i. Bank Angle Selector/Checklist Complete 

j. PF/PNF Duties 

k. FE Duties 

l. Land/Go Around 

m. Uncoupled Approach 

n. Manual Approach 

o. Non-Precision Approach 

p. Circling Approach 

q. VFR Approach 

r. Landing Gear 

4. Summary 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Landing and Missed Approach 

Procedures

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to discuss the landing procedures, 

including Landing and Missed Approach. The lesson covers from being lined up 

on final approach through touchdown and braking. 

II. Duration - 0.5 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Landing and Missed Approach Procedures CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IV, Normal Procedures 

a. Descent and Landing 

(1) Before Landing Information 

(2) Before Landing 

CH 3 

FIQ-C361-SG 1-57-1 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Landing and Missed Approach 

Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson discusses the landing procedures, including Landing and 

Missed Approach. The lesson covers from being lined up on final 

approach through touchdown and braking. The lesson consists of one 

segment and a Test. The segment discusses the Flight Engineer 

procedures in detail, and reviews the Pilot procedures, using the 

expanded Dash-1 procedures. Your responsibilities are to monitor and 

backup the Pilots. Appropriate Notes, Cautions and Warnings are 

discussed. The test evaluates your knowledge of the procedures. 

B. Objective 

1. Identify Landing and Missed Approach Procedures. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Landing and Missed Approach Procedures 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

3. Landing Procedures 

a. Glidepath 

(1) Glidepath 

(2) Stabilized for Landing 

(3) Aim Point 

b. The Flare 

c. Spoilers 

d. Thrust Reversers 

CH 3 

FIQ-C361-SG 1-57-2 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

(1) Thrust Reversers 

(2) Reverser Interlocks 

(3) Landing Ground Roll 

(4) Maximum Reverse Thrust 

(5) 80/60 Knots / Reverse Call 

(6) Reverse Thrust Limits 

e. Brakes 

f. Taxi Speed 

4. Missed Approach 

a. Missed Approach 

b. Initial Procedures 

(1) Initial Procedures 

(2) Go Around 

(3) TOGA/Spoilers 

(4) FGS - Go Around 

(5) Autothrottles 

(6) Climbout 

c. Normal Procedures 

(1) Obstacle Clearance 

(2) Altitude Preselect 

(3) Vertical Speed Wheel 

(4) Speed Select Knob 

(5) Flap Overspeed Protection 

(6) Cleanup Speeds 

(7) Compliance 

CH 3 

FIQ-C361-SG 1-57-3 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

d. Crew Coordination 

5. Summary 

III. Exam 

FIQ-C361-SG 1-57-4 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

After Landing Procedures

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - This lesson introduces you to the checklists and procedures used 

after a normal landing. 

II. Duration - 0.5 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. After Landing Procedures CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IV, Normal Procedures 

a. After Landing 

b. Parking-Engine Shutdown 

c. Leaving Aircraft 

CH 3 

FIQ-C371-SG 1-58-1 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

After Landing Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson introduces you to the checklists and procedures used after a 

normal landing. After discussing the flow and details of these checklists, 

there is a practice with minimal prompts and remediation directing you to 

the abbreviated checklist. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify After Landing Procedures. 

2. Perform After Landing Procedures 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. After Landing Procedures 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. After Landing Procedures 

1. After Landing Checklist 

a. After Landing Checklist 

b. IFF/WX Radar 

c. Iridium Phone 

d. APU 

e. HI-INT/Landing Lts 

f. Anti-ice 

g. Spoilers 

h. Flaps/Slats 

CH 3 

FIQ-C371-SG 1-58-2 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

i. Trim 

j. Hydraulic System 

k. Number 2 Fuel Lever 

l. Brake Press/Temperature 

m. After Landing Cklst -Complete 

2. Parking - Eng Shutdn Cklst 

a. Parking Brakes 

b. Aux Hydraulic Pump 

c. Electrical Power 

d. Fuel Levers 

e. Exterior Lights 

f. Fuel Panel 

g. Seat Belts – Parking Checklist Complete 

3. Leaving Aircraft Cklst 

a. Parking Brakes 

b. INUs Accuracy Check – Part 1 

c. INUs Accuracy Check – Part 2 

d. INUs Accuracy Check – Part 3 

e. WX Radar/IFF Mode 4 Codes 

f. FMS Radio Master Power 

g. Oxygen Regulators 

h. Radios 

i. GPS Crypto Keys 

j. CDU Power Switches 

k. Panel Lights 

CH 3 

FIQ-C371-SG 1-58-3 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

l. Emergency Lights 

m. Overhead Panel Items 

n. Aux Hydraulic Pumps 

o. Cabin Cargo Smoke Switch 

p. L-BAND SATCOM 

q. Iridium Phone 

r. APU 

s. BAT Switch 

t. FMS Data Cartridge 

u. Exterior Walk Around 

4. Full Stop Taxiback Checklist 

a. Full Stop Taxiback Checklist 

b. Brake Temperatures 

5. Summary 

III. Exam 

FIQ-C371-SG 1-58-4 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-T305-SG 1-59-1 01 OCT 10 

FTD-305 

FE Interior Inspection

I. Purpose – The purpose of this FTD mission is for continued practice of the 

FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection and the FE’s Interior Inspection. 

II. Duration – 2.0 hours 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Flight Training Device 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

C. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-2 

V. Student Preparation/Review 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IV, Normal Procedures 

a. FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 

b. FE’s Interior Inspection 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-T305-SG 1-59-2 01 OCT 10 

Objectives

Training objectives practiced during this training mission:

1. Perform Equipment Operation 

2. Perform FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection Procedures 

3. Perform FE’s Interior Inspection Procedures 

4. Perform Fuel Management and Conservation Procedures 

Profile

Instructor may vary profile to meet student needs. 

1. FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 

2. FE’s Interior Inspection 

Mission Briefing 

1. Briefing: While in the FTD the instructor will brief the procedures to be 

accomplished during this FTD period. 

Note: Other normal procedures checklists may be discussed or introduced time 

permitting.
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-T306-SG 1-60-1 01 OCT 10

FTD-306 

Normal Procedures

I. Purpose – The purpose of this trainer is to allow practice of normal procedures 

for FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection, FE’s Interior Inspection, starting 

engines, taxi, takeoff, climb, cruise, descent, approach, landing, after landing, 

and leaving the aircraft. 

II. Duration – 2.0 hours

III. Reference Materials 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Flight Manual Performance Data 

IV. Equipment and Materials 

A. Flight Training Device 

B. TOLD Card Provided in FTD 

C. DoD FLIP (Terminal), High and Low Altitude U.S., Volumes 3 or 21 

D. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

E. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

F. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-2 

V. Student Preparation/Review 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IV, Normal Procedures (Through Climb and Cruise) 

2. Section V, Part 2, Operating Techniques (Takeoff and Climb) 

B. Student must have the following CBT lessons completed: 

1. Engine Start Procedures 

2. Before Takeoff Procedures 

3. Takeoff Procedures 

4. Climb/Cruise Procedures 

5. Descent Procedures 

6. Approach Procedures 

7. Landing/Missed Approach Procedures 

8. After Landing Procedures 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-T306-SG 1-60-2 01 OCT 10

Objectives

Training objectives introduced and practiced during this training mission:

1. Perform Checklist Procedures and Use 

2. Perform Cockpit Preparation Procedures 

3. Perform Before Start Procedures 

4. Perform Starting Engines Procedures 

5. Perform Before Taxi Procedures 

6. Perform Before Takeoff Procedures 

7. Perform Takeoff Duties 

8. Perform After Takeoff/Climb Procedures 

9. Perform Cruise Procedures 

10. Perform Descent Procedures 

11. Perform Approach Procedures 

12. Perform Missed Approach Procedures 

13. Perform Downwind Procedures 

14. Perform Before Landing Procedures 

15. Perform Landing Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) Procedures 

16. Perform After Landing Procedures 

17. Perform Parking – Engine Shutdown Procedures 

18. Perform Leaving Aircraft Procedures 

Training objectives previously introduced that will be practiced during this 

training mission: 

1. Perform Equipment Operation 

2. Perform FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 

3. Perform FE’s Interior Inspection 

4. Perform Fuel Management and Conservation Procedures 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-T306-SG 1-60-3 01 OCT 10

Profile

1. FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 

2. FE’s Interior Inspection 

3. Cockpit Preparation 

4. Before Start 

5. Starting Engines 

6. Before Taxi 

7. Before Takeoff 

8. Takeoff 

9. After Takeoff/Climb 

10. Cruise 

11. Descent Checklist 

12. Descent 

13. Approach Checklist 

14. Approach 

15. Before Landing Checklist 

16. Missed Approach 

17. Downwind Checklist 

18. Approach 

19. Landing 

20. After Landing Checklist 

21. Parking – Engine Shutdown Checklist 

22. Leaving Aircraft Checklist 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-T306-SG 1-60-4 01 OCT 10

Mission Briefing 

A. Specialty Briefing and Instructional Period 

1. This is a flight engineer FTD for practicing normal procedures and 

checklists. Required pilot actions will be accomplished by the instructor. 

2. Instructor Briefs: 

a. FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 

b. FE’s Interior Inspection 

c. TOLD Card as Required 

d. Cockpit Preparation Checklist 

e. Engine Start Checklist 

(1) Before Start 

(2) Starting Engines 

f. Taxi and Takeoff Procedures 

g. After Takeoff/Climb/Cruise Procedures 

h. Descent Procedures 

i. Approach Procedures 

j. Missed Approach Procedures 

k. Downwind Procedures 

l. Landing Procedures 

m. After Landing Procedures 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

FTD Mission 1 

I. Purpose – The purpose of this FTD mission is to allow practice of normal 

procedures for starting engines, taxi, takeoff, climb, cruise, enroute descent, 

approach, landing, after landing, and leaving the aircraft. Student A will be in the 

left seat for this FTD. 

II. Duration – 3.5 hours

A. 1.0 hour pre-brief 

B. 2.0 hours FTD 

C. 0.5 hour debrief 

III. Reference Materials 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Flight Manual Performance Data 

IV. Equipment and Materials 

A. Flight Training Device 

B. Briefing Room 

C. TOLD Card provided in device 

D. DOD FLIP (Terminal), High and Low Altitude U.S., Volumes 3 or 21 

E. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

F. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

G. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-2 

V. Student Preparation/Review 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IV, Normal Procedures (Through Climb and Cruise) 

2. Section V, Part 2, Operating Techniques (Takeoff and Climb) 

B. Each student must have the following CBT lessons completed: 

1. Engine Start Procedures 

2. Before Takeoff Procedures 

3. Takeoff Procedures 

4. Climb/Cruise Procedures 

5. Descent Procedures 

6. Approach Procedures 

7. Landing/Missed Approach Procedures 

8. After Landing Procedures 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T601-SG 1-61-1 01 JUL 13
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Pilot Objectives

Training objectives introduced and practiced during this training mission:

1. Demonstrate Airmanship/Situational Awareness 

2. Demonstrate Judgment/Compliance 

3. Demonstrate Safety Consciousness 

4. Demonstrate Regulation, Directive Knowledge and Use 

5. Perform General Navigation 

6. Perform Mission Planning and Briefing 

7. Perform Crew Coordination 

8. Demonstrate Performance Knowledge and Use 

9. Perform Fuel Management and Conservation 

10. Perform Radar Operation 

11. Perform Communications 

12. Perform Missed Approach (Auto) Procedures 

13. Perform Landing 

14. Perform Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) Procedures 

Training objectives previously introduced that will be practiced during this 

training mission:

1. Perform Checklist Procedures and Use 

2. Perform Equipment Operation 

3. Perform Cockpit Preparation Procedures 

4. Perform Before Start Procedures 

5. Perform Starting Engines Procedures 

6. Perform Before Taxi Procedures 

7. Perform Before Takeoff Procedures 

8. Perform Left Seat Takeoff 

9. Perform Takeoff, Initial 

10. Perform Pilot Not Flying (PNF) Takeoff and Climb Duties 

11. Perform After Takeoff/Climb Procedures 

12. Perform Cruise Procedures 

13. Perform Descent Procedures 

14. Perform Enroute Descent Procedures 

15. Perform Approach Procedures 

16. Perform ILS Coupled Approach Procedures 

17. Perform Before Landing Procedures 

18. Perform Downwind Procedures 

19. Perform After Landing Procedures 

20. Perform Parking – Engine Shutdown Procedures 

21. Perform Leaving Aircraft Procedures 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T601-SG 1-61-2 01 JUL 13
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Flight Engineer Objectives

Training objectives introduced and practiced during this training mission:

1. Demonstrate Airmanship/Situational Awareness 

2. Demonstrate Regulation, Directive Knowledge and Use 

3. Demonstrate Judgment/Compliance 

4. Demonstrate Safety Consciousness 

5. Perform General Navigation 

6. Perform Crew Coordination 

7. Demonstrate Performance Knowledge and Use 

8. Perform FMS Operation 

9. Perform Communications 

10. Perform Mission Planning and Briefing 

Training objectives previously introduced that will be practiced during this 

training mission:

1. Perform Equipment Operation 

2. Perform Checklist Procedures and Use 

3. Perform Cockpit Preparation Procedures 

4. Perform Before Start Procedures 

5. Perform Starting Engines Procedures 

6. Perform Before Taxi Procedures 

7. Perform Before Takeoff Procedures 

8. Perform Fuel Management and Conservation Procedures 

9. Perform FE Takeoff Duties 

10. Perform After Takeoff/Climb Procedures 

11. Perform Cruise Procedures 

12. Perform Descent Procedures 

13. Perform Approach Procedures 

14. Perform Instrument Approach Procedures 

15. Perform Missed Approach Procedures 

16. Perform Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) Procedures 

17. Perform Before Landing Procedures 

18. Perform Downwind Procedures 

19. Perform After Landing Procedures 

20. Perform Parking – Engine Shutdown Procedures 

21. Perform Leaving Aircraft Procedures 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T601-SG 1-61-3 01 JUL 13
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Profile

1. Cockpit Preparation 

2. Before Start 

3. Starting Engines 

4. Before Taxi 

5. Before Takeoff 

6. Takeoff, Initial 

7. After Takeoff/Climb 

8. Cruise 

9. Descent Checklist 

10. Enroute Descent 

11. Approach Checklist 

12. ILS Coupled Approach 

13. Before Landing Checklist 

14. Auto Missed Approach 

15. Downwind Checklist 

16. ILS Coupled Approach 

17. Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) 

18. After Landing Checklist 

19. Parking – Engine Shutdown Checklist 

20. Leaving Aircraft Checklist 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T601-SG 1-61-4 01 JUL 13
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Mission Briefing 

1. Mission Overview: Briefed by the Instructors 

2. Specialty Briefing and Instructional Period 

a. This is a FTD for Pilots and Flight Engineers. All required crew 

coordination will be accomplished by the appropriate crewmember. 

b. Instructor Briefs: 

(1) TOLD Card as Required 

(2) Cockpit Preparation Checklist 

(3) Engine Start Checklist 

a. Before Start 

b. Start Engine 

(4) Taxi and Takeoff Procedures and Techniques 

(5) After Takeoff/Climb/Cruise Procedures and Techniques 

(6) Descent Procedures and Techniques 

(7) Approach Procedures and Techniques 

(8) Missed Approach Procedures and Techniques 

(9) Downwind Procedures 

(10) Landing Procedures and Techniques 

(11) After Landing Procedures 

3. Crew Briefing: Pilot student A will accomplish the briefing. The crew will be 

briefed IAW Section V of the Flight Manual. The items covered will be the normal 

procedures from cockpit preparation to after landing. 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T601-SG 1-61-5 01 JUL 13
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T601-SG 1-61-6 01 JUL 13
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-1 01 JUL 13 

Terminal Instrument Procedures 

(TERPS)

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to help the student better understand the 

capabilities and limitations of the aircraft and crew relating to Terminal Instrument 

Procedures (TERPS). A Flight Engineer Instructor presents this lesson. 

II. Duration - 4.0 hours 

III. Reference Materials 

A. Aeronautical Information Manual, Chapters 1 and 2 

B. DOD Flight Information Publication, Airport Diagrams - SIDS & STARS 

C. DOD Flight Information Publication, High Altitude 

D. DOD Flight Information Publication, Low Altitude 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Classroom Presentation System 

B. Dry Erase Board 

V. Student Preparation and Review 

A. Read “Crew Duties”, T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Section V, Crew Duties 

Description 

B. Complete TERPS Workbook (W853) 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-2 01 JUL 13 

Objectives

1. Locate and identify approach and arrival components and symbols. 

2. Locate and identify departure and arrival procedures using SIDS and STARS. 

3. Locate and identify Instrument Approach Procedures. 

4. Locate and identify IAF to FAF Procedures. 

5. Locate and identify Final Approach Procedures. 

6. Use the RMI and DME to determine aircraft position. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-3 01 JUL 13 

Terminal Instrument Procedures 

(TERPS)

Student Lecture Outline 

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. Instructor Introduction 

B. Purpose Statement 

As a Flight Engineer on the KC-10, an essential part of your job will be to monitor 

departure, enroute, and approach procedure deviations from the briefed procedures. 

The approach plates in this lesson are for “Training Use Only” and may not be the 

most current. 

1. Attention 

As KC-10 crewmembers, you will spend a lot of time preparing for events you 

hope never happen. You practice “worst case” scenarios, or “killer items” in 

the vernacular of our trade. When you read media coverage of an aircraft 

accident or study a National Transportation Safety Board’s final report, you 

can usually see that any crewmember aboard the aircraft could have 

detected errors and should have been assertive enough to insist on 

corrective action. 

2. Motivation 

You will never be required to fly an instrument approach. However, it is 

important that you be able to detect deviations from the briefed procedure 

and determine if equipment is set correctly. You must become familiar with 

the terminology, definitions, and symbols used, and be able to correctly 

interpret the charts associated with terminal instrument procedures. 

While the Pilot will actually fly the approach, it is important that all 

crewmembers remain alert and aware of events. The majority of aircraft 

accidents are not caused by the failure of an aircraft component or system. 

Instead, they happen when one or more members of the aircrew are diverted 

from the situation and unaware of the aircraft position. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-4 01 JUL 13 

C. Objectives 

At the completion of this lesson, you should be able to: 

1. Locate and identify approach plate components and symbols. 

2. Locate and identify departure and arrival procedures using SIDS 

and STARS. 

3. Locate and identify Instrument Approach Procedures. 

4. Locate and identify IAF to FAF Procedures. 

5. Locate and identify Final Approach Procedures. 

6. Use the RMI and DME to determine aircraft position. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Approach Books 

The Department of Defense, National Geospacial-Intelligence Agency (NGA) issues 

approach, and other flight information publications, for High Altitude, Low Altitude, 

and Standard Instrument Departures (SIDs) and Standard Terminal Arrivals 

(STARs). Both military and civilian airports are included. 

In the front of each approach book is a list of general information and abbreviations, 

a table of contents, an explanation of approach and landing minima, a meter 

conversion chart, and legend pages identifying chart symbols used for both arrival to 

and departure from the airport. 

1. Low Altitude 

Low altitude books are published in 22 volumes, usually several states in a 

volume, depending upon the number of airports in the area. These books are 

also issued every eight weeks with the effective date on the front cover. 

Approach plates use a 10 or 20-mile plan view circle. A symbol legend is in 

the front section of the book. 

2. High Altitude 

The high altitude books are published in three volumes -- one for each 

geographical region in the United States. The hashed border on the cover 

easily distinguishes these books. They are issued every eight weeks. The 

effective date is on the front cover. Approach plates usually contain a 20-

mile plan view circle. Symbol legends used in the charts are in the front 

section of the book. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-5 01 JUL 13 

3. Choosing the Approach Volume 

The pilot will have chosen the type of approach to fly when planning the 

mission. It is particularly important that crewmembers use the same 

approach plates volume, identified by the effective date, and the same page 

during the briefing. The front cover of each book shows a map of the 

geographical area covered. 

4. Approach Name 

In addition to the airport name and location, the type of approach or 

departure appears at the top and bottom of each page. Approaches are 

named for the radio navigational aid or aids providing final approach 

guidance and the runway to which the final approach course is aligned. 

When a letter such as A, B, or C follows the name of the approach, the 

approach is designed for circling minimums only. 

Where more than one approach using the same final approach guidance is 

developed to the same runway, each runway/navigational aid combination 

will be identified with an alphabetical suffix beginning at the end of the 

alphabet; e.g. ILS Z RWY 28L (first procedure), ILS Y RWY 28L (second 

procedure), ILS X RWY 28L (third procedure), etc. Suffixes will be used in 

reverse alphabetical order, beginning with “Z.”

5. Approach Plate Data 

The approach plate is divided into four main sections -- the plan view, profile 

view, airport sketch, and a minima section containing approach minimums for 

each type of aircraft. 

Each published approach is designed to take the aircraft from the enroute or 

feeder station to the initial approach fix, from there to the final approach fix, 

and ultimately to a safe landing. Decision height and minimum descent 

altitude are included. 

Because of the complexity and the amount of data presented on these 

plates, we will continue this presentation by breaking down the plates to a 

manageable size. For clarity, some data contained on the chart may have 

been ignored or edited.

6. Plan View 

The plan view is usually the largest block on the approach plate. It shows the 

track of the approach as though viewed from directly overhead and is always 

oriented to north. The upper most part of the approach plate also includes a 

briefing strip with information relevant to that approach. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-6 01 JUL 13 

a. Radio Frequencies 

Ground control, tower, and other frequencies associated with the 

airport appear directly below the approach name. 

b. Minimum Safe Altitude 

The minimum safe altitude, or MSA, appears in a small circle on the 

approach plate. The MSA guarantees a 1,000-foot clearance of all 

obstacles within 25 nautical miles of the navigation facility or NAVAID 

if so depicted upon which the approach is based. Sometimes the 

circle is divided into sectors or quadrants, indicating different minimum 

safe altitudes for direction of approach. 

c. Emergency Safe Altitude 

High altitude approach plates list an emergency safe altitude at the 

lower left. The emergency safe altitude provides a 1,000-foot 

clearance in non-mountainous terrain and 2,000 foot clearance in 

mountainous terrain within 100 nautical miles from the navigation 

facility. 

d. Obstacles 

Points of higher elevation and obstacles along the approach course 

are clearly defined. 

e. Restrictions, Warnings, and Cautions 

Warnings or cautions appear on many approach plates, and are not 

always labeled “warning” or “caution”. All restricted areas are clearly 

identified. If a particular navigational aid is required for the approach, it 

is listed; for example, TACAN REQUIRED, GROUND RADAR 

REQUIRED, DME REQUIRED. 

f. 10 NM Distance Circle 

The solid-line inner circle on the plan view indicates 10 nautical miles 

from the terminal NAVAID on low altitude approach plates. 

Everything within this circle is depicted to scale unless otherwise 

indicated. 

g. 20 NM Distance Circle 

The solid-line circle indicates 20 nautical miles on high altitude 

approach plates, if drawn to scale. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-7 01 JUL 13 

h. Enroute Facilities 

A dashed outer circle on the plan view is associated with TACAN or 

VORTAC NAVAIDS, called “enroute facilities”. From each NAVAID, 

an arrow depicts the terminal routing to the IAF. Each routing is 

annotated with a minimum enroute altitude, the course, and the 

distance to the IAF. These appear more often on high altitude 

approach plates, where an enroute descent enables an aircraft to 

transition from the high altitude on course to the IAF or final approach 

fix. 

i. Feeder Facilities 

Feeder facilities, illustrated by an inner dashed circle, are basically the 

same as enroute facilities except they are associated with low altitude. 

j. Navigation Aids 

Each primary navigational aid has condensed coded information in a 

box near the symbol. An underline under the frequency indicates that 

no voice is transmitted. Coordinate values are also provided. Let’s 

briefly review some of the symbols associated with NAVAIDS. 

(1) Tactical Air Navigation (TACAN) 

The theoretical and technical principles of operation of TACAN 

equipment are different from those of VOR; however, the end 

result, as far as the navigating pilot is concerned, is the same. 

TACAN ground equipment consists of either a fixed or mobile 

transmitting unit. The airborne unit in conjunction with the 

ground unit reduces the transmitted signal to a visual 

presentation of both azimuth and distance information. TACAN 

operates in the ultra high frequency (UHF) band of frequencies. 

The system presently has a total of 252 channels available and 

is identified by two sets of channel numbers from 1 to 126, with 

suffixes ''X'' or ''Y'' for discrimination between the sets. 

(2) Very High Frequency Omnirange (VOR) 

VORs operate within the 108.0 to 117.95 MHz, or very high 

frequency (VHF) and have a power output necessary to 

provide coverage within their assigned operational service 

volume. The equipment is subject to line-of-sight restriction, 

and its range varies proportionally to the altitude of the 

receiving equipment. Most VORs are equipped for voice 

transmission. VORs without voice capability are indicated on 

enroute and sectional charts by underlining the VOR frequency 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-8 01 JUL 13 

or by the designation "VORW" in the IFR Supplement. Since a 

large portion of the frequencies available on the VOR control 

panel may overlap the VHF communication frequency band, 

you may use the VOR receiver as a VHF communications 

receiver. 

(3) VHF Omni-Directional Range/Tactical Air Navigation 

(VORTAC). 

A VORTAC is a facility consisting of two components, VOR 

and TACAN, which provides three individual services: VOR 

azimuth, TACAN azimuth, and TACAN distance (DME) at one 

site. Although consisting of more than one component, 

incorporating more than one operational frequency, and using 

more than one antenna system, a VORTAC is considered to be 

a unified navigation aid. Both components of a VORTAC 

operate simultaneously and provide the three services at all 

times.

(4) Distance Measuring Equipment (DME)

In the operation of DME, paired pulses at a specific spacing 

are sent out from the aircraft and are received at the ground 

station. The ground station then transmits paired pulses back 

to the aircraft at the same pulse spacing but on a different 

frequency. The time required for the round trip of this signal 

exchange is measured in the airborne DME unit and is 

translated into distance in nautical miles from the aircraft to the 

ground station. 

(5) Instrument Landing System (ILS) 

The ILS is designed to provide an approach path for exact 

alignment and descent of an aircraft on final approach to a 

runway. The ground equipment consists of two highly 

directional transmitting systems, and along the approach, three 

(or fewer) marker beacons. The directional transmitters are 

known as the localizer and glide slope transmitters.

(6) Marker Beacon 

Marker beacons serve to identify a particular location in space 

on the approach to an instrument runway. This is done by 

means of a 75-MHz transmitter that transmits a directional 

signal to be received by aircraft flying overhead. These 

markers are generally used in conjunction with en route 

NAVAIDs and ILS as point designators. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-9 01 JUL 13 

(7) Localizer Type Directional Aid (LDA) 

The LDA is of comparable utility and accuracy to a localizer but 

is not always aligned with the centerline of the runway. TERPS 

requires the Localizer (LOC) signal alignment within 3° of the 

runway alignment. If the alignment exceeds 3°, the LOC will be 

identified as an LDA. Once designated as an LDA, the 

maximum angle of convergence of the final approach course 

and the extended runway centerline is 30°. The signal 

accuracy of the LDA is the same as a LOC, however the LDA 

course alignment will be greater than 3°, not to exceed 30°. 

Straight-in minima can be published only where alignment 

conforms to the straight-in criteria specified in AFJMAN 11-226 

(TERPS). Circling minima are published where this alignment 

exceeds straight-in criteria. The LDA is usually considered a 

non-precision approach; however, in some installations with a 

glide slope, a decision height will be published. If a decision 

height is published, it can be flown just like an ILS approach.

(8) Simplified Directional Facility (SDF) 

SDF. The SDF provides a final approach course that is similar 

to that of the ILS localizer and LDA. However, the SDF may 

have a wider course width of 6° or 12°. It does not provide glide 

slope information. A clear understanding of the ILS localizer 

and the additional factors listed below completely describe the 

operational characteristics and use of the SDF. 

(9) Non-Directional Beacon (NDB) 

NDB is a low, or medium, or ultra high frequency radio beacon 

that transmits nondirectional signals whereby an aircraft 

properly equipped can automatically determine and display 

bearing to any radio station within its frequency and sensitivity 

range. These facilities normally operate on frequencies 

between 190 and 1750 kHz or 275-287 MHz and transmit a 

continuous carrier keyed to provide identification except during 

voice transmission. 

(10) Global Positioning System (GPS) 

GPS is a space based navigation system that has the 

capability to provide highly accurate three-dimensional 

position, velocity, and time to an infinite number of equipped 

users anywhere on or near the Earth (Figure 6.8). The typical 

GPS integrated system will provide: position, velocity, time, 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-10 01 JUL 13 

altitude, steering information, groundspeed and ground track 

error, heading, and variation. GPS also provides a constant 

monitor of system status and accuracy, and the built-in test 

circuitry provides self-tests that diagnose most system failures. 

The airborne GPS receiver may accept inputs from other 

aircraft systems, such as INS, altimeter, central air data 

computer (CADC), attitude gyro, and compass systems that 

improve GPS accuracy and reliability. GPS may also be 

integrated into a multi-sensor navigation system combining 

GPS information with other sources such as an Inertial 

Reference Unit (IRU) or DME/DME Area Navigation (RNAV) 

equipment. 

7. Profile View 

An observer standing to one side of the airport would see the movement of 

aircraft as presented in the profile view. This allows you to view the approach 

in three dimensions by showing the effect of altitude changes. Situational 

awareness is maintained by mentally following the aircraft on both the plan 

view and profile view simultaneously. 

a. Altitudes 

Four types of altitude entries are used in profile views. These are 

mandatory, minimum, maximum, and recommended altitudes. These 

legends appear on the charts legend page in the front of all approach 

plate books. 

b. Transition Level/Transition Altitude 

Transition level, labeled TLV, and transition altitude, labeled TA, 

appear in overseas DoD charts. They usually appear in the profile 

view of high altitude approach plates, and in the plan view of SIDS 

and STARS. 

c. QNE/QNH 

These indicate when the crew will change the altimeter to normal 

enroute QNE, 29.92, or QNH, mean sea level. These are critical items 

since outside the continental United States transition flight levels vary. 

Transition level in the United States is always FL180. 

8. Minima Section 

The minima section of the approach plate appears in the lower corner 

opposite the airport sketch. It has several lines of information listing 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-11 01 JUL 13 

the various types of approaches that may be flown to the airport. 

During the pilot’s briefing and the actual approach, all crewmembers 

should crosscheck the minimums for the procedure and to make sure 

that altimeter and radio altimeter bugs are set correctly. 

a. Aircraft Category 

Aircraft approach category is based on 1.3 times the stalling speed in 

the landing configuration at maximum certificated gross landing 

weight. An aircraft can fly an IAP only for its own category or higher, 

unless otherwise authorized by AF Instruction or MAJCOM directives. 

If it is necessary to maneuver at speeds in excess of the upper limit of 

a speed range for a category, the minimums for the next higher 

category should be used. The categories are as follows:

Category A - Speed less than 91 knots. 

Category B - Speed 91 knots or more but less than 121 knots. 

Category C - Speed 121 knots or more but less than 141 knots. 

Category D - Speed 141 knots or more but less than 166 knots. 

Category E - Speed 166 knots or more. 

b. KC-10 Minimums 

The KC-10 is a Category D aircraft. However, if the instrument final 

approach is flown at 166 knots or more, the Category E minima must 

be used. This could also apply to the KC-10 during emergency 

overweight approach and landing, abnormal configuration approach 

and landing, increased approach speed due to wind, or circling 

approach with 22o/EXT minimum maneuver speed of 166 knots or 

more. 

c. Types of Final Approach Guidance 

There are numerous different types of final approach guidance that 

can be categorized in a number of different ways. For the purposes of 

this chapter, final approach guidance will be categorized as follows:

Non-Radar Approaches. These are approaches that do not require 

radar vectoring or radar services on final approach. Non-radar 

approaches can be further subdivided among those that provide 

electronic glide path guidance and those that do not provide electronic 

glide path guidance.

Radar Approaches. These are approaches that require radar 

vectoring on final approach. There are two types PAR and ASR.
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-12 01 JUL 13 

Procedures with a Visual Component. Sometimes it is not possible to 

construct an instrument procedure that meets all requirements. 

Incorporating a visual component into an instrument procedure is an 

acceptable alternative. There are four types of approaches that fall 

into this category: visual approach, contact approach, IAP with a 

visual segment, and a charted visual flight procedure.

Other Specialized Procedures. These are specialized subsets of 

particular approach types listed above. There are four approaches 

that fall into this category: converging approaches, ILS/PRM, SOIA, 

and TLS. All require specialized training and crew qualifications 

except converging approaches.

(1) Circling Approach 

Circling to land is a visual flight maneuver. When the 

instrument approach is completed, it is used to align the aircraft 

with the landing runway. Each landing situation is different 

because of the variables of ceiling visibility, wind direction and 

velocity, obstructions, final approach course alignment, aircraft 

performance, cockpit visibility, and controller instructions. The 

circling MDA and weather minima to be used are those for the 

runway to which the instrument approach is flown (this is not 

always the landing runway). The circling minima listed on IAPs 

apply to nonradar nonprecision approaches (LOC, VOR, 

TACAN, etc.). Circling procedures and techniques are not 

compatible with precision approach criteria, and under normal 

circumstances, should not be attempted. Since the pilot in 

terms of a DH and not a specific point along the final approach 

course determines the MAP associated with the precision 

approach, it becomes difficult to ascertain when to discontinue 

the approach if visual conditions are not encountered. 

Therefore, pilots should not plan to circle from a precision 

approach.

d. Approach Minimums 

(1) Decision Height (DH) 

Decision height applies only to precision approaches – 

Instrument Landing System (ILS) and Precision Approach 

Radar (PAR). It is the minimum height above Mean Sea Level 

(MSL) where a missed approach is initiated if visual reference 

to the runway has not been established or the aircraft is not in 

position for a normal landing. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-13 01 JUL 13 

(2) RNAV/GPS Decision Altitude (DA) 

DA replaces the term Decision Height (DH) as a step towards 

harmonization with ICAO terminology. The published descent 

profile is flown to the DA, where a missed approach will be 

initiated if visual references for landing are not established. 

Obstacle clearance criteria accounts for a momentary descent 

below DA while transitioning to the missed approach.

(3) Runway Visual Range (RVR) 

The runway visibility range is the distance a pilot should see 

down the runway measured in hundreds of feet. RVR is a 

horizontal measure used to determine field conditions for 

straight-in approaches. 

(4) Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) 

Minimum descent altitudes are associated with non-precision 

straight-in, or circling approaches -- LOC, ASR, TAC, VOR, 

and NDB. Descent will not continue below this height unless 

visual reference has been established with the runway and the 

aircraft is in position for a normal landing. 

(5) Height Above Touchdown (HAT) 

Height above touchdown, or HAT, is the height of the DH or 

MDA above ground level or the highest runway elevation in the 

touchdown zone, in feet. HAT is published as part of all 

straight-in approach minima. 

(6) Height Above Airport (HAA) 

Height above airport is published for all circling approaches, in 

feet. This is the height of the MDA above the published airport 

elevation. 

(7) Ceilings 

The published ceiling, in parentheses on the approach plate, is 

feet above the published airport elevation. It can be equal to 

or greater than the height of the associated decision height or 

minimum descent altitude.
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-14 01 JUL 13 

9. Airport Sketch 

The airport sketch of the approach plate shows the airport layout, runway 

dimensions, obstacles, elevations, and approach lighting systems. 

a. Elevation 

Field elevation appears in the upper left corner of the airport sketch 

block. This is the highest point on the usable landing surface. TDZE, 

or touchdown zone elevation is also shown on the sketch as well as 

the heights of all obstacles, including the tower. 

b. Runway Information 

Length and width of the runway are printed alongside each runway 

depicted. If the runway is not level and the gradient is 0.3% or above, 

the percent of slope also appears alongside the runway. 

c. Timing Information 

If timing information is associated with the approach (to establish the 

missed approach point, for example), a timing chart will appear below 

the airport sketch or below the profile view. 

d. Runway Light Systems 

Types of airport lighting with position identification are provided in the 

airport sketch. These include: 

(1) REIL - Runway End Identifier Lights 

REILS are installed at many airfields to provide rapid and 

positive identification of the approach end of a particular 

runway. Two synchronized flashing lights, one on each side of 

the runway threshold facing the approach area identify the end 

of the runway. 

(2) HIRL/MIRL/LIRL - High, Medium, and Low Intensity 

Runway Edge Light Systems 

These are elevated bi-directional lights classified according to 

intensity, which extend the length of the runway. Runway edge 

lights are white. On instrument runways, yellow replaces white 

on the last 2000 feet or half the runway length, whichever is 

less, to form a caution zone for landings. Lights at the ends of 

the runway emit green outward from the runway end and red 

inward from the runway end. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-15 01 JUL 13 

(3) TDZ - Touchdown Zone Lighting 

Two rows of high intensity light bars, arranged on both sides of 

the runway centerline, extend from the threshold of the runway 

3000 feet inward. 

(4) CL - Centerline Lighting 

A straight line of lights located along the runway centerline. 

These lights display alternate red and white in the 3000 to 

1000 foot section of the runway. The last 1000 feet displays all 

red lights. 

e. Approach Light Systems 

Approach lights are the basic means to transition from instrument 

flight to visual flight for a landing. Symbols for approach lights are 

located near the approach end of each runway and are circled. 

(1) Approach Light Systems - ALS 

Operational requirements at the airport dictate the 

sophistication and configuration of the lighting system for a 

particular runway. Configurations discussed in this lesson are 

identified as ALSF-1 (A-1), ALSF-2 (A), MALS/SSAL (A-4), and 

MALSR (A-5). On the approach plate airport sketch, the 

circled letter “A” with a number indicates the particular format 

or the system in use.

(a) ALSF-1 (A-1) 

Different formats have different light configurations. For 

example, A-1 starts 2400 to 3000 feet from the 

beginning of the runway, with high intensity white bar 

lights along the runway and sequenced flashing lights 

along the centerline. Red bar lights appear toward the 

end of the runway with a solid line of green lights at the 

end. 

(b) ALSF-2 (A) 

A-2 is similar to A-1 but has more red and green lights 

in the last 1000 feet. 

(c) MALS/SSALS (A-4) 

A-4 uses medium intensity lights and is associated with 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-16 01 JUL 13 

shorter runways.

(d) MALSR (A-5) 

A-5 lighting systems have a series of flashing lights 

leading to the runway center line followed by a series of 

horizontal steady lights up to the runway threshold.

(2) PAPI – Precision Approach Path Indicator (PAPI) 

A circled “P” indicates a PAPI, or precision approach path 

indicator. The PAPI is a system of four lights arranged 

horizontally to provide visual descent guidance information 

during the approach. The lights illuminate either red or white 

depending on aircraft being position on the glide path (high or 

low). When the two left lights white, and the two right lights 

red, indicates the aircraft is on the desired approach path. 

(3) VASI - Visual Approach Slope Indicator 

A circled “V” indicates a VASI, or visual approach slope 

indicator. The VASI is a system of lights arranged in bars to 

provide visual descent guidance information during the 

approach. They are visible 3 to 5 miles during the day and up 

to 20 miles or more at night. 

V-3 is associated with heavy aircraft and indicates a threshold 

crossing height to accommodate long-bodied or jumbo aircraft. 

10. Lesson Exercise 1A (Plan View) 

a. What Navigation Station is the basis for the IAF? 

b. The MSA of 5200 feet is based on what Navigational Aid? 

c. What is the UHF Frequency for the Tower? 

d. Where do you hold after a missed approach to runway 21L? 

11. Lesson Exercise 1B (Profile View and Sketch) 

a. How many Precision Approaches are listed on this approach 

plate? 

b. What do the altitudes 2500 and 1800 with a solid line under the 

number indicate? 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-17 01 JUL 13 

c. What is the altitude at the IAF? 

d. What Category is the KC-10 Aircraft? 

e. What type of lighting system is available for RWY 21L? 

f. What RVR is required for the ILS to RWY 21L? 

B. PROCEDURES 

Departure and Terminal Arrival 

Instrument Approaches 

IAF to FAF 

Final Approach 

Missed Approach 

RMI/DME Navigation

1. Departure and Terminal Arrival 

Standard instrument departures (SIDs) and standard terminal arrivals 

(STARs) are published in three volumes -- Western, Central, and Eastern 

United States -- every eight weeks, although some SIDs may be included 

with the regular approach plates. 

These books are similar to the approach plate volumes in general layout. 

Each contains legend pages and a table of contents. IFR takeoff minimums 

and departure procedures are listed separately for easy reference. The back 

cover contains a table for ground speed, climb or descent angle, and climb or 

descent gradient in feet per nautical mile. 

a. Standard Instrument Departure (SID) 

Standard instrument departures (SIDs) are located in the approach 

plate books on separate pages. A SID routing page contains a great 

deal of information including notice of any special equipment required. 

This page is similar to the approach plan view in that the SID and 

airport are identified at the top and bottom of the page. It also contains 

a block of required frequencies. 

(1) Obstacles 

When using a SID plate, you must refer to the airport plan view 

for runway definition and obstacles that may not be apparent 

on the SID. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-18 01 JUL 13 

(2) Ground Speed/ Required Climb Rate 

Ground speed and the required climb rate for each runway 

used for the SID are shown in a table on the SID plate when 

published in the approach plate book. Otherwise, refer to the 

table in the back cover. 

(3) Transitions 

Transition waypoints for the SID are clearly defined, with the 

routing for each. Be sure that these waypoints are included in 

the flight plan. 

(4) Cautions and Warnings 

To ensure a safe departure, note any cautions or warnings that 

may be on this page. 

b. Departure Route 

(1) Departure Routing Description 

In addition to the graphic illustration of transitions and routings 

for the SID, the plate also contains a text description of the 

departure route. Each runway to be used and each transition is 

described in detail. 

(2) Trouble T 

On US Government charts, the symbol of a white “T” on a 

black inverted triangle, or the “Trouble T,” meaning trouble for 

departing aircraft. The presence of the “Trouble T” indicates 

you need to consult the separate listing in the front of the 

approach plated titled “IFR Takeoff Minimums and (Obstacle) 

Departure Procedures.”

c. Special Departure Procedures (SDP)

The Air Force Flight Standards Agency (AFFSA) has contracted with 

Jeppesen to provide safe engine out departure procedures for bases 

used by the KC-10 providing the maximum takeoff weight possible, 

and miss any obstacles should an engine fail during takeoff. SDP 

information is found at “http://www.jeppesen.com/wlcs/index.jsp” on 

the internet. 

Jeppesen analyzes terrain and obstacle data against aircraft specific 

performance data to determine the best engine out departure and 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-19 01 JUL 13 

takeoff weight for each runway at a given location. The login user 

name for the website is “usafsdp” and the password is “aircrews”, all 

in lower case. Be sure to check with your instructor and/or squadron s 

the login and passwords are changed occasionally. Once logged into 

the website, click on OPS DATA which will take you to the SORT and 

aircraft selection menus. 

A User Guide can be viewed or downloaded on the website directly 

below the airport drop down menu. Only bases that have approved 

procedures are listed on the Jeppesen website. This website should 

be checked during mission planning. If an approved procedure is 

available, it must be briefed and used if an engine failure occurs on 

takeoff. TOLD and/or SDP departure plate information can be found 

on the website. The data has been approved by the Air Force for 

TOLD computations. 

d. SDP planning data sheet. 

Each base that has an approved SDP will have TOLD data that has 

been approved by AMC. This is an example of the information 

available. If there is a “T” behind the runway number, there is a turn 

procedure included for that runway. Some bases will have turns and 

others will not. The currency of the sheet is located in the upper left 

corner of the sheet. Also found in the top section is ACFT and system 

information. 

e. Engine Failure Departure Procedure Plate. 

The departure plate provides specific runway turn information that 

must be used and briefed should an engine fail. Not all bases have 

turn procedures. 

f. Special Engine Failure Procedure.

Another type of SDP procedure is the “Special Engine Failure 

Procedure” plate. You may see this instead of the departure plate 

seen on the previous slide. 

2. Terminal Arrival 

a. Feeder Facility Routing 

As mentioned earlier, enroute and feeder facilities are identified on 

approach plates. These are designed to take the aircraft from the 

enroute structure to the initial approach fix, or to some point dictated 

by operational requirements. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-20 01 JUL 13 

(1) Radial/Distance from NAVAID 

The fix or point is sometimes identified by the radial and 

distance from a specific NAVAID. In the case of feeder 

facilities, the point-to-point has been computed for the pilot so 

that by simply proceeding along the radial for the specified 

distance, the aircraft will arrive over the desired fix or point. 

(2) Monitoring the Course 

When the aircraft is established on a feeder course, you can 

use the RMI and DME to monitor aircraft position. Remember, 

the tail of the bearing pointer is the aircraft position from the 

NAVAID. When you read the number under the tail of the 

bearing pointer, you are reading the present radial from the 

facility. If the aircraft is established on course outbound from 

the station, this radial should be very nearly the same as the 

aircraft heading. 

b. Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) 

Published standard terminal arrivals (STARs) provide transition from 

an enroute NAVAID to an outer fix, initial approach fix, and arrival 

waypoint in the terminal area. The page layout is similar to that of a 

SID. A STAR is usually named for the initial fix or NAVAID. 

(1) Transition Points 

Transition points along the route are Waypoints, Geographical 

Locations or Lat/Long Coordinates. 

(2) Routing 

Routing, altitude and distance are defined for the course. 

Course, Radial, Altitude and DME are provided. 

3. Lesson Exercise 2A 

a. What is the height of the controlling obstacle for this departure 

using RW 19? 

b. Radial R226 will intercept SMYRNA. What is the course to 

track? 

c. What is the distance from PENSY to LARRI? 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-21 01 JUL 13 

4. Lesson Exercise 2B 

a. How much of a delay would you expect if the radar is 

inoperative? 

b. What radial would you track to fly the inbound course to the 

McGuire VORTAC? 

c. During a missed approach, at what DME from GXU would you 

turn left to CYN to hold? 

5. Lesson Exercise 2C

a. What is the distance from the Seattle VORTAC to AAIRE? 

b. The NAVAID VICTORIA symbol is a VOR with a square box 

around it. What does the box signify? 

c. All the NAVAIDS on this plate have a solid line beneath the 

station frequency. TCM, frequency 109.6 is not underlined. 

What does this indicate?

C. Instrument Approaches 

Initial Approach 

High Penetrations 

Procedure Turns 

Holding Pattern in Lieu of Procedure Turns 

Procedure Tracks 

1. Initial Approach 

As you approach your destination, the pilot will choose the type of approach 

desired for the transition from the high altitude environment to the terminal 

environment. This should be accomplished well in advance of the descent so 

that all attention can be focused on accomplishing a safe approach and 

landing. 

a. A Radar Approach may consist of monitoring and radar vectors 

to the final approach and landing. 

b. If Radar is not available, the pilot can fly the complete 

published approach without further directions from ATC. 

c. If Radar is required, there will be a bold “RADAR REQUIRED” 

on the PLAN VIEW. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-22 01 JUL 13 

2. High Penetration 

Contained within the High Altitude series of approach plates, the penetration 

enables the aircraft to transition from the high altitude structure to the 

terminal area. It places the aircraft to a position that will align it with the 

inbound course to the Final Approach Fix (FAF). 

These approaches can employ radials, arcs, courses, procedure turns and 

fly-off restrictions. 

Special restrictions, cautions or warnings are usually provided in plain text 

within the plan view. 

Minimum, mandatory and recommended altitudes, along with the DME from 

the station, are provided in the profile view. 

3. Procedure Turn 

If a procedure turn is required, it will be depicted as a heavy black line with a 

bend and a single barb. The barb indicates the maneuvering side of the final 

approach course. 

4. Holding Pattern in Lieu of Procedure Turn 

At times, the facility may depict a holding pattern that will descend the 

aircraft, allow time to configure for landing, and align the aircraft with the final 

approach course. 

These patterns are depicted on the plan view. They are similar to the 

standard holding pattern except they are usually longer and are depicted by a 

heavy black line. Both radial and course are provided along with the DME. 

5. Procedure Track 

Like the penetration, the Procedure Track is used to place the aircraft at a 

position to intercept the final approach course prior to the final approach fix. 

Procedure Tracks are depicted as a heavy black line with directional arrows. 

It may use a combination of arcs, radials or courses. Again, the purpose is to 

align the aircraft with the final approach course. 

To fly an arc, the pilot will place the station on the wing tip and maintain a 

constant DME until crossing a radial or NAVAID. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-23 01 JUL 13 

6. Lesson Exercise 3 

a. Illustration A: From top to bottom, what type of tracks are 

depicted? 

b. Illustration B: From top to bottom, what type of holding 

patterns are depicted? 

c. Illustration C: What does the heavy black line with a singlebarb 

indicate? 

D. IAF to Final Approach Fix 

1. Initial Approach Fix 

Using one or more of the procedures discussed in the previous segment, the 

aircraft will have arrived at a geographical location that is depicted on the 

plan view as the Initial Approach Fix or IAF. 

The IAF may be a NAVAID or merely a point in space on a radial at a 

specified DME. The purpose of the IAF is to place the aircraft in a position to 

intercept the final approach fix in a manner that will permit a successful 

landing or missed approach, if conditions warrant. 

If traffic is very light, the controller will sometimes provide radar vectors to 

intercept the final approach course outside the FAF where the aircraft can 

proceed to a landing. However, if the pilot is cleared for a specific published 

approach, the approach must be flown as published in order to guarantee 

cleared airspace 

2. Descent Procedures 

During the approach briefing, the pilot will state the altitude at which the 

aircraft will depart the IAF for the FAF. 

The briefing should include any restrictions or unusual aspects of the 

approach. It is important to remember that as the aircraft proceeds along the 

final approach course, it will be descending below the Minimum Safe Altitude 

for the area. Failure to observe the altitude restrictions, whether Mandatory, 

Minimum, Maximum, or Recommended will negate the guaranteed terrain 

clearance. 

Usually, the altitude of the initial approach fix will be a “minimum” altitude, but 

occasionally it will be a “hard” or mandatory altitude. 

From the IAF to the FAF and on to landing, the approach becomes more 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-24 01 JUL 13 

critical. The majority of Class A accidents happen during this phase of flight. 

Each crewmember must be in the loop. Any one person on the flight deck 

could have prevented the accident in Bosnia. They simply were not flying the 

approach as published, nor could they have with the equipment available on 

the aircraft.

a. Where is the IAF located for this approach? What is the 

Minimum Sector Altitude at the IAF? 

b. At what point and altitude would you expect a right turn to 

intercept the localizer? 

c. Where is the holding pattern for the missed approach located? 

E. Final Approach 

Radar Approach 

Non-Radar Approach 

Procedures with a Visual Component 

Other Specialized Procedures 

1. Radar Approach 

These are approaches that require radar vectoring on final approach. There 

are two types PAR and ASR.

2. Non-Radar Approach 

These are approaches that do not require radar vectoring or radar services 

on final approach. Non-radar approaches can be further subdivided among 

those that provide electronic glide path guidance and those that do not 

provide electronic glide path guidance. Most runways provide a VASI system 

that is coincident with the VDP. The MAP will always be after the VDP. 

However if the VDP is missed, the chances of acquiring the runway for a 

successful landing is doubtful. 

3. Procedures with a Visual Component 

Sometimes it is not possible to construct an instrument procedure that meets 

all requirements. Incorporating a visual component into an instrument 

procedure is an acceptable alternative. There are four types of approaches 

that fall into this category: visual approach, contact approach, IAP with a 

visual segment, and a charted visual flight procedure.
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-25 01 JUL 13 

4. Other Specialized Procedures 

These are specialized subsets of particular approach types listed above. 

There are four approaches that fall into this category: converging 

approaches, ILS/PRM, SOIA, and TLS. All require specialized training and 

crew qualifications except converging approaches.

E-FRAME 68: PRECISION APPROACH

5. Precision Approach 

The precision approach provides the pilot with precise course, glideslope, 

and range information Precision approach data, Instrument Landing System 

(ILS) or Precision Approach Radar (PAR) on the approach plate, provides a 

vertical flight path where the navigation facility is precisely aligned with the 

runway centerline. Ground equipment consists of two highly directional 

transmitting system and marker beacons along the approach. 

The directional transmitters are known as the localizer and glide slope 

transmitters. These signals are displayed on the aircraft control panel.

6. Non-Precision Approach 

The non-precision approach entry (LOC or TAC, for example) provides 

course and range data only. A glideslope is not used. 

7. RNAV/GPS Approach 

Another non-precision approach is the RNAV (GPS) approach. GPS is a US 

satellite-based radio navigational positioning and time transfer system 

operated by the Department of Defense (DOD). The system provides highly 

accurate position and voice information and precise time on a continuous 

global basis to an unlimited number of properly equipped users. The system 

is unaffected by weather and provides a worldwide common grid reference 

system based on earth-fixed coordinate system. For its Earth Model, GPS 

uses the World Geodetic System of 1984 (WGS-84). 

8. Circling Approach 

Circling to land is a visual flight maneuver. When the instrument approach is 

completed, it is used to align the aircraft with the landing runway. Each 

landing situation is different because of the variables of ceiling visibility, wind 

direction and velocity, obstructions, final approach course alignment, aircraft 

performance, cockpit visibility, and controller instructions. The circling MDA 

and weather minima to be used are those for the runway to which the 

instrument approach is flown (this is not always the landing runway). The 

circling minima listed on IAPs apply to nonradar nonprecision approaches 

(LOC, VOR, TACAN, etc.). Circling procedures and techniques are not 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-26 01 JUL 13 

compatible with precision approach criteria, and under normal circumstances, 

should not be attempted. Since the pilot in terms of a DH and not a specific 

point along the final approach course determines the MAP associated with 

the precision approach, it becomes difficult to ascertain when to discontinue 

the approach if visual conditions are not encountered. Therefore, pilots 

should not plan to circle from a precision approach.

9. Missed Approach 

The missed approach point for a nonprecision straight-in approach is located 

along the final approach course and no farther from the FAF than the runway 

threshold (or over an on-airport navigation facility for a no-FAF procedure 

and some selected FAF procedures). The missed approach point for any 

precision approach is the point at which the decision height is reached. This 

is normally the point depicted on the IAP as the start of a climbing dashed 

line. When the missed approach is initiated prior to the MAP, proceed to the 

MAP along the final approach course and then via the route and altitudes 

specified in the published missed approach departure instruction. The 

missed approach must be initiated no later than the missed approach point 

(MAP) or you may be below the missed approach obstacle clearance surface 

or outside the missed approach obstacle clearance area. 

10. Lesson Exercise 5 

a. What type of approach is the S-ILS 15? 

b. What are the DH, RVR and HAT? 

c. What is the glide slope intercept altitude? 

d. What type of approach is the S-LOC 15? 

e. What are the ILS ceiling and visibility requirements for the 

KC-10? 

f. What are the minimums for a circling approach? 

g. During a missed approach, what altitude would the pilot climb 

to? 

F. RMI/DME Navigation 

1. Radio Magnetic Indicator 

You listen to the approach briefing, make sure that everything is set as 

required by the approach, but how do you monitor the approach if you don’t 

know where you are in relation to the NAVAID? Answer: You Can’t! 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-27 01 JUL 13 

Use of the RMI/DME information is an acquired skill learned through 

exposure and repeated practice. 

We’ll consider the bearing pointer to have three segments: The Head, The 

Pivot, and The Tail. The KC-10 has two bearing pointers; however, for our 

discussion, one has been removed for clarity. 

a. Upper/Lower Lubber Line 

Draw a vertical mental line through the center of the RMI from top to 

bottom. This is called the LUBBER LINE. It is further divided into the 

UPPER and LOWER LUBBER LINES. 

The aircraft heading is always read from the index at the top of the 

UPPER LUBBER LINE. The NAVAID, a TACAN, VOR, or NDB will 

always be represented by the pivot of the bearing pointer. The tail of 

the pointer will always represent the aircraft’s position. The head of 

the pointer represents the direction TO the station. 

b. RMI Situational Awareness 

The aircraft’s relative position from the station is always represented 

on the tail of the pointer. However, the direction the aircraft is flying is 

always parallel to the UPPER LUBBER LINE. Put a different way, the 

position of the head of the pointer, relative to the LUBBER LINE (left 

or right) tells you which way to turn to fly directly to the station. If the 

head of the pointer was already under the UPPER LUBBER LINE (or 

pointing straight up), no turn would be necessary since the station 

would be directly in front of the aircraft. 

Note that no mention has yet been made of compass heading. It is 

possible for a pilot to fly directly point to point to a station using only 

the bearing pointer. The aircraft would be maneuvered to keep the 

head of the pointer under the UPPER LUBBER LINE. 

2. RMI/DME 

Now, we add the compass card. Using this, along with the DME, it is 

possible to determine the general position of the aircraft relative to the 

approach NAVAID. 

Assume you are flying a radar vector of 360 degrees (0 on the compass 

card) as depicted by the graphic on screen. 

Remember that the pivot of the bearing pointer represents the TACAN 

Station. The tail is the aircraft and the head is the direction you would have 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-28 01 JUL 13 

to fly to go TO the station. 

The tail of the TACAN bearing pointer is on 270. Therefore your position is 

on the 270 degree radial due west of the TACAN. Adding DME to the picture 

you know the aircraft is 10 NM from the station on the 270-degree radial. 

3. RMI Over Plan View 

If you mentally superimpose the RMI over the plan view of the approach 

plate, you can determine is the aircraft is positioned as briefed. 

As the aircraft moves on the northbound heading, the tail of the bearing 

pointer will follow its movement and the bearing pointer will pivot accordingly 

(i.e., the aircraft drags the tail of the bearing pointer as it flies). 

4. Radial vs. Course 

A radial is a magnetic bearing extending from a navigation station. You will 

recall that we used the pivot of the bearing pointer as the Selected NAVAID 

Facility. When we use this procedure to determine the aircraft position 

relative to the station, the compass card of the RMI is a representation of 

these radials or magnetic bearing from the NAVAID. 

Since we used the tail of the bearing pointer to determine our position in 

relation to the station, we can say that the tail of the bearing pointer tells us 

which radial the aircraft is on. 

When selecting a desired course to be flown, you must first determine if the 

course will take the airplane TO or FROM the selected NAVAID. 

a. Away from Station 

If the direction of flight (heading) is to be away FROM the station, the 

NAVAID radial will be the same value as the NAVAID course. Note 

that the aircraft is heading 0 degrees (North). The tail of the bearing 

pointer is also on 0 degrees, the aircraft heading. The Head of the 

bearing pointer is on 180 on the RMI compass card 

The aircraft is flying away FROM the station. The course is the same 

as the radial. 

b. Toward The Station 

Now the aircraft is heading 0, or Due North. The head of the bearing 

pointer is also on 0 on the RMI compass card. The tail of the pointer 

is on 180. The aircraft is flying TO the station. When an aircraft is 

heading to the station, its inbound course is said to be the reciprocal 

of the radial it’s on. In our example, although we are on the 180-
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-29 01 JUL 13 

degree radial, the inbound course to the station is 0 (the reciprocal of 

the 180-degree radial). 

Adding or subtracting 180 from the radial that the aircraft is inbound 

on will result in the aircraft’s course. Through the proper interpretation 

of radials, and the inbound and outbound courses, you can keep your 

situational awareness in relation to an approach procedure. 

5. Lesson Exercise 6 

a. Using the on-screen presentation, list the radial and relative 

aircraft position in relation to the station. 

III. SUMMARY/REVIEW 

A. You have: 

1. Located and identified approach plate components and symbols. 

2. Located and identified departure and arrival procedures using SIDS 

and STARS. 

3. Located and identified Instrument Approach Procedures. 

4. Located and identified IAF to FAF Procedures. 

5. Located and identified Final Approach Procedures. 

6. Used the RMI and DME to determine aircraft position. 

B. Conclusion 

KC-10 crewmembers spend a lot of time preparing for events we never 

expect to happen. We practice “worst case” scenarios, or “killer items” in the 

vernacular of our trade. When media coverage is read of an aircraft 

accident or study a National Transportation Safety Board’s final report, 

usually, a crewmember aboard the aircraft could have detected errors 

and should have been assertive enough to insist on corrective action.

You will never be required to fly an instrument approach. However, it is 

important to be able to detect deviations from the briefed procedure and 

determine if equipment is set correctly. Become familiar with the terminology, 

definitions, and symbols used, and be able to correctly interpret the charts 

associated with terminal instrument procedures. 

It is important that all crewmembers remain alert and aware of events. The 

majority of aircraft accidents are not caused by the failure of an aircraft 

component or system. Instead, they happen when one or more 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

members of the aircrew are diverted from the situation and unaware of 

the aircraft position. 

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-30 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

FTD Mission 2 

I. Purpose – The purpose of this FTD mission is to allow practice of normal 

procedures for starting engines, taxi, takeoff, climb, cruise, enroute descent, 

approach, landing, after landing, and leaving the aircraft. Student B will be in the 

left seat for this FTD.

II. Duration – 3.5 hours 

A. 1.0 hour pre-brief 

B. 2.0 hours FTD 

C. 0.5 hour debrief 

III. Reference Materials 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Flight Manual Performance Data 

IV. Equipment and Materials 

A. Flight Training Device 

B. Briefing Room 

C. TOLD Card provided in device 

D. DOD FLIP (Terminal), High and Low Altitude U.S., Volumes 3 or 21 

E. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

F. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

G. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-2 

V. Student Preparation/Review 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IV, Normal Procedures (Through Climb and Cruise) 

2. Section V, Part 2, Operating Techniques (Takeoff and Climb) 

B. Each student must have the following CBT lessons completed: 

1. Engine Start Procedures 

2. Before Takeoff Procedures 

3. Takeoff Procedures 

4. Climb/Cruise Procedures 

5. Descent Procedures 

6. Approach Procedures 

7. Landing/Missed Approach Procedures 

8. After Landing Procedures 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T602-SG 1-63-1 01 JUL 13
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Pilot Objectives

Training objectives previously introduced that will be practiced during this 

training mission:

1. Demonstrate Airmanship/Situational Awareness 

2. Demonstrate Judgment/Compliance 

3. Demonstrate Safety Consciousness 

4. Demonstrate Regulation, Directive Knowledge and Use 

5. Perform General Navigation 

6. Perform Mission Planning and Briefing 

7. Perform Crew Coordination 

8. Demonstrate Performance Knowledge and Use 

9. Perform Fuel Management and Conservation 

10. Perform Radar Operation 

11. Perform Communications 

12. Perform Missed Approach (Auto) Procedures 

13. Perform Landing 

14. Perform Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) 

15. Perform Checklist Procedures and Use 

16. Perform Equipment Operation 

17. Perform Cockpit Preparation Procedures 

18. Perform Before Start Procedures 

19. Perform Starting Engines Procedures 

20. Perform Before Taxi Procedures 

21. Perform Before Takeoff Procedures 

22. Perform Left Seat Takeoff 

23. Perform Takeoff, Initial 

24. Perform Pilot Not Flying (PNF) Takeoff and Climb Duties 

25. Perform After Takeoff/Climb Procedures 

26. Perform Cruise Procedures 

27. Perform Descent Procedures 

28. Perform Enroute Descent Procedures 

29. Perform Approach Procedures 

30. Perform ILS Coupled Approach Procedures 

31. Perform Before Landing Procedures 

32. Perform Downwind Procedures 

33. Perform After Landing Procedures 

34. Perform Parking - Engine Shutdown Procedures 

35. Perform Leaving Aircraft Procedures 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T602-SG 1-63-2 01 JUL 13
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Flight Engineer Objectives

Training objectives previously introduced that will be practiced during this 

training mission:

1. Demonstrate Airmanship/Situational Awareness 

2. Demonstrate Regulation, Directive Knowledge and Use 

3. Perform General Navigation 

4. Perform Crew Coordination 

5. Demonstrate Performance Knowledge and Use 

6. Perform FMS Operation 

7. Perform Communications 

8. Perform Mission Planning and Briefing 

9. Demonstrate Judgment/Compliance 

10. Demonstrate Safety Consciousness 

11. Perform Equipment Operation 

12. Perform Checklist Procedures and Use 

13. Perform Cockpit Preparation Procedures 

14. Perform Before Start Procedures 

15. Perform Starting Engines Procedures 

16. Perform Before Taxi Procedures 

17. Perform Before Takeoff Procedures 

18. Perform Fuel Management and Conservation Procedures 

19. Perform FE Takeoff Duties 

20. Perform After Takeoff/Climb Procedures 

21. Perform Cruise Procedures 

22. Perform Descent Procedures 

23. Perform Approach Procedures 

24. Perform Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) Procedures 

25. Perform Before Landing Procedures 

26. Perform Downwind Procedures 

27. Perform After Landing Procedures 

28. Perform Parking - Engine Shutdown Procedures 

29. Perform Leaving Aircraft Procedures 

30. Perform Instrument Approach Procedures 

31. Perform Missed Approach Procedures 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T602-SG 1-63-3 01 JUL 13
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Profile

1. Cockpit Preparation 

2. Before Start 

3. Starting Engines 

4. Before Taxi 

5. Before Takeoff 

6. Takeoff, Initial 

7. After Takeoff/Climb 

8. Cruise 

9. Descent Checklist 

10. Enroute Descent 

11. Approach Checklist 

12. ILS Coupled Approach 

13. Before Landing Checklist 

14. Auto Missed Approach 

15. Downwind Checklist 

16. ILS Coupled Approach 

17. Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) 

18. After Landing Checklist 

19. Parking – Engine Shutdown Checklist 

20. Leaving Aircraft Checklist 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T602-SG 1-63-4 01 JUL 13
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Mission Briefing 

1. Mission Overview: Briefed by the Instructors 

2. Specialty Briefing and Instructional Period 

a. This is an FTD for Pilots and Flight Engineers. All required crew 

coordination will be accomplished by the appropriate crewmember. 

b. Instructor Briefs: 

(1) TOLD Card as required 

(2) Cockpit Preparation Checklist 

(3) Engine Start Checklist 

a. Before Start 

b. Start Engine 

(4) Taxi and Takeoff Procedures and Techniques 

(5) After Takeoff/Climb/Cruise Procedures and Techniques 

(6) Descent Procedures and Techniques 

(7) Approach Procedures and Techniques 

(8) Missed Approach Procedures and Techniques 

(9) Downwind Procedures 

(10) Landing Procedures and Techniques 

(11) After Landing Procedures 

3. Crew Briefing: Pilot student B will accomplish the briefing. The crew will be 

briefed IAW Section V of the Flight Manual. The items covered will be the normal 

procedures from cockpit preparation to after landing. 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T602-SG 1-63-5 01 JUL 13
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T602-SG 1-63-6 01 JUL 13
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-1 01 JUL 13

Performance Workshop V 

(Climb/Cruise/Holding/Air Refueling/Descent) 

Flight Planning Workshop 

(Computerized/Manual) 

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this workshop is to provide an opportunity for you to 

practice computing Inflight Data and verify the fuel calculations of a computer 

flight plan. You should have completed the assigned workbooks prior to 

attending this workshop period. Climb, Cruise, Holding, Air Refueling, and 

Descent Performance Data along with computerized flight planning exercises are 

covered in this lesson. The lesson will be presented in three segments. 

Segment One is the Performance Workshop, Segment Two is Computerized 

Flight Planning Workshop, and Segment Three is the Flight Engineer Worksheet 

(AF IMT 4091). Segments One and Two are divided into two parts. Part One 

describes the topics to be covered by the workshop exercises, and Part Two 

consists of the workshop exercises to be completed and their solutions. 

Segment Three explains blocks on the Flight Engineer Worksheet. The 

instructor will present the workshop exercises for you to complete, and give the 

appropriate guidance when your questions arise. Once again, this is intended to 

be a workshop, and not simply a lecture. 

II. Duration – 3.5 hours

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Performance Manual 

C. Introduction to KC-10 Performance Workbook 

D. Exercise Text 

E. AFI 11-2KC-10V3 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A1-1 

C. Computerized Flight Plan Sample Mission 

D. KC-10 Flight Plan and Fuel Log AF IMT 4090 

E. KC-10 Mission Data Worksheet AF IMT 4091 

F. DOD Information Publication – AR-621 Information Page 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-2 01 JUL 13

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. Prior to this lesson the student should have completed the following 

workbooks. 

1. Climb, Cruise, and Holding Data 

2. KC-10 Air Refueling Performance 

3. Descent, Approach and Landing Data 

4. Flight Plan Mission Forms 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 Review 

1. Section IV - Climb 

2. Section V - Cruise 

3. Section VI - Holding 

4. Section VII - Air Refueling 

5. Section VIII - Descent 

C. Review AFI 11-2KC-10V3, Chapters 6, 8, 12, 14 

D. Read accompanying exercise text 

Objectives 

1. Using the KC-10 Flight Manuals: Compute Climb, Cruise, Holding, Air Refueling, 

and Decent Performance Data. 

2. Verify computer flight plan fuel burn using the KC-10 Performance Manual and 

the standard fuel planning values in AFI 11-2KC10V3, Chapter 14. 

3. Given a Mission Data AF IMT 4091 complete the form using AFI 11- 2KC10V3, 

Chapters 12 & 14. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-3 01 JUL 13

Segment One – Part I 

Climb

The climb charts provide information necessary for planning aircraft climb performance. 

For three engine climbs, you can use either maximum climb thrust, or perform a derated 

climb using maximum cruise thrust. Two engine climbs will be performed at maximum 

continuous thrust. A derated climb allows you to operate the engines at a lower thrust 

setting, but requires more time in the climb, thus requiring more fuel (This is not used). 

N1 Setting charts are provided to calculate the climb power setting at the beginning of 

Section IV in the performance manual. 

After calculating the climb power setting, the time, distance, and fuel required to climb 

are calculated from the respective charts. Just like the N1 Setting charts, Time to Climb, 

Distance to Climb, and Fuel to Climb charts are provided for three engine climb thrust, 

derated, and two engine climbs. Procedures for using all charts are the same. 

Remember from the workbook that you enter the chart with the starting gross weight, 

move up to the start of climb altitude, and then parallel the fuel burn lines to the end of 

climb altitude. Don’t forget to note the beginning climb values before following the 

guidelines up to the end of climb altitude. After extracting necessary data from the 

charts, do the math (i.e. starting altitude values vs. ending altitude values) to determine 

time, fuel and distance to climb. 

Climb time, distance, and fuel can also be computed from the tab data charts provided. 

However, since these charts are based on a standard day and no winds, they require 

extensive interpolation to compute accurate data. This is their primary disadvantage. 

Charts are provided to compute three-engine and two-engine service ceilings. For any 

configuration other than clean, enter the chart with the aircraft's drag index (obtained 

from Figure 1-14, Drag Index Table or Table 14.1 AFI 11-2KC-10V3) to determine the 

service ceiling. The Effect of Drag Index charts are used to adjust the fuel, distance, 

and time required to climb when the aircraft's drag index is more than zero. 

Cruise

Several cruise profile options are available for mission planning and execution. A cruise 

climb profile may be the most efficient but its use can be inhibited by Air Traffic Control 

(ATC) restraints. A step cruise profile may be the second most efficient but, again, ATC 

restraints can make it difficult to use. The step cruise profile is normally planned for 

each mission, however, be prepared to use the constant speed/Mach cruise flown at a 

constant altitude if ATC requires. 

No matter what type of cruise is performed, step cruise, cruise climb, constant 

speed/Mach cruise, etc., the required data can be obtained from the specific range chart 

for the specific altitude being flown. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-4 01 JUL 13

The basic Three Engines and Two Engine Specific Range charts are based on a clean 

configuration and standard day temperature, with an N1 adjustment factor for nonstandard temperatures. Separate charts are provided for slats and flaps extended (flap 

Data is located in Section XII, Supplemental Performance); these charts are here in the 

case you may have to ferry an airplane with the devices in a fixed position. 

Another set of cruise performance charts in Section V of the KC-10-1-1 are the 

Integrated Range and Time charts. These charts can be used to determine the cruise 

range and time for a given fuel consumption, or to determine the fuel required to cruise 

a given range. 

You also have Optimum Altitude Cruise Performance charts that can be used to 

determine the speed, altitude, and specific range for optimum cruise performance 

versus gross weight. Enter the chart with a given gross weight and read up to the 99% 

or 100% max NM/1,000 lbs. to obtain the specific range, speed, and altitude from the 

appropriate chart. We in the KC-10 use 99%; the faster speed offsets the loss of 1% in 

range. 

Holding

Holding is a maneuver that keeps an aircraft within a specified airspace while awaiting 

clearance from ATC or during air refueling operations. The bank angle used during 

holding imposes a load factor on the aircraft requiring an increase in thrust. This 

additional load factor is known as an increase in aircraft effective weight. 

The information obtained from the Holding charts in Section VI of the Performance 

Manual includes the holding speed, target N1 power setting, and the total fuel flow in 

pounds per hour. The holding speed is defined as the minimum fuel flow speed. This 

speed could be less than 1.5 VS (1.4 VS slats extended) but is always well above the 

1.2g buffet onset speed. All the charts are based on standard day temperatures but 

include adjustment factors for temperatures above standard day. For each degree of 

temperature above standard day increase the N1 RPM by .20 % and the fuel flow by 35 

lbs per hour. 

When varying airspeed according to bank angle to improve endurance, you can obtain a 

more accurate account of fuel use by averaging the fuel flow for 0° bank and fuel flow at 

the required bank angle. An increase in drag index results in an increased fuel flow, 

which decreases endurance. When holding with a drag index greater than zero, obtain 

a fuel flow correction factor from the Effect of Drag Index on holding chart to compute a 

more accurate fuel flow. 

Air Refueling

Since one of the missions of the KC-10 is that of an air refueling tanker (with receiver 

capability), it is important to understand performance parameters associated with air 

refueling. The charts in Section VII are used to determine fuel consumption, airspeeds, 

and formatting capability during air refueling operations. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-5 01 JUL 13

When refueling at low airspeeds, such as with C-130's or A-10's, a minimum air 

refueling speed must be computed using the appropriate Cruise Buffet-Onset Boundary 

chart in Section I of the Performance Manual. 

Three charts are provided: one for a clean configuration, one for slats extended, and 

one for slats/flaps extended. Remember that, this is the slowest acceptable safe speed 

at which the aircraft can fly to accomplish air refueling. The KC-10 will not be flown with 

a minimum air refueling speed of less than 180 knots as per the Flight Manual section III 

Limitations. 

If the tanker arrives at the A/R track ahead of the receiver it may become necessary to 

orbit (tankers will make every effort to arrive at the ARCP a minimum of 15 minutes, as 

per T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 page 8.2-4). If so, A/R orbit airspeed and fuel consumption 

should be computed. Enter the chart with the gross weight and pressure altitude. 

Where the two intersect is the orbit-indicated airspeed, target N1 RPM, and total fuel 

flow. The first A/R Orbit chart works for all aircraft except the A-10. 

Formatting Capability charts are used to determine the maximum gross weight at which 

the KC-10 receiver can maintain position in the tanker downwash. The initial and final 

receiver weights cannot exceed the computed formatting capabilities. The second 

receiver weight is the End Air Refueling (EA/R) gross weight. Again the receiver weights 

cannot exceed the computed formatting capability. If it appears the receiver EA/R weight 

may cause a problem, further computations on fuel consumption during air refueling can 

be accomplished to determine a more accurate EA/R weight. 

Descent

The descent charts found in the Performance Manual are used to determine the time, 

distance and fuel required for a particular descent. The desired airspeed and rate of 

descent versus distance flown while descending will dictate the type of descent profile 

used. A long-range descent can be used when there is plenty of time to get down. 

When using this profile, a descent Rate of 275 ft per NM is achieved. An enroute 

descent of 300 ft per NM provides a faster descent. Both of these descent profiles are 

accomplished in the clean configuration. During a penetration descent the speed 

brakes are deployed and landing gear extended when the aircraft descends through 

20,000 ft MSL. 

Descent rates are as follows: 

Idle Thrust: 300 feet per NM 

Speed Brakes: 150 feet per NM 

Landing Gear: 150 feet per NM 

Slats: 150 feet per NM 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-6 01 JUL 13

Segment One – Part II

Workshop Exercises

For the following exercises, use the appropriate charts in Section IV and Section I of the 

Performance Manual. 

Climb

1. Conditions: TAT = 15o

C 

 Pressure Altitude = 3,000 ft 

 Find Maximum Cruise Thrust ________ 

2. Conditions: TAT = -8oC 

 Pressure Altitude = 5,000 ft 

 Engine and Wing Anti-ice ON 

 Find Three Engine Climb Power ________ 

3. Conditions: TAT = -4oC 

 Pressure Altitude = 15,000 ft 

 Engine and Wing Anti-ice ON (#2 Engine Inoperative) 

 Find Two Engine Climb Power ________ 

 Conditions for Items 4 - 6: 

 Gross Weight = 510,000 lbs 

 Start of Climb = Sea Level 

 Climb to FL 330 

 Temp Dev = -5o

C

 Wind = 45 knot headwind 

Maximum Climb Thrust 

4. Compute Fuel to Climb __________ 

5. Compute Distance to Climb __________ 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-7 01 JUL 13

6. Compute Time to Climb __________ 

 Conditions for Items 7 - 10: 

 Gross Weight = 525,000 lbs 

 Start of Climb =10,000 ft MSL 

 Start of Climb KIAS = 250 

 Climb to Service Ceiling 

 Temp Dev = 0o

 Wind = 15 Knot tailwind 

 Wing Air Refueling Pods Installed with Hose and Drogue Retracted 

7. Compute Service Ceiling __________ 

8. Compute Fuel to Climb __________ 

9. Compute Distance to Climb __________ 

10. Compute Time to Climb __________ 

Cruise 

11. Compute the optimum altitude for an aircraft weighing 540,000 lbs. 

 __________ 

12. Find the Max Endurance Speed for a 510,000 lb aircraft cruising at FL 330. 

 __________ 

13. Compute Long Range Cruise Speed and Mach for a 410,000 lb aircraft at FL 310. 

 _________________ 

14. Compute Two Engine Optimum Altitude for a 360,000 lb aircraft. 

 _______________ 

15. Compute N1 RPM for Long-Range Cruise for an aircraft weighing 430,000 lbs at FL 

310. 

__________ 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-8 01 JUL 13

16. Compute Long Range Cruise NM/1,000 lb. for an aircraft weighing 375,000 lbs at 

 FL 200 with slats extended. ________________ 

Holding 

Using the following information, compute holding data for the listed conditions: 

 Gross Weight = 407,000 lbs 

 Altitude = 25,000 ft MSL 

 Bank Angle = 20o

 SAT = -30oC 

Find three engine holding data in a clean configuration. 

17. Airspeed ________ 

18. N1 RPM ________ 

19. Fuel Flow ___________ 

Find three engine holding data in a clean configuration with 0o bank. 

20. Airspeed __________ 

21. N1 RPM __________ 

22. Fuel Flow __________ 

Find two engine holding data in a clean configuration with 20o bank. 

23. Airspeed ___________ 

24. N1 RPM ___________ 

25. Fuel Flow ___________ 

Compute corrected Fuel Flow for holding with three engines, using 20o bank, with Wing 

Pods installed. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-9 01 JUL 13

26. Drag Index _________ 

27. Fuel Flow Factor _______ 

28. Corrected FF ________ 

Refueling

29. Your aircraft, weighing 515,000 lbs with a CG of 26.5%, is scheduled to refuel an 

A-10 at FL 190. Compute the minimum air refueling airspeed for (0°/RET) and 

slats (0°/EXT) configurations. 

 0°/RET __________ 

 0°/EXT __________ 

30. Your aircraft is scheduled to refuel a C-5B at FL 270 on AR track 312. You arrive 

at the ARCP 20 minutes ahead of the receiver. The tanker weighs 505,000 lbs The 

OAT is -28oC. Compute orbit speed, N1 power setting, and total fuel consumption 

during the 20-minute orbit. 

 Orbit Speed ________ 

 N1 Power ________ 

 Fuel Consumption _________________ 

31. Given the following conditions, determine the maximum weight formatting 

capability of a KC-10A Receiver/KC-135 Tanker: 

 Temp deviation = +15o

 C 

Receiver UARRSI and Light Reflector Doors Open and Enhanced A/R 

lighting installed 

Tanker Gross weight = 265,000 lbs 

Fuel offload = 48,000 lbs 

 Initial ____________ 

 EA/R ____________ 

32. Compute receiver and tanker fuel data during air refueling using the following 

information: 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-10 01 JUL 13

 KC-10 Receiver initial gross weight = 322,000 lbs 

KC-10 Tanker initial gross weight = 590,000 lbs 

Altitude = 20,000 ft MSL 

Fuel Offload = 80,000 lbs 

Temperature = standard day 

Air Refueling Time = 50 minutes (ARCP to EA/R Time) 

No. 2 Engine Inoperative (Receiver) 

Air Refueling Airspeed =290 KIAS 

 Receiver Instantaneous Fuel Burn __________ 

 Average Tanker Weight __________ 

 Receiver Fuel Consumed __________ 

 Receiver Net Fuel Onload __________ 

 Receiver EA/R Gross Weight __________ 

 Receiver Average Weight __________ 

 Receiver Average Fuel Burn __________ 

 Receiver Fuel Burn During A/R __________ 

 Tanker NM/1,000 lb. __________ 

 Tanker Fuel Burn __________ 

Descent

Compute the fuel, distance and time for three descent profiles using the following 

conditions: 

 Beginning Altitude = 35,000 ft MSL 

 Ending Altitude = 5,000 ft MSL 

 Winds = 25 knot headwind 

 Wing A/R Pods and Enhanced A/R Lighting Installed 

Long Range Descent 

33. Fuel ________ 

34. Distance ________ 

35. Time __________ 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-11 01 JUL 13

Enroute Descent 

36. Fuel _________ 

37. Distance _________ 

38. Time _________ 

Penetration Descent 

39. Fuel _________ 

40. Distance _________ 

41. Time _________ 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-12 01 JUL 13

Segment Two – Part I 

Computerized Flight Planning Workshop 

Flight Plan Familiarization 

KC-10 computer flight plan products are derived from two separate programs (PFPS 

and ACFP). Local mission computer flight plans are generated using PFPS. Off station 

and local Close Watch missions usually use the ACFP format generated using a global 

weather database to optimize routing and fuel burn efficiency. The computer flight 

plans are obtained from TACC or from the Special Missions sections at your home 

station. 

The headers along the manually input PFPS/ACFP flight plans basically describe the 

information contained in the flight plan. 

PFPS Heading 

│WP# FIX TAC │ MC │DISTANCE│ TEMP │CAS │ WIND │LEG TIME│ GR WT.│ │

│ REMARKS VOR │ MH │ LEG │ ALT │TAS │ DRIFT │ ETA │LEGFUEL│ │

│ LATITUDE LONGITUDE │ TC │ TOTAL │ MACH │ GS │DRAG IND│ACC TIME│FUEL RM│ │

ACFP Heading 

OPTIMIZED FUEL PLAN

WP LOCID TC VAR MC DC MH ALT GS DIS TIM AD DCHG

LAT LABEL MACH TAS TDIS ATIM FREM

LONG ID CHNL/ FREQ WIND TD CAS ETA GWT

Figure 1. Flight Plan Headers 

WP# - Number of sequential navigation or action point

FIX - Navigational aid identifier used

LATITUDE/LONGITUDE - Latitude and longitude of the desired action point

TAC VOR - Frequency of Navigational aid used

REMARKS - Used to manually input action point remarks 

LEG DIST - Ground distance from the preceding waypoint 

TOT DIS - Total Ground Distance from the beginning of the flight to the current waypoint 

MC - Magnetic course from the preceding waypoint 

TC - True course from the preceding waypoint 

ALT - Altitude in feet 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-13 01 JUL 13

TEMP - Standard day static air temperature at desired altitude 

MACH - Mach number 

CAS - Calibrated airspeed, same as indicated airspeed for the KC-10 

TAS - True airspeed

GS - Groundspeed, derived from the manually inputted winds 

TIME - Segment time from previous waypoint

EL TIME - Accumulated time from beginning of flight plan to selected waypoint

ETA - Estimated Time of Arrival 

ATA - Actual time to selected waypoint; filled in by crew during flight to check progress 

DRAG INDEX - Drag index value from performance manual 

WINDS/DRIFT - The manually input winds used for computations and drift angle 

Note: PFPS can use global winds.

LEG FUEL - Segment fuel used from previous waypoint 

FUEL FLOW - Engine fuel flow in pounds per hour

FUEL REM - Fuel remaining at the selected waypoint 

GROSS WT - Aircraft gross weight at selected waypoint

AR FUEL - Air refueling onload or offload fuel 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-14 01 JUL 13

The ACFP flight plan has the extra feature of a fuel summary following the flight plan 

output as follows: 

1 -ENROUTE 0633 092212 10-TAXI 001500 

2 -RESERVE 0000 012000 11-REQ D RAMP 111500 

3 -ENROUTE+RESERVE 0633 104212 12-ACTUAL RAMP ........... 

4 -ALTERNATE 0000 000000 13-UNIDENTIFIED EXTRA ........... 

5 -HOLDING 0115 012772 14-REQ D O/H DEST 027772 

6 -APP&LANDING 0015 003000 15-ENDURANCE/DEST 0237 

7 -AR ONLD/OFFL - 020000 16-TOTAL ENDURANCE 0849 

8 -IDENTIFIED EXTRA 010016 17-B/O 095212 

9 -SUBTOTAL 0803 110000 

 

NOTE: BLOCK 9 REFLECTS FOLLOWING ONLOADS/OFFLOADS. 

TOTAL FUEL ONLOAD 030000 TOTAL FUEL OFFLOAD 010000 

Figure 2. Fuel Summary 

ENROUTE - Time and fuel from start of second segment to begin descent point, 

includes transition fuel at enroute locations

RESERVE – Cat 1 reserve. This block is no longer used.

ALTERNATE - If required, fuel for flight from missed approach point at intended 

destination, to alternate using time and fuel to alternate, or specific range charts 

HOLDING - 1 + 15 fuel for remote or island destinations; blank otherwise 

APP&LANDING – Fuel from Begin Descent Point to landing; Use 3,000 lbs if calculated 

separately from descent fuel 

AR ONLD/OFFL - Net fuel onload and offload 

IDENTIFIED EXTRA - Fuel added for unplanned contingencies 

SUBTOTAL - Total of enroute and reserve and subsequent blocks 

TAXI - 1,500 lbs 

REQ D RAMP - Required ramp fuel load; addition of all blocks 

UNIDENTIFIED EXTRA - Difference between actual and required ramp fuel, should not 

exceed 10,000 lbs 

REQ D O/H DEST - Reserve plus alternate plus holding plus approach and landing 

ENDURANCE/DEST - Planned endurance time at initial approach fix fuel 

TOTAL ENDURANCE - Total enroute plus endurance time 

B/O - Accumulated fuel burn-off for each segment from departure to destination 

Additional information specific to the parameters of ACFP flight plans is contained in 

AFI 11-2KC-10V3, Chapter 6 and 14. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-15 01 JUL 13

Flight Plan Fuel Verification

 

AFI 11-2KC-10 V3, Chapter 6, states that: Computer flight plans will be verified by the 

flight crew for route definition and accuracy prior to departure. 

AFI 11-2KC-10V3, Chapter 14, also states it is the crew’s responsibility to review each 

CFP and determine if the planned values chosen by the flight planner are sufficient and 

correct for the mission. The CFP fuel calculations must be verified using T.O. 1C10(K)A-1-1. and the following fuel computation verification procedure: 

The flight engineer does this by completing the time and fuel analysis block of the AF 

Form 4091. Use sections 5 Specific Range charts or Section 10 Flight Planning Tables 

to verify the enroute portion. Confirming each and every segment on the flight plan is 

not necessary Note: Air refueling activities and flying at altitudes lower than figures 10-6 

through 10-11 will increase fuel required. 

1. Start engines, taxi, and APU operation. Normally 1500 lbs. When more than 

15 minutes ground operation time is anticipated, add 100 lbs for each minute in 

excess of 15 minutes, not to exceed 3,000 lbs. 

2. Takeoff. This will normally be the first line entry on a flight plan and represents 

the amount of time and fuel used from the start of takeoff roll (brake release) to 

the start of climb (2,000 ft). This is normally 2.5 minutes and 2,500 lbs of fuel. 

3. ADD number 1 (1,500 lbs) and number 2 (2,500 lbs) together so you would see 

4,000 lbs total. 

4. Enroute. Fuel for flight from start of climb segment at the departure location to 

begin descent point at destination. 

5. Climb. Initial and second segment climb will normally be shown as a separate 

line entry, while enroute climbs may be included as part of the cruise leg. For 

climbs in excess of 4,000 ft, compute the additional fuel required to climb and 

add this value to the fuel for cruise during that leg. 

6. Cruise. Fuel for cruise is calculated using specific range charts. Enter the 

chart for the proper altitude with the planned indicated air speed (IAS) or MACH 

and average gross weight. Nautical miles per 1,000 lbs of fuel divided into the 

air distance for the leg equals fuel consumption for that segment. If a chart for 

the planned altitude is not available, the chart for the next lower altitude should 

be used. 

7. Every effort should be made to plan cruise segments at the altitude and speeds 

that provide the best fuel economy. Altitudes 2,000 ft above or below optimum 

altitude, or speeds in excess of 0.02 MACH above optimum, will cause a rapid 

degradation of fuel economy. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-16 01 JUL 13

8. Descents, Approach and Landing. ACFP flight plans calculate Descent, 

Approach and Landing Fuel in Block 6. CFP add fuel used from the Begin 

Descent Point to Initial Approach Fix for descent and then add 15 minutes and 

3000 pounds for approach and landing. 

9. Alternate (If required). Fuel for missed approach and flight from intended 

destination to alternate aerodrome. Use Time and Fuel to Alternate, or Specific 

Range charts. 

10. Transition. When transition training is scheduled, use a standard fuel 

consumption value of 18,000 lbs per hour. This includes the fuel used for 

descent and initial approach. 

11. Air Refueling. Fuel consumption during tanker refueling is normally calculated 

using the specific range charts. Enter the chart for the proper altitude with the 

planned IAS and average gross weight and determine the average nautical 

miles per pound/1,000 (NMPP/1,000). 

12. Apply the drag index values for that particular configuration. See Table 14.1 

PFPS/ACFP Drag Index Values. As a receiver, use the Fuel Consumption 

During Air Refueling charts (Chapter 7) in the performance manual. 

13. Reserve Fuel 

Holding Fuel. Fuel for 45 minutes of holding. Compute using planned 

destination gross weight at 10,000 feet. Use the Three-Engine Holding Table 

with a 25-degree bank angle. NOTE: ACFP does not use the Three-Engine 

Holding Table to compute holding fuel. Block 18 on the 4091 will always be less 

than the holding block on the ACFP. This is authorized extra fuel and the 

difference will be entered in block 21 of the 4091. If ACFP holding fuel is less 

than block 18 on the 4091, there is an error in your ACFP. Contact your flight 

manager to resolve. 

Remote Destination. When holding is required in lieu of an alternate at a 

remote destination, carry an additional one hour and 15 minutes of holding fuel. 

A remote destination is defined as any aerodrome which, due to its unique 

geographic location, offers no suitable alternate (civil or military) within 2 hours 

flying time. When this option is used, calculate Reserve Fuel (Holding, Remote, 

and Contingency) using the Three-Engine Holding table with a 25-degree bank 

angle, planned destination gross weight, 20,000 feet MSL. 

Contingency. For missions other than local training missions, calculate 15 

minutes of contingency fuel. Local training missions are not required to carry 

contingency fuel. If contingency fuel is carried on local training missions, it 

should not exceed 15 minutes. In all cases, this fuel is to compensate for 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-17 01 JUL 13

unforeseen circumstances during any phase of flight (i.e. Unforecasted 

weather, launch delay, etc). Contingency fuel will not be considered reserve 

fuel since crews may burn some or all of their contingency fuel at any time 

during the mission. Compute using planned destination gross weight at 10,000 

feet. Use the Three-Engine Holding Table with a 25-degree bank angle. 

ACFP flight plans will calculate reserves and contingency fuel as holding fuel. 

ACFP will have 1+00 holding when combined 0+45 reserve and 0+15 

contingency fuel (for remote destinations ACFP will calculate 2+15 holding, 

combining 2+00 reserve and 15 minutes contingency fuel). 

Air Refueling Flight Plan Verification 

It must be clearly understood that the verification procedure described above is only 

accurate for missions that are flown at the appropriate altitudes and cruise profiles that 

the charts are based on. The charts in the performance manual (Figures 10-6 through 

10-11) are for missions that do not have planned air refueling. To verify fuel burns for 

mission flight plans that have one or more air refueling included, the following procedure 

is suggested: 

1. Verify initial takeoff and taxi fuel in segment 1 of the flight plan is the standard 

planning number of 4,000 lbs (1,500 taxi and 2,500 takeoff/acceleration). This 

fuel accounts for engine start, taxi, and climb to 2,000 ft above the airfield. 

2. Using Figure 4-5, THREE ENGINE FUEL TO CLIMB, calculate the fuel 

required to climb from 2,000 ft above the airfield to the initial level-off altitude 

shown on the flight plan. Remember to account for any drag index. The 

resulting value should be very close to the CFP climb fuel. 

3. Verify the leg fuel for the cruise and tanker A/R segments of the flight plan 

using the appropriate Specific Range charts from section 5 of the Performance 

Manual. There are several methods to calculate the leg fuel. An asterisk in the 

table below indicates the two most often used. 

The following formulas may be used: 

*FF = TASK ÷ NMPP *F/Pd = Air distance ÷ NMPP 

FF = F/Pd ÷ Time (minutes) x 60 F/Fd = FF ÷ 60 x Time (minutes) 

D = NMPP x F/Pd F/Fd = FF ÷ TASK x Distance 

TASK = NMPP x FF NM/1,000 = D ÷ F/Fd x 1,000 

Time (minutes) = F/Pd ÷ FF x 60 NMPP = Air Distance ÷ F/Fd 

Air Distance (AD) = True Airspeed (TAS) X Ground Distance (GD) ÷ Ground Speed 

(GS) 

Table 1 - Formulas 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-18 01 JUL 13

4. Tanker Orbit leg fuel burns can be verified using the AR Orbit table (Fig 7-1). 

 The sample flight plan has a planned rendezvous orbit at 22,000 ft after 

waypoint 5. Using Figure 7-1 and the planned gross weight, we can calculate a 

fuel flow of approximately 330 lbs per minute (Interpolation is required). 

Multiply this value by the number of minutes in the orbit segment to verify the 

leg fuel for the orbit. Orbit fuel can also be verified using the Specific Range 

charts, however, the orbit table takes into account the bank angle, so it is 

somewhat more accurate. 

5. Receiver Air Refueling leg fuel can be verified by the following method. FUEL 

CONSUMPTION DURING RECEIVER AIR REFUELING charts (Figures 7-5 

and 7-6). These charts reflect the effect of flying in the tanker’s downwash. 

The tanker’s gross weight must be known, however, and this information is not 

always available so use the maximum weights on the chart. 

6. AFI 11-2KC-10V3, Chapter 14 provides the following guidance for verifying 

descent/approach & landing fuel values. ACFP use Approach and Landing 

Block 6 for Time and Fuel calculation. CFP add fuel used from the Begin 

Descent Point to Initial Approach Fix for descent, then add 15 minutes and 

3000 pounds for approach and landing. Otherwise compute descent fuel from 

Section 8 of TO 1C-10(K)A-1-1 and then add 15 minutes and 3000 pounds for 

approach and landing. 

7. Pattern work/transition is calculated by the flight planning software using 18,000 

lbs per hour and can be verified by simply multiplying this fuel flow times the 

time shown for the transition segment. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-19 01 JUL 13

Segment Two – Part II

The following flight plan on the following pages is to be used for this fuel burn 

verification exercise. It was developed using the PFPS program. This mission contains 

both tanker and receiver A/R, and concludes with transition/pattern work at the 

destination field. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-20 01 JUL 13

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-21 01 JUL 13

Figure 3. PFPS Mission Flight Plan (Sheet 1 of 2) 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-22 01 JUL 13

Figure 3. PFPS Mission Flight Plan (Sheet 2 of 2)
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-23 01 JUL 13

PFPS Flight Plan Fuel Solutions 

The following fuel computations were calculated from the Performance Manual. During 

the lesson exercise you may obtain slightly different numbers due to interpolation 

variances. 

Segment 1 – 4,000 lbs. Standard value from AFI 11-2KC-10V3 

Segment 2 through Level-off – 8,576 lbs (1548+5895+1133). Calculated from Figure 4-

5, THREE ENGINE FUEL TO CLIMB, from 2,000 ft up to 25,000 ft fuel burn is 8,300 

lbs. 

Segment 4 – Calculated from Figure 5-19, THREE ENGINE SPECIFIC RANGE, 

NM/1,000 = 21.4. Fuel burn is 5,100 lbs.

ORBIT Segment – Calculated from Figure 7-1, AR ORBIT TABLE. Fuel flow = 340 lbs 

per minute. Fuel Burn 4,950 lbs per minute. 

Segment 5, 6 and 7 – Calculated from Figure 5-19. Using the Drag Index Table Figure 

1-14 of 18.5 (Air Refueling Boom Deployed 16.5 & ARO Sighting Door Open 2.0). Next 

take this 18.5 to Effect of Drag Index On Range Figure 5-56; the effect is .935 on range. 

The average NM/1,000 value of 21.2 is corrected to 19.82. Fuel Burn for these three 

segments 7,630 lbs. Don’t forget to subtract your offload of 50,000 lbs. 

Segment 8 – Calculated from Figure 5-19. Using the NM/1,000 value of 25.0. Fuel 

Burn 1,221 lbs. 

Segments 9, 10 and 11 – Calculated using FIG 7-5, FUEL CONSUMPTION DURING 

AIR REFUELING. Assume a maximum tanker gross weight of 600,000 lbs to obtain a 

fuel flow of 390 lbs per minute. Fuel Burn is 12,090 lbs. Again don’t forget the onload 

of 50,000 lbs. 

Descent PT – Calculated using FIG 8-2, ENROUTE DESCENT. A descent from 33,000 

ft down to 3,000 ft. Fuel Burn is 1,560lbs (25,000 = 1,600, 3,000 = 400). 

 

SEGMENT 15 – Standard planning value of 3,000 lbs. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-24 01 JUL 13

Segment Three – Flight Engineer Worksheet 

Flight Engineer Worksheet 

The Flight Engineer Worksheet is used to record pertinent data during mission planning 

and all phases of flight from pre-flight through post flight activities. 

The front side of the form contains Inflight Activity and Mission Planning sections. A 

blank form is provided at the end of this lesson. 

This section will cover the entries required on the front side of the form. 

Your Unit may use a different format; however, the data contained in the form should be 

the same. 

The Flight Engineer Worksheet has two sections, Inflight Activity and Mission Planning. 

Only those sections required for the mission or through local guidance need to be 

completed. Units may supplement this with additional local guidance for NERCCs, 

Standardized Alternates, etc. Complete the Time and Fuel Analysis prior to every flight 

to verify flight plan computations. Most entries are self-explanatory. Blocks 1 through 

13 provide a worksheet to aid in completing the Time and Fuel Analysis.

Detailed information will be provided in AFI 11-2KC-10, Volume 3, Chapters 12 and 14.
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-25 01 JUL 13

Figure 4. Inflight Activity
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-26 01 JUL 13

Inflight Activity: Refueling Air Refueling and Tanker Air Refueling, Approaches & 

Landings 

RECEIVER AIR REFUELING information, including call sign, type of aircraft, scheduled 

onload, actual onload and number of contacts. 

TANKER AIR REFUELING information, including call sign, tail number, scheduled 

offload, actual offload and number of contacts.

LANDINGS/APPROACHES 

This block provides a tabulated table in which you record touch and go landings, missed 

approaches and full stop/taxi backs. 

Figure 5. Schedule

Most of the information required for completion of the Header for each of the refueling 

activities can be found in the locally published daily schedule shown in the example 

above. The ACTUAL entries are entered as they occur during the mission.
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-27 01 JUL 13

 

Figure 6. Mission Planning 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-28 01 JUL 13

MISSION PLANNING 

This section satisfies the requirements of AFI 11-202V3 and AFI 11-2KC-10V3. This 

section consists of the following seven blocks: Fuel Quantities; Weights; Center of 

Gravity; CAT I Reserve Fuel; Decompression Fuel; Air Refueling Fuel; Destination 

Transition Fuel: and Time and Fuel Analysis.

FUEL QUANTITIES 

Three columns, labeled Plan, Actual, and After, make up this section and include 

provisions to record individual fuel tank quantities, total fuel quantity, and fuel totalizer 

readings for the two columns labeled ACTUAL and AFTER. 

 1. PLAN 

This column is provided for mission planning computations. Maintenance 

personnel normally service the aircraft prior to aircrew arrival. Fuel distribution, 

other than standard fuel loads, may be required due to air refueling requirements 

or cargo limitations that dictate specific offload or center of gravity requirements. 

The flight engineer, after coordinating with the boom operator, plans an optimum 

ramp fuel load, which will satisfy mission requirements. The desired fuel load 

and fuel distribution for the mission is shown in the (PLAN) column. 

2. ACTUAL 

During the preflight check of the fuel system, the flight engineer will make any 

required adjustment to the fuel tank quantities; coordinate the distribution with 

the boom operator; and enter the actual tank quantities in the (ACTUAL) column. 

3. AFTER 

This value is entered upon engine shutdown at destination and is recorded on 

the Fuel Totalizer line.
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-29 01 JUL 13

Figure 7. Mission Planning 

(Weights) 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-30 01 JUL 13

WEIGHTS 

Contains pertinent aircraft and fuel weights. Two columns (Plan and Actual) are 

provided to record the following weights: Operating; Cargo/Pax; Zero Fuel; Fuel; Ramp; 

Taxi and Takeoff. 

1. PLAN 

The first three aircraft weights; Aircraft Operating Weight, Cargo/Passenger 

Weight, and Zero Fuel Weight are provided by the boom operator during mission 

planning and entered in the appropriate blocks. Ramp Weight is the Zero Fuel 

Weight plus the Fuel Weight. Taxi Fuel is a standard 1,500 pounds unless 

mission requirements dictate otherwise. Takeoff Weight is the Ramp Weight 

minus Taxi Fuel. 

2. ACTUAL 

Operating Weight, Cargo/Passenger Weight, and Zero Fuel Weight should be the 

same values computed and entered in the Form "F" by the boom operator. 

Ramp Fuel is the same value entered in block 34 (12). The sum of these weights 

should be the same gross weight on which the TOLD data is based. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-31 01 JUL 13

Figure 8. Mission Planning 

(Center of Gravity)
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-32 01 JUL 13

CENTER OF GRAVITY % MAC 

Contains Center of Gravity % MAC information. Blocks are provided for the PLANNED 

and ACTUAL values. 

 1. PLAN 

Like the aircraft weights, the boom operator provides the planned aircraft Zero 

Fuel Weight CG value. The Flight Engineer based on fuel load, mission 

requirements, and a structural limitation computes the planned takeoff CG. 

 2. ACTUAL 

Actual zero fuel weight for cargo missions and abnormal fuel distribution for 

unusual A/R missions may cause the actual CG to differ greatly from the planned 

values. CG can be critical to takeoff performance, especially at heavy gross 

weights. Takeoff CG is based on Brake Release Gross Weight and the aft limits 

reach a very narrow band at maximum gross weight. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-33 01 JUL 13

Figure 9. Mission Planning 

(Time and Fuel Analysis)
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-34 01 JUL 13

TIME AND FUEL ANALYSIS 

This block contains time and fuel analysis. It consists of 16 lines and is used 

primarily to enter time and fuel requirements by phase of flight. Two columns 

labeled (TIME) and (FUEL) are provided and, depending upon the computation, 

one or both columns are used. The blocks parallel the fuel summary section of a 

standard CFP.

Block 14 

 Enroute. Time and fuel from brakes release to Begin Descent Point at 

destination. Includes transition fuel at enroute locations.

Block 15 

Cat 1 Reserve. This block no longer used 

Block 16 

Decompression Fuel. Enter fuel from Block 9, if greater then zero. 

 Decompression Fuel. Additional fuel may be needed to satisfy oxygen 

requirements. For flights where the total number of individuals on board the 

aircraft exceeds the total number of operational flight crew oxygen system 

stations, ensure there is sufficient fuel on board to allow for a loss of cabin 

pressurization from any point along the route, an emergency descent to 

10,000 feet MSL minimum, and continued flight to the nearest suitable 

emergency airfield. To compute decompression fuel, examine the intended 

route of flight and determine the point furthest from a suitable emergency 

airfield. From the flight plan determine the amount of fuel remaining on board 

the aircraft at that point. Compare that fuel remaining value with the amount 

of fuel that would be required to proceed from that furthest point, at 10,000 ft, 

to the suitable emergency airfield, execute a descent, approach and landing, 

and land with 12,000 pounds. 

Block 17 

Alternate. If required

Alternate. Fuel for missed approach and flight from intended destination to 

alternate aerodrome. Use Time and Fuel to alternate, or Specific Range 

charts. 

Block 18 

 Holding. Enter value from Reserve Fuel Table (Holding + Remote + 

Contingency) time and fuel 

Holding. Enter 45 minutes of fuel. Compute using planned destination gross 

weight at 10,000 feet. Use the Three-Engine Holding Table with a 25-degree 

bank angle. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-35 01 JUL 13

Remote Destination. Since remote destination fuel may be required in lieu of 

an alternate, at remote destinations enter the additional 1+15 minutes of 

holding fuel here. Enter “zero” in Block 17 if adding fuel for a remote 

destination.

Contingency. Enter 15 minutes of fuel computed using planned destination 

gross weight at 10,000 feet. Use the Three-Engine Holding Table with a 25 

degree bank angle. 

Block 19 

Descent, Approach & Landing. Use CFP add fuel from the Begin Descent 

Point to Initial Approach Fix for descent, then add 15 minutes and 3000 

pounds for approach and landing. Otherwise compute descent fuel from 

Section 8 of TO 1C-10(K)A-1-1, then add 15 minutes and 3000 pounds for 

approach and landing. 

Minimum Planned Fuel at Begin Descent Point. Consists of fuel required for 

descent, approach and landing, alternate/missed approach, and 

holding/minimum landing fuel. Additional fuel may be added to allow crews 

some flexibility when dealing with unplanned contingencies (e.g., late 

receivers, extra receivers, increased off loads, weather avoidance, ATC 

delays, etc.) This Identified Extra fuel should not normally exceed 10,000 

pounds. When dealing with unplanned contingencies, crews will still plan to 

touchdown with minimum landing fuel. Units may develop standard alternate 

fuel requirements for local training missions however; these fuel requirements 

will not be less than those specified in this AFI. 

Block 20 

AR On/Offload. Enter the amount from Block 12. 

Air Refueling. Scheduled offload minus scheduled onload. If scheduled 

onloads are not completed it may be impossible to complete the mission. 

Block 21 

Identified Extra. Compute as per Fuel Requirements Chapter 14. 

Block 22 

Taxi. Compute as per Fuel Requirements Chapter 14. 

Block 23 

Required Ramp Fuel Load. Add Blocks 14 thru 22. 

Required Ramp Fuel. Required ramp fuel will consist of all fuel required for 

engine start, taxi, APU operation, takeoff, enroute, enroute reserve, air 

refueling, decompression, descent, approach and landing, alternate, 

transition, holding/minimum landing. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-36 01 JUL 13

Block 24 

Actual Ramp Fuel Load. Self-explanatory. 

Block 25 

Unidentified Extra. Subtract Block 23 from Block 24. If this value exceeds 

5,000 pounds, see Fuel Planning Procedures 14.3. This block should not be 

less than zero. 

Block 26 

Required Overhead Destination is the minimum planned fuel at begin 

descent. Add blocks 17, 18 and 19 then subtract contingency fuel. 

Note: ACFP does not subtract contingency fuel from required overhead. 

Block 27 

Endurance at Begin Descent Point. Block 24, minus Block 22, minus Block 

14, plus/minus Block 20, divided by 15,000 pounds per hour. 

Block 28 

Total Endurance. Block 14 plus Block 27. This value should be entered onto 

the DD Form 175 or 1801. 

Block 29 

AR Onload Endurance. Planned onload divided by 15,000 pounds per hour. 

This value should be entered onto the DD Form 175 or 1801. 

This completes the Flight Engineer Worksheet entries. During the simulator 

phase, you will use this worksheet to compute fuel requirements for specific 

missions. 

The Time and Fuel Analysis is mandatory for all missions, since it satisfies the AFI 

11-202V3 requirements. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-37 01 JUL 13

Figure 10. Flight Engineer Worksheet 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-38 01 JUL 13

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-1 01 JUL 13 

FTD Mission 3 

I. Purpose – The purpose of this FTD mission is to allow for hands on practice of 

a local training flight. This mission will acquaint the crew with the handling 

characteristics of the KC-10 and use of the Flight Guidance System. The primary 

emphasis on this mission will be normal procedures and proper use of checklists. 

Student A will start in the left seat with a planned seat change. 

II. Duration – 7 hours 

A. 2.0 hour pre-brief 

B. 4.0 hour FTD 

C. 1.0 hour debrief 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

B. AFI 11-2KC-10, Vol 3, KC-10 Operations Procedures 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Flight Training Device 

B. Briefing Room 

C. TOLD Card 

D. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

E. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

F. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-2 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. Scenario, Profile, and applicable briefing items 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IV, Normal Procedures 

a. Initial Inspection through Leaving Aircraft 

2. Section V, Mission Preparation 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-2 01 JUL 13 

Pilot’s Objectives 

Training objectives introduced and practiced during this training mission: 

1. Perform Standard Instrument Departure (SID) Procedures 

2. Perform Full Stop Taxiback Procedures 

Training objectives previously introduced that will be practiced during this 

training mission: 

1. Demonstrate Airmanship/Situational Awareness 

2. Demonstrate Judgment/Compliance 

3. Demonstrate Safety Consciousness 

4. Demonstrate Regulation, Directive Knowledge, and Use 

5. Perform General Navigation 

6. Perform Mission Planning and Briefing 

7. Perform Checklist Procedures and Use 

8. Perform Crew Coordination 

9. Demonstrate Performance Knowledge and Use 

10. Perform Fuel Management and Conservation 

11. Perform Equipment Operation 

12. Perform Radar Operation 

13. Perform Communications 

14. Perform Pilot’s Interior Inspection Procedures 

15. Perform Cockpit Preparation Procedures 

16. Perform Before Start Procedures 

17. Perform Starting Engines Procedures 

18. Perform Before Taxi Procedures 

19. Perform Before Takeoff Procedures 

20. Perform Takeoff, Initial Procedures 

21. Perform Left Seat Takeoff Procedures 

22. Perform Pilot Not Flying Takeoff and Climb Duties 

23. Perform After Takeoff/Climb Procedures 

24. Perform Cruise Procedures 

25. Perform Descent Procedures 

26. Perform Enroute Descent Procedures 

27. Perform Approach Procedures 

28. Perform ILS Coupled Approach Procedures 

29. Perform Before Landing Procedures 

30. Perform Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) Procedures 

31. Perform After Landing Procedures 

32. Perform Parking – Engine Shutdown Procedures 

33. Perform Leaving Aircraft Procedures 

During this training mission, you are expected to practice and achieve required 

proficiency level (RPL) on the following procedure: 

1. Perform Vertical “S” Maneuver 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-3 01 JUL 13 

Flight Engineer’s Objectives

Training objectives introduced and practiced during this training mission: 

1. Perform Full Stop Taxiback Procedures 

2. Compute Fuel Requirements 

Training objectives previously introduced that will be practiced during this 

training mission: 

1. Demonstrate Airmanship/Situational Awareness 

2. Demonstrate Judgment/Compliance 

3. Demonstrate Safety Consciousness 

4. Demonstrate Regulation, Directive Knowledge, and Use 

5. Perform General Navigation Procedures 

6. Perform Crew Coordination 

7. Demonstrate Performance Knowledge and Use 

8. Perform FMS Operation 

9. Perform Equipment Operation 

10. Perform Communications 

11. Perform Mission Planning and Briefing 

12. Perform Checklist Procedures and Use 

13. Perform FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection Procedures 

14. Perform FE’s Interior Inspection Procedures 

15. Perform Cockpit Preparation Procedures 

16. Perform Before Start Procedures 

17. Perform Starting Engines Procedures 

18. Perform Before Taxi Procedures 

19. Perform Before Takeoff Procedures 

20. Perform Fuel Management and Conservation Procedures 

21. Perform FE Takeoff Duties 

22. Perform After Takeoff/Climb Procedures 

23. Perform Cruise Procedures 

24. Perform Descent Procedures 

25. Perform Approach Procedures 

26. Perform Before Landing Procedures 

27. Perform Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) Procedures 

28. Perform After Landing Procedures 

29. Perform Parking – Engine Shutdown Procedures 

30. Perform Leaving Aircraft Procedures 

31. Perform Standard Instrument Departure Procedures 

32 Perform Vertical “S” Maneuver 

33. Perform Instrument Approach Procedures 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-4 01 JUL 13 

Scenario FTD Mission 3

This mission is a local training flight at Travis AFB. Student A will start in the left seat 

with a seat change planned to allow student B to accomplish left seat items. This 

mission will acquaint the crew with the handling characteristics of the KC-10 and the 

use of the Flight Guidance System. The primary emphasis on this mission will be 

normal procedures and the proper use of checklists. 

Profile 

1. FE’s Interior Inspection 

2. Pilot’s Interior Inspection (A-L, B-R) 

3. Cockpit Preparation (A-L, B-R) 

4. Before Start (A-L, B-R) 

5. Starting Engines (A-L, B-R) 

6. Before Taxi (A-L, B-R) 

7. Before Takeoff (A-L, B-R) 

8. Takeoff, Initial (400,000 lbs) (A-L) 

9. Standard Instrument Departure (A-L) 

10. After Takeoff/Climb/Cruise (A-L) 

11. Vertical “S” Maneuver (Alpha) (A-L, B-R) 

12. Enroute Descent (A-L) 

13. ILS Coupled Approach (A-L) 

14. Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) (A-L) 

15. Full Stop Taxiback Seat Change (B-L, A-R) 

16. Takeoff, Initial (400,000) (B-L) 

17. Standard Instrument Departure (B-L) 

18. After Takeoff/Climb/Cruise (B-L) 

19. Vertical “S” Maneuver (Alpha) (B-L, A-R) 

20. Enroute Descent (B-L) 

21. ILS Coupled Approach (B-L) 

22. Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) (B-L) 

23. After Landing (B-L, A-R) 

24. Parking – Engine Shutdown (B-L, A-R) 

25. Leaving Aircraft (B-L, A-R) 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-5 01 JUL 13 

Mission Briefing 

1. Mission Overview: Briefed by the Instructor. 

2. Specialty Briefing and Instructional Period. 

a. Instructor Pilot Briefs: 

(1) Previous training and weak areas 

(2) Planned mission activities 

(3) Selected abnormal and emergency procedures 

b. Instructor Flight Engineer Briefs: 

(1) TOLD Card 

(2) CG Graph and Fuel Management 

(3) Terminal Enroute Procedures 

(4) Planned mission activities 

3. Crew Briefing conducted by Aircraft Commander: 

a. Normal and Emergency Takeoff considerations 

b. Planned Instrument Approach procedures 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-6 01 JUL 13 

 ***THE ACCURACY OF THIS AFMSS/PFPS COMPUTER FLIGHT PLAN DEPENDS UPON THE ACCURACY *** 

*****OF THE NIMA NAVIGATIONAL DATA BASE, THE WEATHER DATA BASE, AND USER INPUT.****** 

*******************AIRCREWS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR FUEL REQUIREMENTS ******************* 

**********************AND THE ROUTE OF FLIGHT THEY FILE AND FLY********************** 

RTE NAME:X:\Biennial Reviews\PIQ\Misc Suppor CFPS VERSION:4.2 

FLIGHT PLAN CREATED: 22 MAY 13 NIMA DAFIF EFF DATE: 2 JUL 09 

┌─────────────┬───────────────────────────────┬────────────────────────────────────────────────┐

│MISSION C/S │CLEARANCE │Takeoff Time(Z): 00:00 Oper Wt: 250000 │

│ │ │Land Time (Z) : 00:49 Cargo Wt: 0 │

├─────────────┤ │Sched Duration : +49 Ramp Fuel: 150000 │

│ACFT TYPE │ │FOB/RES : 06+22 Total GW: 400000 │

│ KC-10A │ │WARP Drag Index: 0.00 Ldg Fuel: 130752 │

│ │ │Total Dist(nm): 307.4 Climb Winds: │

│ │ │ L/O Winds: │

├─────────────┴───────────────────────────────┴────────────────────────────────────────────────│

│AR TRACK: ARCT: │

│UHF PRI: UHF SEC: │

│BCN: TACAN: │

│A/R ALT: │

│AVAIL BLK: │

├──────────────────────────┬────┬────────┬──────┬────┬────────┬────────┬───────┬───────────────┤

│WP# FIX TAC │ MC │DISTANCE│ TEMP │CAS │ WIND │LEG TIME│ GR WT.│ │

│ REMARKS VOR │ MH │ LEG │ ALT │TAS │ DRIFT │ ETA │LEGFUEL│ │

│ LATITUDE LONGITUDE │ TC │ TOTAL │ MACH │ GS │DRAG IND│ACC TIME│FUEL RM│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 1 KSUU 21R/RW │213 │ │ +15C │ │ │00+00 │396000 │ │

│ TRAVIS AFB │213 │ 1 │ 53M│ │0 │00:00 │ 4000 │ │

│N 38 15.818 W121 55.719 │227 │ 1 │ │ │0.00 │00:00 │ 146000│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 2 TEALL/W │215 │ │ +2C │N/A │ │00+02 │394612 │ │

│ TEALL │215 │ 7 │ 6568M│N/A │0 │00:02 │ 1388 │ │

│N 38 10.635 W122 03.111 │229 │ 8 │ N/A │N/A │0.00 │00:02 │ 144612│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 3 WAPEX/W │344 │ │ -14C │N/A │ │00+03 │392386 │ │

│ WAPEX │344 │ 17 │14418M│N/A │0 │00:05 │ 2226 │ │

│N 38 27.702 W122 03.973 │358 │ 25 │ N/A │N/A │0.00 │00:05 │ 142386│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ .level off │349 │ │ -23C │N/A │ │00+02 │391354 │ │

│ │349 │ 11 │19000M│N/A │0 │00:06 │ 1032 │ │

│N 38 39.007 W122 03.254 │003 │ 36 │ N/A │N/A │0.00 │00:06 │ 141354│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 4 ILA/R 091X │349 │ │ -23C │325 │ │00+04 │390252 │ │

│ WILLIAMS 114.40 │349 │ 25 │19000M│425 │0 │00:10 │ 1102 │ │

│N 39 04.269 W122 01.633 │003 │ 61 │ .69 │425 │0.00 │00:10 │ 140252│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 5 FMG/R 126X │061 │ │ -23C │325 │ │00+16 │385306 │ │

│ MUSTANG 117.90 │061 │ 114 │19000M│425 │0 │00:26 │ 4946 │ │

│N 39 31.876 W119 39.364 │075 │ 175 │ .69 │425 │0.00 │00:26 │ 135306│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ .descent pt │220 │ │ -23C │325 │ │00+07 │383239 │ │

│ │220 │ 48 │19000M│425 │0 │00:33 │ 2067 │ │

│N 39 03.794 W120 29.138 │234 │ 223 │ .69 │425 │0.00 │00:33 │ 133239│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 6 SAC/R 099X │220 │ │ +9C │N/A │ │00+11 │382162 │ │

│ SACRAMENTO 115.20 │220 │ 62 │ 3000M│N/A │0 │00:44 │ 1077 │ │

│N 38 26.625 W121 33.099 │234 │ 285 │ N/A │N/A │0.00 │00:44 │ 132162│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 7 SUU/T 113X │224 │ │ +15C │250 │ │00+05 │380752 │ │

│ TRAVIS │224 │ 22 │ 74M│250 │0 │00:49 │ 1410 │ │

│N 38 14.733 W121 56.704 │238 │ 307 │ .38 │250 │0.00 │00:49 │ 130752│ │

╘══════════════════════════╧════╧════════╧══════╧════╧════════╧════════╧═══════╧═══════════════╛

 KC-10 ATS Form 70 (27 FEB 01) - CFPS Ver 4.2
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-7 01 JUL 13 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-8 01 JUL 13 

FOR TRAINING USE ONLY 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-9 01 JUL 13 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-10 01 JUL 13 400.0 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-11 01 JUL 13 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-12 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

FTD Mission 4 

I. Purpose – The purpose of this FTD mission is to allow for hands on practice of 

a local training flight. Emphasis will be on normal procedures and use of the 

Flight Guidance System. Auto Missed Approach and Manual ILS without Flight 

Director will be introduced. Emphasis will be on flying from the left seat. 

II. Duration – 7 hours 

A. 2.0 hour pre-brief 

B. 4.0 hour FTD 

C. 1.0 hour debrief 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

B. AFI 11-2KC-10, Vol 3, KC-10 Operations Procedures 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Flight Training Device 

B. Briefing Room 

C. TOLD Card 

D. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

E. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

F. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-2 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. Scenario, Profile, and applicable briefing items 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IV, Normal Procedures 

a. Interior Inspection through Downwind 

2. Section V, Mission Preparation 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-1 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Pilot’s Objectives

Training objectives introduced and practiced during this training mission: 

1. Perform ILS Manual Approach Procedures 

2. Perform ILS Flight Director Off Approach Procedures 

3. Perform Auto Non Precision Approach Procedures 

4. Perform Localizer Approach Procedures 

Training objectives previously introduced that will be practiced during this 

training mission:

1. Demonstrate Airmanship/Situational Awareness 

2. Demonstrate Judgment/Compliance 

3. Demonstrate Safety Consciousness 

4. Demonstrate Regulation, Directive Knowledge, and Use 

5. Perform General Navigation 

6. Perform Mission Planning and Briefing 

7. Perform Checklist Procedures and Use 

8. Perform Crew Coordination 

9. Demonstrate Performance Knowledge and Use 

10. Perform Fuel Management and Conservation 

11. Perform Equipment Operation 

12. Perform Radar Operation 

13. Perform Communications 

14. Perform Pilot’s Interior Inspection Procedures 

15. Perform Cockpit Preparation Procedures 

16. Perform Before Start Procedures 

17. Perform Starting Engines Procedures 

18. Perform Before Taxi Procedures 

19. Perform Before Takeoff Procedures 

20. Perform Takeoff Initial Procedures 

21. Perform Left Seat Takeoff Procedures 

22. Perform Pilot Not Flying (PNF) Takeoff and Climb Duties 

23. Perform After Takeoff/Climb Procedures 

24. Perform Cruise Procedures 

25. Perform Standard Instrument Departure (SID) Procedures 

26. Perform Descent Procedures 

27. Perform Enroute Descent Procedures 

28. Perform Auto Missed Approach Procedures 

29. Perform Before Landing Procedures 

30. Perform Landing 

31. Perform Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) 

32. Perform Full Stop Taxiback Procedures 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-2 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-3 01 JUL 13 

33. Perform After Landing Procedures 

34. Perform Parking-Engine Shutdown Procedures 

35. Perform Leaving Aircraft Procedures 

During this training mission, you are expected to practice and achieve required 

proficiency level (RPL) on the following procedures:

1. Perform Vertical “S” Maneuver 

2. Perform Approach Procedures 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-4 01 JUL 13 

Flight Engineer’s Objectives

Training objectives previously introduced that will be practiced during this 

training mission: 

1. Demonstrate Airmanship/Situational Awareness 

2. Demonstrate Judgment/Compliance 

3. Demonstrate Safety Consciousness 

4. Demonstrate Regulation, Directive Knowledge, and Use 

5. Perform General Navigation Procedures 

6. Perform Crew Coordination 

7. Demonstrate Performance Knowledge and Use 

8. Perform FMS Operation 

9. Perform Equipment Operation 

10. Perform Communications 

11. Compute Fuel Requirements 

12. Perform Mission Planning and Briefing 

13. Perform Checklist Procedures and Use 

14. Perform FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection Procedures 

15. Perform FE’s Interior Inspection Procedures 

16. Perform Cockpit Preparation Procedures 

17. Perform Before Start Procedures 

18. Perform Starting Engines Procedures 

19. Perform Before Taxi Procedures 

20. Perform Before Takeoff Procedures 

21. Perform Fuel Management and Conservation Procedures 

22. Perform FE Takeoff Duties 

23. Perform After Takeoff/Climb Procedures 

24. Perform Cruise Procedures 

25. Perform Descent Procedures 

26. Perform Approach Procedures 

27. Perform Before Landing Procedures 

28. Perform Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) Procedures 

29. Perform After Landing Procedures 

30. Perform Full Stop Taxiback Procedures 

31. Perform Parking – Engine Shutdown Procedures 

32. Perform Leaving Aircraft Procedures 

33. Perform Instrument Approach Procedures 

34. Perform Missed Approach Procedures 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-5 01 JUL 13 

During this training mission, you are expected to practice and achieve required 

proficiency level (RPL) on the following procedures:

1. Perform Standard Instrument Departure Procedures 

2 Perform Vertical “S” Maneuver 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-6 01 JUL 13 

Scenario FTD Mission 4

This mission is a local training flight at Travis AFB, emphasizing normal procedures and 

the use of the Flight Guidance System. Student B will start in the Left Seat. Plan a seat 

change to allow Student A to accomplish left seat items. Emphasis is on flying from the 

left seat. Auto Missed Approach and Manual ILS without Flight Director are introduced. 

Profile

1. FE’s Interior Inspection 

2. Pilot’s Interior Inspection (B-L, A-R) 

3. Cockpit Preparation (B-L, A-R) 

4. Before Start (B-L, A-R) 

5. Starting Engines (B-L, A-R) 

6. Before Taxi (B-L/A-R) 

7. Before Takeoff (B-L, A-R) 

8. Takeoff, Initial (400,000 lbs) (B-L) 

9. Standard Instrument Departure (B-L) 

10. After Takeoff/Climb/Cruise (B-L) 

11. Vertical “S” Maneuver (Delta) (B-L, A-R) 

12. Enroute Descent (B-L) 

13. Auto Non-Precision Localizer Approach (B-L) 

14. Auto Missed Approach (B-L) 

15. ILS Manual Approach (Flight Director Off) (B-L) 

16. Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) (B-L) 

17. Full Stop Taxiback – Seat Change (A-L, B-R) 

18. Takeoff, Initial (400,000) (A-L) 

19. Standard Instrument Departure (A- L) 

20. After Takeoff/Climb/Cruise (A-L) 

21. Vertical “S” Maneuver (Delta) (A-L, B-R) 

22. Enroute Descent (A-L) 

23. Auto Non Precision Localizer Approach (A-L) 

24. Auto Missed Approach (A-L) 

25. ILS Manual Approach (Flight Director Off) (A-L) 

26. Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) (A-L) 

27. After Landing (A-L, B-R) 

28. Parking – Engine Shutdown (A-L, B-R) 

29. Leaving Aircraft (A-L, B-R) 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-7 01 JUL 13 

Mission Briefing 

1. Mission Overview: Briefed by the Instructor. 

2. Specialty Briefing and Instructional Period. 

a. Instructor Pilot Briefs: 

(1) Previous training and weak areas 

(2) Planned mission activities 

(3) Selected abnormal and emergency procedures 

b. Instructor Flight Engineer Briefs: 

(1) TOLD Card as required 

(2) CG Graph and Fuel Management 

(3) Terminal Enroute Procedures 

(4) Planned mission activities 

3. Crew Briefing conducted by Aircraft Commander: 

a. Normal and Emergency Takeoff considerations 

b. Planned Instrument Approach procedures 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-8 01 JUL 13 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-9 01 JUL 13 

***THE ACCURACY OF THIS AFMSS/PFPS COMPUTER FLIGHT PLAN DEPENDS UPON THE ACCURACY *** 

*****OF THE NIMA NAVIGATIONAL DATA BASE, THE WEATHER DATA BASE, AND USER INPUT.****** 

*******************AIRCREWS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR FUEL REQUIREMENTS ******************* 

**********************AND THE ROUTE OF FLIGHT THEY FILE AND FLY********************** 

RTE NAME:X:\Biennial Reviews\PIQ\Misc Suppor CFPS VERSION:4.2 

FLIGHT PLAN CREATED: 22 MAY 13 NIMA DAFIF EFF DATE: 2 JUL 09 

┌─────────────┬───────────────────────────────┬────────────────────────────────────────────────┐

│MISSION C/S │CLEARANCE │Takeoff Time(Z): 00:00 Oper Wt: 250000 │

│ │ │Land Time (Z) : 00:57 Cargo Wt: 0 │

├─────────────┤ │Sched Duration : +57 Ramp Fuel: 150000 │

│ACFT TYPE │ │FOB/RES : 06+15 Total GW: 400000 │

│ KC-10A │ │WARP Drag Index: 0.00 Ldg Fuel: 128388 │

│ │ │Total Dist(nm): 362.2 Climb Winds: │

│ │ │ L/O Winds: │

├─────────────┴───────────────────────────────┴────────────────────────────────────────────────│

│AR TRACK: ARCT: │

│UHF PRI: UHF SEC: │

│BCN: TACAN: │

│A/R ALT: │

│AVAIL BLK: │

├──────────────────────────┬────┬────────┬──────┬────┬────────┬────────┬───────┬───────────────┤

│WP# FIX TAC │ MC │DISTANCE│ TEMP │CAS │ WIND │LEG TIME│ GR WT.│ │

│ REMARKS VOR │ MH │ LEG │ ALT │TAS │ DRIFT │ ETA │LEGFUEL│ │

│ LATITUDE LONGITUDE │ TC │ TOTAL │ MACH │ GS │DRAG IND│ACC TIME│FUEL RM│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 1 KSUU 21R/RW │213 │ │ +15C │ │ │00+00 │396000 │ │

│ TRAVIS AFB │213 │ 1 │ 53M│ │0 │00:00 │ 4000 │ │

│N 38 15.818 W121 55.719 │227 │ 1 │ │ │0.00 │00:00 │ 146000│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 2 TEALL/W │215 │ │ +2C │N/A │ │00+02 │394612 │ │

│ TEALL │215 │ 7 │ 6567M│N/A │0 │00:02 │ 1388 │ │

│N 38 10.635 W122 03.111 │229 │ 8 │ N/A │N/A │0.00 │00:02 │ 144612│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 3 WAPEX/W │344 │ │ -14C │N/A │ │00+03 │392386 │ │

│ WAPEX │344 │ 17 │14417M│N/A │0 │00:05 │ 2226 │ │

│N 38 27.702 W122 03.973 │358 │ 25 │ N/A │N/A │0.00 │00:05 │ 142386│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ .level off │349 │ │ -23C │N/A │ │00+02 │391354 │ │

│ │349 │ 11 │19000M│N/A │0 │00:06 │ 1032 │ │

│N 38 39.010 W122 03.254 │003 │ 36 │ N/A │N/A │0.00 │00:06 │ 141354│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 4 ILA/R 091X │349 │ │ -23C │325 │ │00+04 │390252 │ │

│ WILLIAMS 114.40 │349 │ 25 │19000M│425 │0 │00:10 │ 1102 │ │

│N 39 04.269 W122 01.633 │003 │ 61 │ .69 │425 │0.00 │00:10 │ 140252│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 5 FMG/R 126X │061 │ │ -23C │325 │ │00+16 │385306 │ │

│ MUSTANG 117.90 │061 │ 114 │19000M│425 │0 │00:26 │ 4946 │ │

│N 39 31.876 W119 39.364 │075 │ 175 │ .69 │425 │0.00 │00:26 │ 135306│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ .descent pt │202 │ │ -23C │325 │ │00+14 │380870 │ │

│ │202 │ 103 │19000M│425 │0 │00:40 │ 4436 │ │

│N 38 07.777 W120 54.811 │215 │ 278 │ .69 │425 │0.00 │00:40 │ 130870│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 6 ECA/E 107X │201 │ │ -12C │N/A │ │00+04 │380498 │ │

│ MANTECA 116.00 │201 │ 22 │13466M│N/A │0 │00:44 │ 372 │ │

│N 37 50.016 W121 10.283 │215 │ 299 │ N/A │N/A │0.00 │00:44 │ 130498│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 7 SAC/R 099X │320 │ │ +9C │N/A │ │00+08 │379793 │ │

│ SACRAMENTO 115.20 │320 │ 41 │ 3000M│N/A │0 │00:52 │ 705 │ │

│N 38 26.625 W121 33.099 │334 │ 340 │ N/A │N/A │0.00 │00:52 │ 129793│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 8 SUU/T 113X │224 │ │ +15C │250 │ │00+05 │378388 │ │

│ TRAVIS │224 │ 22 │ 74M│250 │0 │00:57 │ 1405 │ │

│N 38 14.733 W121 56.704 │238 │ 362 │ .38 │250 │0.00 │00:57 │ 128388│ │

╘══════════════════════════╧════╧════════╧══════╧════╧════════╧════════╧═══════╧═══════════════╛

 KC-10 ATS Form 70 (27 FEB 01) - CFPS Ver 4.2
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-10 01 JUL 13 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-11 01 JUL 13 

FOR TRAINING USE ONLY
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-12 01 JUL 13 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-13 01 JUL 13 

KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-13 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-14 01 JUL 13 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-15 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 

PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-16 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-T307-SG 1-67-1 01 OCT 10 

FTD-307 

FE Interior Inspection

I. Purpose – The purpose of this FTD mission is to allow continued practice of 

the FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection and the FE’s Interior Inspection. 

II. Duration – 2.0 hours 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Flight Training Device 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

C. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-2 

V. Student Preparation/Review 

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IV, Normal Procedures 

a. FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 

b. FE’s Interior Inspection 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Original 

FIQ-T307-SG 1-67-2 01 OCT 10 

Objectives

Training objectives practiced during this training mission:

1. Perform Equipment Operation 

2. Perform FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection Procedures 

3. Perform FE’s Interior Inspection Procedures 

4. Perform Fuel Management and Conservation Procedures 

Profile

Instructor may vary profile to meet student needs. 

1. FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 

2. FE’s Interior Inspection 

Mission Briefing 

1. Briefing: While in the FTD the instructor will brief the procedures to be 

accomplished during this FTD period. 

Note: Other normal procedures checklists may be discussed or introduced time 

permitting.
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-1 01 JUL 13

FMS Mission Exercise (McGuire) 

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - Only McGuire students take this FET lesson. Travis students 

take the F857 lesson, which includes a Travis scenario. This exercise allows 

you the opportunity to practice FMS operations in a mission type scenario. In 

addition to practicing those actions that you will normally accomplish such as 

preflight and remote ranging, this exercise provides the opportunity to observe 

and monitor certain functions of the FMS. To do this, you will perform specific 

actions normally accomplished by the Pilots. They include the Direct-to function, 

holding, and the addition and deletion of specific waypoints. Remember, these 

actions directly affect the flight path of the aircraft.

II. Duration - 2.0 hours

III. Reference Materials 

A. FMS Mission Exercise (McGuire) Student Guide 

IV. Equipment and Materials 

A. Learning Center CBT Computer with FET Desktop Icon 

B. FMS Mission Exercise (McGuire) Student Guide 

C. FMS CDU Page Flow Diagram 

V. Student Preparation/Review 

A. Complete all FMS CBT lessons 

B. Read FET introduction in this lesson. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-2 01 JUL 13

Objectives 

1. Perform FMS Initialization. 

2. Perform FMS preflight tasks. 

3. Perform holding procedures. 

4. Perform data-for procedures. 

5. Perform management of active flight plan. 

6. Perform Remote Ranging. 

7. Perform Alternate flight planning. 

8. Perform FMS approach tasks. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-3 01 JUL 13

FMS Emulation Trainer (FET) 

Introduction

The Flight Management System Emulation Trainer (FET) provides you with additional 

training prior to encountering the FMS in the simulator or aircraft. The FET is a parttask trainer with computer simulation emulating Control Display Unit (CDU) operation. 

A flight map and Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI) display provide a visual 

reference of what occurs in the physical environment during FMS operation. 

FET exercises reinforce procedures learned in the CBT lessons and present you with 

self-paced activities on the Flight Management System. The Student Guide includes 

the steps that direct you through the scheduled exercise activities. If you are a Travis 

student, complete the FMS Mission Exercise (Travis) scenario. If you are a McGuire 

student, complete the McGuire scenario. This exercise profile allows you to step 

through the scenario and check off the tasks as they are completed. An instructor is 

available to assist you, as necessary. Use your FMS CDU Page Flow diagram as a 

reference for FMS CDU operations. 

FET OVERVIEW

The FET is a desktop computer simulation of the FMS-800 CDU with fully functional 

keys. The FET allows you to view flight progress with a flight map or an EHSI in the 

map mode. The FET will help you to master the pages and functions of the FMS-800 

and EHSI prior to running a full scenario or actual use in the simulator or aircraft. 

The FET uses a slightly different database than the aircraft and simulator. For instance, 

when you load a Standard Instrument Departure or Standard Terminal Arrival into your 

flight plan, the FET may have more or less waypoints than the aircraft or simulator 

database. Remember, the FET is meant to be an instructional device that reinforces 

basic functions of the FMS-800, not a complete Flight Management System. 

EMULATOR ENVIRONMENT

The FET work space is divided into CDU, flight map window (or optional EHSI map), 

and simulation control windows. 

1. CDU: All buttons are active to touch except the brightness knob. The CLEAR

key blanks the entire scratchpad if held depressed. Interaction with other aircraft 

components through the CDU, such as the GPS, is simulated at a basic level. 

2. FET Exit: Exiting the FET program through the File menu returns you to the 

Windows desktop. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-4 01 JUL 13

3. Flight Map: The aircraft can fly anywhere on or off the flight map. The flight map 

is used to display course legs, waypoints, VOR rings, and airport identifier 

symbols with 20nm rings—all of which are part of the flight plan. Points not on 

the flight plan are not shown. As the aircraft moves, it leaves a history track. 

Each of these display items can be toggled to draw, or not, through the Plot

dropdown menu. Also on the Plot menu is a choice between displaying the 

waypoint number or its name. 

4. Map Scale and Centering: The map scale is the distance from top of map to 

bottom. It can be adjusted through the simulation controls at the lower edge of 

the FET window. The default is 20nm, but can be changed by clicking the button 

for another range. 160nm is usually a good working distance. 

While running the simulation, the aircraft moves toward the edge of the window. 

Click anywhere on the flight map to center the point clicked. Pressing the 

“Center on AC” button does a one-time centering of the aircraft. Toggle the 

“Auto on AC” box to X (the default) to keep the aircraft from flying out of the map 

window. “Center on WP” places the active waypoint in the center of the map. 

5. EHSI and EHSI Control Panel: Click on the MAP/EHSI button to select the EHSI 

display. The EHSI "map" and "map-arc" modes are available and normal range 

selections are possible by moving the cursor over the Mode-Range knob on the 

EHSI Control Panel. The Cursor, Cursor Reset, Data, and NAV controls are also 

functional. 

6. INU Mode Selector Units: For start up checklist tasks, the three INU controls are 

simulated through three banks of buttons below the CDU. It is recommended to 

select each button in turn for each CDU on start up. Skipping from OFF to NAV

does not align the INUs. 

MACHINE STATES

The “state” of the FET is reported in a small window just below the CDU, to the left of 

the simulated mission time. The state of the machine depends on factors such as the 

Freeze/Run buttons below the CDU. 

1. Initialization. The FET starts up and remains in the Initialization state until Run

is selected. During initialization, the CDU is fully functional and the aircraft is 

considered to be on the ground. The ‘Initialization’ state is reached again when 

the aircraft passes the last waypoint in the flight plan. 

2. Run. Selecting the Run button activates the aircraft on the flight map. It is 

considered immediately airborne. You can control the rate at which time passes 

during RUN by selecting an acceleration factor in the lower left of the FET work 

space. Be careful of the higher acceleration factors—it is easy to get behind the 

aircraft and miss timely performance of the FET mission tasks. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-5 01 JUL 13

3. Freeze. During Freeze, CDU control is frozen and the mission stops, but the 

flight map operates in the normal manner. To examine various CDU pages while 

frozen, you need to toggle back to Run to select another page. The Start 1 LS2 

FREEZE selection has nothing to do with the FET Freeze state. 

CONTROLLING THE AIRCRAFT

1. Flight Director: All aircraft control is managed through the CDU FMS 800 pages. 

The autopilot is engaged, and “FMS Track” is your selected flight mode. 

2. Fuel Expenditure: You cannot directly control airspeed, altitude or bank angle 

(set at 25E, variable during patterns), but you never run out of fuel. 

OPERATIONAL TIPS

1. If you are just practicing, the GPS does not need initialization nor do the INUs 

need aligning for the FET to operate. 

2. Whatever is entered on the initial position page becomes the default for the next 

person who uses the FET. 

3. When using the FET map, the cursor position can be used to do quick and dirty 

remote ranging by holding the right button down while the cursor is on the map. 

As you slide the cursor around, a range circle appears on the map. 

Corresponding range and bearing readouts appear in the “Cursor Position” 

window below. 

4. A flight plan you built or modified can be copied waypoint by waypoint through 

the scratchpad and inserted into the alternate flight plan for saving. 

5. If you build an alternate flight plan, you can save it to the catalog and reload it at 

a later session. Only flight plans 09 through 40 can be saved. 

6. Winds entered for each waypoint become “active” when that waypoint is active. 

Crosswind/tailwind is reported on the position page. 

7. Acceleration of the mission time affects all CDU pages and the mission clock. 

While using the FET, you can actually control the passage of time, but only in the 

forward direction. 

8. Freely change the map scale as you fly holding patterns, approaches, etc.. 

9. Do not forget the Clear History selection on the Plot menu, which erases your 

aircraft’s track from the flight map. 

10. The Mag/True toggle buttons below the Freeze/Run buttons are provided in case 

a scenario requires the reference to be switched. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-6 01 JUL 13

11. To shortcut your way back to the Initialization state, perform a DIR to the last 

flight plan waypoint. If you want this to occur where you started, copy your ‘00' 

coordinates to the last waypoint before you DIR To. 

START UP

To run the FET on a Learning Center computer, use the following steps: 

1. Log into the computer with your ID and Password. 

2. Double click on the FET shortcut icon located on the computer desktop. 

3. Click OK after entering the desired airfield identifier. 

4. You are now ready to begin training on the FET. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-7 01 JUL 13

Mission (McGuire) Scenario 

Higher Headquarters Directed (HHD) mission from McGuire AFB to Denver 

International Airport, CO. Tanker and receiver refueling will be conducted enroute. 

Receiver refueling will be conducted on AR-203-SW and tanker refueling on AR-313-N. 

T PROCEDURE

Scenario 

Study Guide 

Reference

PRE-DEPARTURE 

Check Initial Position coordinates (N40°00.935 W074°35.502). 1 

MSUs - Standby 2 

FMS Initialization. 

a. Verify FMS Software Version. 

b. Verify position, time, date, and GPS reference datum. 

c. Clear all messages on annunciation line. 

d. Initialize GPS. 

3 

MSUs - Align 

a. Enter Initial Position coordinates (N40°00.9 W074°35.6) 

b. Select ALIGN (MSUs 1, 2, & 3) 

c. Press DTK-STS, observe countdown. 

d. Select ICAO database. (DB B KC-10)

4 

RADIO MASTER POWER - ON. 5 

Configure TACAN and ADF. 

a. Nav radio page 1 - ADF - 396.9, TCN1 - 43X. 

b. Nav radio page 2 - ADF - 396.9, TCN2 - 85Y, mode – 

BCNINV.

6 

Load and edit the MCGUIRE1 alternate flight plan. 

a. Load the MCGUIRE1 flight plan. 

b. Edit alternate flight plan. Delete AR-203-SW, add AR-111-W

c. Add RVIP and NAV checkpoint. 

d. Replace the current flight plan. 

e. Add the Point Pleasant departure to the flight plan. 

f. Renumber the flight plan. 

7 

Check flight plan waypoints for accuracy. Compare waypoints to 

Figure 6 and the Waypoint List. 8 

MSUs - NAV 9 

Access Position page to monitor for windshear during takeoff. 10 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-8 01 JUL 13

T PROCEDURE

Scenario 

Study Guide 

Reference

Press RUN on the FET Control Panel to begin mission. 11 

CLIMB 

Compare data on Pilot PSN, Copilot PSN, STR, and FPLN pages. 12 

After HTO, 'FREEZE' the FET and compare display with Figure 8, 

then press RUN. 13 

ENROUTE 

Tanker is late, prepare to HOLD at RVIP 

a. Attach hold at RVIP. 

b. Monitor Hold Entry wpt 04 hold page. 

14 

Refueling is canceled. Proceed direct to N37°00°W088°28° (wpt 05) 15 

After passing wpt 05, determine ETA to the RVCP for AR-313-N, 

N33°49°W094°25° (WPT 10), using remote ranging. 16 

After passing wpt 06, determine time to go, bearing, and distance 

to the active waypoint using the STR function key. 17 

After passing waypoint 07: 

a. Determine time and distance from present position direct to 

wpt 10. 

b. Determine time and distance from present position to wpt 10

via flight plan.

18 

Determine time and distance to KTIK from wpt 12. 19 

Receiver is canceled. Recover at Tinker AFB. 

a. Add MLC, TUL & KTIK to flight plan. 

b. Renumber the flight plan. 

c. Delete all waypoints after KTIK. 

20 

DESCENT 

Add SWO as IAF at KTIK. 21 

APPROACH 

Set Baroset to 30.00. 22 

Monitor the Position page for windshear during the approach and 

come to a full stop landing. The FET mode becomes 

'Initialization' and the aircrafts stops. 

23 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-9 01 JUL 13

Mission (McGuire) Mission Data

THE ACCURACY OF THIS AFMSS/PFPS COMPUTER FLIGHT PLAN DEPENDS UPON THE ACCURACY OF THE NIMA NAVIGATIONAL 

DATA BASE, THE WEATHER DATA BASE, AND USER INPUT. AIRCREWS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR FUEL REQUIREMENTS AND 

RTE NAME:E:\PFPS\data\Routes\FET1M.rte CFPS VERSION:3.2 

FLIGHT PLAN CREATED: 1 MAR 1 NIMA DAFIF EFF DATE:28 DEC 0 

┌─────────────┬───────────────────────────────┬────────────────────────────────────────────────┐

│MISSION C/S │CLEARANCE │Takeoff Time(Z): 23:26 Oper Wt: 250000 │

│ │ │Land Time (Z) : 07:08 Cargo Wt: 0 │

├─────────────┤ │Sched Duration : 07+39 Ramp Fuel: 200000 │

│ACFT TYPE │ │FOB/RES : 06+22 Total GW: 450000 │

│ KC-10A │ │WARP Drag Index: 0.00 Ldg Fuel: 70235 │

│ │ │Total Dist(nm): 2153.8 Climb Winds:270/035 │

│ │ │ L/O Winds:040/010 │

├─────────────┴───────────────────────────────┴────────────────────────────────────────────────│

│AR TRACK: AR313 N ARCT: 03:45 │

│UHF PRI: 352.6 UHF SEC: 260.2 │

│BCN: 2/1 N/A TACAN: 50/113 │

│A/R ALT: 8000 MSL │

│AVAIL BLK: Between FL180 & FL220 │

├──────────────────────────┬────┬────────┬──────┬────┬────────┬────────┬───────┬───────────────┤

│WP# FIX TAC │ MC │DISTANCE│ TEMP │CAS │ WIND │LEG TIME│ GR WT.│ │

│ REMARKS VOR │ MH │ LEG │ ALT │TAS │ DRIFT │ ETA │LEGFUEL│ │

│ LATITUDE LONGITUDE │ TC │ TOTAL │ MACH │ GS │DRAG IND│ACC TIME│FUEL RM│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 1 KWRI/A │360 │ │ +15C │ │ │00+03 │446000 │ │

│ MC GUIRE AFB │360 │ 8 │ 133M│ │0 │23:26 │ 4000 │ │

│N 40 00.9 W074 35.6 │347 │ 8 │ │ │0.00 │00:00 │ 196000│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 2 GXU/R058005 043X │145 │ │ +3C │254 │040/010 │00+02 │445552 │ │

│ MC GUIRE 110.6 │143 │ 7 │ 6000M│277 │-2 │23:31 │ 448 │ │

│N 40 04.0 W074 31.0 │132 │ 15 │ .43 │277 │0.00 │00:02 │ 195552│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 3 DIXIE/W │096 │ │ +3C │254 │040/010 │00+04 │444490 │ │

│ DIXIE │094 │ 16 │ 6000M│277 │-1 │23:35 │ 1062 │ │

│N 40 05.9 W074 09.8 │083 │ 32 │ .43 │269 │0.00 │00:05 │ 194490│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 4 GAMBY/W │125 │ │ +3C │254 │040/010 │00+03 │443558 │ │

│ GAMBY │123 │ 15 │ 6000M│277 │-2 │23:38 │ 932 │ │

│N 40 00.4 W073 52.1 │112 │ 46 │ .43 │273 │0.00 │00:08 │ 193558│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 5 MANTA/W │126 │ │ +3C │254 │040/010 │00+04 │442521 │ │

│ MANTA │124 │ 16 │ 6000M│277 │-2 │23:41 │ 1037 │ │

│N 39 54.1 W073 32.5 │112 │ 62 │ .43 │273 │0.00 │00:12 │ 192521│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ .level off │056 │ │ -37C │N/A │250/050 │00+09 │436318 │ │

│ │052 │ 66 │26000M│N/A │-4 │23:51 │ 6203 │ │

│N 40 43.0 W072 33.9 │042 │ 129 │ N/A │N/A │0.00 │00:21 │ 186318│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 6 HTO/R 083X │057 │ │ -37C │325 │250/050 │00+02 │435686 │ │

│ HAMPTON 113.6 │054 │ 17 │26000M│472 │-3 │23:53 │ 632 │ │

│N 40 55.1 W072 19.0 │043 │ 145 │ .79 │516 │0.00 │00:23 │ 185686│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 7 CSN/R 110X │258 │ │ -37C │325 │250/050 │00+41 │422249 │ │

│ CASANOVA 116.3 │259 │ 291 │26000M│472 │1 │00:34 │ 13437 │ │

│N 38 38.5 W077 51.9 │244 │ 436 │ .79 │422 │0.00 │01:05 │ 172249│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 8 HVQ/R210040 121X │267 │ │ -37C │325 │250/050 │00+30 │412686 │ │

│ CHARLESTON 117.4 │266 │ 210 │26000M│472 │-1 │01:04 │ 9563 │ │

│N 37 45.3 W082 09.1 │257 │ 646 │ .79 │422 │0.00 │01:34 │ 162686│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 9 IIU/R123085 095X │261 │ │ -38C │325 │250/050 │00+14 │408364 │ │

│ LOUISVILLE 114.8 │260 │ 97 │27000M│479 │0 │01:17 │ 4322 │ │

│N 37 18.1 W084 06.3 │254 │ 743 │ .80 │429 │44.00 │01:48 │ 158364│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│10 BNA/R055065 088X │252 │ │ -40C │290 │250/050 │00+12 │404420 │ │

│ NASHVILLE 114.1 │252 │ 79 │28000M│438 │0 │01:29 │ 3944 │ │

│N 36 47.1 W085 36.5 │247 │ 821 │ .74 │388 │44.00 │02:00 │ 154420│ │

╘══════════════════════════╧════╧════════╧══════╧════╧════════╧════════╧═══════╧═══════════════╛

 KC-10 ATS Form 70 (27 FEB 01) - CFPS Ver 3.2 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-10 01 JUL 13

┌──────────────────────────┬────┬────────┬──────┬────┬────────┬────────┬───────┬───────────────┐

│WP# FIX TAC │ MC │DISTANCE│ TEMP │CAS │ WIND │LEG TIME│ GR WT.│ │

│ REMARKS VOR │ MH │ LEG │ ALT │TAS │ │ ETA │LEGFUEL│ │

│ LATITUDE LONGITUDE │ TC │ TOTAL │ MACH │ GS │DRAG IND│ACC TIME│FUEL RM│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│11 BNA/R271042 088X │251 │ │ -40C │290 │250/050 │00+16 │399332 │ │

│ NASHVILLE 114.1 │251 │ 102 │28000M│438 │0 │01:45 │ 5088 │ │

│N 36 07.3 W087 32.9 │248 │ 923 │ .74 │388 │44.00 │02:16 │ 149332│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│12 MEM/R046044 122X │249 │ │ -40C │290 │250/050 │00+15 │394677 │ │

│ MEMPHIS 117.5 │250 │ 94 │28000M│438 │0 │02:00 │ 4655 │ │

│N 35 30.9 W089 19.6 │248 │ 1017 │ .74 │388 │0.00 │02:30 │ 144677│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ .onload │248 │ │ -40C │290 │250/050 │00+00 │424677 │ │

│ 30000 lbs │248 │ 0 │28000M│438 │0 │02:00 │ 0 │ │

│N 35 30.9 W089 19.6 │248 │ 1017 │ .74 │388 │0.00 │02:30 │ 174677│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│13 AEX/R 108X │213 │ │ -37C │325 │250/050 │00+42 │411229 │ │

│ ALEXANDRIA 116.1 │217 │ 301 │26000M│472 │4 │02:42 │ 13448 │ │

│N 31 15.4 W092 30.0 │213 │ 1318 │ .79 │431 │0.00 │03:12 │ 161229│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ .descent pt │317 │ │ -37C │325 │250/050 │00+03 │410218 │ │

│ │312 │ 24 │26000M│472 │-6 │02:45 │ 1011 │ │

│N 31 33.8 W092 48.0 │320 │ 1342 │ .79 │452 │0.00 │03:15 │ 160218│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│14 AR313N IP 121X │317 │ │ -1C │N/A │250/050 │00+10 │409442 │ │

│ KEIC/R147030 117.4 │313 │ 59 │ 8000M│N/A │-4 │02:55 │ 776 │ │

│N 32 19.0 W093 33.0 │320 │ 1401 │ N/A │N/A │0.00 │03:26 │ 159442│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│15 AR313N CP 121X │331 │ │ -1C │275 │250/050 │00+20 │403407 │ │

│ KEIC/R327070 117.4 │322 │ 100 │ 8000M│308 │-9 │03:15 │ 6035 │ │

│N 33 49.2 W094 25.4 │334 │ 1501 │ .48 │299 │18.50 │03:46 │ 153407│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ .orbit 121X │150 │ │ -1C │275 │250/050 │00+30 │394886 │ │

│ 117.4 │160 │ 0 │ 8000M│308 │9 │03:45 │ 8521 │ │

│N 33 49.2 W094 25.4 │154 │ 1501 │ .48 │299 │18.50 │04:16 │ 144886│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│16 AR313N NC 091X │331 │ │ -1C │200 │250/050 │00+24 │387542 │ │

│ KTUL/R147070 114.4 │318 │ 87 │ 8000M│225 │-13 │04:09 │ 7344 │ │

│N 35 08.2 W095 11.2 │335 │ 1589 │ .35 │214 │18.50 │04:40 │ 137542│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│17 AR313N EX 091X │331 │ │ -1C │200 │250/050 │00+28 │379177 │ │

│ KTUL/R327030 114.4 │318 │ 100 │ 8000M│225 │-13 │04:37 │ 8365 │ │

│N 36 39.0 W096 03.0 │335 │ 1689 │ .35 │215 │0.00 │05:08 │ 129177│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ .offload │331 │ │ -1C │200 │250/050 │00+00 │359177 │ │

│ 20000 lbs │318 │ 0 │ 8000M│225 │-13 │04:37 │ 0 │ │

│N 36 39.0 W096 03.0 │335 │ 1689 │ .35 │215 │0.00 │05:08 │ 109177│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ .level off │285 │ │ -27C │N/A │250/050 │00+04 │356097 │ │

│ │285 │ 29 │21000M│N/A │0 │04:42 │ 3080 │ │

│N 36 48.9 W096 36.7 │290 │ 1718 │ N/A │N/A │0.00 │05:12 │ 106097│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│18 GCK/R 080X │285 │ │ -27C │250 │250/050 │00+41 │346797 │ │

│ GARDEN CITY 113.3 │279 │ 208 │21000M│341 │-5 │05:23 │ 9300 │ │

│N 37 55.1 W100 43.5 │290 │ 1925 │ .56 │301 │0.00 │05:54 │ 96797 │ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│19 RYLIE/W │288 │ │ -27C │250 │250/050 │00+11 │344260 │ │

│ RYLIE │282 │ 58 │21000M│341 │-6 │05:35 │ 2537 │ │

│N 38 20.2 W101 49.7 │296 │ 1983 │ .56 │305 │0.00 │06:05 │ 94260 │ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│20 SELLS/W │287 │ │ -27C │250 │250/050 │00+14 │341226 │ │

│ SELLS │281 │ 70 │21000M│341 │-6 │05:48 │ 3034 │ │

│N 38 49.6 W103 10.1 │295 │ 2053 │ .56 │304 │0.00 │06:19 │ 91226 │ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│21 PRAGG/W │305 │ │ -25C │250 │250/050 │00+02 │340888 │ │

│ PRAGG │297 │ 8 │20000M│336 │-8 │05:50 │ 338 │ │

│N 38 55.0 W103 17.4 │314 │ 2061 │ .55 │311 │0.00 │06:20 │ 90888 │ │

╘══════════════════════════╧════╧════════╧══════╧════╧════════╧════════╧═══════╧═══════════════╛

 KC-10 ATS Form 70 (27 FEB 01) - CFPS Ver 3.2 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-11 01 JUL 13

┌──────────────────────────┬────┬────────┬──────┬────┬────────┬────────┬───────┬───────────────┐

│WP# FIX TAC │ MC │DISTANCE│ TEMP │CAS │ WIND │LEG TIME│ GR WT.│ │

│ REMARKS VOR │ MH │ LEG │ ALT │TAS │ │ ETA │LEGFUEL│ │

│ LATITUDE LONGITUDE │ TC │ TOTAL │ MACH │ GS │DRAG IND│ACC TIME│FUEL RM│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│22 KIPPY/W │304 │ │ -25C │250 │250/050 │00+03 │340319 │ │

│ KIPPY │297 │ 13 │20000M│336 │-8 │05:52 │ 569 │ │

│N 39 04.3 W103 29.8 │314 │ 2074 │ .55 │311 │0.00 │06:23 │ 90319 │ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│23 CLEVE/W │304 │ │ -25C │250 │250/050 │00+05 │339307 │ │

│ CLEVE │296 │ 24 │20000M│336 │-8 │05:57 │ 1012 │ │

│N 39 20.7 W103 51.9 │314 │ 2098 │ .55 │311 │0.00 │06:28 │ 89307 │ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│24 DANDD/W │304 │ │ -23C │250 │250/050 │00+01 │339105 │ │

│ DANDD │296 │ 5 │19000M│331 │-8 │05:58 │ 202 │ │

│N 39 23.9 W103 56.3 │313 │ 2102 │ .54 │305 │0.00 │06:29 │ 89105 │ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│25 HOKER/W │304 │ │ -7C │250 │010/010 │00+07 │337443 │ │

│ HOKER │305 │ 34 │11000M│293 │2 │06:05 │ 1662 │ │

│N 39 47.3 W104 28.5 │313 │ 2136 │ .46 │287 │0.00 │06:36 │ 87443 │ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│26 DVV/R 094X │303 │ │ -7C │250 │010/010 │00+02 │336986 │ │

│ MILE HIGH 114.7 │305 │ 9 │11000M│293 │2 │06:07 │ 457 │ │

│N 39 53.7 W104 37.5 │313 │ 2146 │ .46 │287 │0.00 │06:38 │ 86986 │ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│27 DEN/E 126X │189 │ │ -7C │222 │010/010 │00+01 │336735 │ │

│ DENVER 117.9 │189 │ 5 │11000M│261 │0 │06:08 │ 251 │ │

│N 39 48.8 W104 39.6 │199 │ 2151 │ .41 │271 │0.00 │06:39 │ 86735 │ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ .delay 126X │189 │ │ -7C │222 │010/010 │00+45 │323235 │ │

│ 117.9 │189 │ 0 │11000M│261 │0 │06:53 │ 13500 │ │

│N 39 48.8 W104 39.6 │199 │ 2151 │ .41 │271 │0.00 │07:24 │ 73235 │ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│28 KDEN/A │344 │ │ +4C │ │010/010 │00+15 │320235 │ │

│ DENVER INTL │344 │ 3 │ 5431M│ │1 │07:08 │ 3000 │ │

│N 39 51.5 W104 40.0 │354 │ 2154 │ │ │0.00 │07:39 │ 70235 │ │

╘══════════════════════════╧════╧════════╧══════╧════╧════════╧════════╧═══════╧═══════════════╛

 KC-10 ATS Form 70 (27 FEB 01) - CFPS Ver 3.2 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-12 01 JUL 13
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-13 01 JUL 13
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-14 01 JUL 13

FLIGHT PROFILE 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-15 01 JUL 13

Mission (McGuire) Scenario Study Guide 

PRE-DEPARTURE 

1. Check Initial Position coordinates. 

 a. Verify/enter airport waypoint KWRI. 

 OR

b. Verify/enter N40°00.935 W074°35.502 in Lat/Long window. 

2. MSUs - STBY 

 a. Select STBY on MSU 1, 2, and 3. 

3. FMS - initialization. 

a. Verify FMS Software version – “XXXXXXXXXXXXX.” 

b. Verify position, time, date and GPS reference datum. If initial position 

coordinates are incorrect, re-enter the coordinates using scratchpad and LS1 or 

LS5. 

NOTE: Items 1-7 are tasks that will normally be accomplished by either the 

Pilots or Flight Engineers prior to the "Before Start” checklist. They do not 

occur in the same sequence as described in your tech order, but are arranged 

to allow practice moving from one page to another. Accomplish all tasks 

regardless of crew position to gain familiarity with CDU operations. 

< Press STAT function key. 

< Select CDU3 GOÆ (LS7). 

< Verify VSN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX. 

LSteps

LSteps < Press IDX function key. 

< Select START (LS1). 

Figure 1. Start 1 Position/Time Page

[N40°00.935 W074°35.502]

 start 1 psn / time 

→ FREEZE UTC DISPLAY ←

DA/MO/YR UTC 

[01/ 05/ 01] [1022 : 35] 

<< √ inu1 >> 

WGS-84 

3 [ ] 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-16 01 JUL 13

c. Review/clear all annunciation line messages. Press CLR key until all messages 

are cleared. 

d. Access the Start 2 page (scroll vertical) and initialize the GPS (LS1). 

4. MSUs - ALIGN 

a. Enter Initial Position coordinates on INU1 Control page. 

 b. Select ALIGN (MSUs 1, 2, and 3). 

 c. Press DTK-STS (LS1) to observe the beginning of status countdown on line 4. 

 d. Return to the start pages and select the appropriate ICAO database cartridge. 

INAV

INU 3

INAV

INU 2

INAV

INU 1

INAV

INU

CONTROL

PAGE

UPDATE

PAGE

< Access INU1 INAV page (---1). 

< Scroll laterally to INU Control page.

Press LS4 INU CONTROL 

< Press LS2 (adjacent to POSITION). 

< Enter initial position latitude in the 

 scratchpad (N4000.9). 

< Press the line select key adjacent to 

ENTER (LS6). 

< Enter initial position longitude in the 

 scratchpad (W07435.6). 

< Press the line select key adjacent to 

 ENTER (LS6).

< Clear the scratchpad before continuing. 

LSteps

Figure 2. INU Control Page Access

< Press IDX function key. 

< Press LS1, START. 

< Vertical scroll to “start 3 database”. 

< Select DB B KC-10 as the ICAO 

 database. 

< Vertical scroll to “start 4 mission”. 

< Select MSN A for the mission data 

 cartridge to be used. 

LSteps

NOTE: In the aircraft this procedure is normally performed on all three CDUs 

and their associated INUs. Only CDU 2 can enter present position into INU 2, 

and only CDU 3 can set INU 3. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-17 01 JUL 13

5. RADIO MASTER POWER - ON 

6. Configure TACAN and ADF. 

 a. Access Navigation Radio page 1 (NAV Function Key). 

 (1) Tune ADF1 to 396.9 (LS5). 

 (2) Change mode (LS6) to ANT and back to ADF. 

 (3) Set TACAN1 to 43X (LS7). 

 (4) Verify TR mode (LS8). 

(5) Copy ADF1 frequency into scratchpad (LS5). 

 b. Access Navigation Radio Page 2 (lateral scroll). 

 (1) Paste ADF1 frequency (396.9) into ADF2 (LS5). 

 (2) Change mode (LS6) to ANT and back to ADF. 

 (3) Set TACAN2 to 85Y (LS7). 

 (4) Set mode to BCNINV. 

7. Due to weather in the area, refueling in AR-203-SW is canceled. Refueling will now 

take place in AR-111-W. Edit the alternate flight plan by deleting AR-203-SW from 

the MCGUIRE1 flight plan and adding AR-111-W. 

a. Access Start 5 Flight Plan/Load. 

LStep < Access Master Power page through IDX.

< Select POWER LS6. 

< Turn on all navigation radios with LS5. 

NOTE: In the aircraft, you continue to update the TACAN and ADF for navigation 

backup. Because of time constraints, this is not done with the FET. You may, 

however, enter new TACAN channels and ADF frequencies as time permits. 

LStep < Press IDX function key. 

< Press LS1 

< Vertical scroll to “start 5 fpln/load”. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-18 01 JUL 13

INDEX 1

IDX

START1

PSN/TIME

START 2

NAV/INIT

START 3

DATABASE

START 4

MISSION

START 5

FPLN/LOAD

 b. Access Alternate Flight Plan Catalog (ALTN CATLG) page on LS6. SELECT 

 ALTN LOAD appears in scratchpad. 

 c. Select MCGUIRE1 (LS3). After load, compare your CDU to sample display in 

figure 4. 

Figure 3. Start 5 Flight Plan/Load Page Access 

Figure 4. Start 5 Flight Plan/Load Page 

 

 start 5 fpln/load 

[MCGUIRE1] ALTN CATLG→ 

fltplan.cr 

→ERASE FPLN REPLACE←

→ERASE FLT/DATA LOAD←

 3 [ ]
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-19 01 JUL 13

d. Change AR-203-SW to AR-111-W by editing the Alternate Flight Plan. 

e. Delete AR-203-SW. Use Minus key and LS key next to each waypoint.) 

RVIP N37°44 W082°09 (wpt 04)

RVCP N37°18 W084°06 (wpt 05)

CK PT N36°47 W085°37 (wpt 06)

CK PT N36°28 W086°36 (wpt 07)

CK PT N36°09 W087°33 (wpt 08)

EAR N35°33 W089°18 (wpt 09)

f. Add AR-111-W (RVCP and EAR point) after CSN. 

g. Add N36°56 W086°23 (RVIP) as wpt 04 and NAV checkpoint N36°50 W090°11 as 

waypoint 06 (Figure 5). 

< Press EDIT function key. 

< Press LS1 (ALTN FPLN). 

< Select LS4 (WAYPOINTS). 

LSteps

NOTE: After deleting RVIP (wpt 04), the RVCP (wpt 05) will move up to become 

waypoint 04. 

LSteps < Type AR-111-W in scratchpad. 

< Press the line select key after CSN. 

< RVCP and EAR appear in waypoints 

 list after CSN. 

Figure 5. Alternate Flight Plan Page 

03 CSN →

altn fpln wpts 

04 N36°56 W086°23 →

05 N37°00 W088°28 P →

06 N36°50 W090°11 →

 [ ↔

 ]
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-20 01 JUL 13

h. REPLACE current flight plan with alternate flight plan and confirm. 

 i. Add the Point Pleasant (PTPL4) departure to the flight plan. 

j. Renumber flight plan. 

LSteps < Press EDIT function key. 

< Press LS1 (ALTN FPLN). 

< Select LS3 (REPLACE FPLN) and 

 confirm LS3. 

< Press EDIT function key. 

< Select LS6 (SIDS). 

< Type KWRI in scratchpad. 

< Press LS1 to access SIDS. 

< Press LS3 for PTPL4. 

< Select LS7 for RW24. 

< Press LS5 to select transition. 

< Press LS4 to select HTO. 

< Press LS7 to insert flight plan. 

< Press LS3 to insert SID before HTO. 

< Removed (DISCONTINUITY 02) by 

 entering a minus (-) in scratchpad and 

 pressing the LS3. 

< Scroll down to wpt 05 (HTO). 

< Remove HTO by entering minus (-) in 

 scratchpad and pressing the line select 

 key adjacent to HTO. 

LSteps

NOTE: The SID points are added based on the FMS 800 database stored in the 

cartridge. A DISCONTINUITY appears whenever a SID is inserted. The 

discontinuity is shown in the flight plan with its associated waypoint number. 

< Press EDIT function key. 

< Scroll to fpln edit 2 page. 

< Press LS5. 

< Press LS5 again to confirm 

renumbering of flight plan. 

LSteps

NOTE: The navigation database is updated often 

and is affected by NOTAMS. If the desired SID is 

not available, skip this step and realize waypoint 

numbering may not correspond with the figures 

in this lesson. 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-21 01 JUL 13

8. Check flight plan waypoints for accuracy. 

WAYPOINT LIST 

04 N36°56 W086°23 09 N32°19 W093°33 

05 N37°00 W088°28 10 N33°49 W094°25 

06 N36°50 W090°11 11 N35°08 W095°11 

07 N36°33 W092°12 12 N36°39 W096°03 

08 AEX 13 GCK 

LSteps < Press FPLN function key. 

< Scroll through waypoints. 

< Compare waypoints to Figure 6 and 

 Waypoint List, realizing waypoints 

 may not correspond if the SID did 

not load. 

Figure 6. Flight Plan (First Page) 

CRS [216] ° [OFFST] AUTO: 

↓ ↓ fpln 

01 N40°01 W074°36 →

075/118nm 

02 HTO →

03 CSN →

↓ [ ]
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-22 01 JUL 13

NOTE: The following item is accomplished during the “Before Start” checklist. 

9. MSUs to NAV

a. Access the INU1 Control page (Check status at 02.) 

b. Note status goes to 01. 

10. Access Position page to monitor for windshear during takeoff (PSN Key). 

11. Press RUN on the FET Control Panel to begin the mission. 

CLIMB 

12. During climb out, compare data on the Pilot and Copilot Position (PSN), Steer 

(STR), and Flight Plan (FPLN) pages. 

LSteps < Press INAV function key. 

< Access INU1 INAV page (---1). 

< Press LS4 (INU Control). 

< Set INU1, 2, and 3 to NAV.

NOTE: The following item is accomplished during the “Before Takeoff” checklist. 

Figure 7. Position Page 

NOTE: Autopilot 1 is in CMD and FMS TRACK is annunciated in the FMAs as soon 

as airborne. 

N40°00.933 W074°35.617 

INU1/GPS pilot psn 

TRK 013° VAR W13°

GS 000 TAS 000 

WIND 360°T/0 ↓0 0←

SAT +15° C 

→[ ]
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-23 01 JUL 13

13. After the aircraft crosses HTO and tracks to wpt 03, Press FPLN, FREEZE the FET 

and compare your display with Figure 8, then press RUN. 

 

ENROUTE 

14. Tanker is late; prepare to HOLD at RVIP. 

a. Attach hold at the RVIP, N36°56 W086°23 (left turn, 11⁄2-minute legs). 

EDIT

FPLN

EDIT 1

HOLD

NOTE: Your course and distance information may differ slightly depending on 

when the 'freeze' was initiated. Experiment with the accelerator factors and scale 

while enroute to the RVIP (wpt 04). You may leave these in any mode you desire. 

Figure 8. Flight Plan Page 

< Access Hold page (EDIT, LS5.) 

< Change to LEFT turn (LS2). 

< Change pattern length to 11⁄2 min legs. 

Insert 130 (minutes and seconds) in the

 scratchpad and press LS3. 

< Press LS8 to insert hold in the flight plan. 

The CDU automatically displays Flight Plan

 page.) 

< Press line select key at right or left of 

N36o56 W086o23. 

LSteps

Figure 9. Hold Page Access 

CRS[256]° [OFFST] AUTO: 

↓ ↓ fpln 

03 CSN →

 270°/404nm 

04 N36°56 W086°23 →

05 N37°00 W088°28 →

3 [ ] 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-24 01 JUL 13

b. Monitor holding entry from the Waypoint 4 

Hold page. 

15. Receiver is canceled. Proceed direct N37°00 W088°28 (wpt 05/RVCP). 

16. When passing wpt 05, determine the ETA via the flight plan at the RVCP for AR313-N, N33°49 W094°25 (wpt 10), using remote ranging. 

17. After passing waypoint 06, determine the time to go (TTG), bearing and distance to 

the active waypoint (wpt 07) using the STR function key. 

< Press FLPN Function Key 

< Press H (LS6). 

< Press H again (LS6) to display the Hold L

 page. Steps

< Press DIR Function Key. 

< Press line select key adjacent to 

 N37o00 W088o28. 

LSteps

< Press DATA Function Key. 

< Press line select key adjacent to 

N33o49 W094o25 (waypoint 10). 

< Toggle LS1 to PPSN VIA FPLN. 

LSteps

Figure 10. Present Position Via Flight Plan 

NOTE: The ETA reflects the projected time of arrival at the RVCP along the 

flight plan path. In the aircraft, check the ETA against the RVCT. 

:PPSN VIA FPLN 

 from-to data 

 10 N33°49 W094°25 →

N33°49.000 094°24.983 

666nm ETE 2:38.1 

 

 ETA 1356:48 

↔ [ ] 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-25 01 JUL 13

18. After passing waypoint 07: 

a. Determine the time and distance from present position direct to waypoint 10. 

Figure 11. Pilot Steer Page 

LSteps < Press FPLN Function Key. 

< Press DATA Function Key. 

< Select N33°49 W094°25.

< Toggle LS1 to PPSN Direct. 

Figure 12. Present Position Direct

NOTE: You will see the ETE count DOWN if 'data for' PPSN DIRECT is performed 

with wpt 09 ahead of you. Once past wpt 10 on the way to wpt 07, the ETE will 

count UP. 

:INU1 / GPS CMD GS: - - - 

↓ to ↓ pilot str 

N36°33 W092°12 ETA 2323 

DTK 259° TTG 0:21:55 

TRK 259° 259 / 92.4 

XTK R0.00nm DA: L0.00° 

0 [ ] 

:PPSN DIRECT 

 from-to data 

10 [N33°49 W094°25] 

N33°49.000 W094°24.983 

212° / 191nm ETE 0:45.4 

 

 ETA 1356:48 

↔ [ ]
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-26 01 JUL 13

c. Determine the time and distance from present position to waypoint 10 via the 

flight plan. 

19. The Command Post notifies you that after refueling you are directed to Tinker AFB. 

The Pilot requests time and distance from wpt 12 (EAR) to KTIK. 

L < Toggle LS1 to PPSN VIA FPLN. Step

Figure 13. PPSN VIA FPLN 

LSteps < Press FPLN function key. 

< Press DATA function key. 

< Scroll to and select wpt 13. 

 then 

< Type KTIK in scratchpad. 

< Press line select key next to wpt 13. 

Figure 14. From-to Data 

:PPSN VIA FPLN 

 from-to data 

10 [N33°49 W094°25] 

N33°49.000 W094°24.983 

493nm ETE 1:57.1 

 

 ETA 1356:41 

↔ [ ]

:12 N42°34 W120°49 

 from-to data 

 [KTIK ] 

N35°24.884 W097°23.193 

215°/96.2nm ETE 0:22.8 

 

 ETA 1503:34 

↔ [ ] 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-27 01 JUL 13

20. Receiver is canceled. You are to recover at KTIK via McAlester (MLC) and Tulsa 

(TUL). 

 a. Add MLC, TUL, and KTIK to the flight plan after waypoint 09. 

b. Renumber the flight plan. 

c. Delete all waypoints after KTIK.

< Press FPLN. 

< Enter MLC in scratchpad. 

< Insert by pressing line select key adjacent 

 to waypoint 10. 

< Select MLC VORTAC. 

< Repeat steps for TUL and KTIK.

LSteps

LSteps < Press EDIT function key. 

< Scroll to fpln edit 2 page. 

< Press LS5. 

< Press LS5 again to confirm renumbering of 

 flight plan. 

< Type minus (-) in scratchpad. 

< Press line select key next to point to be 

 deleted. 

LSteps

Figure 15. Modified Flight Plan 

10 MLC →

11 TUL → 

12 KTIK → 

 *END 

3 [ ] 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-28 01 JUL 13

DESCENT 

21. Add SWO as Initial Approach Fix for Tinker AFB. 

APPROACH 

22. Set Baroset to 30.00. 

LSteps < Type SWO in scratchpad. 

< Press line select key next to KTIK. 

< Select key at LS1. 

Figure 16. Selecting the Fix 

Figure 17. Adding the Fix 

LSteps < Press STR function key. 

< Scroll to VNAV STR page. 

< Type 30.00 in scratchpad. 

< Select LS4. 

← SWO-KZ-VOR-DME 108.40 

 select 01-02 / 02 

N36°1327.4 W097°0452.5 

← SWO-KZ-FIX 

N36°1327.4 W097°0452.5 

3 [SWO ] 

11 TUL →

 fpln 

11A SWO →

12 KTIK →

 *END 

3 [ ] 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-29 01 JUL 13

23. Monitor the Position page for windshear during the approach and come to a full 

stop landing. The FET mode becomes 'Initialization' and the aircraft stops. 

Figure 18. Set Baroset 

Mission Complete 

20000ft 

↓ to ↓ pilot vnav str 

BAROSET [30.00] in: 

3 [ ] 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 3 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-30 01 JUL 13
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

FMS Mission Exercise (Travis) 

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - Only Travis students take this FET lesson. McGuire students 

take the F856 lesson, which includes a McGuire scenario. This exercise 

allows you the opportunity to practice with the FMS operations in a mission type 

scenario. In addition to practicing those actions that you will normally 

accomplish, such as preflight and remote ranging, this exercise provides the 

opportunity to observe and monitor certain functions of the FMS. To do this, you 

will perform specific actions normally accomplished by the Pilots. They include 

the Direct-to function, holding, and the addition and deletion of specific 

waypoints. Remember, these actions directly affect the flight path of the aircraft. 

II. Duration - 2.0 hours

III. Reference Materials

A. FMS Mission Exercise (Travis) Student Guide 

IV. Equipment and Materials 

A. Learning Center CBT Computer with FET Desktop Icon 

B. FMS Mission Exercise (Travis) Student Guide 

C. FMS CDU Page Flow Diagram 

V. Student Preparation/Review 

A. Complete all FMS CBT lessons

B. Read FET introduction in this lesson.

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-1 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Objectives 

1. Perform FMS Initialization. 

2. Perform FMS preflight tasks. 

3. Perform holding procedures. 

4. Perform data-for procedures. 

5. Perform management of active flight plan. 

6. Perform Remote Ranging. 

7. Perform Alternate flight planning. 

8. Perform FMS approach tasks. 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-2 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

FMS Emulation Trainer (FET) 

Introduction

The Flight Management System Emulation Trainer (FET) provides you with additional 

training prior to encountering the FMS in the simulator or aircraft. The FET is a parttask trainer with computer simulation emulating Control Display Unit (CDU) operation. 

A flight map and Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI) display provide a visual 

reference of what occurs in the physical environment during FMS operation. 

FET exercises reinforce procedures learned in the CBT lessons and present you with 

self-paced activities on the Flight Management System. The Student Guide includes 

the steps that direct you through the scheduled exercise activities. If you are a Travis 

student, complete the FMS Mission Exercise (Travis) scenario. If you are a McGuire 

student, complete the McGuire scenario. This exercise profile allows you to step 

through the scenario and check off the tasks as they are completed. An instructor is 

available to assist you, as necessary. Use your FMS CDU Page Flow diagram as a 

reference for FMS CDU operations. 

FET OVERVIEW

The FET is a desktop computer simulation of the FMS-800 CDU with fully functional 

keys. The FET allows you to view flight progress with a flight map or an EHSI in the 

map mode. The FET will help you to master the pages and functions of the FMS-800 

and EHSI prior to running a full scenario or actual use in the simulator or aircraft. 

The FET uses a slightly different database than the aircraft and simulator. For instance, 

when you load a Standard Instrument Departure or Standard Terminal Arrival into your 

flight plan, the FET may have more or less waypoints than the aircraft or simulator 

database. Remember, the FET is meant to be an instructional device that reinforces 

basic functions of the FMS-800, not a complete Flight Management System. 

EMULATOR ENVIRONMENT

The FET work space is divided into CDU, flight map window (or optional EHSI map), 

and simulation control windows. 

1. CDU: All buttons are active to touch except the brightness knob. The CLEAR

key blanks the entire scratchpad if held depressed. Interaction with other aircraft 

components through the CDU, such as the GPS, is simulated at a basic level. 

2. FET Exit: Exiting the FET program through the File menu returns you to the 

Windows desktop. 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-3 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

3. Flight Map: The aircraft can fly anywhere on or off the flight map. The flight map 

is used to display course legs, waypoints, VOR rings, and airport identifier 

symbols with 20nm rings—all of which are part of the flight plan. Points not on 

the flight plan are not shown. As the aircraft moves, it leaves a history track. 

Each of these display items can be toggled to draw, or not, through the Plot

dropdown menu. Also on the Plot menu is a choice between displaying the 

waypoint number or its name. 

4. Map Scale and Centering: The map scale is the distance from top of map to 

bottom. It can be adjusted through the simulation controls at the lower edge of 

the FET window. The default is 20nm, but can be changed by clicking the button 

for another range. 160nm is usually a good working distance. 

While running the simulation, the aircraft moves toward the edge of the window. 

Click anywhere on the flight map to center the point clicked. Pressing the 

“Center on AC” button does a one-time centering of the aircraft. Toggle the 

“Auto on AC” box to X (the default) to keep the aircraft from flying out of the map 

window. “Center on WP” places the active waypoint in the center of the map. 

5. EHSI and EHSI Control Panel: Click on the MAP/EHSI button to select the EHSI 

display. The EHSI "map" and "map-arc" modes are available and normal range 

selections are possible by moving the cursor over the Mode-Range knob on the 

EHSI Control Panel. The Cursor, Cursor Reset, Data, and NAV controls are also 

functional. 

6. INU Mode Selector Units: For start up checklist tasks, the three INU controls are 

simulated through three banks of buttons below the CDU. It is recommended to 

select each button in turn for each CDU on start up. Skipping from OFF to NAV

does not align the INUs. 

MACHINE STATES

The “state” of the FET is reported in a small window just below the CDU, to the left of 

the simulated mission time. The state of the machine depends on factors such as the 

Freeze/Run buttons below the CDU. 

1. Initialization. The FET starts up and remains in the Initialization state until Run

is selected. During initialization, the CDU is fully functional and the aircraft is 

considered to be on the ground. The ‘Initialization’ state is reached again when 

the aircraft passes the last waypoint in the flight plan. 

2. Run. Selecting the Run button activates the aircraft on the flight map. It is 

considered immediately airborne. You can control the rate at which time passes 

during RUN by selecting an acceleration factor in the lower left of the FET work 

space. Be careful of the higher acceleration factors—it is easy to get behind the 

aircraft and miss timely performance of the FET mission tasks. 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-4 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

3. Freeze. During Freeze, CDU control is frozen and the mission stops, but the 

flight map operates in the normal manner. To examine various CDU pages while 

frozen, you need to toggle back to Run to select another page. The Start 1 LS2 

FREEZE selection has nothing to do with the FET Freeze state. 

CONTROLLING THE AIRCRAFT

1. Flight Director: All aircraft control is managed through the CDU FMS 800 pages. 

The autopilot is engaged, and “FMS Track” is your selected flight mode. 

2. Fuel Expenditure: You cannot directly control airspeed, altitude or bank angle 

(set at 25E, variable during patterns), but you never run out of fuel. 

OPERATIONAL TIPS

1. If you are just practicing, the GPS does not need initialization nor do the INUs 

need aligning for the FET to operate. 

2. Whatever is entered on the initial position page becomes the default for the next 

person who uses the FET. 

3. When using the FET map, the cursor position can be used to do quick and dirty 

remote ranging by holding the right button down while the cursor is on the map. 

As you slide the cursor around, a range circle appears on the map. 

Corresponding range and bearing readouts appear in the “Cursor Position” 

window below. 

4. A flight plan you built or modified can be copied waypoint by waypoint through 

the scratchpad and inserted into the alternate flight plan for saving. 

5. If you build an alternate flight plan, you can save it to the catalog and reload it at 

a later session. Only flight plans 09 through 40 can be saved. 

6. Winds entered for each waypoint become “active” when that waypoint is active. 

Crosswind/tailwind is reported on the position page. 

7. Acceleration of the mission time affects all CDU pages and the mission clock. 

While using the FET, you can actually control the passage of time, but only in the 

forward direction. 

8. Freely change the map scale as you fly holding patterns, approaches, etc.. 

9. Do not forget the Clear History selection on the Plot menu, which erases your 

aircraft’s track from the flight map. 

10. The Mag/True toggle buttons below the Freeze/Run buttons are provided in case 

a scenario requires the reference to be switched. 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-5 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

11. To shortcut your way back to the Initialization state, perform a DIR to the last 

flight plan waypoint. If you want this to occur where you started, copy your ‘00' 

coordinates to the last waypoint before you DIR To. 

START UP

To run the FET on a Learning Center computer, use the following steps: 

1. Log into the computer with your ID and Password. 

2. Double click on the FET shortcut icon located on the computer desktop. 

3. Click OK after entering the desired airfield identifier. 

4. You are now ready to begin training on the FET. 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-6 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Mission (Travis) Scenario 

Higher Headquarters Directed (HHD) mission from Travis AFB to San Francisco 

International Airport, CA. An Tanker Anchor Pattern (AR-645) is included in the flight 

plan, but the orbit will not be flown. Receiver air refueling will be conducted on AR-8B. 

T PROCEDURE

Scenario 

Study Guide 

Reference

PRE-DEPARTURE 

Check Initial Position coordinates (N38°15.761W121°55.648). 1 

MSUs - Standby 2 

FMS Initialization. 

a. Verify FMS Software Version. 

b. Verify position, time, date, and GPS reference datum. 

c. Clear all messages on annunciation line. 

d. Initialize GPS. 

3 

MSUs - Align 

a. Enter Initial Position coordinates (N38°15.8 W121°55.6) 

b. Select ALIGN (MSUs 1, 2, & 3) 

c. Press DTK-STS, observe countdown. 

d. Select ICAO database. (DB B KC-10)

4 

RADIO MASTER POWER - ON. 5 

Configure TACAN and ADF. 

a. Nav radio page 1 - ADF - 400, TCN1 - 113X. 

b. Nav radio page 2 - ADF - 400, TCN2 - 94Y, mode - 

BCNINV. 

6 

Load and edit the TRAVIS1 alternate flight plan. 

a. Load the TRAVIS1 flight plan. 

b. Edit alternate flight plan. Delete AR-8B, add AR-7B. 

c. Add RVIP and NAV checkpoint. 

d. Replace the current flight plan. 

e. Add the TEALL1 departure to the flight plan. 

f. Renumber the flight plan. 

7 

Check flight plan waypoints for accuracy. Compare waypoints to 

Figure 6 and the Waypoint List. 8 

MSUs - NAV 9 

Access Position page to monitor for windshear during takeoff. 10 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-7 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

 PROCEDURE 

Scenario 

Study Guide 

Reference

Press RUN on the FET Control Panel to begin mission. 11 

CLIMB 

Compare data on Pilot PSN, Copilot PSN, STR, and FPLN pages. 12 

After ILA, 'FREEZE' the FET and compare display with Figure 8, 

then press RUN. 13 

ENROUTE 

Tanker is late, prepare to HOLD at RVIP 

a. Attach hold at RVIP. 

b. Monitor Hold Entry wpt 04 hold page. 

14 

Refueling is canceled. Proceed direct to N40°44 W120°48 (wpt 06). 15 

After passing wpt 06, determine ETA to the RVCP for AR-645, 

N42°34 W120°49° (WPT 10), using remote ranging. 16 

After passing wpt 07, determine time to go, bearing, and distance 

to the active waypoint using the STR function key. 17 

After passing waypoint 07: 

a. Determine time and distance from present position direct to 

wpt 09. 

b. Determine time and distance from present position to wpt 

09 via flight plan.

18 

Determine time and distance to KTCM from wpt 14. 19 

Receiver is canceled. Recover at McChord AFB. 

a. Add DSD, BTG, & KTCM to flight plan. 

b. Renumber the flight plan. 

c. Delete all waypoints after KTCM.

20 

DESCENT 

Add TOU as IAF at KTCM. 21 

APPROACH 

Set Baroset to 30.00. 22 

Monitor the Position page for windshear during the approach and 

come to a full stop landing. The FET mode becomes 

'Initialization' and the aircrafts stops.

23 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-8 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Mission (Travis) Mission Data 

***THE ACCURACY OF THIS AFMSS/PFPS COMPUTER FLIGHT PLAN DEPENDS UPON THE ACCURACY *** 

*****OF THE NIMA NAVIGATIONAL DATA BASE, THE WEATHER DATA BASE, AND USER INPUT.****** 

*******************AIRCREWS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR FUEL REQUIREMENTS ******************* 

**********************AND THE ROUTE OF FLIGHT THEY FILE AND FLY********************** 

RTE NAME:C:\FMSMSNEXERTRAVIS. CFPS VERSION:4.2 

 FLIGHT PLAN CREATED: 28 MAY 13 NIMA DAFIF EFF DATE:30 MAY 13 

┌─────────────┬───────────────────────────────┬────────────────────────────────────────────────┐

│MISSION C/S │CLEARANCE │Takeoff Time(Z): 00:00 Oper Wt: 250000 │

│ │ │Land Time (Z) : 04:00 Cargo Wt: 0 │

├─────────────┤ │Sched Duration : 03+57 Ramp Fuel: 150000 │

│ACFT TYPE │ │FOB/RES : 06+33 Total GW: 400000 │

│ KC-10A │ │WARP Drag Index: 0.00 Ldg Fuel: 72619 │

│ │ │Total Dist(nm): 1179.0 Climb Winds:260/040 │

│ │ │ L/O Winds:275/030 │

├─────────────┴───────────────────────────────┴────────────────────────────────────────────────│

│AR TRACK: AR8B, ARCT: 00:45 │

│UHF PRI: 305.5 UHF SEC: 319.5 │

│BCN: 4/1 N/A TACAN: 32/95 │

│A/R ALT: FL250 │

│AVAIL BLK: Between FL240 & FL330 │

├──────────────────────────┬────┬────────┬──────┬────┬────────┬────────┬───────┬───────────────┤

│WP# FIX TAC │ MC │DISTANCE│ TEMP │CAS │ WIND │LEG TIME│ GR WT.│ │

│ REMARKS VOR │ MH │ LEG │ ALT │TAS │ DRIFT │ ETA │LEGFUEL│ │

│ LATITUDE LONGITUDE │ TC │ TOTAL │ MACH │ GS │DRAG IND│ACC TIME│FUEL RM│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 1 KSUU/A │032 │ │ +15C │ │ │00+03 │396000 │ │

│ TRAVIS AFB │032 │ 8 │ 62M│ │0 │00:00 │ 4000 │ │

│N 38 15.77 W121 55.65 │047 │ 8 │ │ │0.00 │00:00 │ 146000│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 2 TEALL/W 113X │212 │ │ -8C │N/A │ │00+04 │393070 │ │

│ SUU/T212007 │216 │ 16 │11554M│N/A │4 │00:07 │ 2930 │ │

│N 38 10.13 W122 03.40 │227 │ 24 │ N/A │N/A │0.00 │00:04 │ 143070│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 3 ILA/R169047 091X │314 │ │ -16C │N/A │ │00+01 │392090 │ │

│ WILLIAMS 114.4 │309 │ 9 │15793M│N/A │-5 │00:08 │ 980 │ │

│N 38 17.57 W122 08.91 │330 │ 33 │ N/A │N/A │0.00 │00:05 │ 142090│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ .level off │352 │ │ -35C │N/A │275/030 │00+04 │389798 │ │

│ │347 │ 28 │25000M│N/A │-4 │00:12 │ 2292 │ │

│N 38 45.08 W122 04.64 │007 │ 61 │ N/A │N/A │0.00 │00:09 │ 139798│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 4 ILA/R 091X │351 │ │ -35C │325 │275/030 │00+03 │389021 │ │

│ WILLIAMS 114.4 │348 │ 19 │25000M│465 │-4 │00:14 │ 777 │ │

│N 39 04.27 W122 01.63 │007 │ 80 │ .77 │465 │0.00 │00:11 │ 139021│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 5 AR8B IP 104X │286 │ │ -35C │290 │280/045 │00+12 │385858 │ │

│ KRBL/R227059 115.7 │283 │ 73 │25000M│418 │-2 │00:26 │ 3163 │ │

│N 39 42.00 W123 23.00 │301 │ 153 │ .69 │376 │0.00 │00:23 │ 135858│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ .auto delay 104X │285 │ │ -35C │325 │280/045 │00+04 │384591 │ │

│ 115.7 │283 │ 0 │25000M│465 │-2 │00:30 │ 1267 │ │

│N 39 42.00 W123 23.00 │301 │ 153 │ .77 │423 │0.00 │00:27 │ 134591│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 6 AR8B CP 083X │333 │ │ -37C │290 │280/050 │00+15 │380634 │ │

│ KOED/R191079 113.6 │327 │ 100 │26000M│425 │-6 │00:45 │ 3957 │ │

│N 41 20.00 W123 48.00 │349 │ 253 │ .71 │404 │44.00 │00:42 │ 130634│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 7 AR8B NC 083X │343 │ │ -37C │290 │280/050 │00+10 │377643 │ │

│ KOED/R247040 113.6 │337 │ 66 │26000M│425 │-7 │00:55 │ 2991 │ │

│N 42 26.00 W123 48.00 │360 │ 319 │ .71 │413 │44.00 │00:52 │ 127643│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 8 AR8B EX 076X │343 │ │ -37C │290 │280/050 │00+15 │373091 │ │

│ KEUG/R250025 112.9 │336 │ 101 │26000M│425 │-7 │01:09 │ 4552 │ │

│N 44 07.00 W123 48.00 │360 │ 420 │ .71 │413 │0.00 │01:06 │ 123091│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ .onload │342 │ │ -37C │290 │280/050 │00+00 │378091 │ │

│ 5000 lbs │336 │ 0 │26000M│425 │-7 │01:09 │ 0 │ │

│N 44 07.00 W123 48.00 │360 │ 420 │ .71 │413 │0.00 │01:06 │ 128091│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ 9 AR645 IP 057X │084 │ │ -29C │275 │275/030 │00+17 │373879 │ │

│ KLKV/R319081 112.0 │084 │ 114 │22000M│380 │0 │01:26 │ 4212 │ │

│N 43 43.00 W121 14.00 │101 │ 534 │ .62 │409 │0.00 │01:23 │ 123879│ │

╘══════════════════════════╧════╧════════╧══════╧════╧════════╧════════╧═══════╧═══════════════╛

 KC-10 ATS Form 70 (27 FEB 01) - CFPS Ver 3.2 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-9 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

┌──────────────────────────┬────┬────────┬──────┬────┬────────┬────────┬───────┬───────────────┐

│WP# FIX TAC │ MC │DISTANCE│ TEMP │CAS │ WIND │LEG TIME│ GR WT.│ │

│ REMARKS VOR │ MH │ LEG │ ALT │TAS │ │ ETA │LEGFUEL│ │

│ LATITUDE LONGITUDE │ TC │ TOTAL │ MACH │ GS │DRAG IND│ACC TIME│FUEL RM│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│10 AR645 AN 057X │148 │ │ -29C │275 │275/030 │00+11 │371114 │ │

│ KLKV/R271015 112.0 │152 │ 71 │22000M│380 │4 │01:37 │ 2765 │ │

│N 42 34.00 W120 49.00 │165 │ 605 │ .62 │389 │18.50 │01:34 │ 121114│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ .orbit 057X │150 │ │ -29C │275 │275/030 │00+30 │363548 │ │

│ 112.0 │154 │ 0 │22000M│380 │4 │02:07 │ 7566 │ │

│N 42 34.00 W120 49.00 │166 │ 605 │ .62 │369 │18.50 │02:04 │ 113548│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│11 AR645 AP 057X │059 │ │ -29C │310 │275/030 │00+03 │362758 │ │

│ KLKV/R010011 112.0 │057 │ 20 │22000M│425 │-1 │02:10 │ 790 │ │

│N 42 39.00 W120 23.00 │075 │ 625 │ .70 │453 │18.50 │02:07 │ 112758│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│12 AR645 AP 057X │329 │ │ -29C │310 │275/030 │00+07 │360560 │ │

│ KLKV/R335059 112.0 │326 │ 51 │22000M│425 │-4 │02:17 │ 2198 │ │

│N 43 28.00 W120 40.00 │346 │ 676 │ .70 │414 │18.50 │02:14 │ 110560│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│13 AR645 AP 057X │239 │ │ -29C │310 │275/030 │00+03 │359639 │ │

│ KLKV/R315060 112.0 │240 │ 20 │22000M│425 │1 │02:20 │ 921 │ │

│N 43 23.00 W121 07.00 │256 │ 696 │ .70 │397 │18.50 │02:17 │ 109639│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ .auto delay 057X │239 │ │ -29C │310 │275/030 │00+08 │357232 │ │

│ 112.0 │240 │ 0 │22000M│425 │1 │02:28 │ 2407 │ │

│N 43 23.00 W121 07.00 │256 │ 696 │ .70 │397 │18.50 │02:25 │ 107232│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│14 AR645 EX 057X │148 │ │ -29C │310 │275/030 │00+07 │355140 │ │

│ KLKV/R271015 112.0 │152 │ 51 │22000M│425 │4 │02:35 │ 2092 │ │

│N 42 34.00 W120 49.00 │165 │ 747 │ .70 │435 │0.00 │02:32 │ 105140│ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ .offload │148 │ │ -29C │310 │275/030 │00+00 │345140 │ │

│ 10000 lbs │152 │ 0 │22000M│425 │4 │02:35 │ 0 │ │

│N 42 34.00 W120 49.00 │165 │ 747 │ .70 │435 │0.00 │02:32 │ 95140 │ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│15 FMG/R 126X │147 │ │ -29C │330 │275/030 │00+25 │337700 │ │

│ MUSTANG 117.9 │151 │ 189 │22000M│451 │4 │03:00 │ 7440 │ │

│N 39 31.88 W119 39.36 │163 │ 936 │ .74 │461 │0.00 │02:57 │ 87700 │ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│16 TROSE/W │183 │ │ -29C │330 │275/030 │00+16 │333017 │ │

│ TROSE │186 │ 115 │22000M│451 │4 │03:15 │ 4683 │ │

│N 37 41.95 W120 24.25 │198 │ 1052 │ .74 │443 │0.00 │03:12 │ 83017 │ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│17 MOD/E 093X │246 │ │ -21C │250 │275/030 │00+05 │331833 │ │

│ MODESTO 114.6 │247 │ 27 │18000M│326 │1 │03:21 │ 1184 │ │

│N 37 37.64 W120 57.47 │261 │ 1078 │ .53 │297 │0.00 │03:18 │ 81833 │ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│18 GROAN/W │247 │ │ -7C │250 │275/030 │00+04 │331006 │ │

│ GROAN │248 │ 16 │11000M│293 │1 │03:24 │ 827 │ │

│N 37 35.42 W121 17.10 │262 │ 1094 │ .46 │264 │0.00 │03:21 │ 81006 │ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│19 CEDES/W │247 │ │ -7C │250 │275/030 │00+04 │330148 │ │

│ CEDES │248 │ 16 │11000M│293 │1 │03:28 │ 858 │ │

│N 37 33.05 W121 37.47 │262 │ 1110 │ .46 │264 │0.00 │03:25 │ 80148 │ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│20 SAU/R 109X │278 │ │ +9C │250 │100/010 │00+10 │327640 │ │

│ SAUSALITO 116.2 │279 │ 46 │ 3000M│261 │1 │03:38 │ 2508 │ │

│N 37 51.32 W122 31.36 │293 │ 1157 │ .40 │271 │0.00 │03:35 │ 77640 │ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│21 NORMM/W 105X │193 │ │ +9C │250 │100/010 │00+02 │327014 │ │

│ SFO/E281013 115.8 │191 │ 9 │ 3000M│261 │-2 │03:40 │ 626 │ │

│N 37 43.21 W122 36.79 │208 │ 1166 │ .40 │264 │0.00 │03:37 │ 77014 │ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│ .auto delay 105X │193 │ │ +9C │250 │100/010 │00+05 │325619 │ │

│ 115.8 │191 │ 0 │ 3000M│261 │-2 │03:45 │ 1395 │ │

│N 37 43.21 W122 36.79 │208 │ 1166 │ .40 │264 │0.00 │03:42 │ 75619 │ │

├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤

│22 KSFO/A │103 │ │ +15C │ │100/010 │00+15 │322619 │ │

│ SAN FRANCISCO │102 │ 13 │ 11M│ │-1 │04:00 │ 3000 │ │

│N 37 37.14 W122 22.49 │118 │ 1179 │ │ │0.00 │03:57 │ 72619 │ │

╘══════════════════════════╧════╧════════╧══════╧════╧════════╧════════╧═══════╧═══════════════╛

 KC-10 ATS Form 70 (27 FEB 01) - CFPS Ver 3.2 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-10 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-11 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-12 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

FLIGHT PROFILE 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-13 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Mission (Travis) Scenario Study Guide 

PRE-DEPARTURE 

1. Check Initial Position coordinates. 

 a. Verify/enter airport waypoint KSUU. 

NOTE: Items 1-7 are tasks that will normally be accomplished by either the 

Pilots or Flight Engineer prior to the "Before Start” checklist. They do not occur 

in the same sequence as described in your tech order, but are arranged to allow 

practice moving from one page to another. Accomplish all tasks regardless of 

crew position to gain familiarity with CDU operations. 

OR

b. Verify/enter N38°15.761 W121°55.648 in Lat/Long window. 

2. MSUs - STBY 

 a. Select STBY on MSU 1, 2, and 3. 

3. FMS - initialization. 

a. Verify FMS Software version – “XXXXXXXXXXXXX.” 

< Press STAT function key. LSteps < Select CDU3 GOÆ (LS7). 

< Verify VSN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX. 

b. Verify position, time, date and GPS reference datum. If initial position 

coordinates are incorrect, re-enter the coordinates using scratchpad and LS1 or 

LS5. 

LSteps < Press IDX function key. 

< Select START (LS1). 

[N38°15.761 W121°55.648]

start 1 psn / time 

→FREEZE UTC DISPLAY←

DA/MO/YR UTC 

[01/ 05/ 01] [1022: 35] 

<< √ inu1 >> 

WGS-84 

3 [ ]

Figure 1. Start 1 Position/Time Page

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-14 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

 c. Review/clear all annunciation line messages. Press CLR key until all messages 

are cleared. 

 d. Access the Start 2 page (scroll vertical) and initialize the GPS (LS1). 

4. MSUs - ALIGN 

a. Enter Initial Position coordinates on INU1 Control page. 

 b. Select ALIGN (MSUs 1, 2, and 3). 

 c. Press DTK-STS (LS1) to observe the beginning of status countdown on line 4. 

 d. Return to the start pages and select appropriate ICAO database cartridge. 

INAV

INU 3

INAV

INU 2

INAV

INU 1

INAV

INU

CONTROL

PAGE

UPDATE

PAGE

LSteps < Access INU1 INAV page (---1). 

< Scroll laterally to INU Control page. 

 Press LS4 INU CONTROL 

< Press LS2 (adjacent to POSITION). 

< Enter initial position latitude in the 

 scratchpad (N3815.8). 

< Press the line select key adjacent to 

ENTER (LS6). 

< Enter initial position longitude in the 

 scratchpad (W12155.6). 

< Press the line select key adjacent to 

 ENTER (LS6).

Figure 2. INU Control Page Access < Clear the scratchpad before continuing. 

< Press IDX function key. 

< Press LS1, START. 

LSteps

< Vertical scroll to “start 3 database”. 

< Select DB B KC-10 as the ICAO 

 database. 

< Vertical scroll to “start 4 mission”. 

< Select MSN A for the mission data 

 cartridge to be used. 

NOTE: In the aircraft this procedure is normally performed on all three CDUs 

and their associated INUs. Only CDU 2 can enter present position into INU 2, 

and only CDU 3 can set INU 3. 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-15 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

5. RADIO MASTER POWER - ON 

6. Configure TACAN and ADF. 

LSteps < Access Master Power page through IDX

< Select POWER LS6. 

< Turn on all navigation radios with LS5 

 a. Access Navigation Radio page 1 (NAV Function Key). 

(1) Tune ADF1 to 400 (LS5). 

(2) Change mode (LS6) to ANT and back to ADF. 

(3) Set TACAN1 to 113X (LS7). 

(4) Verify TR mode (LS8). 

(5) Copy ADF1 frequency into scratchpad (LS5). 

 b. Access Navigation Radio Page 2 (lateral scroll). 

(1) Paste ADF1 frequency (400) into ADF2 (LS5). 

(2) Change mode (LS6) to ANT and back to ADF. 

(3) Set TACAN2 to 94Y (LS7). 

(4) Set mode to BCNINV. 

NOTE: In the aircraft, you continue to update the TACAN and ADF for 

navigation backup. Because of time constraints, this is not done with the FET. 

You may, however, enter new TACAN channels and ADF frequencies as time 

permits. 

7. Due to weather in the area, refueling in AR-8B is canceled. Refueling will now take 

place in AR-7B. Edit the alternate flight plan by deleting AR-8B from the TRAVIS1

flight plan and adding AR-7B. 

a. Access Start 5 Flight Plan/Load. < Press IDX function key. 

< Press LS1 

< Vertical scroll to “start 5 fpln/load”. 

LSteps

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-16 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

INDEX 1

IDX

START1

PSN/TIME

START 2

NAV/INIT

START 3

DATABASE

START 4

MISSION

START 5

FPLN/LOAD

Figure 3. Start 5 Flight Plan/Load Page Access 

b. Access Alternate Flight Plan Catalog (ALTN CATLG) page on LS6. SELECT 

ALTN LOAD will appear in the scratchpad. 

c. Select TRAVIS1 (LS3). After it loads, compare your CDU to sample display in 

figure 4. 

 

 start 5 fpln / load 

[TRAVIS1 ] ALTN CATLG→

fltplan.cr 

→ERASE FPLN REPLACE←

→ERASE FLT/DATA LOAD←

3 [ ]

Figure 4. Start 5 Flight Plan/Load Page

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-17 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

d. Change AR-8B to AR-7B by editing the Alternate Flight Plan. 

e. Delete AR-8B (Use Minus key and LS key next to each waypoint.) 

RVIP N39°42 W123°23 (wpt 03) 

RVCP N41°20 W123°48 (wpt 04) 

< Press EDIT function key. 

< Press LS1 (ALTN FPLN). 

< Select LS4 (WAYPOINTS). 

LSteps

CK PT N42°26 W123°48 (wpt 05) 

EAR N44°07 W123°48 (wpt 06) 

f. Add AR-7B (RVCP and EAR point) after ILA. 

g. Add N39°32 W120°46 (RVIP) as wpt 03 and NAV checkpoint N41°40 W120°48 

as waypoint 05 (Figure 5). 

LSteps

Figure 5. Alternate Flight Plan Page 

02 ILA →

altn fpln wpts 

03 N39°32 W120°46 →

04 N40°44 W120°48 P→

05 N41°40 W120°48 →

3 [ ]

NOTE: After deleting RVIP (wpt 03), the RVCP (wpt 04) will move up to become 

waypoint 03. 

< Type AR-7B in scratchpad. 

< Press the line select key after ILA. 

< RVCP and EAR appear in waypoints 

 list after ILA. 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-18 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

 h. REPLACE current flight plan with alternate flight plan and confirm. 

i. Add the TEALL1 departure to the flight plan. 

< Press EDIT function key. 

< Press LS1 (ALTN FPLN). 

< Select LS3 (REPLACE FPLN) and 

 confirm LS3. 

LSteps

< Press EDIT function key. 

< Select LS6 (SIDS). 

j. Renumber flight plan. 

< Type KSUU in scratchpad. 

< Press LS1 to access SIDS. 

< Press LS3 for TEALL1. 

< Select LS7 for RW21R. 

< Press LS5 to select transition. 

< Press LS4 to select ILA. 

< Press LS7 to insert flight plan. 

< Press LS3 to insert SID before ILA. 

< Removed (DISCONTINUITY 03) by 

 entering a minus (-) in scratchpad and 

 pressing the LS3. 

< Scroll down to wpt 05 (ILA). 

< Remove ILA by entering minus (-) in the 

 scratchpad and pressing the line select 

 key adjacent to ILA . 

LSteps

NOTE: The SID points are added based on the FMS 800 database stored in the 

cartridge. A DISCONTINUITY appears whenever a SID is inserted. The 

discontinuity is shown in the flight plan with its associated waypoint number.

LSteps < Press EDIT function key. 

< Scroll to fpln edit 2 page. 

< Press LS5. 

< Press LS5 again to confirm 

renumbering of flight plan. 

NOTE: The navigation database is updated often 

and is affected by NOTAMS. If the desired SID is 

not available, skip this step and realize waypoint 

numbering may not correspond with the figures 

in this lesson. 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-19 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

8. Check flight plan waypoints for accuracy. 

 LSteps

Figure 6. Flight Plan (First Page)

< Press FPLN function key. 

< Scroll through waypoints. 

< Compare waypoints to Figure 6 and 

 Waypoint List, realizing waypoints 

 may not correspond if the SID did not 

 load. 

CRS [325]° [OFFST] AUTO:

↓ ↓ fpln 

01 N38°18 W121°57 →

 201° / 9.3nm 

02 TEALL S→

03 SUU01 S→

3 [ ]

WAYPOINT LIST

04 ILA 10 N42°34 W120°49 

05 N39°32 W120°46 11 N42°39 W120°23 

06 N40°44 W120°48 12 N43°28 W120°40 

07 N41°40 W120°48 13 N43°23 W121°07 

08 N43°20 W120°50 14 N42°34 W120°49 

09 N43°43 W121°14 15 FMG 

NOTE: The following item is accomplished during the "Before Start” checklist.

9. MSUs to NAV

a. Access the INU1 Control page (Check status at 02). 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-20 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

 b. Note status goes to 01. < Press INAV function key. 

< Access INU1 INAV page (---1). 

< Press LS4 (INU Control). 

< Set INU1, 2, and 3 to NAV.

LSteps

NOTE: The following item is accomplished during the "Before Takeoff” checklist.

10. Access Position page to monitor for windshear during takeoff (PSN Key). 

N38°15.761 W121°55.648 

INU1/GPS pilot psn 

TRK 346° VAR E14°

GS 000 TAS 000 

WND 360°T / 50 5 0 0 

←

SAT +15°C 

[ ]

Figure 7. Position Page 

11 Press RUN on the FET Control Panel to begin the mission. 

NOTE: Autopilot 1 is in CMD and FMS TRACK is annunciated in the FMAs as 

soon as airborne.

CLIMB 

12. During climb out, compare data on Pilot and Copilot Position (PSN), Steer (STR), 

and Flight Plan (FPLN) pages. 

13. After the aircraft crosses ILA and tracks to wpt 04, Press FPLN, FREEZE the FET, 

and compare your display with Figure 8, then press RUN. 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-21 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

NOTE: Your course and distance information may differ slightly depending on 

when the 'freeze' was initiated. Experiment with the accelerator factors and 

scale while enroute to the RVIP (wpt 04). You may leave these in any mode you 

desire. 

CRS [347]° [OFFST] AUTO: 

↓ ↓ fpln 

04 ILA →

 051°/65.5nm 

05 N39°32 W120°46 →

06 N40°44 W120°48 P→

3 [ ] 

Figure 8. Flight Plan Page

ENROUTE

14. Tanker is late; prepare to HOLD at RVIP (wpt 04). 

a. Attach hold at the RVIP, N39°32 W120°46 (left turn, 11⁄2 minutes legs). 

LSteps < Access Hold page (EDIT, LS5.) 

< Change to LEFT turn (LS2). 

EDIT

FPLN

EDIT 1

HOLD

< Change pattern length to 11⁄2 minute legs. 

Insert 130 (minutes and seconds) in the 

scratchpad and press LS3. 

< Press LS8 to insert hold in the flight plan. 

The CDU automatically displays Flight Plan 

page.) 

< Press line select key at right or left of 

N39o32 W120o46. 

Figure 9. Hold Page Access 

 b. Monitor holding entry from the Waypoint 4 Hold page. 

LSteps < Press H (LS6). 

< Press H again (LS6) to display the 

 Hold page. 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-22 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

15. Refueling is canceled. Proceed direct to N40°44 W120°48 (wpt 06/RVCP). 

LSteps < Press DIR Function Key. 

< Press line select key adjacent to 

 N40o44 W120o48. 

16. When passing wpt 06, determine the ETA via the flight plan at the RVCP for AR645 

N42°34 W120°49 (wpt 10), by using remote ranging. 

< Press DATA Function Key. LSteps < Press line select key adjacent to 

N42o34W120o49 (waypoint 10). 

< Toggle LS1 to PPSN VIA FPLN. 

17. After passing waypoint 07, determine the time to go (TTG), bearing and distance to 

the active waypoint (wpt 08) using the STR function key. 

:PPSN VIA FPLN 

 from-to data 

 10 N42°34 W120°49 

N42°34.000 W120°49.000 

255nm ETE 0:46.3 

 

 ETA 1310:06 

↔ [ ] 

Figure 10. Present Position Via Flight Plan 

NOTE: The ETA reflects the projected time of arrival at the RVCP along the 

flight plan path. In the aircraft, check the ETA against the RVCT. 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-23 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

:INU1 / GPS CMD GS: - - - 

↓ to ↓ pilot str 

N43°20 W120°50 ETA 1616 

DTK 344° TTG 0:15:06 

TRK 344° 344° / 99.9 

XTK L0.00nm DA: L0.00° 

0 [ ]

Figure 11. Pilot Steer Page 

18. After passing waypoint 07: 

 a. Determine the time and distance from present position direct to waypoint 09. 

L < Press FPLN Function Key. Steps < Press DATA Function Key. 

< Select waypoint 09.

 

< Toggle LS1 to PPSN Direct. 

:PPSN DIRECT 

 from-to data 

09 [N43°43 W121°14] 

N43°43.000 W121°14.000 

334° / 111.0nm ETE 0:16.4 

 

 ETA 1256:03 

↔ [ ] 

Figure 12. Present Position Direct 

NOTE: You will see the ETE count DOWN if 'data for' PPSN DIRECT is performed 

with wpt 09 ahead of you. Once past wpt 09 on the way to wpt 07, the ETE will 

count UP. 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-24 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

b. Determine the time and distance from present position to waypoint 09 via the 

flight plan. 

L < Toggle LS1 to PPSN VIA FPLN. Step

:PPSN VIA FPLN 

 from-to data 

09 [N43°43 W121°14] 

N43°43.000 W121°14.000 

108nm ETE 0:19.7 

 

 ETA 1310:06 

↔ [ ]

Figure 13. PPSN VIA FPLN 

19. The Command Post notifies you that after refueling you are directed to McChord 

AFB. The Pilot requests time and distance from wpt 14 (Exit pt) to McChord 

(KTCM). 

LSteps < Press FPLN function key. 

< Press DATA function key. 

< Scroll to and select wpt 14. 

 then 

< Type KTCM in scratchpad. 

< Press line select key next to wpt 14. 

:13 N43°23 W121°07 

 from-to data 

 [KTCM ] 

N47°08.261 W122°28.589 

327°/234nm ETE 0:33.1 

 ETA 1320:06 

↔ [ ] 

Figure 14. From-to Data 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-25 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

20. Receiver is canceled. You are to recover at KTCM via Deschutes (DSD) and Battle 

Ground (BTG). 

 a. Add DSD, BTG, and KTCM to the flight plan after wpt 08. 

LSteps < Press FPLN. 

< Enter DSD in scratchpad. 

< Insert by pressing line select key adjacent 

 to waypoint 09. 

< Select DSD-KZ-VORTAC. 

< Repeat steps for BTG and KTCM.

b. Renumber the flight plan. 

L < Press EDIT function key. Steps < Scroll to fpln edit 2 page. 

< Press LS5. 

< Press LS5 again to confirm renumbering of 

 flight plan. 

c. Delete all waypoints after KTCM.

< Type minus (-) in scratchpad. 

< Press line select key next to point to be 

 deleted. 

LSteps

Figure 15. Modified Flight Plan 

09A #DSD → 

5 5 fpln 

10 BTG → 

 348°/83.6nm 

11 KTCM → 

 *END 

 3 [ ] 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-26 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

DESCENT

21. After passing DSD, add TOU as Initial Approach Fix for McChord AFB. 

LSteps < Type TOU in scratchpad. 

< Press line select key next to KTCM. 

< Select key at LS3. 

← TOU-KZ-VORTAC 112.20 

 select 01-02 / 04 

N48°1759.6 W124°3737.4 

←TOU-KZ-FIX →

N48°1755.6 W124°3737.4 

3 [TOU ] 

Figure 16. Selecting the Fix 

10 BTG →

 fpln 

10A TOU → 

APPROACH 

11 KTCM → 

 *END 

3 [ ]

Figure 17. Adding the Fix 

22. Set the Baroset to 30.00. L < Press STR function key. Steps < Scroll to VNAV STR page. 

< Type 30.00 in scratchpad. 

< Select LS4. 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-27 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

20000ft 

↓ to ↓ pilot vnav str 

 

BAROSET [30.00] in: 

3 [ ] 

Figure 18. Set Baroset 

23. Monitor the Position page for windshear during the approach and come to a full 

stop landing. The FET mode becomes 'Initialization' and the aircraft stops. 

MISSION COMPLETE 

CH 3 

FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-28 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Tanker Air Refueling Procedures

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to tanker air refueling 

procedures, including rendezvous; contact and air refueling offload, and post air 

refueling. The lesson discusses the procedures and the associated checklists. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

B. ATP-56(B), Air-to-Air Refuelling 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Tanker Air Refueling Procedures CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

1. Section VIII, Part 2, Rendezvous Procedures 

2. Section VIII, Part 4, Tanker Air Refueling Procedures 

(a) Tanker Rendezvous Checklist 

(b) Tanker Preparation For Contact Checklist 

(c) Tanker Post Air Refueling Checklist 

CH 3 

FIQ-C505-SG 1-70-1 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Tanker Air Refueling Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson describes the Flight Engineer duties during tanker air 

refueling, from accomplishing the Rendezvous checklist, Preparation For 

Contact, off-load, and the Post Air Refueling checklist. The lesson consists 

of three segments. The first segment discusses the detailed procedures 

required of the Flight Engineer, as well as review of the other crewmember 

actions to show flow and continuity of the rendezvous procedures. The 

second segment discusses the detailed procedures required for the 

preparation for contact, off-load, and post air refueling procedures. The 

third segment allows the Flight Engineer to practice the checklists. There 

is a test of the procedures. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify tanker rendezvous procedures. 

2. Identify tanker contact/post air refueling procedures. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Tanker Air Refueling Procedures 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Rendezvous Procedures 

1. Introduction 

2. Rendezvous Planning 

a. Rendezvous Planning 

b. AP-1B 

c. CR Plan 

3. Tanker Rendezvous Checklist 

CH 3 

FIQ-C505-SG 1-70-2 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

a. Rendezvous Checklist 

b. 30 Minutes Prior 

c. 15 Minutes Prior 

d. Air Refueling Speeds 

4. RV Delta 

a. RV Delta 

b. RVIP/RVCP 

c. Orbit 

d. Turn Range/Offset 

e. 15 Minutes Prior to RVCT 

f. Receiver IP Inbound 

g. Tanker Turn to Track – Part 1 

h. Tanker Turn to Track – Part 2 

i. On Track 

5. RV Golf 

a. RV Golf 

b. Rendezvous Point 

c. RVIP/AR Information 

6. Modified RV Delta 

a. Modified RV Delta 

b. Receiver Orbit 

c. Tanker Orbit 

d. 2 Minute Call 

e. Closure/Contact 

7. RV Alpha 

CH 3 

FIQ-C505-SG 1-70-3 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

a. RV Alpha 

b. GCI Control 

c. Alternate Procedures 

8. Alternate Rendezvous 

9. Missed Rendezvous 

10. Rendezvous Overrun - Part 1 

11. Rendezvous Overrun – Part 2 

12. Summary 

13. Quiz 

C. Contact/Post Air Refueling Procedures 

1. Introduction 

2. Tanker Preparation for Contact Checklist 

a. Preparation for Contact Checklist 

b. SEAT BELTS 

c. Lighting 

d. BEACON Lights 

e. Radios/Interphone/Iridium 

f. Thrust Computer 

g. IFF/ETCAS 

h. Hydraulic Panel 

(1) Hydraulic Panel 

(2) 2/3 Motor Pump Verification 

(3) Hydraulic Pressure Fluctuation 

(4) Hydraulic Pressure Low 

i. Fuel Panel 

CH 3 

FIQ-C505-SG 1-70-4 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

(1) Fuel Panel 

(2) A/R Pump Override 

(3) Transfer Pumps 

(4) Centerline Drogue Refueling 

(5) Wing Pod Drogue Refueling 

(6) WARP Fuel Panel 

j. Radar 

k. TACAN 

l. Autopilot 

m. Auto Throttles 

n. Checklist Completed 

3. Contact/Offload 

a. Contact/Offload 

b. Boom Refueling 

c. Centerline Drogue 

d. Wing Pod Drogue 

4. Tanker Post Air Refueling Checklist 

a. Post Air Refueling Checklist 

b. BEACON Lights 

c. Lighting 

d. Thrust Computer 

e. IFF/ETCAS 

f. Hydraulic System 

g. Fuel Panel/Manifold Scavenge 

h. Post AR Report 

CH 3 

FIQ-C505-SG 1-70-5 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

i. Altimeters 

j. Rendezvous Beacon 

k. Radios/Interphone/Iridium 

l. Seat Belts 

m. Checklist Complete 

5. Summary 

6. Quiz 

III. Exam 

FIQ-C505-SG 1-70-6 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 2 

FIQ-C504-SG 1-71-1 01 JUN 12 

Receiver Air Refueling Procedures

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the Flight 

Engineer’s duties during receiver air refueling, including the Rendezvous 

Checklist, Preparation for Contact Checklist, fuel onload, and the Post Air 

Refueling Checklist. 

II. Duration - 0.7 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

B. ATP-56(B), Air-to-Air Refuelling 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Receiver Air Refueling Procedures CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

1. Section VIII, Part 2, Rendezvous Procedures 

(a) Receiver Rendezvous Checklist 

 (b) Receiver Preparation For Contact Checklist 

 (c) Receiver Post Air Refueling Checklist 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 2 

FIQ-C504-SG 1-71-2 01 JUN 12 

Receiver Air Refueling Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson describes the Flight Engineer duties during receiver air 

refueling, from accomplishing the Rendezvous Checklist, Preparation for 

Contact Checklist, onload, and the Post Air Refueling Checklist. The 

lesson discusses the detailed procedures required of the Flight Engineer, 

and reviews the other crewmember actions to show flow and continuity. 

The second segment allows you to practice the checklists. There is an 

end-of-lesson test at the end of the lesson. 

B. Objective 

1. Identify receiver air refueling procedures. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Receiver Air Refueling Procedures 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Receiver Air Refueling 

1. Introduction 

2. Receiver Rendezvous 

a. Rendezvous Checklist 

b. Rendezvous Equipment 

(1) Rendezvous Equipment 

(2) VOR/ADF/RMI 

(3) TACAN 

(4) Radar/Beacon Mode 

c. High Intensity Lights 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 2 

FIQ-C504-SG 1-71-3 01 JUN 12 

d. Radios/Interphone 

e. CG Check 

f. UARSSI Hydraulic System Manual Shutoff Valve 

g. Altimeters 

h. Separation Briefing 

i. RENDEZVOUS Checklist Complete 

3. Rendezvous Procedures 

a. Rendezvous Procedures 

b. RV Delta 

(1) RV Delta 

(2) Inbound to RVIP 

(3) 30 Minutes to RVCT 

(4) 15 Minutes to RVCT 

(5) 15 Minute Calls 

(6) IP Inbound 

(7) Turn Range/Offset 

c. RV Golf 

(1) RV Golf 

(2) Rendezvous 

(3) Assigned Altitudes 

(4) Formation/Descent 

d. Alternate Rendezvous 

(1) Alternate Rendezvous 

(2) UHF/DF 

e. Missed Rendezvous 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 2 

FIQ-C504-SG 1-71-4 01 JUN 12 

f. Overrun 

4. Final Closure 

a. Final Closure 

b. One Mile Call 

c. Radio Check/Astern 

d. Rendezvous Complete 

5. Receiver Preparation For Contact Checklist 

a. Receiver Preparation for Contact Checklist 

b. Seat Belts 

c. Radar Transponder 

d. Radios/Interphone/Iridium 

e. IFF/ETCAS 

f. Beacon Light Selectors 

g. Navigation/Formation/Hi Int Lts 

h. Fuel Panel/Quantity 

i. AR Receptacle Door 

j. AR Recp/AR Recp Lights 

k. Flight Director Switches 

l. Thrust Computer 

m. TACAN 

n. Radar 

o. Autopilot/Autothrottles 

p. Ready Light 

q. Receiver Preparation for Contact Completed 

6. Contact/Onload Procedures 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 2 

FIQ-C504-SG 1-71-5 01 JUN 12 

a. Contact/Onload Procedures 

b. CG Limits 

c. Fuel 

(1) Monitor Onload 

(2) High Level Float 

(3) Limitations 

(4) Signal Amplifier Reset 

7. Receiver Post Air Refueling Checklist 

a. Receiver Post Air Refueling Checklist 

b. Beacon Light Selectors 

c. Nav/Formation/Hi Int Lts 

d. Radios/Interphone/Iridium Phone 

e. Thrust Computer 

f. Flight Director Switches 

g. IFF/ETCAS 

h. Radar 

i. AR Receptacle Door 

j. AR Recp/AR Recp Lights 

k. UARRSI Hydraulic System Manual Shutoff Valve 

l. Fuel Panel/CG/MANF SCAV 

(1) Fuel Panel 

(2) Manifold Scavenge 

m. Seat Belts 

n. Post AR Checklist Completed 

8. Summary 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 2 

FIQ-C504-SG 1-71-6 01 JUN 12 

III. Exam 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Performance Workshop VI 

Approach and Landing/ 

Driftdown/Suspected Windshear/ 

Wing Air Refueling Pods

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this workshop is to provide an opportunity for you to 

practice completing the TOLD Card for Approach and Landing Data based on 

Normal and Abnormal Configurations, including Dual Hydraulic Failure. 

Computing data for Driftdown, Takeoff Into Suspected Windshear, and WARP 

TOLD cards are also practiced in this lesson. You should have reviewed the 

Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance and the Takeoff and Landing Data as 

well as Driftdown Workbooks and CBT Lessons prior to attending this workshop 

period. The instructor will present the workshop exercises for you to complete, 

and give the appropriate guidance when questions arise from you. Once again, 

this is intended to be a workshop, and not simply an instructor lecture. 

Part I describes the topics that will be covered by the workshop exercises. 

Part II consists of the workshop exercises to be completed and their solutions. 

II. Duration - 6.0 hours 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Flight Manual Performance Data 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Classroom 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

C. Performance Workshop VI - TOLD Card - Approach and 

Landing/Driftdown/Suspected Windshear/WARP Student Guide 

D. AF IMT 4089, KC-10 TOLD Card Worksheet (8) 

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-1 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. Descent, Approach, and Landing Data Workbook 

B. Driftdown Workbook 

C. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section II, Emergency Procedures 

2. Section IIA, Abnormal Procedures 

3. Section VII, Windshear/Severe Windshear 

D. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

1. Section I, Introduction 

2. Section II, Engine Data 

3. Section III, Takeoff Into Suspected Windshear/Wing Air Refueling 

Pods 

4. Section IX, Approach and Landing 

5. Section X, Mission Planning 

6. Section XI, Driftdown 

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-2 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Objectives

1. Compute KC-10 Approach and Landing Performance Data. 

 a. Abnormal Configurations 

 b. Dual Hydraulic Failure 

2. Compute KC-10 Driftdown Performance Data. 

3. Compute KC-10 TOLD for Takeoff Into Suspected Windshear. 

4. Compute KC-10 TOLD for aircraft with Wing Air Refueling Pods installed. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-3 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Part I

APPROACH AND LANDING

The data found in the APPROACH AND LANDING Section of T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

allows the user to compute the approach and landing speeds plus the distances needed 

to stop the aircraft using a wide variety of configurations. Speeds that can be computed 

using the charts in Section IX of the 1-1 are: minimum maneuver, threshold, and 

touchdown. Landing ground roll combined with flare distance gives you the total landing 

distance needed to stop the aircraft. 

When computing the threshold speed, remember that the tab data is only good from 

Sea Level to 2000 feet. If the altitude is above the 2000-foot level, you must use the 

Threshold Speed charts to compute the threshold speed. 

An equivalent RCR should be computed if the aircraft has an inoperative stopping 

device. This, in turn, is refigured to an SDR for use in the Landing Ground Roll Chart. 

Information contained in Volume 2 of the Dash 1 provides more information in the event 

an abnormal configuration is encountered. 

DRIFTDOWN

The aircraft will begin a descent if it loses thrust on one or more engines when flying 

above the maximum service ceiling for the number of engines operating. This is known 

as a driftdown. Driftdown data can be obtained from Section V or Section XI of the 

Dash 1-1. Section V is used for two-engine operation, whereas Section XI is used for 

single engine operation. If terrain clearance becomes a factor when computing the 

driftdown data, fuel dump may be required. Remember to adhere to the NOTES at the 

top of the charts. 

TAKEOFF INTO SUSPECTED WINDSHEAR

Windshear is a rapid change of wind speed and/or direction along the flight path. The 

potential windshear danger is that it can cause a decrease in airflow over the wings 

resulting in a serious reduction of lift. Up or down drafts can also occur in a windshear 

environment. Basic windshear is defined as conditions that result in an airspeed 

change of 11 to 15 knots. A severe windshear is defined as conditions that result in 

airspeed changes greater than 15 knots, or vertical speed changes greater than 500 

feet per minute. Takeoff will not be attempted when severe windshear conditions exist 

or are forecasted. 

When windshear conditions are reported or forecast, you are directed to accomplish 

Takeoff Into Suspected Windshear procedures. To combat the effects of windshear, the 

aircraft must fly through the shear at an increased, optimum speed. When computing a 

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-4 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

TOLD card for takeoff into a suspected windshear, speeds for the actual gross weight

and performance-limiting weight must be computed and compared. The speeds 

computed for performance limiting weight will not exceed the speeds computed for 

actual weight by more than 20 knots. The computed performance limiting weight VR

must exceed the actual weight VR by at least 10 knots or the takeoff cannot be 

attempted. 

WING AIR REFUELING PODS

The performance data charts do not account for the additional drag created by the Wing 

Air Refueling Pods. When computing TOLD for an aircraft with Wing Air Refueling Pods 

installed, adjustments must be made to the Runway Available prior to computing the 

Equivalent Field Length or Maximum Allowable Weight if V1=VMCG, also the Required 

Climb Gradient is increased prior to determining the Climb Gradient Limiting Weight. 

The required adjustment factors can be obtained from Section III of the Dash 1-1. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-5 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-6 01 JUL 13 

Part II

Compute landing data for the following: 

Landing Card I

Given: 

Gross Weight 303,648 Lbs 

Oat -10° C 

Pressure Altitude +100’ 

Wind Direction 310°

Velocity 10 G 20 Knots 

Runway Heading 350°

Runway Length 11,820’ 

RCR 23 

Slope .4 ↓

Flaps/slats 35°/EXT 

Anti-ice OFF 

Landing Card II

Given: 

Gross Weight 310,218 lbs 

Oat -5° C 

Pressure Altitude +2210’ 

Wind Direction 010°

Velocity 10 Knots 

Runway heading 350°

Runway Length 13,500’ 

RCR 10 

Slope 0 

Flaps/slats 0°/EXT 

Anti-ice ON 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-7 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-8 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-9 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-10 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Landing Card III 

Given: 

Gross Weight 338,618 lbs 

OAT 20° C 

Pressure Altitude +205’ 

Wind direction Calm 

Velocity 0 

Runway Heading 150°

Runway Length 11,150’ 

RCR 10 

Slope 0 

Flaps/slats 35°/RET 

Landing Card IV 

Given: 

Gross Weight 349,112 lbs 

OAT 26° C 

Pressure Altitude 1800’ 

Wind Direction 150°

Velocity 10 G 20 Knots 

Runway Heading 170°

Runway Length 11,752’ 

RCR 23 

Slope 0 

Flaps/Slats 0°/RET 

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-11 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-12 01 JUL 13 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-13 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-14 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-15 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-16 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Landing Card V 

Given: 

Gross Weight 290,703 lbs 

OAT 32° C 

Pressure Altitude +50’ 

Wind Direction 130°

Velocity 15 Knots 

Runway Heading 150°

Runway Length 11,758’ 

RCR 23 

Slope 0 

Flaps/slats 50°/EXT 

Anti-skid Inoperative 

Landing Card VI 

Given: 

Gross Weight 285,000 lbs 

OAT 21° C 

Pressure Altitude +3500’ 

Wind Direction 350°

Velocity 10 Knots 

Runway Heading 010°

Runway Length 13,113’ 

RCR 23 

Slope 0 

Flaps/slats 35°/EXT 

2-3 Dual Hydraulic Failure 

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-17 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-18 01 JUL 13 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-19 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-20 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-21 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-22 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

SINGLE ENGINE DRIFTDOWN 

Given: 

TAT +8°C 

Flight Level FL 290 

Gross Weight 575,000 lbs 

Temperature Std +20°

Terrain Height 4760’ AGL 

Terrain Distance 405 NM 

Wind +25 Knots (Headwind) 

Find: 

MCT Power Setting ______________________ 

Initial Driftdown Speed ______________________ 

Terrain Height PA ______________________ 

Max Start of Driftdown Wt ______________________ 

Required Fuel Dump ______________________ 

Time to Terrain ______________________ 

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-23 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

SINGLE ENGINE DRIFTDOWN 

Given: 

TAT -12°C 

Flight level FL 310 

Gross weight 440,000’ 

Temperature Std 

Wind -75 knots (Tailwind) 

Drag index 10.0 

Find: 

Fuel burned ____________________________ 

Bottom of Driftdown ____________________________ 

Distance ____________________________ 

Time ____________________________ 

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-24 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

SUSPECTED WIND SHEAR 

Gross Weight 463,918 lbs 

CG 18% 

OAT 29° C 

Dew Point √

Anti-Ice OFF 

Pressure Altitude +200’ 

Wind Direction 190°

Velocity 20 G 30 Knots 

Runway Heading 210°

Runway Length 11001’ 

RCR 23 

RSC 0 

Slope 0.2↓

Elevation 62’ 

Obstacle Height N/A 

Obstacle Distance N/A 

Air Conditioning OFF 

Reverse Thrust Yes 

Compute a Takeoff into Suspected Wind Shear Told Card. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-25 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-26 01 JUL 13 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-27 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-28 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

WING AIR REFUELING PODS 

Given: 

Gross Weight 445,000 lbs 

CG 26.0% 

OAT 23° C 

Dew Point √

Anti-Ice Off 

Pressure Altitude 100’ 

Wind Direction 240°

Velocity 10 

Runway Heading 240°

Runway Length 10016’ 

RCR 23 

RSC 0 

Slope 0.3 Up 

Elevation 131’ 

Obstacle Height 28 ft 

Obstacle Distance 2031 ft 

Air Conditioning On 

Reverse Thrust Yes 

Compute a TOLD Card with Wing Air Refueling Pods Installed. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-29 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-30 01 JUL 13 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-31 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-32 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Performance Workshop VII 

CFCC/Tire Limiting Speed/ 

Max Braking Speed 

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this workshop is to provide an opportunity for you to 

practice completing three TOLD cards: one limited by Tire Limit Speed, one 

limited by Max Braking Speed, and one with a Configuration Change. You 

should have reviewed the Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance, the 

Takeoff and Landing Data Workbooks, and CBT Lessons prior to attending this 

workshop period. Your Instructor will present the workshop exercises for you to 

complete, and give the appropriate guidance when questions arise from you. 

Once again, this is intended to be a workshop, and not simply an instructor 

lecture. 

Part I describes the topics that will be covered by the workshop exercises. 

Part II contains the workshop exercises to be completed and includes solutions. 

II. Duration - 2.5 hours 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Flight Manual Performance Data 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Classroom 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

C. Performance Workshop VII - CFCC/Tire Limiting Speed/Max Braking 

Speed Student Guide 

D. AF IMT 4089, KC-10 TOLD Card Worksheet (3) 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance CBT Lesson 

B. Introduction to KC-10 Performance Workbook 

C. KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return Data Computation CBT Lesson 

D. Takeoff and Landing Data CBT Lesson 

E. Review T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

1. Section I, Introduction 

2. Section II, Engine Data 

CH 3 

FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-1 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

3. Section III, Takeoff 

4. Section IX, Approach and Landing 

5. Section X, Mission Planning 

Objectives

1. Compute KC-10 Takeoff Data Based on Correction Factor for Configuration 

 Change. 

2. Compute KC-10 Takeoff Data Based on Tire Limit Speed. 

3. Compute KC-10 Takeoff Data Based on Maximum Brake Speed. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-2 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Part I 

CORRECTION FACTOR FOR CONFIGURATION CHANGE

When a configuration change occurs in the deceleration devices of the aircraft, a 

Correction Factor Configuration Change (CFCC) must be computed. Enter the chart 

with a known RCR value, up to one of the correction lines: Center Gear Retracted, One 

Wheel Brake Inoperative, or Anti-skid Braking Inoperative. The correction line used 

depends on the configuration change. Remember, the CFCC replaces the RCR 

corrections; therefore, use only the charts labeled RCR 23 to 18. In the event the 

aircraft has more than one configuration change, use the most restrictive for 

performance computation. When computing Takeoff Performance be sure to adhere to 

the WARNINGS in Section Three of the 1C-10(K)A-1-1 pertaining to the use of 

Reduced Thrust for Takeoffs. 

TIRE LIMITING SPEED 

Tire Speed Limiting Weight (TSLW) is the weight at which the all engine liftoff speed 

equals the Tire Placard Speed. Normally TSLW will not be a limiting factor in computing 

takeoff performance. However, a combination of high-pressure altitudes, high 

temperatures, long runways, and low flap settings can cause TSLW to be a limiting 

factor when computing takeoff performance. 

Tire speed is based on ground speed at the time of liftoff. Since ground speed is a 

function of true airspeed, high-pressure altitudes and temperatures cause these speeds 

to increase rapidly. This increases the possibility of TSLW becoming a factor in 

performance computation. 

After determining TSLW, compare it to TOGW. If TSLW is less than TOGW, then 

TSLW becomes the limiting factor for takeoff planning. To optimize takeoff performance 

TSLW must be plotted for various flap settings. Accomplish this by entering the TSLW 

chart with the OAT and pressure altitude, and then follow the gridlines down to the flap 

settings correction grid. Determine several TSLWs by using various flap settings (e.g., 

5°, 10°, up to 20°). Take these weights and flap settings to the Maximum Takeoff Gross 

Weight at Optimum Takeoff Flap Setting chart and plot a line from the first TSLW and 

flap setting through the last TSLW and flap setting computed. Now plot a line from the 

RALW and CGLW. The point at which the TSLW curve and CGLW curve intersects is 

the takeoff gross weight and optimum flap setting. This is the takeoff gross weight and 

flap setting that will be used to compute takeoff speeds. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-3 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

MAXIMUM BRAKING SPEED

The maximum speed the aircraft can accelerate to, experience a problem, and stop in 

the remaining runway without exceeding the energy absorption capability of the brakes 

is called the Maximum Braking Speed (VMBE). Once it is determined that VMBE is a 

factor, the weight of the aircraft should be decreased until VMBE is no longer a factor. In 

most cases, reducing TOGW by 3500 lbs. for every knot that VCEF exceeds VMBE will 

satisfy VMBE limitations. After each weight reduction, recompute VCEF and VMBE and 

calculate a new V1. 

One common error in computing VMBE is the tendency to overlook Sheet 2 charts. 

These charts take into consideration any configuration changes. When computing a 

lightweight takeoff with a CFCC, remember to enter Sheet 1 with the computed 

groundspeed to compute the Max Braking Speed. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-4 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Part II

TOLD CARD I

GIVEN: 

GROSS WEIGHT 495,000 lbs 

CG 24.0% 

OAT 26° C 

DEW POINT T

ANTI ICE OFF 

PRESSURE ALTITUDE -50’ 

WINDS CALM 

RUNWAY HEADING 280°

RUNWAY LENGTH 11,475’ 

RCR 10 

RSC 0 

SLOPE 0 

FIELD ELEVATION 42 ‘ 

CLIMB GRADIENT 2.5% 

OBSTACLE HEIGHT N/A 

OBSTACLE DISTANCE N/A 

AIR CONDITION ON 

REVERSE THRUST YES 

NUMBER THREE BRAKE CAPPED 

CH 3 

FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-5 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-6 01 JUL 13 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-7 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-8 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

TOLD CARD II 

GIVEN: 

GROSS WEIGHT 525,000 lbs 

CG 18.0% 

OAT 25° C 

DEW POINT T

ANTI ICE Off 

PRESSURE ALTITUDE +6040’ 

WINDS CALM 

RUNWAY HEADING 350°

RUNWAY LENGTH 13,740’ 

RCR 23 

RSC 0 

SLOPE .6 DN 

FIELD ELEVATION 6183’ 

CLIMB GRADIENT 2.5% 

OBSTACLE HEIGHT N/A 

OBSTACLE LENGTH N/A 

AIR CONDITION OFF 

REVERSE THRUST YES 

CH 3 

FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-9 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-10 01 JUL 13 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-11 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-12 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

TOLD CARD III 

GIVEN: 

GROSS WEIGHT 415,500 lbs 

CG 8.0% 

OAT 35° C 

DEW POINT T

ANTI ICE OFF 

PRESSURE ALTITUDE +6500’ 

WINDS 350° 15G25 

RUNWAY HEADING 320°

RUNWAY LENGTH 12,300’ 

RCR 23 

RSC 0 

SLOPE 2.0 UP 

FIELD ELEVATION 6124’ 

CLIMB GRADIENT 2.5% 

OBSTACLE HEIGHT N/A 

OBSTACLE DISTANCE N/A 

AIR CONDITION ON 

REVERSE THRUST YES 

CENTER GEAR RETRACTED 

NUMBER 7 BRAKE CAPPED 

CH 3 

FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-13 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-14 01 JUL 13 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-15 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-16 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Performance Workshop VIII 

Obstacle TOLD Card

Lesson Introduction 

I. Purpose - The purpose of this workshop is to provide an opportunity for you to 

practice completing an OBSTACLE TOLD card. You should have reviewed the 

Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance and the Takeoff and Landing Data 

Workbooks and the CBT Lessons prior to attending this workshop period. Your 

instructor will present the workshop exercise for you to complete, and give the 

appropriate guidance when questions arise from you. 

Part I describes the topics that will be covered by the workshop exercises. 

Part II consists of the workshop exercises to be completed and solutions. 

II. Duration - 3.5 hours 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Flight Manual Performance Data 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

C. AF IMT 4089, KC-10 TOLD Card Worksheet 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance CBT Lesson 

B. Introduction to KC-10 Performance Workbook 

C. KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return Data Computation CBT Lesson 

D. Takeoff and Landing Data Workbook 

E. Review T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 

1. Section I, Introduction 

2. Section II, Engine Data 

3. Section III, Takeoff 

4. Section IX, Approach and Landing 

5. Section X, Mission Planning. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E850-SG 1-74-1 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Objectives

1. Complete a KC-10 Obstacle Takeoff and Landing Data (TOLD) Card. 

2. Compute an All Engine Climb Gradient for each of the following cases. 

a. Prior to Pressure Height for Acceleration. 

b. After Pressure Height for Acceleration. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E850-SG 1-74-2 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Part I

OBSTACLE CLEARANCE

The Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance workbook (W831) discusses the basic 

obstacle and climb segments for the KC-10. Refer to the obstacle data worksheet, and 

review the calculations required when an obstacle is present in your departure path. 

The obstacle clearance worksheet, on the reverse side of the AF IMT 4089, is divided 

into three sections. Section 1, Conditions, allows you to list the takeoff conditions 

needed to compute the obstacle clearance data. Section 2, Simplified Solution, allows 

you to perform the calculations to determine if the obstacle is going to be a factor or not. 

If the obstacle can be cleared after performing the simplified solution, no further 

obstacle clearance calculations need be performed. The third section, Optimized 

Solution, allows you to perform runway reductions to increase the obstacle distance. 

The Optimized Solution Section also contains the appropriate notes for obstacle 

clearance data calculations. The completion of the worksheet is optional but assists 

greatly in keeping the data in order when runway cutbacks are required. 

Now look at some of the calculations required. OBST HT (AGL) as described in Note 1 

is the obstacle height above Mean Sea Level minus the departure end of runway (DER) 

elevation. If the runway has no slope, or an uphill slope, use the published field 

elevation. If the runway has a downhill slope, and the departure end of runway elevation 

is not known, the DER elevation may be calculated using the formula in Note 1B. 

 Example: Runway Length 10,000'; Runway Slope 0.8%↑;; 

 Field elevation 365' (MSL); Obstacle Height 435' (MSL) 

 OBST HT (AGL) = 435 - [365 - (10,000 X 0.8 / 100)] 

 OBST HT (AGL) = 150' 

150‘ is the obstacle height above the liftoff end of the runway and is entered in the 

OBST HT block in the Condition Section of the Obstacle Clearance Worksheet. 

The Climbout Slope correction is listed in Note 2. It is used to correct the obstacle 

height versus the obstacle distance from the liftoff end of the runway. This is calculated 

by either using the Climbout Slope Correction grid in the Performance Manual, (fig 3-9, 

Sheet 1), for an obstacle distance of up to 4,000', or by 24' for each 1% of downhill 

slope. 

 Example: Runway Slope 0.8% ↓ ; 

 Downhill Slope Correction = 24 X 0.8% = 19' 

19' is entered in the Downhill Slope Correction blocks in both the simplified and 

optimized solution sections. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E850-SG 1-74-3 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

When computing the Climb Gradient Required, always use the most limiting flap 

correction. In this example, 25° flaps is the worst case, so if the flap setting is less, 

there is an additional margin of safety built into the computations. Also, the climb 

gradient depicted on the climbout flight path charts are GROSS climb gradients, not 

NET. So use the charts, the Climb Gradient Required cannot be calculated using the 

40:1 rule. If the climb gradient exceeds 9.0, a runway reduction is required to increase 

the obstacle distance, thus allowing the gradient to be lowered to 9.0. 

 Example: Obstacle Height (AGL) = 75'; Obstacle Distance = 1,000'; 

 Runway Available 10,000' 

The climb gradient exceeds 9.0. The Runway Available will have to be reduced 

750' (corrected for 25° flaps). This would make the new Runway Available 

9,250', and the Obstacle Distance 1,750'. 

When working the optimized solution you may continue to cutback the runway until you 

either calculate a MTOGW (Maximum Takeoff Gross Weight) that equals or exceeds 

the Gross Weight, or if computing a maximum ACL (Allowable Cargo Load) weight, until 

the MTOGW starts to decrease. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E850-SG 1-74-4 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Min Climb Rate 

Using the WAPEX-ONE as an example 

TRAVIS AFB WAPEX-ONE DEPARTURE (RWY 21R)

CH 3 

FIQ-E850-SG 1-74-5 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

This SID has a minimum climb block. 

1. Notes to the min climb rate block. 

a. TACAN is available so use the @ column to get a min climb rate of 

250ft/NM at 60 knots. 

b. Note below the min climb rate block requires the min climb out rate to be 

maintained until reaching 4100 ft. 

2. Go to T.O. 1-1C-10(K)A-1-1 Fig 3-8, Minimum Climb Gradient Chart. 

a. End of Restriction height (AGL) = Top of Min Climb Restriction (MSL) – 

Rwy Departure End Field Elev. For this example > 1505. 

b. Read over to 250ft/NM column and observe a min climb rate of 7.16 and a 

RWY cutback of 573 ft. from the RWY length. Add the normal 300 ft. lineup distance for total cutback distance. 

3. Calculate TOLD using the above data. 

ALL ENGINE CLIMB GRADIENT 

Charts are provided for an ALL ENGINE CLIMB GRADIENT. There are two charts; one 

for if the level off altitude is prior to Pressure Height for Acceleration and the other is for 

after Pressure Height for Acceleration. The next chart in the performance manual will 

convert this percentage to a FT/NM. These charts are only used if you have a standard 

instrument departure (SID) requirement or a hold down altitude. 

This data will not be used to determine obstacle clearance capabilities in lieu of the 

engine out climb gradient data. 

The All Engine Climb Gradient Takeoff Rated Thrust chart (figure 3-40) is used when 

the all engine climb requirement ends at or below pressure height for acceleration. It 

measures all engine climb gradient with the gear fully retracted, flaps and slats in the 

takeoff configuration, all engines operating at takeoff thrust, and climbout speed at V2 + 

10 Knots. 

The All Engine Climb Gradient, Maximum Climb Thrust Chart (figure 3-41) is normally 

used to verify the all engine climb gradient at the top of the all engine climb restriction 

but may be used at any altitude above acceleration height. When an all engine climb 

requirement ends above pressure height for acceleration the all engine climb gradient is 

measured with the flaps and slats retracted, all engines operating at maximum climb 

thrust, and climbout speed at VSR. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E850-SG 1-74-6 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Given the following: 

Problem 1 

SID level off altitude of 1400’ 

Press Height for Accel. 1480’ 

Outside Air Temperature of 20°C 

Pressure Altitude SL 

Gross Weight 440,000 

Takeoff Flaps Setting 20 

Ice Protection OFF 

Climb Gradient 

Climb Gradient (FT/NM) 

Problem 2 

SID level off altitude of 6000’ 

Press Height for Accel. 1480’ 

Outside Air Temperature of 20°C 

Pressure Altitude SL 

Gross Weight 440,000 

Takeoff Flaps Setting 20 

Ice Protection OFF 

Climb Gradient 

Climb Gradient (FT/NM) 

These Climb Gradients (FT/NM) should be equal to or higher than the required 

gradients at the top right corner of the SIDs. 

CH 3 

FIQ-E850-SG 1-74-7 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

Part II

WORKSHOP EXERCISES

1. GIVEN: 

Gross Weight Compute MTOGW 

Takeoff CG 20.0% 

OAT 20° C 

Dew Point T

Anti-ice OFF 

Pressure Altitude +3500’ 

Wind Direction CALM 

Wind Velocity 0 

Runway Heading 030°

Runway Length 11,500' 

RCR 23 

RSC 0 

Slope 0.8% 5

Field Elevation 3526’ at brake release/departure end unknown. 

Obstacle Height 3542’ 

Obstacle Distance 3750’ 

Air Conditioning OFF 

Reverse Thrust YES 

Compute Takeoff Performance 

CH 3 

FIQ-E850-SG 1-74-8 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E850-SG 1-74-9 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 

FIQ-E850-SG 1-74-10 01 JUL 13 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C311-SG 1-75-1 01 OCT 10 

 Electrical Abnormal Procedures I 

Lesson introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the Electrical 

Abnormal Checklist procedures. It discusses general procedures of the 

emergency and abnormal checklists and the electrical abnormal checklist 

procedures. 

II. Duration - 1.0 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual

IV. Equipment and Materials 

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Electrical Abnormal Procedures I CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1) 

1. Section II, Emergency Procedures 

a. Introduction 

2. Section IIA, Abnormal Procedures 

a. Introduction 

b. Electrical 

(1) APU Generator Off Lt On (AC Load Zero) 

(2) Eng Gen Off Lt On (AC Load Zero) 

(3) Gen Fail Light On (Eng or APU) 

(4) Gen Freq Hi 

(5) AC Bus Tie Isol Lt(s) On 

(6) CSD Oil Outlet Temp Hi 

(7) CSD Oil Press Lo Light On 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C311-SG 1-75-2 01 OCT 10 

Electrical Abnormal Procedures I 

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson introduces you to the electrical abnormal checklist procedures. 

It begins with general procedures of the emergency and abnormal 

checklists, and then discusses the electrical abnormal checklist 

procedures. After discussing the flow and details of these checklists, there 

will be an end of lesson test. 

B. Objectives 

1. Identify general characteristics of emergency and abnormal 

procedures checklists. 

2. Identify the characteristics of electrical system malfunctions and 

their respective abnormal procedure. 

II. PRESENTATION 

A. Electrical Abnormal Procedures 1 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

B. Emergency and Abnormal Checklist Procedures 

1. Introduction 

2. General Concepts 

3. Crew Coordination 

a. Crew Coordination 

b. Priority 

c. Responsibility 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 1 

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 2 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C311-SG 1-75-3 01 OCT 10 

d. Responsibility 

4. Checklist Format – Decision Path 

a. Checklist Format - Decision Path 

b. Memory items 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 3 

5. Detection 

a. Embedded Quiz Question 4 

6. Detection 

7. Checklist Procedures 

a. Embedded Quiz Question 5 

8. Checklist Procedures 

9. Summary 

C. Electrical Abnormal Checklist Procedures 

1. Introduction 

2. APU GEN OFF LIGHT ON 

a. Indications 

b. Reset Procedures 

c. Light Out - Volt/Freq Norm 

d. Light Off - Load Norm 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 1 

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 2 

3. ENG GEN OFF LIGHT ON 

a. Indications 

b. Notes 

c. Reset Procedures 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C311-SG 1-75-4 01 OCT 10 

d. Freq> 420 Hz or <380 Hz 

e. Volt Meter Within Limits 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 3 

4. GEN FAIL LIGHT ON 

a. Indications 

b. Note 

c. Gen Fail Reset Button 

d. Gen Fail Lt Not Off 

(1) Gen Fail Lt Not Off 

(2) GEN FAIL LIGHT ON (ENG OR APU) 

e. Diode Failure 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 4 

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 5 

5. GEN FREQ HI 

a. Indications 

b. Procedures 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 6 

6. AC BUS TIE ISOL LIGHT(S) ON 

a. Indications 

b. All 3 Bus Tie Isol Lts On 

c. All 3 Bus Tie Isol Lts Not On 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 7 

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 8 

7. CSD OIL OUTLET TEMP HI 

a. Indications 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C311-SG 1-75-5 01 OCT 10 

b. First two Steps/Temp Stabilized 

c. Temp Not Stabilized 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 9 

8. CSD OIL PRESS LO LIGHT ON 

a. Indications/All Gen’s Available 

b. All Gen’s Not Available 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 10 

9. Summary 

III. EXAM 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

Original 

FIQ-C311-SG 1-75-6 01 OCT 10 

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 1 

FIQ-C322-SG 1-76-1 01 JUL 11 

Air Conditioning Abnormal Procedures 

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to discuss Air Conditioning System 

Abnormal Procedures. 

II. Duration - 0.8 hour 

III. Reference Materials

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 

IV. Equipment and Materials

A. Learning Center CBT Workstation 

B. Air Conditioning Abnormal Procedures CBT Lesson 

C. Writing Material 

V. Student Preparation/Review

A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 

1. Section IIA, Abnormal Procedures - Air Conditioning 

a. Avionic Flow Off Light On 

b. Center Access Compartment Flow Off Light On 

c. Duct-Avionic Compartment Overheat Light On 

d. Trim Air Inoperative 

e. INS Flow OFF Light On 

f. Pack Off Light On 

g. Ram Air Ventilation System Operation 

h. Air Conditioning Trim Air Pressure High Light On 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 1 

FIQ-C322-SG 1-76-2 01 JUL 11 

Air Conditioning Abnormal Procedures 

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION 

A. This lesson discusses Air Conditioning Abnormal Procedures. The lesson 

covers eight procedures which include Avionic Flow OFF Light On, Center 

Accessory Compartment Flow OFF Light On, Duct-Avionic Compartment 

Overheat Light On, Trim Air Inoperative, INS Flow OFF Light On, Pack 

OFF Light On, Ram Air Ventilation System Operation, and Air Cond Trim 

Air Pressure High Light On. The lesson will be followed by a multiple 

choice test. 

B. Objective 

1. Identify the characteristics of Air Conditioning System malfunctions 

and their respective abnormal procedures. 

II. PRESENTATION 

1. Introduction 

2. Objectives 

A. Air Conditioning Abnormal Procedures 

1. Avionic Flow OFF Light ON 

a. Indications 

b. Aircraft Inflight 

c. Aircraft on Ground 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 1 

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 2 

2. CAC Flow OFF Light On 

a. Indications 

b. Aircraft Inflight 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 1 

FIQ-C322-SG 1-76-3 01 JUL 11 

c. Aircraft on Ground 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 3 

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 4 

3. Duct-Avionic Compt Ovht Lt ON 

a. Indications 

b. Trim Air Switch 

c. Avionics Overheat 

d. Duct Overheat 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 5 

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 6 

4. Trim Air Inoperative 

a. Embedded Quiz Question 7 

5. INS Flow OFF Light ON 

a. Indications 

b. MSG Annunciation 

c. INU Status 

d. INS Switch 

e. Mode Selector 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 8 

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 9 

(3) Embedded Quiz Question 10 

6. Pack OFF Light ON 

a. Indications 

b. Pressure Problem 

c. Pack Temp Valve Check 
KC-10 Aircrew Training System 

Initial Qualification Course 

CH 1 

FIQ-C322-SG 1-76-4 01 JUL 11 

d. Pack Selector Manual 

e. Thermostats/Fuse Plugs 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 11 

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 12 

7. Ram Air Ventilation System Operation 

a. Description 

b. Aircraft Depressurization 

c. Notes 

d. Outflow Valve Full Open 

e. Ram Air Activation 

f. Air Conditioning Doors 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 13 

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 14 

(3) Embedded Quiz Question 15 

(4) Embedded Quiz Question 16 

8. Air Cond Trim Air Pressure High Light ON 

a. Indications 

b. Left Trim Air Valve 

c. Right Trim Air Valve 

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 17 

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 18 

9. Summary 

III. Exam